JP7375803B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have operating means, and the interest is increased by operating the operating means.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-249877

However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in playing games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, and a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the discriminating by the discriminating means being a specific discriminating result. an operating means that can be operated by a player; a validity period setting means that can set a validity period for determining that a predetermined operation on the operation means is valid; and a predetermined validity period corresponding to the validity period. a predetermined mode display means capable of displaying a mode, and an information update means capable of updating information in stages by performing the predetermined operation a plurality of times within the validity period; a first effect executed in response to the information being updated to the specific information corresponding to the specific determination result; and a first effect that is executed in response to the information being updated to the specific information corresponding to the specific determination result, and the information changing to the specific information during the validity period in which the predetermined mode is displayed. If the execution condition is satisfied based on the predetermined operation performed without being updated, notification is made in a special mode that is different from the production mode of the first production and corresponds to the specific determination result. a second performance that is executed; and a performance execution means capable of executing, and the gaming machine executes a predetermined performance that corresponds to the result of the determination by the determination means during a performance period that includes at least the valid period. The specified performance period has an executable configuration and includes a first period in which the first performance can be performed and a second period that is before the first period and in which the second performance can be performed. The configuration is capable of executing the predetermined effect corresponding to the determination result .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, and a privilege game in which a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. an execution means, an operation means operable by a player, a validity period setting means capable of setting a validity period for determining that a predetermined operation on the operation means is valid, and a validity period setting means capable of displaying a predetermined mode corresponding to the validity period. a predetermined mode display means, and an information update means that can update the information in stages by performing the predetermined operation a plurality of times within the validity period; The first effect is executed in response to being updated to the specific information corresponding to the determination result, and the information is not updated to the specific information during the validity period during which the predetermined aspect is displayed. If an execution condition is satisfied based on the predetermined operation performed in the state, a notification is executed in a special mode that is different from the production mode of the first production and corresponds to the specific determination result. 2 effects, and a performance execution means capable of executing the following, and the gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined performance corresponding to the result of the determination by the determining means during a performance period that includes at least the valid period. and corresponds to the specific determination result in the presentation period that includes a first period in which the first presentation can be performed and a second period that is before the first period and in which the second presentation can be performed. The configuration is such that the predetermined effect can be executed .

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 7. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XIIIa-XIIIa in FIG. 9. 10 is a sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XIV-XIV in FIG. 9. FIG. (a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulation device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulation device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device. (a) is a rear view of the abutting member, (b) is a front view of the guide member, and (c) is a front view of the operating member. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of a game board and an operation unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XXIa-XXIa in FIG. 20. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and a firing performance unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and a firing performance unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing performance unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing performance unit. (a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device as seen in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device as seen in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 25. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the firing unit taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 2. FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the injection device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the injection device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the injection device. (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along the line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG. 34(b). (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 35(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35(b). (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 36(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36(b). (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. (a) to (f) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, an abutting member, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (a) to (e) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, an abutment member, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (a) to (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. As the front transmission member and rear transmission member rotate, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the contact member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion of the transmission arm member FIG. 2 is a diagram showing changes over time. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a back exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of a rotary plate. It is a side view of a rotary plate. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescoping displacement member and the shielding design member. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescoping displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of a functional board part. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the production member. It is a rear view of a production member. (a) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a). (a) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). 76 is a sectional view of the effect member taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. FIG. It is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 7. FIG. It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a route forming member of the wiring guide member. (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a). (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87(a). (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is a partial front enlarged view of the first decorative member in range XCVII of FIG. 2; It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a rotary plate. According to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the abutment member, and the circle of the transmission arm member FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the arrangement of columnar protrusions over time. According to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the abutment member, and the circle of the transmission arm member FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the arrangement of columnar protrusions over time. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the game board and firing unit in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 2; It is a back view of the pachinko machine in 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the board|substrate box in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the board box. (a) is a front view of the board box, and (b) is a side view of the board box. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the box cover. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the box cover. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover as seen in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109. (a) is a front perspective view of the box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (a) is a front perspective view of the main controller, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller. FIG. 112(a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in section CXIII of FIG. 112(a). (a) is a front view of the main controller as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and (b) is a side view of the main controller as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a); 114(c) is a side view of the main controller as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a). (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the on position. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box as seen in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box as seen in the direction of arrow CXVIb in FIG. 115(b). be. (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. 115(a). It is a diagram. (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 115(a). It is a diagram. (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. 116(a). It is a diagram. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box taken along cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb in FIG. 121(a). (a) is a front view of a board box in a ninth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a front view of a board box in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st example of control. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a first control example. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable prize winning device. (a) is a La-La sectional view of the variable winning device, (b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (a) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the switching member is activated so that game balls are sorted into the special discharge flow path, and (b) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the flow path solenoid is inactive and the special FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a state in which the guiding piece of the switching member closes the opening surface of the entrance of the discharge flow path. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a button repetition performance start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display format of a button repetition performance upper limit reaching screen. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode of the first button press performance result screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display format of the second button press performance result screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the screen when the button is continuously pressed after reaching the upper limit in the button press effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the follow-up screen during the button press effect. FIG. 3(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the effect settings. (a) is a diagram showing an icon displayable area, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a suggestion mode display screen for icon display performance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen on which the first icon is displayed in the icon display performance, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance result of the icon display performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a screen showing another pattern of icon display performance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a button production start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a normal pattern when button production is pressed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a delay pattern when a button effect is pressed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a delay pattern 0.8 seconds after the button effect is pressed. It is a diagram. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when an effective period passes during button performance delay standby. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a group production start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an obtainable character display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a character acquisition screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a group performance end screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the last acquisition chance screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the last GET screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a battle performance start screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a weak attack screen during battle performance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a strong attack screen during battle performance, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a boss defeat screen during battle performance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a boss escape screen for battle performance, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a joint fight screen for battle performance. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a 14-second pseudo-disappearance effect, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of restarting from a pseudo-disconnection stop. It is a timing chart showing the button operation contents and the flow of the performance in a continuous hit performance. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each aspect of button production. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each aspect of collective performance. It is a timing chart showing the flow of battle performance. It is a timing chart showing the flow of pseudo-missing effect. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow of a pachinko machine in a first control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main control device 110. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table in the first control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a second winning random number table in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in a first control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving/probability variation table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variable effect pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal effect pattern table in the first control example. FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time-saving/probability-changing performance pattern table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the continuous hit effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the upper limit number selection table in the first control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the end number selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the performance result selection table in the first control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a random display effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the effect icon storage area in the first control example. FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display order selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the permutation storage area in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table in the first control example. It is. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display number selection table in a first control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a delay effect selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a collective effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character storage area in the first control example. and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character number selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a battle effect selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the HP selection table in the first control example. and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final remaining HP selection table in the first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a battle mode selection table in a first control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces B to D. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the through gate passing process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ending process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed abnormality processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the production mode setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the operation production setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing the continuous hit performance setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the delay production setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the battle effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the battle second half effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the time-saving/probability change effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the random display performance setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the liquid crystal performance execution management process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the operation performance management process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. 7 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is a flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing V production command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 12 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is a flow chart which showed display setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed warning image setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st example of control. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices included in a pachinko machine in a second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an injection device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state where the production member is located in the operating position, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the production member is located in the operating position and performs the dividing operation. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device is driven and a granular member is injected in a state where the injection device is in a state where (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the production member moves to the standby position and the granular member returns to the storage area, and (b) shows a state in which the rotating member is driven. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device is driven and a granular member is injected. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices and performance contents included in a pachinko machine in a second control example. It is a timing chart that schematically shows the status of various devices of the pachinko machine as time passes when a series of accessory effects are executed in the second control example. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the flow of operation control of the launching accessory at the time of start-up in the second control example. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the flow of operation control of the launching accessory during a series of accessory effects in the second control example. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the abnormality determination result and the flow of the performance to be executed during a series of performance effects in the second control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the accessory motion table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the abnormality determination table in the second control example. It is. 12 is a flowchart showing startup processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the initial operation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which showed production mode setting processing 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory performance management process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed abnormality determination processing during performance performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the abnormality determination process during the 2nd performance performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the liquid crystal performance execution management process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed operation production management processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd example of control. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a button repetition production start screen in a first modification, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display format of a screen that prompts a specific operation during a button repetition production. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a specific operation is performed after reaching the upper limit in the first modification, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a specific operation is performed before reaching the upper limit. FIG. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode immediately before the validity period ends without execution of a specific operation in the first modification, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display format when the validity period ends without execution of a specific operation. It is a figure showing an example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a third control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. 12 is a flowchart showing end command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. 12 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. 12 is a flowchart showing display variation pattern command setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. 12 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a third control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a third control example. It is a flowchart which showed the press command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the timer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the effect timer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the four variation pattern selection tables in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the four normal tables in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram which schematically showed 4 tables for time saving and probability variation in a 4th control example. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flow chart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the special symbol lottery process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing resultant command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an obtainable character display screen in a modified example of the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an obtainable character display screen of a chance UP pattern in a modified example of the first control example. It is a figure showing an example. It is a figure which showed an example of the obtainable character display screen of the combination which confirms a jackpot in the modification of the 1st control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a character storage area in a modified example of the first control example. It is a figure showing the stipulated contents of the character lottery table in a modification of the first control example. It is a figure showing the regulation contents of the number lottery table in a modification of the first control example. It is a flowchart showing battle performance setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modification of the first control example. 12 is a flowchart showing an array setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modification of the first control example. 12 is a flowchart showing a number setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modification of the first control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a modification of icon display production. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of an enlargement ratio selection table in a modified example of icon display performance. It is a flow chart showing random display performance setting processing A executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of icon display performance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration performance state in a modification of the performance of the firing accessory. (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a demonstration performance state ending process in a modified example of the performance of the firing accessory. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the firing accessory is located at the reference position in a modification of the presentation of the firing accessory. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the launch accessory is located at the preparation A position in a modified example of the presentation of the launch accessory. (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the launch accessory is located at the preparation B position in a modified example of the production of the launch accessory. It is a flowchart showing the accessory performance management process B executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the performance of the firing accessory. It is a flowchart showing performance mode setting processing B executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modification of the performance of the firing accessory.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 97, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a rail 61 in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , 62, a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc. (see 1) on the back side (or front side).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden board member. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed from the front side of 13 with tapping screws or the like. Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second prize opening 640 is reached. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate, which has a rotating shaft at its lower end and is rotatably displaced to tilt or stand up toward the game area. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second prize opening 640 along the upper surface of the opening/closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening/closing plate is configured to move between the gaming area and the second prize opening 640. By closing the space between the second winning hole 640 and the second winning hole 640, the ball is configured to become difficult to enter the second winning hole 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is released and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win are not changed, and the second symbol Only the winning probability may be changed to be higher than the normal winning probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display unit 80 is disposed at a position (behind the window of the base board 60) that can be seen through the central portion of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display with a size of about 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, Three symbol rows, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so it is possible to give the player more opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second prize opening 640 can be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two, for example.

Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, on the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 when viewed from the front, a second prize opening 640 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. Incidentally, the arrangement of the second winning hole 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be located below the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front, or it may be located to the left of the left and right center of the gaming area.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as in the second winning hole 640, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, under normal circumstances, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter a prize in the second winning hole 640, so the first winning hole 64 without the electric accessory 640a The ball is fired so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, there are many opportunities for a jackpot lottery, and the player wins the jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory 640a. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640.

Note that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, if the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first prize opening 64 by "hitting the right hand" and aiming at the second prize opening by "hitting the left hand". You can also aim for the prize opening 640. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the player cannot aim at the first prize opening 64 when playing with the right hand, and the ball fired when playing with the left does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can request that the game be changed to "left-handed" or "right-handed." Therefore, by adding the gameplay of changing the way the ball is hit, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming slow.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, For example, it may be on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, on the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or above.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out ports 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the second winning port 640.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a in the front and back direction. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening/closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205. .

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5, etc.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be explained. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500. Note that in FIGS. 5 and 6, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . The back case 510 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, capable of dividing the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back side of the game board 13 (for example, arranged parallel to it) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 510 extends from the front end of the outer wall part 512 as a flat plate. A support plate portion 513 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that has a shape that can be fitted into a fitting recess (not shown) formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and protrudes toward the front side, and a positioning convex portion 513a that projects toward the front side. A plurality of insertion holes 513b are provided through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

By fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the convex part may have a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape (in this embodiment, circular or oval) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. It is also possible to use a protrusion having a shape (even smaller external shape). Moreover, when the internal shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has rails 61 and 62 in addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , the general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the window 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60, which can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 configured with a shape, a ball falling unit 150 configured to allow balls discharged from the game area to flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) fired toward the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is constructed by assembling a firing performance unit 300 etc. that can be configured to be able to perform a firing performance, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that its peripheral portion is arranged facing and fixed to the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is formed into a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be easily seen by the player from the front side. Thereby, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure disposed on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

For example, even if the ball flow down unit 150 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the base board 60 is transparent and the back side can be seen, so the balls flowing down the ball flow down unit 150 can be visually recognized. . In this embodiment, the ball flow lowering unit 150 is designed taking into consideration the effect produced by the visually recognized ball, but the details will be described later.

Note that if there is a part that you do not want the player to see, you can take measures such as pasting a seal member with low light transmission (or non-light transmission).

The center frame 86 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The firing production unit 300 receives the granular members 320 (see FIG. 54), and a partitioning member 310 that divides the range in which the granular members 320 can be scattered is disposed inside the center frame 86, so that the granular members 320 are separated from the center frame. It is said that it can be fired towards the inside of 86. Therefore, it is possible for the player who views the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window of the center frame 86 to effectively see the granular members 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. can. Note that details of the firing effect unit 300 will be described later.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a back case 510, an enlargement/reduction unit 600 disposed inside the upper part of the back case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 symmetrically arranged inside the left and right parts of the back case 510. Equipped with.

Specifically, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is disposed above the opening 511a, and the displacement rotation unit 800 is disposed on the left and right positions of the opening 511a, respectively, on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of this operation unit 500 will be explained.

7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 7, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 are shown in a production standby state, and in FIG. 8, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in an extended state and the displacement rotation unit 800 is in a production standby state, In FIG. 9, an enlargement/reduction unit 600 in an enlarged state and a displacement rotation unit 800 in an effect standby state are illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 10, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 in the performance standby state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the performance top end state are illustrated, and in FIG. 11, the left displacement rotation unit 800 is in the performance top end state, and the right displacement rotation unit The unit 800 is in the lower end state of presentation.

As illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement locus of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the displacement/rotation unit 800 is in the performance upper end state (see FIG. 10) and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 changes its state from the performance standby state, there is a possibility of a collision.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the state change from the performance standby state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the performance standby state, and the By controlling the state change from the effect standby state to be executable on the condition that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 from overlapping in a front view. It can be avoided.
Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be allowed).

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is configured to be able to move downward in a state where the production members 700 are arranged in one place, and after the downward displacement, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is The constituent members of the effect member 700 are separated from each other in a state where the effect member 700 is disposed in a state where the effect member 700 is disposed in a state in which the operation is controlled so that the area that can be viewed from the front becomes larger (see FIG. 9).

Thereafter, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is controlled so that the effect members 700 are assembled again (see FIG. 8), displaced upward in a state where they are assembled in one place, and returned to the effect standby state shown in FIG. 7.

The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10, and 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced from the performance standby state in a direction having not only an up-down component but also a left-right component.

In this embodiment, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced along a path curve S1 set by a mechanism described below. The route curve S1 includes a common circular arc portion S1a having a circular arc shape centered on each center point C1, and an advancing/retreating route portion S1b extending downward from the lower end of the common circular arc portion S1a to the left and right outside.

In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right horizontal slide members 840 are arranged at the upper end position of the common arc part S1a, and in FIG. 11, the left side horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the upper end position of the common arc part S1a, while the right The horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at a position above the lower end position of the common arc portion S1a.

Therefore, if the left side horizontal slide member 840 is controlled to be displaced downward and the right side horizontal slide member 840 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. The player can visually perceive it as if it were being rotated and displaced about the center point C1, which is located closer to the center.

That is, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotating performance body having the same size as the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the degree of freedom of performance using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

12(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 taken along the line XIIIa-XIIIa, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 taken along the line XIV-XIV in FIG.

Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, FIGS. 12 to 14 show the game board 13 assembled to the front side of the operating unit 500 (see FIG. 2).

Furthermore, in FIGS. 12(a) and 13(a), an example of a state in which the granular members 320 are retained downward is illustrated, and in FIGS. 12(b) and 13(b), the granular members 320 are ejected and scattered. An example of such a state is illustrated.

In the performance standby state shown in FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b), the production member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 has a central part of the collective arrangement located above the division member 310 of the firing performance unit 300, and the division member Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be visible through 310.

On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), the effect member 700 is placed close behind the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300, and is blindfolded by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is hidden from view.

Since the displacement locus of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 does not interfere with the partitioning member 310, the firing production unit 300 is configured to perform the motion production of ejecting the granular material 320 at the partitioning member 310 regardless of the arrangement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. It is possible to control.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the granular member 320 is disposed below the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is ejected in a path that slopes upward toward the front. , hits the front wall of the partition member 310, and rises while bouncing within the range formed by the partition member 310.

This allows the player to see the granular members 320 as if they are coming toward the player, thereby increasing attention to the performance using the granular members 320.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the range in which the granular members 320 are scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the area in which the granular members 320 are scattered can be moved closer to the player, and the components disposed in the gaming area, such as the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2), can be scattered. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom of arrangement.

In other words, a position directly below the partitioning member 310 or a position closer to the front may be adopted as the standby position of the granular member 320 that is fired toward the partitioning member 310 of this embodiment. However, in this case, since the firing effect unit 300 is arranged in the space on the back side of the first winning hole 64, it is difficult to secure a space for installing a guide path for the ball that enters the first winning hole 64. This may become difficult, and it may be necessary to move the position of the first winning opening 64 to deal with it.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the partitioning member 310 is arranged at the frontmost position and the standby position of the granular member 320 is arranged diagonally backward, so that the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64 can be secured. The guide path of the ball can be arranged without any problem, and the situation where the first prize opening 64 cannot be freely arranged can be prevented from occurring.

When the granular member 320 is controlled to be fired in the state shown in FIG. 12(a), the granular member 320 scattered inside the partition member 310 and the third symbol display device 81 are This can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. This allows the player to visually recognize a combination of a two-dimensional display and the three-dimensionally displaced movement of the granular members 320.

When the firing control of the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 13(a), as shown in FIG. This can be shown to the player together with the changes. In this case, for example, by matching the scattering timing of the granular member 320 with the timing at which the effect member 700 of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is displaced in a discrete manner, the granular member 320 It is possible to visually recognize the state of the images scattering, and the impact of the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be enhanced.

Here, as a method of producing the effect in conjunction with the change in the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, a method of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the change in the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 may also be considered.

However, in a situation where the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 and most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is blocked by the enlarging/reducing unit 600, as in this embodiment, Even if the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display and it is difficult to effectively produce the effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the position of the partitioning member 310 that forms the range in which the granular members 320 that produce the motion in conjunction with the state change of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is scattered is provided on the front side of the enlarging/reducing unit 600. Therefore, even in a situation where the enlargement/reduction unit 600 blocks most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is not difficult for the player to see the granular members 320.

Furthermore, by configuring the granular member 320 with a small-sized member, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from becoming more difficult to see than when the granular member 320 is configured with a large-sized member.

Therefore, even in a state where most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is blocked by the enlarging/reducing unit 600, the presentation effect of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can be improved.

Furthermore, the effect of making the scattering of the granular members 320 visible in combination with the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can be used as is for the effect of making the scattering of the granular members 320 visible in combination with the displacement rotation unit 800.

That is, similarly to the enlargement/reduction unit 600, the displacement rotation unit 800 can be used in a state in which the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (effect standby state, see FIG. Since the state of the slide member 840 can be changed depending on the state in which it is disposed in front of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the lower end state of the effect, the upper end state of the effect, see FIGS. 10 and 11), the state can be changed depending on the state. , performs an effect in which the scattering granular member 320 and the display of the third symbol display device 81 are combined to be visually recognized, and an effect in which the scattering granular member 320 and the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 are combined to be visually recognized. be able to.

In this case, it has been explained that the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can effectively create an effect by scattering the granular members 320 in accordance with the displacement of the effect member 700 in a manner that disperses them. By scattering the particulate members 320 in accordance with the rotation of the wing-like member 854 disposed in the It can be visually recognized as if the displacement rotation unit 800 is rotating at high speed, and the presentation effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the scattering of the granular member 320 is made visible in combination with the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the effect is made visible in combination with the enlargement/reduction unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. It can be used for both.

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is a part of the firing effect unit 300 and is arranged directly above the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is as shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement locus of the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 (for example, if the horizontal slide member 840 continues to be displaced directly upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement rotation unit 800 may collide.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the advance/retreat route portion S1b is set as a route that can avoid the collision between the firing effect unit 300 and the displacement/rotation unit 800. That is, by setting the advancing/retreating path section S1b as a path passing through the gap provided diagonally between the ejection device 400 of the ejection production unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 are In addition to being able to improve the degree of freedom in setting, it is configured to be able to be displaced upwardly beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the rear end line BL1, and a large displacement range of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be secured. .

As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the presentation member 700 and the division member 310 are arranged to the extent that a space can be secured between them, but it is necessary to ensure a space between the presentation member 700 and the division member 310 even during transportation. It's not something I'm considering. Therefore, during transportation, it is desirable to maintain the effect member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range and to restrict the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 from being disposed close to each other.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIG. 6. The operation unit 500 includes a displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the back case 510. The displacement regulating device 180 is configured such that its state can be changed by manual operation from the back side of the rear case 510, and in the regulating state, it regulates the downward displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the production standby state.

By employing the displacement regulating device 180, even if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily shipped and transported.

To explain in detail, conventionally, the displacement of the movable accessory is suppressed by filling the area where the movable accessory moves with cushioning material (cushion material such as cotton), and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. This sometimes prevents movable accessories from being displaced during shipping or transportation. However, if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in this embodiment (see FIG. 12(a)), there is no penetration point for removing the cushioning material, so the game board 13 and the back case 510 The cushioning material cannot be removed unless it is disassembled, which may place a heavy burden on the game hall.

As a countermeasure against this, the present embodiment employs a displacement forming device 180. As a result, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be changed between a regulation state in which the vertical displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is regulated and a regulation release state in which the regulation is released, without releasing the fixation of the game board 13 and the back case 510. Can be switched. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be explained first, and then the details of the state change will be explained.

15(a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 15(b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 15(c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180. It is a diagram.

Note that FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b) show the displacement regulating device 180 in a deregulated state, and FIG. 15(c) shows the displacement regulating device 180 in a regulated state. As shown in FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c), the displacement regulating device 180 is switched between a regulating state and a regulating state by the cylindrical portion 183d protruding and retracting from the abutment member 181. In the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to protrude to the inside of the back case 510 and engage with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, but the details will be described later.

16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 18(a) is a rear view of the abutting member 181. 18(b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18(c) is a front view of the operating member 183.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement regulating device 180 includes a contact member 181 that is placed in contact with the back case 510 (see FIG. 6), and a contact member that is placed on the back side of the contact member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operating member 183 in the front-rear direction, an operating member 183 whose displacement is guided by the guide member 182, and a guide member 183 disposed between the operating member 183 and the abutment member 181. It mainly includes a coil spring 184 configured to be able to apply a biasing force toward the rear side to the operating member 181.

As the operating member 183 is formed into a substantially elliptical shape that is elongated from side to side when viewed from the rear, the abutment member 181 and guide member 182 that accommodate the operating member 183 are also formed from an approximately elliptical shape from which is elongated from side to side when viewed from the rear. Therefore, the external shape of the displacement regulating device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape that is elongated from side to side when viewed from the rear.

The abutting member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the back case 510, and the contact member 181 is designed to have a plate shape to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the back case 510. The wall part is extended, and there is an insertion hole 181a drilled at the left and right ends into which a fastening part protruding from the back case 510 is inserted, and a double cylindrical back wall with a shape that allows the coil spring 184 to be placed in the gap. It includes a cylindrical holding portion 181b that protrudes to the side, and an engaged portion 181c that constitutes a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183 and is configured to be engageable with the operating member 183.

The guide member 182 includes a main body part 182a that has an elliptical annular shape along the outer periphery of the contact member 181 and extends in the front-rear direction, and a screw into which a fastening screw is inserted into a fastening part inserted into the insertion hole 181a. The insertion part 182b, the fastening part 182c into which the fastening screw inserted into the abutment member 181 is screwed, the retaining part 182d that projects radially inward at the back end of the main body part 182a, and the fastening part 182c of the main body part 182a. It includes a protrusion 182e that protrudes radially inward in the front-rear direction on the upper and lower inner parts.

With this configuration, by fastening and fixing the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be disposed between the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 and held so that it cannot fall off. In the embodiment, the situations in which the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled are limited by setting the fastening direction.

In other words, in this embodiment, the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the abutting member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side of the abutting member 182 (the side covered by the back case 510). Therefore, when the displacement regulating device 180 is assembled to the rear case 510, the fastening screws cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement regulating device 180 is removed from the back case 510.

Note that the fastening screws for fastening and fixing the displacement regulating device 180 to the back case 510 are inserted into the screw insertion portions 182b from the back side of the guide member 182, so that the back side of the back case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). (see), making it easy to remove the displacement regulating device 180 from the rear case 510.

The operating member 183 has a main body part 183a formed in a cup shape with an oval shape slightly smaller than the retaining part 182d of the guide member 182 when viewed from the rear and an open front side, and a front edge of the main body part 183a. a flange portion 183b extending radially outward from the flange portion 183b; a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b; a cylindrical portion 183d projecting cylindrically from the bottom center of the main body portion 183a toward the front side; An arc-shaped protruding portion 183e that has a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 and projects toward the front side with the portion 183d as the center, and a position where it can engage with the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181. The engaging portion 183f is provided in a protruding manner to form a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

An elliptical sticker is pasted on the back surface of the operating member 183. This seal has a concave shape formed on one of the ends in the transverse direction (see Figure 15(a)), and by arranging this concave shape upward, it is easy to prevent incorrect vertical orientation during assembly. can do.

By forming the main body portion 183a into an elliptical shape, rotational displacement of the operating member 183 can be easily prevented. That is, even if the operating member 183 is about to be rotated, the rotation is restricted by coming into contact with the main body portion 182a of the guide member 182.

The flange portion 183b is formed to be larger than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 in rear view, thereby preventing the operating member 183 from falling off from the guide member 182. That is, the operating member 183 is movable in the front-rear direction while the flange portion 183b is held between the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182.

The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182, and has the role of smoothly displacing the operating member 183 back and forth. In this embodiment, since the protrusions 182e are formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side, the groove portions 183c are also formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side. This makes it possible to prevent incorrect assembly in which the operating member 183 is placed in the wrong upper or lower position.

The cylindrical portion 183d is a portion that is inserted through the center of the coil spring 184, and is configured to be able to be inserted into the center opening of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181. When the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes from the central opening of the abutment member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the regulated hole 657 of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 to regulate the vertical movement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

That is, in this embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be used both as a portion that restricts the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and as a portion that supports the coil spring 184.

The arcuate protruding portion 183e is disposed to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and is disposed to face the large diameter side cylindrical portion of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction.
When the operating member 183 is pushed in, the arc-shaped protruding portion 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other before other parts, so the load generation area can be increased and a large load can be locally applied. Load can be prevented from occurring.

The arc-shaped protruding portion 183e is not circular, but is formed in an arc shape with an interrupted circle, and the engaging portion 183f is disposed at the interrupted position. This can prevent the engaging portion 183f from being too far away from the cylindrical portion 183d and the coil spring 184.

The state change of the operating member 183 will be explained. The operating member 183 is biased toward the rear side by a coil spring 184, and when the operating member 183 is pushed toward the front side against this biasing force, it is composed of an engaging portion 183f and an engaged portion 181c. Each time the latch mechanism is pushed in beyond the minimum stroke at which the latch mechanism acts, the above-mentioned restricted state and restricted state are alternately switched.

In this way, since the latch mechanism is configured so that the state can be changed, the operation member 183 changes to the above-mentioned minimum value not only when the operation member 183 is intentionally operated but also when a large external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10. If it is displaced by the stroke, there is a risk that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may change unintentionally.

For example, in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, if a state change occurs in the displacement regulating device 180 unintentionally due to shock during shipping or vibration during transportation, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is placed in the production standby state (the production member 700 is located at the upper displacement end).
When the performance member 700 displaced from the performance standby state is placed close to the division member 310 (see FIG. 13) and receives shock during shipping or vibration during transportation, the performance member 700 will displace the division member of the firing performance unit 300. 310, and there is a possibility that the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is disposed at a position away from the position (center position) where the biasing force is applied to the operating member 183 (position eccentric to the right), and the engaging portion 183f The gap size between the groove portion 183c of the guide member 183 and the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182 is set to be large, so that the posture maintaining ability of the operating member 183 is deliberately reduced.

Thereby, since the attitude of the operating member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be inclined in advance, the displacement resistance of the operating member 183 can be increased. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the operating member 183 in the front-back direction due to unintended external force can be suppressed.

The relationship between the displacement regulating device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be explained. FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 open, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line XXIa-XXIa in FIG. 20.

Note that FIG. 21(a) illustrates a restricted state of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 21(b) illustrates a restricted state of the displacement regulating device 180.

As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed on the opening/closing proximal end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and allows the operator to extend his/her hand by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is configured so that it can be touched easily. This position is on the opposite side to the side (opening/closing tip side, right side) where the worker who opens the inner frame 12 and performs the work enters, so when the worker opens the inner frame 12, the displacement regulating device may be unintentionally removed. 180 can be avoided.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c that constitute the above-mentioned latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement regulating device 180. Since the operating member 183 is loosely supported, the entire load pushing the operating member 183 is not used for moving the operating member 183 back and forth, but is also used for changing the posture of the operating member 183.

For example, when the right side of the operating member 183 is pushed in, even if the right side moves back and forth sufficiently, the attitude of the operating member 183 may change and the left side may not be pushed in enough.

Therefore, for the purpose of pushing in the displacement regulating device 180 to switch the state, it is easier for the operator to cause the displacement regulating device 180 to produce the necessary displacement by pushing in the forming part of the latch mechanism with pinpoint accuracy. It can be said that the state switching of the regulating device 180 is likely to be successful.

In this embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement regulating device 180, and the operator enters from the right side to regulate the displacement. By operating the device 180, the operator can reach the displacement regulating device 180 with a minimum of movements. Therefore, the operator can easily press the forming portion of the latch mechanism with pinpoint precision.

Further, the posture change when the operating member 183 is pushed in occurs in such a manner that the pressing surface (the surface formed on the proximal end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) is directed toward the pushed side. Therefore, as the amount of pushing increases, the pushing load of the operator can be more easily transmitted to the operating member 183.

In the restricted state shown in FIG. 21(a), the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to restrict displacement of the transmission gear 650. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from changing.

Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (rotation direction around the longitudinal axis) and the displacement direction (the longitudinal direction) of the operating member 183 are perpendicular to each other, the operating member 183 receives the load in the displacement direction from the transmission gear 650. It is possible to prevent this from happening. Thereby, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively regulated without requiring a strong structure for the forming part of the latch mechanism.

In this way, by setting the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulating state, the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be maintained, so the use of the displacement regulating device 180 is not limited to transportation. For example, by maintaining the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 with the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulating state during maintenance after installation in a game machine store, maintenance of the displacement rotation unit 800 described later can be performed safely and easily.

That is, in the case where the displacement locus of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement/rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is Even if the MT2 malfunctions, the displacement regulating device 180 can maintain the state (arrangement) of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, thereby preventing the enlarging/reducing unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 from colliding. I can do it.

If the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulating state before the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, pressing the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 switches the displacement regulating device 180 to the regulating state. (See FIG. 21(b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 becomes movable, and the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can perform a performance operation that involves a change in state.

Here, before turning on the power, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and by looking into the open end side (right side), the displacement regulating device 180 is in the deregulated state. This section explains how the system is configured to allow confirmation of whether or not the user is present.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulating state, the operating member 183 is disposed in front of the shaped part of the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, so when viewed from the right side, In this case, the operating member 183 is hidden in the shape of the bottom wall portion 511.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21(b), when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the non-restricted state, the operating member 183 is arranged so as to protrude toward the rear side beyond the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510. When viewed from the right side, the operating member 183 is visible at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511.

Therefore, as a confirmation work before turning on the power, the operator does not have to fully open the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11, but can open the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 slightly relative to the outer frame 11. When opened and viewed from the right side, it can be confirmed that the displacement regulating device 180 is in the deregulated state by visually confirming that the operating member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511.

In this embodiment, the back case 510 is made of a colorless transparent resin material, and the operating member 183 is made of a red transparent resin material, so that the visibility of the operating member 183 can be improved.

Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). . In this embodiment, when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulating state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) detects that the state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 has not changed during the power-on operation. A position detection error display accompanying this determination is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

By showing this position detection error display to the clerk at the gaming machine store, it is possible to make the clerk aware that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may not have changed. Note that this error display is displayed by detecting the presence or absence of a change in the state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, and not by detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

That is, in this embodiment, the alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is issued using the position detection error display normally provided in the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without preparing an additional error display program or display material. It can be output. This makes it possible to reduce design costs.

In this embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). In some cases, the operating member 183 is configured to be unable to be pressed while the power is turned on, and the power is required to be turned off, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the operating member 183 may be configured to be operable even when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, the configuration that disables the pushing operation of the operating member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which push-in operation is disabled due to friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operating member 183, or a large diameter portion may be provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183, and the displacement of the transmission gear 650 may be Inside, the rear plate of the transmission gear 650 and the large diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged with each other in the front and rear to limit the displacement of the operating member 183.

As a different situation, an example in which the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is pressed during maintenance at a game machine store will be described. In this embodiment, the pushing operation of the operating member 183 is not only possible when the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 matches the cylindrical portion 183d front and back.

For example, during maintenance, even if the operation member 183 is pushed in while the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 8), the displacement regulating device 180 changes to the regulating state. In this case, since the cylindrical portion 183d is placed on the displacement locus of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, when a driving force is generated and the transmission gear 650 is displaced after the maintenance is completed, the displacement is the same as that of the cylindrical portion 183d. limited to.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that it can be determined that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is restricted, and by displaying an error (notifying an abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the restricted state. This can be notified to the clerk at the game machine store, but the details will be described later.

Thereby, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be determined by using the device for detecting the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without separately providing a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

Note that the displacement regulating device 180 can be operated before or after the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 are assembled to the inner frame 12. After assembling to the inner frame 12, it is necessary to not only open the inner frame 12 but also to open the back pack 92 from the inner frame 12. Preferably, the device 180 has been operated.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described firing performance unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as performance devices that enliven the game. These presentation devices will be explained in order starting from the firing presentation unit 300.

22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing performance unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing performance unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the assembled state of the firing effect unit 300, the partitioning member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161. That is, it is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to see the light guide plate 161 and the partition member 310 in an overlapping manner.

Since the partitioning member 310 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be seen by the player, and the player who sees the area surrounded by the center frame 86 can see the particulate member 320 scattered inside. In this way, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light guide plate 161 and the scattered granular members 320 are visually recognized as being superimposed on each other.

24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing performance unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing performance unit 300. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown exploded.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing performance unit 300 includes a partition member 310 that is disposed inside a center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and has a box shape with an open bottom; A plurality of granular members 320 disposed so as to be displaceable inside the member 310, an injection device 400 disposed in such a manner as to close the open portion on the lower side so that the granular members 320 do not fall off from the partition member 310, and a partition member 310. A first light irradiation device 330 is provided on the right side of the partition member 310, and a second light irradiation device 340 is provided on the left side of the partition member 310.

The partition member 310 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and includes a front plate portion 311 which is a plate-shaped portion disposed at the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 integrally formed below the front plate portion 311. A bottom plate part parallel to the front plate part 311 is disposed opposite to the back side of the front plate part 311, and has a closing wall extending from the left and right sides and the top of the bottom plate part toward the front side so as to close the gap. The back partition 313 is integrally formed below the back partition 313 and communicates with the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) formed between the front plate 311 and the back partition 313. It includes a lower back section 314 whose path can be configured between the lower section 314 and the curved plate section 312, and an irregularly shaped penetrating section 315 formed through the lower section of the back section 314.

Although the size of the partition member 310 is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, the size of the window surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 is approximately the same as the size of the partition member 310 when viewed from the front. It is formed as follows. That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed to have substantially the same shape.

Thereby, the component for hiding the edge of the light guide plate 161 can also be used to hide the edge of the partition member 310. A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 is not required, and the number of parts is reduced, and the edge of the partition member 310 is displayed by being visually recognized by overlapping the display by the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where the symbol is divided, the visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

The internal space IE1 serves as a range in which the granular members 320 can be scattered, but if this space is too wide, the granular members 320 will be scattered too much, and the number of granular members 320 may be too large for an impressive performance. You will need to do more. Therefore, if the space is formed as a narrow space to some extent, it is possible to create a more powerful effect by making the small number of granular members 320 visible with high density.

On the other hand, if the space is made too narrow, there is a risk that the granular members 320 will become clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1 is ensured to be approximately the same as the front-to-back width between the left-right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear section lower portion 314. Therefore, compared to the case where the longitudinal width is shortened, clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and rapid deceleration during injection can be avoided.

Furthermore, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the lower back section 314 than the left and right center portions 312b, the movement path of the granular member 320 is smaller in the vicinity of the left and right portions 312b than in the left and right center portions 312b. The movement path of the granular member 320 can be narrowed.

That is, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated near the left and right center portions 312b, and the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1. It can be made easier to reach the vicinity of the center. This allows the granular member 320 to be easily recognized by the player.

In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches near the center of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and is scattered through the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can see as if the granular member 320 is exploding from near the center of the internal space IE1 and being scattered in all directions, so the action of the granular member 320 is more powerful. can be improved.

The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 when the granular member 320 falls. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to be inclined downward toward the back side, and inclined downward toward the left and right center.

Thereby, irrespective of where the granular member 320 is placed in the internal space IE1, the granular member 320, which is displaced downward by its own weight, can be moved toward the left and right center and displaced downward on the back side.

Furthermore, the degree of downward inclination in the left and right parts 312a of the curved plate part 312 is configured such that the downward inclination towards the left and right center side is steeper than the downward inclination towards the back side. As a result, the tendency of the downward displacement of the granular member 320 can be caused to occur toward the left and right center side, giving priority to the displacement toward the back side. Therefore, due to the configuration of the injection device 400, which will be described later, the granular members 320 try to displace all at once toward the rear side at the left and right end positions where the granular members 320 tend to be crowded together, resulting in a situation where the granular members 320 stay (clog) in the middle of downward displacement. can be avoided.

In addition, the degree of downward inclination toward the back side at the left and right center portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 is steeper than the degree of downward inclination toward the left and right center side at the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid crowding of the granular members 320 on the way down.

On the other hand, in the lower part of the rear section 314, the plate part disposed opposite to the rear side of the curved plate part 312 is approximately the same as the left and right center part 312b of the curved plate part 312 in side view (see FIG. 12(a)). It is formed into a flat plate shape with an inclination angle such that the distance from the left and right center portions 312b becomes slightly wider toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is larger.

In this embodiment, the angle of inclination of the lower part of the rear section 314 with respect to the vertical direction is equal to (a slightly larger angle) than the angle of inclination with respect to the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 that injects the granular member 320.

Therefore, the angle of incidence of the granular members 320 on the lower part 314 of the rear compartment is the same without depending on the ejection direction of the granular members 320, which can change from side to side, so that the resistance given to the granular members 320 from the lower part 314 of the rear compartment is almost uniform. can do.

The irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 is formed in a shape into which the lid member 480 can be inserted, and includes a short portion that extends vertically at both left and right ends, and a long portion that curves left and right to connect the upper ends of the short portion. Equipped with The penetrating direction is formed so as to be inclined diagonally upward from the back side toward the front side with respect to the plate surface of the lower part of the back section 314 (see FIG. 12(a)). As a result, the acute-angled portion of the lower back section 314 constituting the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (the lower portion of the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 in FIG. 12A) is not arranged to face the injection direction of the granular member 320.

As a result, when the granular member 320 is injected, the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with an acute angle portion can be reduced, so that it is possible to avoid local loads being generated on the granular member 320 and the lower part of the back section 314, and the granular member 320 can be It is possible to prevent cracks or chips from occurring in the member 320 or the lower part of the rear section 314.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 on an enlarged scale, the granular member 320 is made of a relatively flexible (at least softer than the resin material forming the partition member 310) resin material and has a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons). It is formed into a tridecahedron (quasi-regular polyhedron) consisting of 20 regular hexagons, and includes non-penetrating recesses 321 that are recessed without penetrating along a plurality of straight lines parallel to each other.

This non-penetrating recess 321 can reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and also make the center of gravity of the granular member 320 deviate from the geometric center position. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed, the flesh remains on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, so that the center of gravity can be biased toward the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed. .

Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating recess 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

In this case, the load from the injection device 400 can be received by the surface on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed (see FIG. 25), making it easier to avoid damage or chipping of the granular member 320. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating recess 321 is oriented toward the injection direction when the injection device 400 receives a load and is injected, the surface on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed should not collide with the front plate portion 311. Can be done. Thereby, the load upon collision with the front plate part 311 can be easily absorbed by the deformation of the granular member 320, and the possibility of damaging the front plate part 311 can be reduced.

The first light irradiation section 330 includes a fixed plate section 331 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition section 313, an illuminated board 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate section 331, and a A lid part 333 is disposed on the right side, is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate part 331, and is formed between the fixing plate part 331 and the illumination board 332 so as to be accommodating therein.

The illumination board 332 is provided with light irradiation parts 332a such as LEDs on both left and right sides, and light having an optical axis is irradiated from the light irradiation parts 332a in the left-right direction. The fixing plate part 331 and the lid part 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance, and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation part 332a. Thereby, the light can be visually recognized as light divided into granules.

Of the light emitted from the illumination board 332, the light emitted to the right illuminates the right path (right-handed flow path) of the gaming area where the through gate 67 etc. (see FIG. 2) are arranged. It serves one purpose. The light emitted to the left side will be described later.

The fixing plate part 331 and the lid part 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance), and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation part 332a. Thereby, the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 332a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules, and the illumination board 332 is connected to the fixed plate part 331 and the lid part 333 in a range away from the light irradiation part 332a. can be shielded and avoided from being seen.

The second light irradiation section 340 includes a fixed plate section 341 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition section 313, an illumination board 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixed plate section 341, and a A lid part 343 is disposed on the left side, is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate part 341, and is formed to be able to accommodate the illumination board 342 between the fixing plate part 341 and the fixing plate part 341.

The fixing plate part 341 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance), while the lid part 343 is made of a colorless and light transmitting resin material. Therefore, the illumination board 342 is visible when viewed from the left, but in this embodiment, the left side of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is configured to extend long to the left. Thereby, the player's field of view can be narrowed in advance, and the left side surface of the illumination board 342 can be prevented from being viewed from the front.

Thereby, light can be irradiated through the transparent lid part 343 while avoiding the illumination board 342 from being seen.

The illumination board 342 is provided with light irradiation parts 342a such as LEDs on both left and right sides. A light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the left side emits light having an optical axis pointing forward. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side of the center frame 86 while not illuminating the left path of the gaming area.

Here, the reason for adopting a configuration different from the configuration in which the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 342a of the right illumination board 332 is actively directed toward the gaming area is that the gaming performance of the present pachinko machine 10 (normally This takes into consideration the fact that the game is played with the left hand, and the game is played with the right hand during probability change, time saving, and jackpot games. This will be explained below.

In the playing area of this pachinko machine 10, there is a high degree of freedom in the falling path of the ball on the left side of the playing area, so during normal play, adjust the firing strength of the ball so that the ball flows down the desired path. The player performs this operation. Therefore, if the light emission intensity on the left side of the gaming area is made too high, the visibility of the ball will deteriorate, which will impede adjustment of the ball launch intensity and may cause player dissatisfaction.

On the other hand, when shooting a ball to the right side of the gaming area, the player basically shoots the ball with maximum shooting strength. The momentum of the ejected ball is suppressed by the return rubber 69, and the degree of freedom in selecting the downstream path of the ball is significantly reduced, and the ball exclusively follows the same path.

To be more specific, in this embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed downstream of the second winning opening 640 and has a width that allows one ball to pass through. All the balls that do not hit the ball pass through the guide route DL1 and head towards the variable winning device 65 and the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof.

In this way, there is little need to adjust the firing strength of the ball, so even if the visibility of the ball becomes poor on the right side of the gaming area (particularly where the guide route DL1 is formed), the game will not be hindered. Since the possibility of this occurring is low, effects with high luminous intensity can be performed within this range.

For these reasons, in the present embodiment, the light irradiation section 332a is arranged in the illumination board 332 disposed on the right side so as to direct the light toward the gaming area, while the illumination board 342 disposed on the left Here, the light irradiation section 342a is arranged so as not to direct the light toward the gaming area.
As a result, it is possible to perform an effective light emission effect while suppressing player dissatisfaction.

A light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right side emits light having an optical axis pointing rightward. A through hole 341a is bored in the fixed plate part 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation part 342a. Thereby, the light irradiated from the light irradiation section 342a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules, and the illumination board 342 is shielded by the fixed plate section 341 in a range away from the light irradiation section 342a, You can avoid being seen. Note that the object illuminated by the light irradiation section 342a disposed on the right side will be described later.

26(a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 as seen in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 26(b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 as seen in the direction of arrow L in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), the outer shape of the partitioning member 310 is illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the light irradiation unit 332a disposed on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330 includes an LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and a light emitting unit 332a arranged on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330. and an LED through which the shaft passes.

This not only irradiates the granular member 320 with light inside the partition member 310, but also irradiates light to other movable means (enlargement/reduction unit 600 and displacement/rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310. It is possible to perform a lighting effect.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 has no LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and the light irradiation unit 342a is arranged on the back side of the partition member 310. It is composed only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

As a result, while suppressing the intensity of light emitted into the interior of the partitioning member 310, the intensity of light directed toward other movable means (the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800) disposed on the back side of the partitioning member 310 is reduced. can be improved.

In the second irradiation device 340, by suppressing the intensity of light emitted into the interior of the partition member 310, it is possible to improve the comfort of the game in the normal state. That is, in the game in the normal state, the player's line of sight is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the gaming area, the display on the third symbol display device 81, or the vicinity of the first winning hole 64. Most of the time, you are looking at the area to the left from the center of the gaming area.

In this case, when the second irradiation device 340 irradiates the inside of the partitioning member 310 with light, it shines at a position near the front of the gaming area, so it is a backlight for the player who sees the left side of the gaming area. Therefore, there is a possibility that the visibility of the gaming area may become poor for the player.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the light irradiation section 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is placed closer to the back side, and the gaming area and the light irradiation section 342a are separated, so that the light irradiated from the light irradiation section 342a is It is possible to reduce the degree of influence that this has on the visibility of the gaming area.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 illuminates the inside of the center frame 86 with high intensity while reducing the degree to which the game area is illuminated. Able to perform a performance. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) shine without lowering the visibility of the game area.

FIG. 27 is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 are illustrated, and the operation unit 500 is not illustrated. Further, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is arranged on the left side and rear side of the vertical substrate unit 167, avoiding the vertical substrate unit 167, which will be described later, that irradiates light onto the light guide plate 161. As a result, it is possible to perform a light emission effect while avoiding the light from the light irradiation section 342a entering the light guide plate 161, so that the light emission effect is performed using the light irradiated from the light irradiation section 342a and the light guide plate 161 is made to shine. You can separate it from the performance.

When employing the light guide plate 161 as in this embodiment, there is a possibility that the light guide plate 161 may unintentionally emit light depending on the irradiation path of the light, reducing the presentation effect. In particular, since the light irradiated around the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) tends to make the light guide plate 161 shine, there is a possibility that it will be necessary to suppress the light emission intensity, which will reduce the degree of freedom of production. was.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the light from the light irradiation section 342a is configured to travel while avoiding the light guide plate 161, so the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation section 342a is improved. be able to. Thereby, the degree of freedom in producing light emission around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 24 and 25. The injection device 400 is disposed below the partitioning member 310, and is a device on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) of the partitioning member 310 rides.

28, 29, and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32, and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. Note that FIGS. 28 and 31 schematically illustrate the configuration of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 29 and 32 illustrate details of the configuration of a part of the injection device 400 disposed closer to the front side. FIGS. 30 and 33 show details of the configuration of a part of the injection device 400 located closer to the back side. Further, in the description of FIGS. 28 to 33, FIGS. 24 and 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, the injection device 400 includes a fixing member 350 that is fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24), and a fixing member 350 that is fastened and fixed on the back side of the fixing member 350. A space forming member 360 configured to be able to form a space capable of accommodating another movable member between it and the fixed member 350, and an electrical wiring or transmission arm member 470 which is fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360 and will be described later. and an intermediate member 401 disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and having a keyhole-shaped opening 402 in the center thereof.

A fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the fixing member 350 to the partitioning member 310 is inserted into the partitioning member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, it is necessary to loosen and remove this fastening screw with a screwdriver, but it is necessary to remove the fixing member 350 when the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12(a)). In this case, the base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350, and is configured so that a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

Therefore, in preparation for removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, the firing unit 300 can be removed from the game board 13. This prevents a situation in which the fixing member 350 is accidentally removed from the partitioning member 310 and the granular material 320 is ejected from the fixing member 310 when the firing unit 300 is assembled to the game board 13. be able to.

The injection device 400 is configured such that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front side of the intermediate member 401 are inserted as members displaceably disposed between the intermediate member 401 and the fixed member 350 so as to be linearly movable. a linear motion member 410, a collision member 420 disposed above the translation member 410, supported so as to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the translation member 410, and having an arch-shaped collision surface at the top; The contact member 430 is disposed below the moving member 410 and is configured to be able to change its state between a contactable state and a non-contactable state in the displacement direction of the translational member 410.

The injection device 400 is a member disposed displaceably between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, and is formed to be able to transmit a load to the linear motion member 410 and the abutting member 430, and is rotatable to the space forming member 360. a front transmission member 440 which is pivotally supported by the front transmission member 440 and has gear teeth formed on its outer peripheral surface; and a drive shaft which is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor MT1 which is fastened and fixed to the fixed member 350 and meshes with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. It includes a gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 that is disposed on the opposite side of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and is fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440.

The injection device 400 is a member that is movably disposed on the back side of the space forming member 360 and is rotatably supported on a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. It includes a transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by action, and a lid member 480 that is rotatably supported around a straight line facing in the left-right direction as a rotation axis and is displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470.

The design concept of the injection device 400 having the above-described configuration will be explained. In the injection device 400, the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the direction in which the shaft portion 362 protrudes from the space forming member 360. Within the arrangement range divided in this way, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is generated in the middle range where the drive gear 450 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is applied to the front range and the rear side. As a result, each component is displaced in the front range and the rear range.

Based on this design concept, openings for driving force transmission are formed in the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, respectively. That is, the intermediate portion 401 includes an opening 402 formed in a keyhole shape, and the space forming member 360 includes an opening 361 formed in a lemon shape (approximately elliptical shape).

The transmission of driving force is completed in the front range of the intermediate portion 401 and the rear range of the space forming member 360, so the details of the configuration will be explained below in the order of the front range and the rear range, and then , the details of the configuration in the intermediate range will be explained, and the operational aspects will be explained.

First, the description will focus on the front range. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the above-mentioned opening 402, a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 403 that protrude from the upper end toward the front side, and the cylindrical protrusions 403. A plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper ends are supported, a plurality of rod fixing parts 404 arranged in bilaterally symmetrical positions so as to be able to fix a plurality of metal bars MB1, and a columnar shape protruding toward the front near the lower end. The lower end of the coil spring SP1 is hooked onto each of a plurality of claws 411 formed at the lower end of the linear motion member 410.

The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed to be shorter than the distance between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the claw portion 411 when the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear motion member 410 is always biased by the coil spring SP1, and the biasing force causes the linear motion member 410 to be placed at the upper end position before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range. The coil spring SP1 is disposed diagonally below the linear motion member 410, but this also aims to concentrate the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular members 320 tend to accumulate.

The linear motion member 410 includes the above-described claw portion 411, a plurality of insertion portions 412 that are formed to allow the metal rod MB1 to be inserted therethrough, and a trapezoidal protrusion portion 413 that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape from an upper end portion at the left and right center. A linear protrusion 414 extending in the left-right direction at approximately the center in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower protrusion 414 formed as a protrusion shorter than the protrusion 414 on the lower side of the protrusion 414 415, and a displacement regulating portion 416 that protrudes toward the front side from the lower end portion at the left and right center.

The trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the collision member 420 when the linear motion member 410 is placed at the upper end position. In other words, the linear motion member 410 is formed so that only the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 can come into contact with the collision member 420, and the portion other than the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as not to come into contact with the collision member 420. Ru.

The protrusions 414 and the lower protrusions 415 are portions that receive loads from other structural members during load transmission, and details will be described later.

The displacement regulating portion 416 is a portion that contacts the buffer member 352 of the fixed member 350 in the displacement direction, and this contact regulates the displacement of the linear motion member 410 (the upward displacement end is set).

The collision member 420 includes a curved plate portion 421 that forms an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate portion that extends from the back side end of the curved plate portion 421 in parallel to the plane in which the linear motion member 410 is displaced. A plate portion 422 , a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in the shape of an elongated hole extending along the extending direction of the plate portion 422 , and a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the direction in which the plate portion 422 extends, and a plurality of guide holes 423 formed at the lower end of the left and right center of the plate portion 422 in the direction of displacement of the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 . A buffer member 424 is fixed at a position facing each other and arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the trapezoidal protrusion 413.

The cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted into the guide hole 423 . That is, the cylindrical protrusion 403 serves both as a part that supports the upper end of the coil spring SP1 and as a part that guides the displacement of the collision member 420.

The buffer member 424 is formed from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material as a small piece with a square exterior. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, etc. can be used. In this case, the load and impact caused when the buffer member 424 and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact can be alleviated by the characteristics of the resin material, thereby preventing the trapezoidal protrusion 413 from being damaged or chipped. Can be suppressed.

The abutting member 430 is formed into a substantially triangular elongated plate shape, and has a support hole 431 bored as a circular opening through which the support column part 405 can be inserted at one end of the elongated plate, and a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column part 405 can be inserted, and a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column part 405 can be inserted. A protruding portion 432 having a circular cross section and protruding toward the back side, and a hook-shaped protruding portion 433 having a hook-shaped cross section and protruding toward the front side at a position between the support hole 431 and the protruding portion 432. Be prepared.

The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column 405 is inserted, so that the abutting member 430 is rotatably supported by the support column 405 .

The protruding portion 432 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 are portions that receive loads from other structural members during load transmission, and details will be described later.

The fixing member 350 includes a motor fixing part 351 to which the above-described drive motor MT1 is arranged and fixed, a buffer member 352 arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement regulating part 416, and a tip end of the circular protrusion 403 that can be received. A plurality of fastening recesses 353 formed as recesses and configured to be able to be fastened and fixed by screwing fastening screws inserted from the front side into through holes inside the recesses into female threads formed in the circular protrusion 403; A guide portion 354 is provided, which is configured of an inclined surface that narrows from the front side and from the left and right directions, and guides the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24).

The buffer member 352 is made of a highly durable and highly flexible resin material and is formed as a small piece with a square outline. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, etc. can be used. In this case, the characteristics of the resin material can reduce the load and impact when the cushioning member 352 and the displacement regulating part 416 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact with each other, thereby suppressing the occurrence of damage or chipping of the displacement regulating part 416. be able to.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are provided at a plurality of locations where the linear motion member 410 comes into contact at the end of displacement in the urging direction. As a result, as will be described later, even if the linearly moving member 410 is upwardly displaced at high speed by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 and suddenly stops, the load that the linearly moving member 410 receives when stopping suddenly. can be absorbed by the deformation of the buffer members 352, 424, and the load can be distributed to multiple locations.

The cylindrical protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected to each other through the fastening recess 353, and in order to release this connection, it is necessary to turn and remove the fastening screw inserted into the connection recess 353. On the other hand, since this fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, it is not possible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw when the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). configured so that it cannot be done.

This prevents a situation in which the fastening screw is accidentally loosened and the fastening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401 becomes loose when the game board 13 and the firing performance unit 300 are assembled. I can do it.

Next, explanation will be given focusing on the rear range. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-mentioned opening 361, a shaft portion 362 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from approximately the center of the back plate toward the front side, and a back plate. A pair of left and right guiding inclined surfaces 363 are formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion extending toward the front side at the left and right ends of the upper end position of the face plate, and a pair of left and right guiding inclined surfaces 363 are provided below the left and right inner sides of the guiding inclined surfaces 363. A pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 protrude from the back plate portion toward the front side, and a pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 are formed in a cylindrical shape at both left and right ends, are arranged on the same line, and are formed in a size capable of pivotally supporting the lid member 480. A plurality of support pillars 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support pillar 364 and generates a biasing force toward the retracting side of the lid member 480, and a cylindrical structure protruding from the back side at the upper left of the opening 361. cylindrical protrusion 366.

The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as described later. In accordance with this, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centered on the shaft portion 362 is provided to extend from the back plate portion of the space forming member 360 to the front side. This wall portion can cover the internal front transmission member 440 and rear transmission member 460.

The guide inclined surface 363 is configured such that the inclination of the left and right inner surfaces is flush with the left and right inner surfaces of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and directs the flowing granular material 320 toward the collision member 420 side (left and right center side). It is formed so that it can be guided towards.

The protruding support portion 364 is formed such that its protruding tip abuts the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and its upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401 . This flush upper surface supports the left and right ends of the curved plate part 421 in a state where the collision member 420 is disposed at the lower end position.

The support column portions 365 have different shapes on the left and right sides. That is, the right side is formed into a small-diameter cylindrical shape that protrudes toward the left and right outside, and the left side is formed into a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter that can accommodate the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489.

The cylindrical protrusion 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted into the transmission arm 470. By fixing a screw with a large diameter head to a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366, the transmission arm 470 is supported so as not to fall off.

The transmission arm member 470 is an elongated member formed in a substantially rectangular shape in appearance, and is a support member that is bored with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 366 and into which the cylindrical projection 366 is inserted. A hole 471, a cylindrical protrusion 472 that protrudes from one end in the longitudinal direction toward the front side in parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 471, and a cylindrical protrusion 472 that extends perpendicularly to the axis of the support hole 471 from the other end in the longitudinal direction. It includes a transmission protrusion 473 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape along a plane.

The cylindrical protrusion 472 passes through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 and projects toward the front side, and is formed to be able to engage with the rear transmission member 460. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 changes as the posture of the rear transmission member 460 changes, and the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes. Details will be described later.

A limiting member 370 is provided on the back side of the cylindrical protrusion 472 . That is, the limiting member 370 is a plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the space forming member 360, and includes a covering plate part 371 that covers the moving path of the cylindrical protrusion 472 from the back side, and a covering plate part 371 that suppresses the electrical wiring. Alternatively, a plurality of holding claws 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling are provided.

The covering plate portion 371 is disposed close to the back side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 toward the back side (back side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). This can prevent the cylindrical projection 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460, thereby preventing the cylindrical projection 472 from disengaging from the rear transmission member 460. can.

The holding claw portion 372 is a portion for temporarily fixing electric wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 between the rear side plate of the space forming member 360. This prevents fluctuations in the arrangement of electrical wiring (for example, changes in the arrangement of electrical wiring due to vibrations, etc.) and secures an entry route for other components, so as mentioned above, injection The transverse slide member 840 and wing member 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of the displacement and rotation unit 800 can be configured to be displaced in a path that includes a location proximate to the device 400.

The transmission protrusion 473 is a part that is inserted into the lid member 480 and transmits driving force to the lid member 480.

The lid member 480 is a member configured to be movable in and out of the partition member 310 through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 12(a)) of the partition member 310, and is a member formed in a curved plate shape. 481, a plurality of extending plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from both left and right ends of the advancing/retracting portion 481, and a plurality of extending plate portions 485 coaxially received with the support column portion 365 at the extending ends of the extending plate portions 485. a transmission hole 487 formed in a curved elongated hole shape in the extension plate portion 485 on the left side and through which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted; The fastening screw is formed into a disk shape with a hole surrounding the receiving part 486, and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column part 365 can be inserted. The left cover member 489 has a cylindrical portion inserted into the left receiving portion 486 and an elongated hole portion continuously connected to the transmission hole 487.

The left cover member 489 is not provided with abutment surfaces 489a to 489c that are formed along the axial direction like a drill hole but are functionally formed, the details of which will be described later.

The cross-sectional shape of the reciprocating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is an arc centered on the rotation axis assumed in the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load applied from the granular member 320) is rotated. Although it is constructed to face the axis, it is not simply a pipe divided into pieces, but the radius and shape of the arc change depending on the left and right position. This design intention will be explained.

First, the advancing/retracting portion 481 includes a projecting portion 482 that protrudes toward the entry side at the left-right center position. The projecting portion 482 is formed such that the projecting width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, when the overhanging portion 482 and another component (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed to be in contact with each other), a load is applied to the component toward the left and right sides. can be given, and the constituent members can be pushed outward to the left and right.

Second, as described above, the advancing/retracting portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the partitioning member 310 through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partitioning member 310; Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advancing/retracting portion 481 is shortened at the left-right center position where the overhanging portion 482 is formed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation that may occur at the point where it begins to enter the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (the left and right center of the overhanging portion 482), thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem in which the advancing/retracting portion 481 is unable to enter the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315. can be suppressed.

Thirdly, the radius of the arc is made longer near the left and right outer sides of the advance/retreat portion 481, as opposed to the center position of the projecting portion 482 in the left and right directions. The main purpose of this is to avoid contact with the granular member 320. That is, in this embodiment, the granular members 320 (see FIG. 12(a)) arranged on the upper surface of the collision member 420 accumulate near the left and right outer sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421.

The manner in which this retention occurs is not completely uniform on the left and right sides, but may result in non-uniformity on the left and right sides. For example, there is a possibility that an extremely large number of granular members 320 may stay on the right side, and if sufficient space is not secured, there is a possibility that the unevenly accumulated granular members 320 collide with the advance/retreat portion 481. .

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advance/retreat portion 481 is made longer in the vicinity of the left and right outer portions where a large amount of the granular material 320 tends to accumulate. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficiently long distance between the advancing and retracting portions 481 and the curved plate portion 421 in advance, so that even if the granular members 320 accumulate unevenly, the granular members 320 and the retracting portions 481 can Collisions can be avoided.

Explain other design philosophies. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end surface on the entry side is recessed toward the retreat side. Thereby, the extension plate portion 485 can be prevented from colliding with the granular members 320 that are staying.

In addition, even if the lid member 480 is placed at the end of the displacement on the entry side before the granular member 320 has completely flowed down, the granular member 320 can be removed from the concave forming portion of the extending plate portion 485 and the curved portion of the partition member 310. By configuring the gap with the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) to be large enough to pass through, the granular material 320 can be gathered above the collision member 420.

The receiving portion 486 has different shapes on the left and right sides. That is, the left receiving part 486a on the left side is formed in a circular cylindrical shape, and the right receiving part 486b on the right side is formed in a semicylindrical shape (half pipe shape), but this is a design that takes assembly into consideration.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 28 and 31. The support column part 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends outward in the left-right direction, especially on the right side, so when both the receiving parts 486 of the lid member 480 are formed in a circular cylindrical shape, the support column part 365 that supports the lid member 480 cannot support the lid member 480. In order to assemble it to the column part 365, it is necessary to divide the advancing/retracting part 481.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 needs to be configured so that the cover member 480 can be moved forward and backward from the partition member 310, while being configured to be able to prevent the granular member 320 from being discharged from the partition member 310. That is, the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 cannot be increased in size without limit, and the degree of freedom in designing the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 is limited.

Here, if the shape of the lid member 480 collapses to such an extent that it cannot pass through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315, it will be impossible to move forward or backward, so accuracy is required in the shape. On the other hand, when the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured by combining a plurality of members, the shape may be distorted due to factors such as assembly errors.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the shapes of the receiving portions 486 are made different on the left and right sides, so that it is unnecessary to divide the advancing/retracting portion 481. As for the assembly process, first, the left receiving part 486a is arranged on the axially outer side (left side) of the support column part 365, and the cylindrical part of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the left receiving part 486a while being inserted into the support column part 365. This allows the left receiving portion 486a to be arranged coaxially with the support column portion 365.

At this time, in the right receiving part 486b, the support column part 365 is arranged to face the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extension plate portion 485 by inserting the fastening screws through the plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing them into the extension plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480. can do.

After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and the lid member 480 is secured in the space by being supported so as not to fall off using the screw head of the fastening screw screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support column part 365. It can be rotatably supported relative to the forming member 360.

The design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. 34 to 36, displacements of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 are illustrated in chronological order.

34(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG. 34(b).

35(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 35(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35(b).

36(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 36(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36(b).

35 and 36 illustrate a process in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. Specifically, FIG. 36 shows a state in which the lid member 480 is placed at the entrance end of the displacement range, and FIG. 34 shows the lid member 480 placed at the retraction end of the displacement range. A state in which the cover member 480 is arranged is illustrated, and FIG. 35 shows a state in which the lid member 480 is disposed at an intermediate position of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 are not parallel. Specifically, a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (the plane shown in FIG. 34(a)) and a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (the plane shown in FIG. 34(b)) ) are orthogonal.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the contact area of the transmission protrusion 473 that contacts the left cover member 489 usually changes as the posture of the transmission protrusion 473 changes. For example, when the inner surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending parallel to the axial direction of the lid member 480, the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is oriented in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 34(a). On the other hand, in the inclined state, the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 is considered to come into contact with the left cover member 489 at a position closer to the right (closer to the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

On the other hand, when the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction as shown in FIG. It will be done.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 35(c), and 36(c), the upper surface of the transmitting protrusion 473 is The left cover member 489 is designed to have a shape that allows the opening upper side surface of the left cover member 489 to come into contact with each other in the left and right width direction.

That is, the left cover member 489 has a first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retracted side, and a The second contact surface 489b is formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction, and the second contact surface 489b is formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction compared to the second contact surface 489b, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side. and a third contact surface 489c that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in the state.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the inclination in the left-right direction of the shape of the upper surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is maximized at the first contact surface 489a and gradually decreases as it approaches the rotation axis of the lid member 480. Designed to.

Specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the lid member 480. The inclination at the abutting position of the left cover member 489 with the upper surface of the opening is designed to be an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 in the abutting state.

As a result, when the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are in contact with each other, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be ensured, regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, at the timing at which a large load is generated, which is the timing at which the lid member 480 starts to be displaced against gravity, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 changes in the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489). Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

As a result, the area that bears the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end on the entry side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489). In addition to the contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489 becoming smaller, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is at its maximum, which increases the possibility of overloading the transmission protrusion 473. be.

As a countermeasure against this, in the present embodiment, the proportion of the weight of the cover member 480 that is loaded on the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced when the cover member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the advancing/retracting portion 481, which accounts for most of the weight of the lid member 480, is aligned with the rotation axis of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the dead weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction of displacing the lid member 480 toward the entry side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

In this case, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is the maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, the least of the biasing force is A portion of this can be offset by the own weight of the lid member 480.

As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is greater than that in the case where most of the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side. can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the radial direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Specifically, the distance between the contact position of the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 in the process of displacing the lid member 480 from the retreating side position to the entering side position is The member 480 is configured to be longest when disposed at the displacement end position on the retracted side.

In addition, the first contact surface 489a has a normal line at the position of contact with the transmission protrusion 473 in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480, which forms an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so that the angle of inclination is small, the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is centered around the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can occur along an arc.

As a result, when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 becomes longer, thereby reducing the load required to rotate the lid member 480. can do.

As a modification of the shape of the transmission protrusion 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the transmission protrusion 473 includes a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, in the transmission protrusion 473, a groove 473a extending in the longitudinal direction is formed from the front side toward the back side to a position beyond the center in the width direction.

As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressively deformed in the direction of contact with the left cover member 489, so that the load at the time of contact can be released by deformation, and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), FIG. 35(b), and FIG. 36(b), the curved plate portion 312, which is arranged to face the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480, is formed in a shape along the same plane from side to side. be done.
Therefore, due to the shapes of the advancing/retracting portion 481 and the overhanging portion 482, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center in the left-right direction.

Note that the radius at the left-right center position of the overhanging portion 482 of the lid member 480 is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the curved plate portion 312. As a result, it is possible to avoid collision of the overhanging part 482, which has the maximum entry width, with the curved plate part 312, so that the lid member 480 is slightly over-rotated (to the extent caused by design errors for each member). In this case, it is possible to prevent the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 from colliding and being damaged.

Returning to FIGS. 28 and 31, the description will focus on the intermediate range. The drive gear 450 is meshed with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, as the drive gear 450 rotates, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are engaged with each other. The transmission member 460 rotates integrally around the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360. Note that, in the following description, rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (viewed from the side of the front transmission member 440) is assumed to be normal rotation.

The front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 have a structure formed on the sides facing each other to ensure relative position and rigidity of each other, and are used for driving force transmission on the opposite side. A shaped portion is formed. The details of the shaped portion used for this driving force transmission will be explained below.

37(a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 37(b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. . Note that the arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotational axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), the front transmission member 440 includes a main body plate portion 441 having a substantially disk shape, a portion extending in the axial direction from the edge of the main body plate portion 441, and a groove on the inside thereof. A groove forming part 442 that is recessed, a support hole 443 that is a circular opening bored in the center of the main body plate part 441 to a size that allows the shaft part 362 to be inserted therethrough, and a gear formed in the main body plate part 441. A flange portion 444 covered by the teeth, a detected portion 445 extending radially outward from the flange portion 444 and formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and a groove forming A transmission protrusion 446 is provided that protrudes parallel to the rotation axis from a position eccentric to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side than the groove formed in the portion 442 .

The groove forming part 442 has a recessed groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the protruding part 432 so that the protruding part 432 of the abutting member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter therein. The groove has a first groove portion 442a formed along a first circular arc shape, and the front transmission member 440 rotates in the normal direction with the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 disposed in the first groove portion 442a. A second groove 442b in which the protrusion 432 is guided, and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove 442a with respect to the second groove 442b and having a larger diameter than the reference arc of the first groove 442a. , and a fourth groove 442d that connects the third groove 442c and the first groove 442a.

While the second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, compared to the second groove part 442b, the fourth groove part 442d has a smaller forming angle range, and the distance between the groove and the support hole 443 changes rapidly with respect to the rotation angle of the front transmission member 440. is designed to be.

The transmission protrusion 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but includes a groove 446a formed along the protrusion direction in a straight line connecting the center and a point on the outer diameter side. Thereby, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 in response to a load input from the radial direction can be changed in accordance with the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input from a direction perpendicular to a straight line serving as a reference for the groove 446a.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), the rear transmission member 460 includes a main body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disc shape with the same diameter as the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440; a groove-forming part 462 that extends in the axial direction and has a groove recessed inside thereof; and a non-contact opening portion 463 formed to avoid contact with.

The main body plate portion 461 includes a weight portion 461a that is enlarged in the radial direction in a range where the recessed groove portion is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and does not function as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rotationally displaced rear transmission member 460 from the rotation axis.

In this embodiment, the arrangement of the weight portion 461a and the The weight is calculated and it is formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460. As a result, the centers of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be made to coincide with the rotation axis, so that changes in the postures of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. .

The groove forming portion 462 has a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 472 so that the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter therein. , the groove includes a first groove portion 462a formed along a first circular arc shape, and a rear side transmission member 460 with the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 disposed in the first groove portion 462a. A second groove 462b in which the cylindrical protrusion 472 is guided by normal rotation (clockwise rotation in rear view), and a first groove 462b formed on the opposite side of the first groove 462a with respect to the second groove 462b. 462a, and a fourth groove 462d that connects the third groove 462c and the first groove 462a.

While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, compared to the second groove part 462b, the fourth groove part 462d has a significantly larger forming angle range (approximately 180 degrees), and the groove and the non-contact open part 463 are different from each other with respect to the rotation angle of the rear transmission member 460. The design is such that the distance between them changes slowly.

An example of the displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described below. First, an outline of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be explained.

38, 39, 40, and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. Note that in FIGS. 38, 39, 40, and 41, illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring SP1 is illustrated with imaginary lines as a schematic diagram to the extent that changes in length can be understood.

38 to 41, the displacement of the injection device 400 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, FIG. 38 shows a state immediately after the granular member 320 flows down toward the collision member 420 and stops, FIG. 39 shows a standby state of the injection device 400, and FIG. A firing standby state is illustrated in which the device 400 waits for firing timing, and FIG. 41 illustrates a firing state which is a state immediately after the injection device 400 executes a firing effect. Although FIG. 41 shows a state in which the granular member 320 is still on the collision member 420, the granular member 320 immediately scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421.

In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the translational member 410, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retracting side. Note that a state in which the lid member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the end of the entry side displacement will be described as an effect standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 39).

In the performance standby state shown in FIG. 39, the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, so the lid member 480 can partially block the player's line of sight to the granular member 320. As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be lowered, so that the player can take his eyes off the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 disposed below it.

In the firing standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended in such a manner that the cylindrical protrusion 403 is in contact with the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retreat side. . In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linearly moving member 410 is regulated by the abutting member 430, and the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retraction side, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 and rises, and the cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted into the guide hole. It stops at the position where it comes into contact with the lower inner surface of 423. Thereafter, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

Due to the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310, the flow of the granular material 320 that is splashed and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided toward the collision member 420 side after being brought to the left and right center side. (See the arrow schematically shown in FIG. 38).

In this embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided toward the collision member 420, since the collision member 420 is arranged relatively upward, the guide portion 354 of the fixed member 350 (see FIG. 32) and the collision member 420 The depth of the saucer shape formed by the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 is set to be shallow.

Therefore, due to the shape, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 cannot be received unevenly. In this embodiment, the partitioning member 310 accommodates a number of granular members 320 that cannot be accommodated unevenly.

As a result, even if, for example, a large number of granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420, when the granular members 320 return thereafter, the collision member 420 is Since a slope is formed on the right side that slopes downward toward the left, the granular material 320 that returns later flows to the left along this slope. That is, it flows to the left in a manner that it rides on the granular member 320 and flows.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the left and right deviation of the granular members 320 that accumulate on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420, thereby reducing the deviation in the arrangement of the granular members 320 (difference in scattering mode) in each firing performance. can do.

Furthermore, when the granular member 320 is guided toward the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is placed in the middle of the displacement section, and is separated from the lower linear motion member 410 by a point with the trapezoidal protrusion 413. It's just that they are in contact with each other. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the amount of the gap created between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423. In other words, the posture is allowed to change in a rotational manner around an axis parallel to the axis of one of the cylindrical protrusions 403.

As described above, for example, if many of the granular members 320 are biased to the right side of the collision member 420 and begin to return, the collision member 420 will change its posture in such a manner that the right side is lowered compared to the left side. However, in this case, the top of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right.

Therefore, the granular member 320 that flows down near the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side can be easily guided to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its attitude, the horizontal center position of the guide section 354 and the top position of the curved plate section 421 match when viewed from the front; It is thought that whether the flowing granular member 320 flows down to the left or right depends on the difference in the contact points between the granular member 320 and the curved plate portion 421, and is almost uniformly distributed to the left and right.

On the other hand, when the collision member 420 changes its attitude, the top position of the curved plate part 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the left-right center position of the guide part 354, and the position of the top of the curved plate part 421 is shifted to the right side with respect to the left-right center position of the guide part 354. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided to the left along the slope of the curved plate portion 421.
This makes it easier for the granular members 320 that have returned later to flow down to the side where fewer granular members 320 remain, making it easier to distribute the granular members 320 approximately equally on the left and right sides.

Note that the change in attitude of the collision member 420 is not always allowed in the same way. For example, in the firing standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the cylindrical protrusions 403 are arranged at the upper end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. Therefore, the attitude change of the collision member 420 is suppressed compared to the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the cylindrical protrusions 403 are arranged at the lower end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. Since the displacement of the collision member 420 is regulated, the change in the posture of the collision member 420 is suppressed compared to the production standby state of the injection device 400.

In addition, when the collision member 420 receives a load from the linear motion member 410, the load is a biasing force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expands and contracts in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easily stabilized.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress changes in the posture of the collision member 420 during the period from the firing standby state to the firing state. This makes it possible to stabilize the way in which the granular members 320 scatter under the load from the collision member 420 when the retention state of the granular members 320 (left and right deviation in the number of grains) is the same.

As described above, when the injection device 400 executes the firing effect, the granular members 320 are scattered, and then flow down along the internal shape of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 Return to the top of the screen and return to the production standby state again. That is, in this embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes shown in FIGS. 38 to 41. The relationship between the structures of the injection device 400 to enable this state change to be performed will be described in detail below.

42(a) to 42(f) and 43(a) to 43(e) show the linear motion member 410, collision member 420, abutment member 430, and front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 440 is a plan view of FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 42(a) to 42(f) and FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e), the external shapes of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the abutting member 430 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and the external shapes are Except for the parts involved in mutual load transmission, the protruding part 414 and the lower protruding part 415 of the linear motion member 410, the buffer member 424 of the collision member 420, and the protruding part 432 and the hook-shaped part of the abutting member 430. The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is illustrated with a solid line, the inside thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the rear side thereof is illustrated without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated with a solid line, the interior thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof. is shown without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with drive control, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated using imaginary lines.

42 and 43, a linear motion member 410, a collision member 420, and an abutment member 430 (hereinafter also referred to as "each component" in the description of FIGS. 42 and 43) are shown as the front transmission member 440 rotates forward. ) is illustrated in chronological order. Below, they will be explained in order.

In FIG. 42(a), the arrangement of each component in the performance standby state of the injection device 400 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 42(a), in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 begins to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the audio lamp control device 113 causes the front transmission member 440 to be detected in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is drive-controlled in the forward rotation. By detecting a change from a state in which the portion 445 is not disposed to a state in which the detected portion 445 is entered, it can be determined that the injection device 400 is in the production standby state.

FIG. 42(b) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 contacts the protrusion 414 of the translation member 410 and starts to push down the translation member 410. From the state shown in FIG. 42(b), the front transmission member 440 starts pushing down the translation member 410 against the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, from FIG. 42(a) to FIG. 42(b), since the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other, direct load transmission between the members is interrupted. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420, causing the collision member 420 to vibrate slightly, the vibration and load will not be directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. is configured to be able to be shut off.

FIG. 42(c) illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is placed at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the translational member 410 and the collision member 420 begins to be released.

From the state shown in FIG. 42(b) to the state shown in FIG. 42(c), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally displaced downward. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the translation member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other, so that vibrations and loads caused by the collision of the granular member 320 with the collision member 420 are , may be indirectly transmitted to the front transmission member 440.

On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction of pushing down the translational member 410, and this causes the translational member 410 to move toward the transmission point where it contacts the transmission member 440. This is the direction away from the protrusion 446. Therefore, the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the forward rotational displacement of the transmission member 440 can be reduced.

Note that the influence on the forward rotational displacement is not limited at all. Examples include an effect that causes the speed controlled as a rotational displacement to differ from the actual speed, and an effect that impedes rotational displacement and causes the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat.

In FIG. 42(d), the protruding portion 432 of the abutment member 430 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state where the abutment member 430 begins to tilt. be done.

The contact member 430 is not applied with a biasing force from other biasing means, and is a member whose attitude changes according to the shape of the groove forming portion 442. From FIG. 42(d) onward, the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 increases to two, the linear motion member 410 and the abutting member 430, but the direction of displacement of the abutting member 430 is the direction in which it is displaced by its own weight. Since it is the same, the state of the load that the front transmission member 440 receives does not substantially change from the state before FIG. 42(d) in which only the translation member 410 was displaced.

FIG. 42(e) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the translation member 410 is placed at the lower end position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42(e), when the translation member 410 is placed at the lower end position, the translation member 410 and the abutment member 430 are still placed apart from each other.

After the state shown in FIG. 42(e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission protrusion 446, so that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rotation of the abutment member 430 are The load required for changing the posture can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. Thereby, the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

In FIG. 42(f), the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 is arranged at the end position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state in which the abutting member 430 has finished tilting. be done.

As shown in FIG. 42(f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart, but from the state shown in FIG. is arranged in the third groove portion 442c, the attitude of the abutting member 430 is maintained (a change in attitude is prevented).

Therefore, regarding the subsequent contact between the linear motion member 410 and the abutment member 430, the contact between the translation member 410 and the abutment member 430 will be greater than when the translation member 410 and the abutment member 430 abut at speeds in opposite directions. The aspect can be softened.

In FIG. 43(a), a diagram in the same state as FIG. 42(f) is illustrated for easy understanding. In FIG. 43(b), as the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, the translation member 410 is displaced upward, and the lower protrusion 415 of the translation member 410 and the contact member The arrangement of each component in a state where the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of 430 starts to come into contact is illustrated.

Note that the state from the state shown in FIG. 43(a) to just before the state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing standby state (for example, see FIG. 40).

The lower protrusion portion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion portion 433 are provided with protruding portions that protrude toward the mutually opposing sides at the distal end portions of the opposing sides. As a result, it is possible to suppress slippage at the abutment position between the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433, and to stably bring the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433 into contact. can be brought into contact.

In the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the terminal end position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the detected portion 445 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and this state change is caused by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). Output.

That is, in this embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the audio lamp control device 113 detects the detection target of the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is controlled to rotate in the forward direction. Control is performed so that it is determined that the injection device 400 has transitioned to the firing standby state by detecting a change from a state in which the portion 445 is disposed to a state in which the detected portion 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is regulated by the abutment member 430. A biasing force is generated in the linear motion member 410 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), and a load is applied to the contact member 430 in the direction of standing up the contact member 430, but the displacement of the contact member 430 is Displacement of the provided portion 432 is restricted by being obstructed by the groove forming portion 442 .

The contact between the protruding portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is the contact between the circularly curved surface (outer surface of the protruding portion 432) and the arcuate surface (inner surface of the third groove portion 442c). The resulting load is directed toward the center of the circle.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the protruding part 432 is directed toward the front side. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being affected, and also to restrict the displacement of the protrusion 432 regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440.

Therefore, in the firing standby state shown in FIG. 43(b), even after the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized, the state shown in FIG. 43(b) can be maintained. As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which the drive motor MT1 must always be energized in the firing standby state, it is possible to suppress the heat generation of the drive motor MT1, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1. can be improved.

For example, when driving and controlling the injection device 400 in conjunction with the display performance on the third symbol display device 81, this is a restriction on setting the length of the display performance from the firing standby state to the firing state. This is advantageous in that it does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

In FIG. 43(c), the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state in which the abutting member 430 starts to stand up. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(c), the position of the groove forming part 442 that contacts the protruding part 432 changes from the third groove part 442c, so the direction of the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is transferred to the front side. This results in deviation from the rotation axis of the member 440.

Therefore, in order to de-energize the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain it in the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 must be turned off before changing from the state shown in FIG. 43(b) to the state shown in FIG. It is necessary to de-energize the

In FIG. 43(d), the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of the abutment member 430 retreats from the displacement locus of the lower protrusion 415 of the translational member 410, so that the restriction on the upward displacement of the translational member 410 is released. , the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state where the linear motion member 410 is upwardly displaced by the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and the collision member 420 is thrown upward. The state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force thereof is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not regulated by the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the translation member 410 The biasing force (see FIG. 38) also acts to assist the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction.

In this embodiment, the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 applied via the linear motion member 410 are both Since they are configured in the same way in the upright direction, the driving force and urging force applied to the abutment member 430 can be generated in a manner that assists each other.

In FIG. 43(e), the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state in which the abutting member 430 has finished standing. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(e), the position of the groove forming part 442 that contacts the protruding part 432 of the contact member 430 becomes the first groove part 442a. As a result, the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. The influence on rotation can be reduced.

For example, in the present embodiment, the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was applied to the contact member 430 until just before the state shown in FIG. 43(d). ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction of raising the abutment member 430 during subsequent displacements will also increase. Therefore, without countermeasures, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 may be inhibited due to the displacement of the abutment member 430 standing up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the abutting member 430 finishes standing up, the protruding part 432 of the abutting member 430 is placed in the first groove part 442a, and the protruding part 432 of the abutting member 430 is disposed in the first groove part 442a. The structure is such that the load applied to the front transmission member 440 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. This makes it easier to prevent rotation of the front transmission member 440 from being inhibited by the displacement of the contact member 430 standing up.

From the state shown in FIG. 43(e), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction of forwardly rotating the front transmission member 440, and when it is detected that the detected part 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. By controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, the injection device 400 can be returned to the performance standby state, and the MPU 221 ( A control program (see Figure 4) has been designed.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of control of the injection device 400, firing execution control is described in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated once in the forward rotation direction from the performance standby state of the injection device 400. In the firing execution control, in the firing state, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 that rises due to the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and an effect is executed in which the granular member 320 is scattered.

Since this effect scatters the granular members 320 in the player's field of view, it is flashy and can improve the player's attention. If there is a jackpot at the timing near the end of the following long reach, the player's interest can be improved by shifting to the firing state and scattering the granular members 320 to create an effect.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot (if it is a miss), executing the effect of scattering the granular members 320 may cause the player to misunderstand that it is a jackpot, which is not preferable.

In addition, if the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when it does not shift to the firing state (missing), the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 will indicate that the long reach during execution will result in a jackpot. This means that the player will be able to figure out whether the game will be a hit or a miss, which may reduce the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of a miss, after the injection device 400 is put into the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is drive-controlled in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction. The injection device 400 is configured to be able to return to the performance standby state without going through the firing state.

That is, for example, by controlling the drive motor MT1 in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the opposite direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. can be done.

In this case, before the abutment member 430 starts to be displaced in the direction of standing up (see FIG. 42(e)), the translational member 410 is pushed down to bring the translational member 410 and the abutment member 430 into contact. (See FIG. 42(f)), it is possible to avoid friction between the translational member 410 and the contact member 430 when the contact is released.

In addition, from FIG. 42(e) onward, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission protrusion 440 via the linear motion member 410 prevents the rotation of the front transmission protrusion 440. Since it works in an assisting direction, the magnitude of the driving force required of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

The upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 in this case is not instantaneous based on the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement accompanying the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446.

As a result, it is possible to avoid the linear motion member 410 from splashing the collision member 420, so the injection device 400 is placed in a standby state (see FIG. 42(a)) without performing the effect in which the granular member 320 is scattered. can be restored to.

In order to achieve the state shown in FIG. 42(a) after reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440, after detecting that the detected portion 445 has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be controlled to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the forward direction until it is detected that the detected groove 445 has entered the detection groove again.

Thereby, both the production control for scattering the granular members 320 and the production control for not scattering the granular members 320 can be executed using the same preliminary operation accompanying the drive of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand whether the game is a jackpot or not, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the outcome due to differences in drive sounds.

In particular, according to this embodiment, in the firing standby state (see FIG. 43(c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be de-energized to temporarily eliminate the drive sound of the drive motor MT1. . This makes it difficult to determine from the drive sound whether the drive direction is the same or the opposite direction, compared to the case where control is performed to switch the drive direction from a state where the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven. .

Therefore, the driving motor MT1 is controlled to drive in advance of the timing of notification of success or failure in the performance, and even if a driving sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the driving direction, thereby avoiding a situation in which the player understands the success or failure result. be able to.

As a result, drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started in advance of the success/failure notification timing without running the risk of the player being able to grasp the success or failure result from the driving sound. The stop timing can be varied. In other words, it is not necessary to stop the drive motor MT1 immediately before the firing state, and even if the drive motor MT1 is stopped sufficiently before the firing state, it will not interfere with the subsequent performance. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 over-rotates contrary to control and unintentionally enters the firing state.

44(a) to 44(f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28.

In FIG. 44, changes in the arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter also referred to as "each component" in the description of FIG. 44) due to the forward rotation (clockwise) of the rear transmission member 460 are shown. Illustrated in chronological order. Below, they will be explained in order.

In FIG. 44(a), the arrangement of each component in the performance standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 42(a)) is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 44(a), in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side.

Since the lid member 480 receives a biasing force toward the retracting side from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), a load is generated in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and this load is If no countermeasure is taken, the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 may be affected by the transmission to the rear transmission member 460.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, the circular curved surface and the arcuate surface are in contact with each other, so the load generated by the contact is directed toward the center of the circle.

Therefore, since the load applied to the groove forming part 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460, the load applied to the groove forming part 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed to the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

In FIG. 44(b), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed at the end position of the third groove 462c of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still placed at the displacement end position on the entry side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

In FIG. 44(c), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at an intermediate position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at an approximately intermediate position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

Since the attitude change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460, the driving force for the attitude change rotationally drives the rear side transmission member 460. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, the biasing force of torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) acts in a direction to push down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and at the same time, this biasing force pushes the cylindrical protrusion 472 upward. The urging force of torsion spring SP2 also acts to assist the posture change of transmission arm member 470.

In this embodiment, the attitude change direction of the transmission arm member 470 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the attitude change direction of the transmission arm member 470 caused by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied via the lid member 480 are as follows. Since both have the same configuration in the clockwise direction, the driving force and biasing force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a mutually complementary manner.

In FIG. 44(d), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed at the end position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the retracted side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 44(d), the lid member 480 is maintained at the end of displacement on the retracting side by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged without contacting each other.

Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the transmission protrusion 473 even when there is no need to displace the lid member 480 toward the entry side, and it is possible to reduce the degree of fatigue accumulated in the transmission arm member 470. .

In FIG. 44(e), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed in the middle of the first groove 462a of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still placed at the end of displacement on the retraction side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

After the state shown in FIG. 44(e), a firing standby state (see FIG. 43(b)) is established. From the firing standby state to the firing state, the lid member 480 is disposed at the end of displacement on the retracting side, and is configured to avoid collision with the granular member 320 (see FIG. 41) to be injected.

In FIG. 44(f), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed at the end position of the first groove 462a of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still placed at the displacement end position on the retracted side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

From the state shown in FIG. 44(e) to the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the injection device 400 goes through a firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing the forward rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the lid member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side and returns to the performance standby state (see FIG. 44(a)).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44(f) is the state after the execution of the firing effect, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the abutment member 430 to the front transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. 43(f) (see e)). Therefore, of the driving force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38), the amount distributed to the front transmission member 440 side can be extremely reduced.

As a result, even if a large driving force is required because the direction of displacement of the lid member 480 is a direction opposing the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the drive motor MT1 Most of the drive force can be used as a driving force for rotating other components that come into contact with the rear transmission member 460, so that sufficient driving force can be ensured.

FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. Note that in FIG. 45, illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted, so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the abutment member 430 are illustrated in the same manner as described in FIGS. 42 and 43. Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated with a solid line, the interior thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof. is shown without being hidden.

In FIG. 45, the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction with the linear motion member 410 disposed at the upward displacement end position (for example, the production standby state, see FIG. 42(a)), and the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction. A state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the member 440 contacts the lower protrusion 415 of the translational member 410 from below, and further rotational displacement is restricted is illustrated.

In this manner, in this embodiment, a limit is set on the displacement mode allowed for the front transmission member 440. That is, when driving in the forward rotational direction, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the front transmission member 440 can be driven continuously without being restricted in displacement, whereas when driving in the reverse rotational direction, When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and further continuous driving is restricted.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven with the displacement regulated, there is a risk that the drive motor MT1 will generate heat and be damaged, so in this embodiment, the drive control is limited to a direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the opposite direction. By providing this, damage to the drive motor MT1 is avoided, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the protruding portion 432 of the abutment member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a change in the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 over time.

Note that in FIG. 46, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration is not described, but a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

In addition, in FIG. 46, the standard rotation angle of normal rotation from the performance standby state (FIGS. 42(a) and 44(a)) is shown on the horizontal axis. That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(c), 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(d), 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42(f) and 43(a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(c). , 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(e).

In addition, in FIG. 46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(d). , 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(e), and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(f).

In FIG. 46, the rotation angle of forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is shown on the horizontal axis with the performance standby state as a reference (angle is 0 degrees), and each of the above-mentioned components corresponding to the angle State changes in are described. The change in the arrangement of each component due to drive control in forward rotation corresponds to the change toward the right in FIG. 46, and the change in the arrangement of each component due to drive control in reverse rotation corresponds to the change toward the left in FIG. 46. Respond to changes.

As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is upwardly displaced by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the opposite direction before entering the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) is as follows: The displacement speed is slower than that when the collision member 420 reaches the firing state and is displaced upward. That is, in this embodiment, the speed of upward displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

Note that after the firing state is exceeded, since the collision member 420 has already risen, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted midway (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (the angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (the angle is 360 degrees) can be determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

For example, when the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are arranged between the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle is 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Even so, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether or not the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on again, there is a possibility that the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are arranged between the firing state (the angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (the angle is 360 degrees). If there is, that is, if the detected part 445 is not arranged at the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the direction of forward rotation. Motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

Due to this rotation, the injection device 400 is configured to temporarily return to the performance standby state, and thereafter control the execution of each performance. This prevents the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 from being unintentionally restricted and causing the drive motor MT1 to generate heat after the control is interrupted, such as when the power is turned on again. I can do it.

In this embodiment, the arrangement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) is changed from the firing state (the angle is 287 degrees) to the state where the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 starts to change (the angle is 304 degrees). The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotational speed at which the rotation speed is stabilized.

For example, if the arrangement is stabilized within 2 seconds after firing, by controlling the drive so that the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds/rotation), particles on the way down can be It is possible to avoid a situation in which the member 320 is caught in the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

Note that the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to these, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be rotated at 4x speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can be started to be displaced toward the entrance side at a timing at which the granular member 320 starts flowing down. In this case, the lid member 480 can be completely displaced before the granular member 320 is disposed in the advancing direction of the lid member 480.

In this state, by stopping the drive in the performance standby state, the granular members 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so the granular members 320 can be collected toward the left and right center along the shape of the lid member 480. I can do it. Thereafter, by driving and controlling the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the lid member 480 is displaced toward the retraction side, and the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 and the collision member 420 Get on top.

In this way, by controlling the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 differently, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes in which the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420.

Thereby, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each firing execution control. Therefore, for example, by configuring the granular members 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, the appearance of the ejected granular members 320 (the arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320) can be made different. , the performance effect can be improved.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described firing performance unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as performance devices that enliven the game. Next, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 will be explained.

47 and 48 are front perspective views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. 47 and 49 illustrate the effect standby state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 illustrate the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 includes a production member 700 configured to be able to move up and down in the center position in the left and right direction and capable of producing light emission, and hemispherical lights fixedly arranged apart to the left and right of the production member 700. A device 613 is provided.

By performing a light emitting performance using the performance member 700 and the hemispherical illumination device 613, light is emitted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) toward the player, and a performance that makes the player visually recognizable is performed. be able to.

51 is an exploded front perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIG. 52 is an exploded rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 51 and 52, the presentation member 700 is shown in an assembled state. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the tip of the lower arm member 630 connected to the presentation member 700 is located on the front side of the rear plate 611, but in FIGS. , is conveniently arranged on the back side of the rear plate section 611.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 includes a left and right elongated main body member 601 that is fastened and fixed to a bottom wall 511 of a rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and a front surface of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 disposed on the side and having a design surface, a pair of upper arm members 620 that are rotatably supported by the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlock with each other in a meshing relationship, and the upper arm member 620 and the intermediate member. A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected at the upper arm member 620 and change their posture as the upper arm member 620 rotates, a drive motor MT2 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, and a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2. a transmission gear 650 which is engaged with the left upper arm member 620 so as to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT2 and rotatably supported by the main body member 601; and an annular portion is assembled to the main body member 601; It includes a torsion spring SP3 that applies an upward biasing force to the upper arm member 620, and a presentation member 700 that is connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630.

The main body member 601 is formed into a left and right long plate shape, and has a pair of guide holes 602 which are long holes on the left and right arranged in a straight line on the left and right, and a pair of guide holes 602 which are cylindrical and protrude in both the front and rear directions from a left and right symmetrical position. A cylindrical shaft portion 603, a pair of arc-shaped holes 604 formed in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 603 as a central axis, and a cylindrical shaft portion 605 protruding from the left side toward the back side, An arc-shaped hole 606 is formed in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as the center axis, and a detection groove is formed in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 on the back side with the detection groove facing toward the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side. It includes a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630. The guide hole 602 functions as a long hole that guides the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 therethrough.

A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes toward the front side is inserted into a support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620, and rotatably supports the upper arm member 620. By screwing a screw with a large diameter head into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603, the upper arm member 620 is supported so as not to fall off.

The portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes toward the back side is inserted into the wound body portion of the torsion spring SP3, thereby stabilizing the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3.

One arm of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by the overhang 601a that extends in a dogleg shape from the back side of the main body member 601, and the other arm is pressed by the biased part 625 of the upper arm member 620. engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions to push down the biased portion 625, so that the upper arm member 620 is biased in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

The arcuate hole 604 is a through hole for passing the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the back side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engageable.

The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted into the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 650. A screw with a large diameter head is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605, so that the transmission gear 650 is supported so as not to fall off.

The arcuate hole 606 is a through hole through which the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 passes toward the front side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engageable. The upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so that it cannot fall off by screwing a screw with a large diameter head into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650.

The detection sensor 607 is provided with a detection groove into which the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and is located at a position where the transmission gear 650 puts the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in a production standby state or at any other position. It is configured such that it can be determined whether the

The front cover member 610 is a thin member made of a resin material with low light transmittance and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 601. A front plate part 612 is formed on the left and right sides from the connection position with the left and right upper end parts and is formed to protrude to the front side from the rear plate part 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate part 612 so as to be able to emit light. and a hemispherical illumination device 613.

The rear plate portion 611 is disposed on the front side of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601, and blocks the view so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 is not visible. The back side of the rear plate part 611 has a dimension that is slightly longer than the front and back width of the gear part 622 of the upper arm member 620 and extends toward the back side, avoiding the movement locus of the gear part 622 of the upper arm member 620, and abuts the main body member 601 in a plane. An overhanging contact portion 611a is provided.

As a result, it is possible to stabilize the fastened state of the rear plate part 611 to the main body member 601, and also to make it possible to displace the upper arm member 620 in the space divided by the rear plate part 611 and the main body member 601. can. In other words, a change in the posture of the upper arm member 620 (for example, a change in posture such as bending with respect to the rotation axis) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, so that the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

The front plate part 612 is a plate-shaped part that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and configured so that the structural parts of these members are not visible to the player. A pair of sliding surfaces 612a are formed as a pair of left and right planes parallel to the front plate part of the board, and a wiring passageway is formed as a recessed part opened to the back side in the plate part extending from the left upper end toward the back side. A recessed portion 612b.

The sliding surface 612a is assembled and fastened to the lower arm member 630 from the front side, and configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1, which is formed to have low friction due to its shape and material, can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed midway in the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 is a planar plate surface formed along a locus that is displaced as the lower arm member 630 is displaced.

The shape of the side of the pressing member PC1 facing the sliding surface 612a is approximately a semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a, and when the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a are in contact, the state is point contact. It is configured so that Thereby, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be easily displaced smoothly.

The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not in constant contact, and a gap is provided. On the other hand, before the amount by which the lower arm member 630 is displaced toward the front side exceeds an allowable amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are configured to come into contact with each other to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side. Ru.

In this embodiment, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set based on the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13(a)) and the presentation member 700. That is, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set to such a size that the presentation member 700 in the arrangement assumed from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not come into contact with the partition member 310.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a comes into contact with the pressing member PC1 and restricts the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side, so that the presentation member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is brought into contact with the partition member 310. It is possible to prevent contact.

Note that the sliding portion 612a disposed on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the locus of the pressing member PC1, whereas the sliding portion 612a disposed on the left side includes an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large flat surface, the functions of the left and right sliding parts 612a are common. That is, it is sufficient that at least the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1 is formed in a planar shape, and the shape of the other portions can be arbitrarily set. For example, like the right side portion of this embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed in a limited arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1, and the other portions protrude toward the back side (the design portion on the front side is The sliding portion 612a may be arranged so that it protrudes toward the back side due to the influence of being placed closer to the back side, or the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may also be configured with a similar planar shape as in the left side portion of this embodiment. good.

In addition, the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is limited by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a, and the upper arm member 620 is fastened to the torsion spring SP3 and the cylindrical protrusion 654. The forward displacement is regulated by the fastening screw that is fixed. That is, in addition to limiting the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 is also limited, thereby making it possible to avoid generating a large load locally.

The wiring passage recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for the electric wiring to pass through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630. That is, the electrical wiring that has reached between the back case 510 and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring passage recess 612b, passes through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then goes to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630. The user is guided and passed through the presentation member 700.

In this way, by making the insertion path of the electric wiring into the inside of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from above, the elongated lower arm member 630 connected to the presentation member 700 is largely displaced in the left-right direction as the elongated lower arm member 630 is displaced. Even when the electrical wiring is displaced by a distance that is approximately half the width of the left and right width of the back case 510 (in this embodiment), it is possible to easily prevent the electrical wiring from becoming loose and hanging downward.

The hemispherical illumination device 613 is a device that includes a hemispherical lens member and irradiates light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the back side of the device to the front side through the hemispherical lens member. . In this embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to be inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction.

This makes it easier to improve the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical illumination device 613 compared to the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical illumination device 613 is directed in the front-rear direction. can. For example, by making it easier to bring light into the field of view of a player who is viewing the center of the third symbol display device 81, or by irradiating light onto the effect member 700 in an overhanging or enlarged state, it is made easier to make the player notice the light. You can

The upper arm member 620 has a support hole 621 formed in the shape of a long plate and configured as a circular hole having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 can be inserted therethrough. , a gear part 622 formed on an arc centered on the support hole 621 and configured to be able to mesh with each other by a pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 formed in a circular shape at the longitudinal end. The connecting portion 623 is configured to be able to pass through the cylindrical protrusion 631 of the transmission gear 650, and the connecting portion 623 is formed only on the left upper arm member 620 as a long hole with a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650. The upper arm member 620 includes a transmission hole 624 and a biased portion 625 that protrudes from the back side of the upper arm member 620 and has a hook-shaped tip.

The transmission hole 624 includes a transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621, and a margin continuously extending from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. 624b.

The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion that receives the driving force transmitted via the transmission gear 650, and the margin portion 624b functions as a portion for blocking the transmission of the driving force, which will be described in detail later.

The biased portion 625 is a portion that is engaged with one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3, and increases the biasing force in the direction of upwardly displacing the left and right outer sides of the upper arm member 620 via the biased portion 625. Arm member 620 receives.

Furthermore, the engagement between the tip hook-shaped portion of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 can restrict the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 (see FIG. 49).

The lower arm member 630 is formed of a long plate member that is substantially bilaterally symmetrical, except that the left arm has a path for passing electrical wiring, and has a circular shape that projects from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction toward the back side. A columnar protrusion 631, a columnar protrusion 632 that protrudes from the left and right outer positions to the back side with respect to the columnar protrusion 631, and a columnar protrusion 632 that protrudes from the left and right inner positions with respect to the columnar protrusion 631 in the front and back direction. The support hole 633 has a circular support hole 633, and a plurality of arcuate holes 634 are formed through the support hole 633 along a pair of arcs centered on the support hole 633.

The cylindrical protrusion 631 is inserted into the connecting part 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw with a large diameter head is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 631 from the back side. Lower arm member 630 is supported by upper arm member 620 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical protrusion 632 is inserted into the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 via a collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is inserted into the female thread formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 632 on the back side. The lower arm member 630 is supported with respect to the main body member 601 so that it cannot fall off by screwing a screw with a large diameter head from the lower arm member 601.

The support hole 633 and the arcuate hole 634 are used for connection with the presentation member 700. Due to the relationship with the arrangement portion 635 which will be described later, the thickness of the portion where the arcuate hole 634 is formed is thicker on the lower side than on the upper side. As a result, when the effect member 700 is placed at the lower end position, the effect member 700 can be supported in a thick part so as to be held from the left and right sides, thereby effectively preventing the effect member 700 from changing its posture to a forward-leaning position. can be regulated.

In addition, the lower arm member 630 on the left side includes an arrangement portion 635 that is formed open to the back side to form a space for passing electrical wiring in the longitudinal direction of the arm body, and a rear surface of the arrangement portion 635. A thin lid portion 636 is provided on the side and functions as a lid for the placement portion 635.

The arrangement portion 635 includes a proximal through hole 635a that is bored in the front-rear direction at the end on the side of the cylindrical protrusion 632.

The base end side through-hole 635a is a through-hole for passing the electric wiring arranged in the arrangement part 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement part 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635a from the front side, is guided to the arrangement part 635, and exits from the arrangement part 635 to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630.

The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and in the performance standby state, a lower meat part 637 disposed below the boundary is recessed toward the back side. be done. In other words, the upper side with the tangential line as the boundary is formed as a thin plate part.

In the right lower arm member 630, this lower flesh portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction. Further, in the left lower arm member 630, the lower flesh portion 637 constitutes the upper wall portion of the placement portion 635, is configured to be able to guide electrical wiring therein, and is disposed as a lid on the guide path. This is reinforced by fastening and fixing the thin lid portion 636.

The electrical wiring passes through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the placement part 635 and the thin lid part 636) and is guided to the production member 700 side, so it is connected to the members disposed before and after the lower arm member 630 (for example, This can prevent the upper arm member 620) from coming into contact with the electrical wiring. Thereby, it is possible to avoid damage to the electrical wiring due to entanglement or rubbing of the electrical wiring with these members.

In addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 that is assembled from the front side, the lower arm member 630 includes a pressing member PC1 that is made of the same material and is assembled from the back side. The lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to come into contact with the main body plate-shaped portion of the main body member 601 at the front and rear via this pressing member PC1. Note that the main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not in constant contact and have a slight gap, so that when the lower arm member 630 is displaced toward the back side, they come into contact and limit the displacement. This function is similar to that of the front pressing member PC1.

That is, the lower arm member 630 has pressing members PC1 assembled on both its front and rear sides, and is configured to be able to come into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing members PC1. It is possible to easily limit the displacement and reduce the resistance that occurs to vertical displacement when the displacement is limited.

The tip of the pressing member PC1, which is assembled from the back side, extending toward the back side is arranged closer to the back side than the end of the upper arm member 620 on the back side. Thereby, even if the tip of the pressing member PC1 is displaced toward the back side to such an extent that it comes into contact with the main body member 601, it is possible to avoid the upper arm member 620 coming into contact with the main body member 601. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged in the front and rear.

This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is likely to be unintentionally displaced in the front-back direction. For example, in this embodiment, the tip of the lower arm member 630 is arranged near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connection position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 are located in the front and back. Since the lower arm member 630 is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the configuration is such that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, the configuration is such that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 or the drive displacement of the presentation member 700 itself.

The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular main body part 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear part 652 carved in a gear shape on the radially outer side of the semicircular main body part 651, and a semicircular main body part A support hole 653 is formed as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft part 605 can be inserted on the central axis of the semicircular shape of the semicircular body part 651, and a support hole 653 is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding from the outer diameter end of the semicircular body part 651 toward the front side. a cylindrical protrusion 654, a detection plate part 655 formed in the circumferential end of the semicircular main body part 651 in a plate shape with a thickness that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, and the detection plate part 655. 655 and the support hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 formed through the thickened portion 656 in the front-rear direction at a position on the support hole 653 side.

The gear portion 652 is disposed in mesh with the drive gear of the drive motor MT2, and the driving force of the drive motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

The cylindrical protrusion 654 passes through the arcuate hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is disposed inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620. As a result, driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the cylindrical protrusion 654 as the transmission gear 650 rotates. The cylindrical protrusion 654 is inserted into a collar member whose outer diameter is slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a fastening screw with a large diameter head is inserted into the female thread formed at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so that they cannot fall off, and forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

The thickened portion 656 and the regulated hole 657 are portions configured to be engageable with the above-mentioned displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 6). By arranging the regulated hole 657 on the support hole 653 side (position closer to the support hole 653), when the displacement regulation device 180 is in the regulation state (see FIG. 21(a)), the transmission gear 650 is connected to the displacement regulation device 180. The structure is such that the transmitted load (moment) is reduced.

Further, as a design concept for the thickness of the transmission gear 650, the thickened portion 656 is set as a portion that needs to be able to withstand the load caused by engagement with the displacement regulating device 180. That is, by forming the portions where engagement with the displacement regulating device 180 cannot occur with a thin wall, it is possible to reduce the material cost required for the transmission gear 650.

53 is a front exploded perspective view of the production member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the production member 700. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 53 and 54, FIGS. 51 and 52 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the production member 700 includes a plate-shaped main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630, and a functional plate part 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-shaped main body 710. , a rotating plate 730 disposed between the functional plate part 720 and the plate-like main body 710 and supported rotatably with respect to the functional plate part 720, and a rotating plate 730 between the rotating plate 730 and the functional plate part 720 A telescopic displacement member 740 that is arranged and configured to be able to move in the same manner as a magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotary plate 730 and a drive gear MG3 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate section 720 are connected to the function plate section 720. The drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, the light emitting device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function board section 720 and executes the light emitting effect, and the light emitting device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the front end of the plurality of telescopic displacement members 740 and are respectively fastened and fixed to the effect standby state. and a plurality of shielding design members 760 that are combined so as to shield the passage of light on the front side of the light emitting production device 750.

The plate-like main body 710 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 711 that protrude from symmetrical positions toward the back side in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the cylindrical protrusions. A plurality of auxiliary protrusions 712 protrude from a position on an arc centered at 711 on the back side in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the upper arc hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions. 711, a wiring guide member 714 provided below the through hole 713 and open only on the front side, and a pressing member provided on the back surface of the plate. It includes a member PC1.

The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electrical wiring DK1 guided to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 between the arrangement part 635 and the thin lid part 636 to the front side through the lower arm member 630. . In the section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided by a wiring guide member 714. Thereby, even in the limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring DK1 will come into contact with other members or be seen by the player.

In addition to the function of guiding the electrical wiring DK1, the wiring guide member 714 is formed with an inclined surface that slopes downward as the upper surface goes toward the back side. It also has the function of softening the contact between the two.

That is, the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714 is arranged to face the rear plate part 611 of the front cover member 610 when the production member 700 is displaced upwardly, and when the production member 700 is displaced toward the back side. Even if the wire guide member 714 comes into contact with the rear plate portion 611, the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side during upward displacement along the slope of the upper surface of the wire guide member 714.

Like the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is also disposed to be slidable on the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. That is, in this embodiment, in the process of upward displacement of the presentation member 700, the pressing member PC1 disposed at the upper end and the wiring guide member 714 disposed at the lower part can come into contact with the rear plate part 611 of the front cover member 610. By configuring this, the positions where the load for maintaining the posture of the presentation member 700 is generated can be separated.

FIG. 55 is a front view of the functional board section 720. Note that in the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The functional plate part 720 is formed from a resin material into a substantially plate shape, and includes a cylindrical part 721 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side at the center and has the inside of the cylinder penetrated, and a central axis of the cylindrical part 721. An arc-shaped hole 722 drilled along the coaxial arc shape, a sensor placement part 723 formed so that the detection sensor SC7 can be placed at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted therethrough. A motor fixing part 724 that has an opening and is formed to be able to fasten and fix the drive motor MT3, a radial long hole 725a along a straight line passing through the central axis of the cylindrical part 721, and a radial long hole 725a for the radial long hole 725a. A plurality of guide holes 725 (in this embodiment, 5 sets) consisting of a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b intersecting each other at right angles, and extending radially outward on an extension of the radial elongated holes 725a. A plurality of (in this embodiment, five locations) extension plate portions 726 and both ends in the width direction of the extension plate portion 726 from the back side end of the flat portion disposed at the extension base end of the extension plate portion 726. A pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 (in this embodiment, one pair for each of the extension plate parts 726) protruding from each other, and a pair of columnar protrusions protruding from the vicinity of the radially outer end toward the back side. 728.

The cylindrical part 721 is arranged so that its rear end comes into contact with the plate-like main body 710, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710 with the internal through-hole communicating with the through-hole 713 of the plate-like main body 710. be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-like main body 710 from the back side of the plate-like main body 710, and the threaded portion is screwed into a female thread formed at the end of the back side of the cylindrical part 721.

As a result, the functional plate part 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the center thereof, and in this embodiment, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through this through hole. .

The electrical wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 which is fastened and fixed to the sensor placement part 723 and the drive motor MT3 which is fastened and fixed to the motor fixing part 724. This allows the detection sensor SC7 and drive motor MT3 to be energized.

The arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole that allows the detected portion 731a of the rotary plate 730 to project out to the front side, and when the detected portion 731a enters the detection groove of the detection sensor SC7, the detected portion 731a of the rotary plate 730 is exposed. It is possible to determine the posture.

The guide hole 725 is a group of through holes formed with a width that allows the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 to be arranged, and extends along a straight line extending radially from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721. A long hole-like radial hole 725a is formed, and a long hole-like hole is formed on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the long hole 725a along a straight line perpendicular to the straight line that is the reference of the radial long hole 725a. A pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b are formed.

The radial elongated hole 725a and the intersecting elongated hole 725b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary protrusion 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the assembled arrangement state. The details will be explained later.

The columnar protruding portion 728 is configured such that its rear end can come into contact with the plate-like main body 710 . In the abutting state, a fastening screw inserted into the plate-like main body 710 from the back side is screwed into a female thread formed on the tip side of the columnar protrusion 728, so that the functional plate part 720 is connected to the plate-like main body. It is fastened and fixed to 710.

In the assembled state, the columnar protrusion 728 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730 and limits the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730. That is, the columnar protruding portion 728 serves both as a portion for fastening and fixing the functional plate portion 720 to the plate-like main body 710 and as a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730.

56 is a front view of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of the rotating plate 730. In the description of FIGS. 56 and 57, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The rotary plate 730 is formed from a resin material into a substantially disk shape, and includes a cylindrical portion 731 that protrudes toward the front side in a cylindrical shape at the center and has the inside of the cylinder penetrated, and a central axis of the cylindrical portion 731. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 are formed along a coaxial arc shape, and a long through hole is formed at a position that is on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732. The guide hole 733 includes a plurality of guide holes 733 (five locations in this embodiment), and an extending claw portion 734 extending radially outward in a claw shape at a position corresponding to the guide hole 733.

The cylindrical part 731 is designed to have an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical part 721 of the function plate part 720, and is extended from the front end to the front side and passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the function plate part 720 to the detection sensor SC7. The detection target portion 731a is formed to be able to enter the detection groove of the drive motor MT3, and the gear portion 731b is formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape that can mesh with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar protruding portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed with a length that can ensure the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 at a little less than about 120 degrees.

The guide holes 733 are formed in the same shape, and include a small diameter circular arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731, and a small diameter circular arc portion 733a that is closer to the center of the cylindrical portion 731 than the small diameter circular arc portion 733a. It includes a large-diameter arcuate portion 733b having a long length from the axis, and a connecting portion 733c that connects the large-diameter arcuate portion 733b and the small-diameter arcuate portion 733a.

Although the form of the connecting portion 733c is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, it is formed such that the length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle changes in accordance with the position. Ru. In particular, in this embodiment, the change in length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle near the small diameter circular arc portion 733a and the large diameter circular arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

This makes it possible to reduce the resistance that occurs when transmitting the load to the telescopic displacement member 740, and to improve the presentation effect by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 non-uniform.

The extending claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that protrudes clockwise when viewed from the front, is configured to be able to engage with the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the front side, and is formed closer to the back side in the thickness direction. It includes a back side claw part 734a and a front side claw part 734b formed on the front side of the back side claw part 734a. In this embodiment, the extended claw portion 734 is divided into a rear claw portion 734a and a front claw portion 734b at a substantially midway point in the thickness dimension of the extended claw portion 734.

The extending claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740. The front side claw part 734b and the back side claw part 734a respectively correspond to the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b whose protruding tip positions from the telescopic displacement member 740 are different in the front and back. The guide is guided inward in the radial direction, details of which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the extending claw portion 734 is arranged such that the extension length of the extending claw portion 734 disposed on the lower side is longer than that of the extending claw portion 734 disposed on the upper side. is formed. In this embodiment, the extension length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be alleviated.

That is, even if the telescoping members 740 have the same shape, the relationship between the direction in which they can be displaced and the direction of gravity is different, so the displacement caused by the action of gravity differs for each telescoping member 740. For example, the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in a direction away from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. 740, the first guided protrusion 743b may be disposed, and the radially inward guidance by the extending claw portion 734 may fail.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the extension length of the extension claw portion 734 disposed on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the hanging of the telescopic displacement member 740. Guidance inward in the radial direction by the portion 734 can be stably performed.

On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced due to its own weight, the displacement is in the direction closer to the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730, so that the extending claw portion 734 is guided radially inward. is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extending claw portion 734 disposed on the upper side is not extended longer than necessary, but is formed short, thereby reducing material costs and downsizing the rotary plate 730. Can be done.

The telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. Note that in the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

58(a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, FIG. 58(b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. ) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 59(b) is a rear perspective view of the telescoping displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

In FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), among the five sets of telescoping displacement members 740 and shielding design members 760, one set disposed at the top is shown in a state where they are arranged collectively. 59(a) and 59(b), the same set is illustrated as it would be if it were to be discretized.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is a member that constitutes a link mechanism composed of a plurality of elongated members arranged in two layers, front and rear. The plane on which the elongated members can be displaced is also referred to as the front layer plane, and the plane on which the plurality of elongated members disposed on the rear side can be displaced is also referred to as the rear layer plane.

The telescopic displacement member 740 includes a pair of base end members 741 which are arranged in two layers, front and back, and are relatively rotatably supported at the lower end, and a pair of base end members 741 are relatively rotatably supported at the upper end of the base end member 741. A pair of first elongated members 742, a pair of second elongated members 743 that are relatively rotatably supported at the upper end of the first elongated member 742, and an upper end of the second elongated member 742. The distal end adjustment member 744 has a guide elongated hole 744a that extends linearly so as to be guided.

The proximal member 741, the first elongated member 742, and the second elongated member 743, which are configured as a pair of front and rear members, are designed to have the same length in the longitudinal direction and the same support position.

The proximal end member 741 includes a transmission protrusion 741a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of the member on the rear plane side toward the back side, and a circular protrusion 741a that protrudes from the back surface where the cylindrical protrusion 741a protrudes toward the front side. A guided protrusion 741b that projects in a columnar shape and is inserted through the member on the front layer plane side, and a lower end of the first elongated member 742 that projects in a columnar shape from the upper end of the member on the rear layer plane side to the front side. A guided protrusion 741c is inserted into a through hole drilled in the guide portion 741c.

The transmitted protrusion 741a is arranged in a guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotary plate 730 and is configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotary plate 730 rotates.

The guided protrusion 741b and the guided protrusion 741c are arranged in the guide hole 725 of the functional plate part 725 and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof. Note that the guided protrusion 741b is arranged in the radial elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

The first elongated member 742 is relatively rotatably supported on a longitudinal axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding from the lower end of the member on the rear layer plane side toward the front side. A guided protrusion 742a is provided which is inserted into the upper end of the proximal end member 741 on the side.

The guided protrusion 742a is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b of the functional plate part 725, and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof (see FIG. 55).

The second elongated member 743 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the front side from the upper end of the member on the front layer plane side. A pair of cylinders protrudes from the upper end of the member on the layer plane side to a point flush with the front end surface of the member on the front layer plane side with a diameter about the width of the member, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the tip of the protrusion toward the front side. It includes a support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from a substantially middle position of the member on the rear plane side toward the back side.

The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the rear claw portion 734a of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and receives a load directed inward in the radial direction due to this guidance (see FIG. 56).

The tip adjustment member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed on the front side, and has a length extending along the linear direction with a width that allows the support protrusion 743a of the second elongated member 743 to be inserted. It includes a pair of guide elongated holes 744a formed in the shape of holes, and a second guided protrusion 744b protruding in a cylindrical shape from the central position in the longitudinal direction toward the back side.

The second guided protrusion 744b has a protruding tip disposed in front of the protruding tip of the first guided protrusion 743b, and is guided by the front claw part 734b of the extending claw part 734 of the rotary plate 730, Due to this guidance, a load directed inward in the radial direction is applied (see FIG. 57).

The second guided protrusion 744b has a protruding tip that is not circular in shape, and is inclined as the rotary plate 730, which has its rotation center on the transmitted protrusion 741a side, is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view. The surface on the side facing the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) (the left surface in FIG. 59(b)) has an inclined surface in a chamfered manner.

Due to this inclined surface, even if the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is slightly deviated in the front-rear direction, the resistance at the time of contact with the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730 can be avoided from becoming excessive. I can do it.

As shown in FIG. 58(b) and FIG. 59(b), when the telescopic displacement members 740 are arranged collectively and when they are arranged separately, the telescopic displacement members 740 are arranged at the tip of the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement members 740. Support protrusions 743a are arranged at both outer ends or inner ends of the guide slot 744a of the tip adjustment member 744. Thereby, the arrangement (longitudinal arrangement) of the tip adjustment member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the tip adjustment member 744, extends from the fastening portion to the front side, and extends toward the front side from the extended tip toward the side that covers the telescopic displacement member 740. A generally triangular member in front view, which has a shaped portion that extends from the extending tip parallel to the plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) on which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced. be.

The shielding design member 760 is configured to hide the decorative member 752 on the back side from visibility by pasting colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheets on the front and back sides, and at the right end part, a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet is attached. An extended plate portion 761 is provided which extends in a plate shape to the right in such a manner that a plate surface is formed.

Like the main body of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate part 761 has a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet pasted on its front and back sides, and is a shield placed on the right side (next in the clockwise direction) when viewed from the front. It is arranged to face the back side of the left end of the design member 760, and is configured to abut when the shielding design member 760 shifts toward the back side, thereby suppressing the shift.

The arrangement of the extension plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be shifted toward the back side of the main body of the shielding design member 760. In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion and the extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 move in the direction of displacement (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. It is possible to avoid contact (collision) along the

This effect becomes more pronounced as the extension plate portion 761 is arranged farther away from the main body of the shielding design member 760, but at least the dimension that the shielding design member 760 is allowed to shift in the front and back direction of the shielding design member 760 is. By arranging the extension plate portion 761 apart from each other, the extension plate portion 761 and the main body of the shielding design member 760 are brought into contact along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. (Collision) can be avoided.

Moreover, the shape of the front surface of the extending plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface, or may be formed as a flat surface with the normal line directed in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, it is configured as an inclined surface that moves closer to the back side as the distance from the shielding design member 760 increases.

As a result, for example, the shielding design members 760 are assembled with the shielding design member 760 on the right side of the uppermost shielding design member 760 being slightly shifted toward the back side with respect to the uppermost shielding design member 760. Even when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the position (see FIG. 63), the position of the shielding design member 760 on the right side in the front view is changed along the front slope of the extension plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760. Misalignment can be corrected. Thereby, the relative positions of the adjacent shielding design members 760 in the front and back direction can be easily aligned.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is such that the member supporting the right side of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the rear layer plane. , a member supporting the left side of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the intermediate parts of the pair of second elongated members 743 intersect in a manner that they are overlapped back and forth, so that the left side becomes the right side. In comparison, the shielding design member 760 is configured to be easily tilted to a posture in which it is disposed toward the front.

Since the structure of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side is the right side (the side where the extension plate part 761 is formed). In comparison, it is configured so that it is more likely to tilt toward the front position.

By tilting the posture of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the back side of the shielding design member 760 that is disposed opposite to the extension plate portion 761 side. By displacing the shielding design member 760 to the collective arrangement position in this state, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 move in the displacement direction (displacement plane ) can be avoided.

In the state where five sets of shielding design members 760 are arranged together (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are placed next to each other on the left (adjacent in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 suppresses displacement toward the back side.

According to this configuration, the extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 is prevented from shifting toward the front side by abutting the shielding design member 760 on the right (adjacent in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). Therefore, by arranging the five sets of shielding design members 760 to face each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress positional displacement in the front-rear direction for each of the five sets of shielding design members 760.

With reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the interlocking movement between the rotary plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described. 60 and 61 are front views of the functional board section 720. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotary plate 730 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and an example of the arrangement of the external shapes of the transmitted protrusion 741a, guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is illustrated. Ru.

FIG. 60 shows a state in which the telescoping members 740 are arranged in groups (see FIG. 58), and FIG. 61 shows a state in which the rotary plate 730 is rotated approximately 120 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the telescoping members 740 are separated. (See FIG. 59).

In this embodiment, the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the guided protrusion 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 as the rotary plate 730 rotates. The state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes by being displaced in a direction approaching the rotation axis of the member 730 .

In this state change, the guided protrusions 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the functional plate section 720, so the shielding design member 760 is stretched toward the outer diameter side with reference to the positions of the guided protrusions 741c and 742a. Although it is configured to be able to be displaced so as to be exposed, the details will be described later.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 53 and 54. The light emitting device 750 includes an illumination board 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 disposed on the front side of the illumination board 751 and made of a light-transmitting resin material. An opening is formed in the center of the illumination board 751, and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape protruding toward the front side, so that an area for disposing the drive motor MT3 can be secured.

The illumination board 751 has an opening 751a formed in the center. A drive motor MT3 and electrical wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged inside the opening 751a. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and electric wiring, but this limits the area in which the LED as a light emitting means can be placed, so from the viewpoint of light emitting performance, the smaller the opening 751a is, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and electric wiring. desirable.

Since no LED can be provided in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. In contrast, this embodiment deals with this by dividing the configuration of the decorative member 752 into two.

That is, the decorative member 752 includes a light transmitting member 752a made of a colorless and light transmitting resin material, and a light transmitting member 752a that is assembled from the front side to the light transmitting member 752a and has a mirror-like visible surface (for example, coated with silver plating). ) a mirror surface member 752b.

An opening is formed in the center of the light transmitting member 752a, and the center of the mirror member 752b is closed, so that the mirror member 752b can be placed at the position where the drive motor MT3 is placed when viewed from the front. . As a result, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the player can see reflected light from light irradiation from other directions (for example, light irradiation from the hemispherical illumination device 613). , it is possible to prevent the front side portion of the opening 751a from being visually recognized as dark.

The vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 will be explained. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. Note that illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted in FIGS. 62 to 64 for ease of understanding.

62 shows the effect standby state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the descending state where the effect member 700 has descended from the effect standby state, and FIG. 64 shows the extended state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600. Illustrated.

Note that the state in the middle of descent shown in FIG. 63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half of the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the performance standby state to the extended state. In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the performance standby state, the cylindrical protrusion 654 is arranged at the boundary between the transmission section 624a and the margin section 624b of the upper arm member 620.
That is, the state in which the cylindrical protrusion 654 immediately enters the transmission section 624a and is placed at a position where the downward displacement of the presentation member 700 can be started is the presentation standby state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600.

This performance standby state suggests, for example, that the performance member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is displaced downward by the performance member including the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) disposed in the pachinko machine 10. This is a state that can be switched according to the execution of the suggested effect, and before the suggested effect is executed, the cylindrical protrusion 654 is arranged on the side of the margin 624b.

As described above, the margin portion 624b is a shaped portion that extends continuously from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and in the state shown in FIG. 606 in the front-back direction.

Therefore, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed toward the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and does not function as a load for rotating the transmission gear 650. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated. Displacement of the presentation member 700 can be regulated.

Note that even if the above-mentioned effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is a effect mode in which the effect member 700 is not ultimately displaced downward, in this embodiment, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is placed in the effect standby state. It is controlled to change the state to .

In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the presentation member 700 will not be displaced downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in front view in order to return the cylindrical protrusion 654 to the margin 624b side. Drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

Thereby, when a performance suggesting that the performance member 700 moves downward is executed, it is possible to avoid predicting the subsequent performance regarding the performance member 700 due to a difference in the drive sound of the drive motor MT2. .

The allowance portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when rotating the drive motor MT2 in the direction of raising the presentation member 700. That is, in the driving mode in which the effect member 700 is raised, the effect member 700 is already placed at the displacement end position on the upper end side in the state shown in FIG. The displacement is simply sliding along 624b.

No matter where the columnar protrusion 654 is placed in the margin 624b, there is no difference in the function of regulating the displacement of the upper arm member 620. Therefore, it is allowed that the setting accuracy of the stop position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is lowered, so that the rotation allows the transmission gear 650 to be stopped immediately when the detected plate part 655 enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotational speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) when upwardly displacing the presentation member 700 can be set to a large value without being limited to the speed. Thereby, the rising speed of the effect member 700 can be set high.

In addition, even if the rising speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the cylindrical protrusion 654, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 will be directed in the radial direction of the transmission gear 650. Therefore, it does not function to displace the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the rotation direction. Therefore, even if the rising speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted at the position where it contacts the cylindrical protrusion 654.

Further, even if the rising speed is excessive, the upward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is regulated by the upper arm member 620, but details will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the left-right distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the left-right distance between the ends arranged in the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601) changes from the performance standby state. It is set larger from the mid-descent state to the extended state compared to the mid-descent state.

In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 as the effect member 700 moves downward, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. It is possible to make the player visually perceive as if the displacement speed of the presentation member 700 is increasing rapidly, and the presentation effect of the vertical displacement of the presentation member 700 is can be improved.

65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the production member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 65, for ease of understanding, FIG. 65(b) is also shown as a diagram in which illustration of the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 is omitted.

65(a) and 65(b) illustrate the effect standby state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, FIG. 66 illustrates the descending state where the effect member 700 has descended from the effect standby state, and FIG. 67 illustrates, The extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the performance standby state, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. That is, in the present embodiment, before the performance indicating that the performance member 700 is displaced downward is executed, the drive motor MT2 is stopped while the detected plate portion 655 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. At this point, the drive motor MT2 is drive-controlled in accordance with the execution of the above-mentioned suggestion effect, and the drive motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. The enlargement/reduction unit 600 is controlled to change its state to a production standby state.

Conversely, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven in the direction of upwardly displacing the production member 700, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. By controlling to release the transmission gear 650, it is possible to stop the transmission gear 650 at a position that has even slightly entered the margin 624b from the position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the performance standby state, and as described above, the upper arm member 620 , displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be regulated.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is not immediately stopped, but regardless of whether the drive speed is maintained or decelerated. The driving of the drive motor MT2 is controlled to be stopped after a time delay sufficient for the position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 to be located at the end of the margin portion 624b.

This allows the transmission gear 650 to be stopped at a position where the cylindrical protrusion 654 is located at the end of the margin 624b. In this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 can be inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21(a)). Note that even if the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly shifted, since the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15(c)), the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the regulated hole 657. can do.

The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise in rear view from the state shown in FIG. It is set at a position that partially overlaps with the regulation hole 657.

Therefore, for example, after pushing the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67 to bring the displacement regulating device 180 into the regulating state (see FIG. 15(c)), the transmission gear 650 is Even if the rotation of the transmission gear 650 is controlled in the direction of upwardly displacing the presentation member 700 through drive control, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is obstructed by the cylindrical portion 183, and the state shown in FIG. 65(a) is not reached.

The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines that there is a displacement defect in the transmission gear 650 because the detected plate portion 655 does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven. Can be done.

Based on this determination, it is possible to notify the abnormality by displaying an error message indicating that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is defective in displacement on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). The store clerk can be made aware that the displacement regulating device 180 may remain in the regulating state.

As a result, information regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be conveyed to the clerk at the gaming machine store by utilizing notifications such as error displays regarding the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin equal to the length of the margin portion 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a large value. If the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when displacing the upper arm member 700 upward is too high, the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 will be too high, causing the lower arm member 630 to displace the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the gravity direction (upward direction), so downward acceleration is always applied to the lower arm member 630. Therefore, when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620, the vertical load at the contact position can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65(b), since the upper side shape of the lower flesh portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 The contact area when the upper arm member 620 collides with the upper arm member 620 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a large load being locally applied to the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630, and it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or bent.

In this way, the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently wide contact area, so that the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when displacing the presentation member 700 upward is excessive. Therefore, even if the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is regulated by the cylindrical protrusion 654 as described above will cause the lower arm to move upward. The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the effect standby state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state by the driving force of the drive motor MT2 against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. corresponds to the situation.

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 700 auxiliary protrusions 712 are disposed at the ends of the arcuate holes 634 of the lower arm member 630.

Thereby, the degree to which the lower arm member 630 holds the presentation member 700 (the degree to which the posture is stabilized) can be changed. That is, the lower arm member 630 can hold the performance member 700 to a higher degree in the performance standby state or the extended state compared to the state in the middle of descent.

In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation around the cylindrical protrusion 711. For example, if the auxiliary protrusion 712 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and displacement in the rotational direction is not restricted (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 rotates around the right cylindrical protrusion 711 in the rotational direction. Posture may change.

In this embodiment, the production member 700 is supported by a pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left cylindrical projection 711, but in the direction of rotation around the right cylindrical projection 711. When the presentation member 700 changes its posture, the left cylindrical protrusion 711 is displaced in the lateral direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, in the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, there is a possibility that the posture change of the production member 700 is not restricted by the lower arm member 630 and may occur visibly, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the extended state, when the presentation member 700 changes its posture in the direction of rotation around the right cylindrical protrusion 711, the direction of displacement of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 is downward. The lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 630. Thereby, the posture change of the presentation member 700 can be effectively restricted by the lower arm member 630, and it is possible to prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture to a discernible extent.

In addition, in the extended state, since the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed on the right side are disposed at the end positions of the circular arc-shaped hole 732, the contact between the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the circular arc-shaped hole 732 causes the right side to It is possible to prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear around the cylindrical protrusion 711 . Note that the posture change in the counterclockwise direction in rear view is restricted because the displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 is along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630, as described above.

Similarly, in the extended state, since the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the terminal positions of the circular arc-shaped hole 732, the contact between the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the circular arc-shaped hole 732 causes the left side It is possible to prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear around the cylindrical protrusion 711 . Note that the posture change in the clockwise direction in rear view is restricted because the displacement direction of the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is along the longitudinal direction of the right lower arm member 630, as described above.

Furthermore, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the attitude of the presentation member 700 in the rotational direction (rotation direction centered on an axis extending in the front-back direction) but also in the tilting direction (rotation direction centered on an axis extending in the left-right direction). It also functions to suppress posture changes and posture changes in the lateral direction (rotation direction around an axis extending in the vertical direction).

For example, the lower arm member 630 and the production member 700 are not connected only by the pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions 711, but also by an auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged above the cylindrical protrusion 711, Since the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700 can be connected in three positions (up and down) by being connected by the auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed on the lower left and right outer sides, the posture change in the direction of tilting of the presentation member 700 can be prevented. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed above the cylindrical protrusion 711 is disposed in the middle of the elongated main body of the lower arm member 630 (on the base side of the arcuate hole 634), the tilting of the production member 700 is prevented. The elongated main body portion of the lower arm member 630 can withstand the load caused by the change in posture in the direction.

Furthermore, the pressing member PC1 is disposed on the elongated main body of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the pressing member PC1 is lowered by the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of arm member 630 is restricted.

In this way, when a load due to a change in the posture of the production member 700 is applied to the elongated main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives the load in the direction of deflection along the elongated direction, the lower arm member 630 By using the configuration that restricts displacement, it is possible to firmly prevent changes in the posture of the presentation member 700.

Further, as described above, the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (lower side) of the cylindrical protrusion 711 can increase the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, so that the effect member 700 can be lowered. It is possible to suppress posture changes in the lateral swing direction with respect to the arm member 630.

In this embodiment, the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the vertical center of the plate-like main body 710 of the presentation member 700. In addition, in this embodiment, the center of gravity of the effect member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

This makes it possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the presentation member 700 changes its posture in such a manner that it falls forward centering on the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630, and also to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-back direction. It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the presentation member 700 changes its posture centering on the connecting portion in such a manner that it falls backward.

That is, even if there is a possibility that multiple types of posture changes may occur in the presentation member 700, the front-back displacement of the presentation member 700 is suppressed regardless of which of the plurality of posture changes occurs. Therefore, it can respond to any change in posture.

This prevents the performance member 700 from rubbing against or colliding with the division member 310 even when the front-to-back distance between the performance member 700 and the division member 310 (see FIG. 13(a)) is narrowed. Since this can be avoided, damage to the presentation member 700, deterioration of the designed portion, and reduction in visibility (reduction in transparency) due to damage or scratches on the partition member 310 can be made difficult to occur.

In a state where the presentation member 700 is disposed at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 comes into contact with the shaped portion of the main body member 601 in the rotational direction, and further rotation is restricted. Therefore, even if drive motor MT2 continues to be driven, excessive displacement of upper arm member 620, lower arm member 630, and production member 700 can be prevented by simply accumulating driving force in transmission gear 650.

In this embodiment, in the extended state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force that slightly exceeds the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the effect member 700 from bouncing upward and displacing. It's in control.

Thereby, the presentation member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while setting the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 to be large (for example, to a size that allows the presentation member 700 to be lifted).

On the other hand, when starting to displace the effect member 700 upward, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so it is possible to avoid excessive load from being applied to the drive motor MT2.

For example, when starting the upward displacement, after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the effect member 700 should not start to be displaced upward due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the driving force of the drive motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the driving of the drive motor MT2 starts), the driving force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the displacement has started.

Thereby, the load placed on the drive motor MT2 can be reduced compared to the case where the production member 700 in a stopped state is upwardly displaced.

65 to 67, changes in the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK1 passed through the lower arm member 630 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and the shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electrical wiring DK1 is illustrated with hidden lines. be done.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), the electrical wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid part 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the circular arc hole 634, and is guided inside the wiring guide member 714, It passes through the through hole 713 to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, tension in the electrical wiring DK1 that may occur due to relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the production member 700 is offset by the extra length of the electrical wiring DK1 arranged in advance inside the wiring guide member 714. I try to do that. Thereby, the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 can be completed near the wiring guide member 714, so that displacement of the electric wiring DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 or inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

The shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed into an arc shape having a center on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load that the electrical wiring DK1 receives from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

In addition, the shaped portion in which the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1. For example, when displacing the effect member 700 upward from the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shaped portion in which the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is the electrical wiring DK1. The arrangement is such that the DK1 can be pushed into the wiring guide member 714 side.

Thereby, the electrical wiring DK1 can be stably taken in and taken out from the wiring guide member 714, and the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be stably changed.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed in the arcuate hole 634, which is disposed on the front side of the thin lid part 636 and is mostly hidden by the thin lid part 636, is in an overhanging state. 67).

The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided into the arcuate hole 634 and at the same time is a fastening portion used to connect the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700. Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the production member 700, it is necessary to screw a fastening screw into the auxiliary protrusion 712 (or remove it).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or disassembled) can be limited to the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Thereby, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. Further, it is possible to prevent the production member 700 and other constituent members from being damaged as a result of performing assembly or maintenance with the production member 700 being placed at a halfway position.

Next, the displacement (enlargement/contraction displacement) of the telescopic displacement member 740 of the presentation member 700 due to a change in state will be explained. In this embodiment, the degree of expansion/contraction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be changeable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700.

68 is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 68 and 69, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

68 and 69 illustrate a state in which the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the process of being lowered. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the middle of descending, the effecting member 700 is not controlled to be enlarged until the telescopic displacement member 740 is dispersed at its maximum diameter. It is controlled to allow enlarged displacement.

In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the size of the presentation member 700 from becoming excessively large when viewed from the front, so the amount of attitude change allowed for the presentation member 700 from the perspective of avoiding contact with the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 22). can be made larger.

In the middle of the enlarged displacement of the presentation member 700, the decorative member 752 is partially covered by the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered). As for the arrangement of the decorative member 752 in front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position (gap position) not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b is arranged at a position where it is not covered by the effect member 700, and the light transmitting member 752b is arranged at a position where it is not covered by the effect member 700. 752a is placed at a position other than the position where it is visually recognized.

This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the light emitted from the LEDs etc. arranged on the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53) through the light transmitting member 752a, and also to improve the visibility of the light transmitted through the light transmitting member 752a. By reflecting the light reflected on the back side of the member 760 by the mirror member 752b, the presentation effect of the mirror member 752b can be improved.

For example, when the mirror surface member 752b is not irradiated with light from the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the mirror surface member 752b is colored with the ground color of the shielding design member 760 (in this embodiment, red). can be reflected and made visible to the player.

On the other hand, when emitting light from the LED of the illumination board 751, the color reflected from the mirror surface member 752b and visually recognized is a mixture of the background color of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light emitted from the LED. It can be made in different colors. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror member 752b can be changed by light passing through a portion other than the mirror member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752a).

Note that the control mode is not limited at all. For example, after stopping the shielding design member 760 in the state shown in FIG. 68, it may be controlled to return to the assembled state, or the driving direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. The shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction by switching between forward and reverse directions in small increments.

When controlling the shielding design member 760 to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In the present embodiment, in the state of expanded displacement up to the halfway position, as shown in FIG. 744 is set at an intermediate position between the guide elongated holes 744a. Thereby, the tip adjustment member 744 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

While making it possible to achieve such a displacement, when the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a group or when the shielding design members 760 are expanded and displaced to the maximum in the radial direction, the support protrusion 743a disposed at the tip of the second elongated member 743 By arranging the positions at both ends of the guide elongated hole 744a of the tip adjustment member 744, the circumferential arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be returned to its original position (see FIGS. 58(b) and 59(b)). ).

Further, the intermediate position that is allowed as the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the position may be slightly shifted from the collective arrangement state, or it may be a position slightly before the position at which the maximum displacement occurs.

Here, in a state where the extended plate portion 761 is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the assembled arrangement state (for example, a position where the extended plate portion 761 is visually recognized as overlapping with the shielding design member 760 arranged oppositely when viewed from the front), the extended plate portion 761 is Since the portions 761 play the role of filling the gaps between the shielding design members 760, it is possible to visually recognize to the players that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

In this embodiment, like the main body of the shielding design member 760, a red reflective sheet is attached to the extension plate part 761, so the red color of the extension plate part 761 is visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even if the red color is the color of the extension plate portion 761 or the shielding design member 760, it may be difficult to distinguish.

Note that, unlike the present embodiment, in a state where the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced to a position slightly shifted from the assembled arrangement state by painting the extension plate portion 761 in another color (for example, gold), etc. The extension plate portions 761 that are visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 may be made to stand out.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which the light transmitting member 752a is formed from a colorless and light transmitting resin material, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

In this case, even if the shielding design members 760 are displaced beyond the overlap margin with the extension plate portions 761 from the assembled arrangement state, the light transmitting members 752a that are visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 are not shielded. Since the shielding design members 760 are visually recognized in red like the design members 760, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the shielding design members 760 are at least partially connected to each other.

On the other hand, when emitting light from the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting member 752a visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light to make it stand out, and the light emitting effect is The performance effect can be improved.

70 is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 70 and 71, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

70 and 71, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is shown in an extended state and the effect member 700 is shown in an enlarged state. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the extended state, the effect member 700 is controlled to be able to expand and displace until the telescopic displacement member 740 is dispersed at its maximum diameter.

Therefore, the size of the presentation member 700 when viewed from the front becomes maximum, and the amount of change in posture allowed for the presentation member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 22) becomes the minimum. Note that the measures for suppressing changes in the posture of the presentation member 700 are as described above.

In the enlarged state of the presentation member 700, the shielding design member 760 is retracted from the decorative member 752 when viewed from the front. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the appearance reflected on the mirror member 752b can be changed from the case where the presentation member 700 is disposed at a position midway through the enlarged displacement.

That is, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the background color of the shielding design member 760, and to make the background color (silver in this embodiment) of the mirror surface member 752b easily visible to the player. Therefore, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is expanded and displaced, the decorative member 752 can be visually recognized even in a control mode in which the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53) continues to emit light of the same color. The color of the light visible to the player can be changed over time.

To be more specific, for example, when white light is irradiated from the illuminated board 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visible near the start of expansion, while the color of the shielding design member 760 is visible as the expansion is displaced. The color of the character 760 becomes weaker (the range narrows), and the background color (silver) of the mirror member 752b becomes easier to see at the end position of the enlarged displacement. Thereby, the color of the light visually recognized by the player can be changed without changing the color of the emitted light.

In this embodiment, the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 are not controlled in a continuous manner, but are controlled in a state where the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed. , and is controlled to execute an enlarged displacement of the effect member 700.

That is, the vertical displacement of the effect members 700 is controlled to be executable only when the effect members 700 are arranged in a group. This can prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with other components such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

In addition, after considering the avoidance of collisions with other structural members and configuring the structure so that problems with displacement do not occur due to collisions with other structural members, the enlarged displacement may be It may be controlled as much as possible.

The radial reduction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. 72(a), FIG. 72(b), FIG. 73, FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing the reduction displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 74(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as seen in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). It is a diagram.

72(a), FIG. 72(b), FIG. 73, FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(a), illustration of the plate-like main body 710 is omitted for easy understanding, and FIG. 72 is used as a reference. , the rotating plate 730 is shown rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. In FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), illustration of the rotating plate 730b is further omitted.

FIG. 72(a) shows a state in which the shielding design members 760 of the presentation member 700 are dispersed at the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. A state in which it has been expanded and displaced to an intermediate position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 72(a), the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the small diameter arc portion 733a of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c, and in the state shown in FIG. 72(b), , the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is disposed in the middle of the connecting portion 733c of the rotary plate 730.

FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side has started contacting the rear claw portion 734a of the rotary plate 730, and FIG. A state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 is guided by the rear claw part 734a of the rotary plate 730 and reaches the position just before the collective arrangement state is illustrated.

Since the influence of gravity is different between the members arranged on the upper side and the members arranged on the lower side, the displacement mode of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 is different from that of the member arranged on the upper side and the member arranged on the lower side. It differs depending on the parts.

As shown in FIG. 73, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 disposed on the upper side are placed close to the rotating plate 730 side due to their own weight, while the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side rotates due to its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotary plate 730 to an extent allowed by the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted protrusion 741a.

This hanging portion is lifted by the load from the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the assembled position. Therefore, the timing at which the five shielding design members 760 reach the assembled arrangement state is not simultaneous, and at least the upper three shielding design members 760 are earlier than the lower two shielding design members 760.

Thereby, the performance members 700 can be stably displaced to the collective arrangement state. That is, when the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 forcefully reach the assembled arrangement state, so that the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first. 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates in the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause early breakage.

On the other hand, in the case where the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, and then the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in a collective arrangement state as in this embodiment, Since the self-weight is generated in a direction opposing the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, the momentum of colliding with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue due to collision between the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

In FIG. 74, the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary between the large-diameter arc portion 733b of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c. Immediately after this, the telescopic displacement member 740 is pushed and cut by the rear claw portion 734a, and is brought into the assembled state. On the other hand, the second guided protrusion 744b of the tip adjustment member 744 is arranged apart from the front side claw part 734b.

In FIG. 75, a collective arrangement state of the effect members 700 is illustrated. That is, the diagram shows a state in which the rotary plate 730 has been rotated counterclockwise in rear view to a terminal position where the columnar protrusion 728 of the functional plate part 720 is disposed at the end of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730.

FIG. 76 is a sectional view of the effect member 700 taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. As shown in FIG. 76, in the collective arrangement state of the presentation members 700, the surface on the central axis side of the rear claw portion 734a abuts the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the diameter of the telescopic displacement member 740 Displacement in the outward direction is restricted.

In addition, the surface of the front claw portion 734b on the central axis side comes into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, thereby restricting the radially outward displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b come into contact with each other in the radial direction with the front and rear width in the protruding direction, so that the arrangement of the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744 can be adjusted. It can stabilize your posture.

Further, the front surface of the tip adjustment member 744 is configured to be slidable on the rear surface of the extension plate portion 726.
During this sliding process, the protruding tip of the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 comes into contact with the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotation direction. (The closer the clustered arrangement state is, the more it is inclined so as to protrude toward the front side.) Therefore, the inclined surface 734c can apply a load toward the front side to the second guided protrusion 744b.

As a result, in the configuration in which the tip adjustment member 744 is sandwiched between the extension plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730, as the rotary plate 730 rotates and the production members 700 approach the assembled arrangement state, the tip The tip adjustment member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in such a manner that the adjustment member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extension plate portion 726.

Therefore, while preventing the resistance generated by the rotation of the rotary plate 730 from increasing excessively, the pinching load is applied to the tip adjustment member 744 in the front-rear direction in a manner that gradually increases, thereby improving the front-rear position and posture of the tip adjustment member 744. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the position and posture of the shielding design members 760 in the front-rear direction, and the shielding design members 760 can be arranged in close contact with each other without gaps in the assembled state.

With reference to FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), it will be explained that the attitude inclination of the shielding design member 760 can be corrected by the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b. The configurations of the shielding design members 760 are all the same, and the configurations of the telescopic displacement members 740 that displace the shielding design members 760 are also common.

As described above, the shielding design member 760 is located on the side where the extension plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59(a)) is formed in the width direction (in the case of the shielding design member 760 disposed at the top, the right side, FIG. 74 (b)) is configured to be easily inclined in posture so that it is placed on the rear side compared to the opposite side.

This is due to the manner in which the second elongated member 743 is formed, and this attitude inclination also occurs in the tip adjustment member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the posture of the tip adjustment member 744, the tip position of the second guided protrusion 744b is lower than the tip position of the first guided protrusion 743b (the protrusion direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift toward the clockwise direction (left side in the case of the shielding design member 760 placed at the top, see FIG. 74(b)).

On the other hand, in the rotary plate 730, the extending claw portion 734 is disposed opposite to the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and is arranged counterclockwise in the rear view with respect to the second guided protrusion 744b. Rotationally displaces so that a load can be applied.

That is, for example, when the inner diameter side surface of the front claw portion 734b or the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) comes into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b, the second guided protrusion 744b is Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction in rear view, the degree of inclination of the postures of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). Thereby, it is possible to easily eliminate the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the position where the presentation members 700 are arranged together.

The load on the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. 75. Therefore, in the process of state changes of the presentation member 700 shown in chronological order from FIG. 72 to FIG. 75, until the shielding design member 760 is placed at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the allowable displacement range (see FIG. 74). , the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, and then a change in attitude can be caused to eliminate (correct) the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760.

That is, by maintaining the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, the main body of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate part 761 come into contact (collision). ), while eliminating (correcting) the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 after the shielding design members 760 have come close to each other, the shielding design member 760 can be easily avoided. The plate portions disposed at the forefront of the shielding design members 760 can be arranged flush, making it easier to create a sense of unity of the shielding design members 760 in the assembled arrangement state.

Note that the state shown in FIG. 74(b) is illustrated as a state in which the positional deviation of the shielding design member 760 has occurred to a maximum. Furthermore, the configuration is such that a posture shift opposite to the posture shift shown in FIG. 74(b) is unlikely to occur due to the front-back arrangement of the second elongated member 743. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the extension plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face each other.

Further, an auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) disposed on the opposite side of the extending plate portion 726 is configured to be able to come into contact with the reduction side wall portion when the tip adjustment member 744 is enlarged or reduced. Since the auxiliary protrusions 727 are formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the extension plate part 726, the tip adjustment member 744 is adjusted by coming into contact with the left and right ends of the tip adjustment member 744 that has reached the reduction side end of the displacement range. Posture deviations can be corrected.

As a result, not only can the posture be corrected by engaging with other shielding design members 760, but also the posture can be stabilized when the tip adjustment member 744 reaches the reduced side end of the displacement range. can.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described firing performance unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as performance devices that enliven the game. Next, the displacement rotation unit 800 will be explained.

The displacement and rotation unit 800 is a pair of units that are arranged symmetrically and are configured with mutually symmetrical shapes. Therefore, below, the configuration of the left displacement and rotation unit 800 will be described, and the description of the right displacement and rotation unit 800 will be as follows. Omitted. In addition, in the following description, FIG. 5 will be referred to as appropriate.

77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 77 and 78, the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated.

79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 79 and 80, the horizontal slide member 840 is shown in an assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement rotation unit 800 includes a base plate portion 810 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and a metal plate portion 810 fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A rod MB2, a vertical slide member 820 through which the metal rod MB2 is inserted and configured to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a drive that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the vertical slide member 820 and fastened and fixed to the base plate part 810. A transmission member 830 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and the metal rod MB3 inserted through and configured to be slidable in the left and right direction. A transmission means 860 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT4 to the horizontal slide member 840 via the vertical slide member 820 as the vertical slide member 820 is vertically displaced; A wiring arm member 870 is rotatably fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 at the upper end position on the metal rod MB2 side of the vertical slide member 820, and a wiring guide member 880 that guides the wiring arm member 870 and the electric wiring. .

The base plate part 810 has a pair of both-end fixing parts 811 on which the metal rod MB2 is arranged, a slide guide part 812 formed so as to be able to guide a transmission member 830 arranged on the front side, and a long length on the back side. A transmission guide section 813 formed in a groove shape and capable of guiding the cylindrical protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide section 813. A falling-off prevention plate 814 is provided on the back side to prevent falling off.

The vertical slide member 820 includes a flat plate part 821, a wall part 822 extending from the edge of the flat plate part 821 to the back side, and a circular movement from the approximate center of the area surrounded by the wall part 822 to the back side. A cylindrical protrusion 823 that protrudes in a columnar shape, omitted portions 824a and 824b that are large enough to allow insertion of a connector portion of electrical wiring and in which the formation of a wall portion is omitted, and a left end portion of the flat plate portion 821. A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 are formed in a cylindrical shape (or a cylindrical member is provided) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a normal metal rod insertion portion through which the metal rod MB3 can be inserted is formed at the upper and lower central portions of the flat plate portion 821. A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 are formed (or a cylindrical member is arranged) and are fastened and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 near the ends of the metal rod insertion portions 826 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. A falling-off prevention member 827 that can be configured to be able to fall off, a shaft support 828 that is formed in a columnar shape to protrude from the back side of the flat plate portion 821 and that can pivotally support the second-stage pinion 861, and A support protrusion 829 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the left side in FIG. 79 is provided.

The wall portion 822 is a portion that forms a region on the inside in which the electrical wiring disposed between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced, and is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electrical wiring.
The omitted portions 824a and 824b formed as discontinuous portions of the wall portion 822 are composed of a first omitted portion 824a formed as an opening, and a second omitted portion 824b formed as a recessed portion opened to the back side.

The metal rod insertion part 825 has an upper part extending in a plate shape toward the back side, and has an upper detection sensor SC8 and a lower detection sensor fastened and fixed to the base member 810 with the detection groove facing the front side of the base member 810. A detection target plate portion 825a configured to be disposed in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

The transmission member 830 includes a main body 831 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a female thread formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 on the upper side of the main body 831. An insertion hole 832 is formed to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that can be screwed into the plate, and a plate portion in which the insertion hole 832 is formed, and the rear surface is located in an area constituted by the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It includes a lid-shaped part 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear part 834 in which gear teeth are formed linearly in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body part 831.

The cylindrical protrusion 823 has both the role of a part into which the fastening screw inserted into the above-mentioned insertion hole 832 is screwed, and the role of a winding center of the electrical wiring, as will be described later.

The linear gear portion 834 is meshed with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, as the drive motor MT4 is rotationally controlled, the transmission member 830 is moved up and down in the vertical direction. This causes the vertical slide member 820 to move up and down.

81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 includes a main body plate member 841 formed in a substantially circular plate shape through which a metal rod MB3 is inserted and whose displacement is restricted in the left-right direction, and a rear surface of the main body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper side and constitutes a guide route for electrical wiring, a circular member 847 that is disposed on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and has a circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and the circular member 847 An illumination board 850 disposed between the main body plate member 841, an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and a circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. a wing-like member 854 rotatably supported by the shaft; and an intermediary member 857 that is fitted into the opening of the wing-like member 854 from the front side in order to match the center opening diameter of the wing-like member 854 with the opening diameter of the collar member C8. , and a central design member 858 in which a columnar member having an outer diameter that can be inserted into the center opening of the intermediary member 857 projects from the back side.

The main body plate member 841 has a drive motor MT5 fastened and fixed to the back side, a drive gear MG5 thereof arranged on the front side, a rod arrangement part 842 where the metal rod MB3 is arranged, and a bar arrangement part 842 on the lower side of the rod arrangement part 842. A rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are carved along the left-right direction is provided.

The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding the horizontal displacement of the electric wiring, and is formed in a shape that allows the electric wiring to detour. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing against other structural members, but the details will be described later.

The circular member 847 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and is configured in such a manner that a wing-like member 854 and a drive gear MG5, which are formed so as to be able to mesh with each other, are assembled from different front and rear directions.

The circular member 847 includes a cup-shaped receiving portion 848 that is recessed toward the back side and has a size that can receive the wing-like member 854, and a cylindrical receiving portion 848 that protrudes from the center of the receiving portion 848 toward the front side. cylindrical protrusion 849.

The receiving part 848 includes a through-hole part 848a that is formed in a manner that the shape overlaps with a cylinder centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5. Expose to a position that is visible when viewed from the rear.

In this way, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can mesh with the drive gear MG5, and as the drive motor MT5 rotates, driving force is transmitted and the wing-like member 854 is rotationally controlled. This rotational drive of the wing-like member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the route forming member 882 is designed so that it can be performed even in the performance standby state.

The cylindrical protrusion 849 has a linear notch 849a formed at its tip. This is a shaped portion that facilitates maintaining the posture of the central design member 858 by arranging the radial protruding portion 858b of the central design member 858, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 83 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 taken along the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 7. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 will be referred to as appropriate.

The illumination board 850 includes a circular opening formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, an irregularly shaped opening 851 formed by a long opening extending above the circular opening, and the irregularly shaped opening 851. A front light emitting means 852a is composed of a plurality of LEDs arranged on the front side in the vicinity of the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs etc. are arranged on the back side at the outer diameter end of the illumination board 850. and a rear side light emitting means 852b.

The receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 can be placed inside the irregularly shaped opening 851, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-like member 854 is arranged on the back side of the irregularly shaped opening 851 in the assembled state.

The elongated hole-shaped portion extending above the irregularly shaped opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotating shaft of the drive gear MG5. Thereby, the drive gear MG5 can be brought closer to the illumination board 850, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-like member 854 and the drive gear MG5 can be easily brought into mesh with each other.

The front light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis is directed in the front-rear direction. Thereby, light can be irradiated toward the front side near the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854 along the arrow D8a.

The back light emitting means 852b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces outward in the radial direction. Thereby, light can be irradiated toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b.
By reflecting (refracting) this light toward the front side by the uneven shape formed on the back surface of the circular member 847, the light can travel toward the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854. In this embodiment, the back surface of the circular member 847 is densely formed with a plurality of elongated uneven shapes that are formed along an arc concentric with the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854, so that the player On the other hand, arcuate (or circular) light can be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the player can easily see the light without disposing an LED or the like whose optical axis faces in the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854 on the front side of the illumination board 850. The position where the light is visually recognized can be shifted to the radial direction. In other words, while using the illuminated substrate 850 having a smaller diameter than the outermost diameter of the feathered member 854, the outside of the surface on which the illuminated substrate 850 is formed, that is, the outermost diameter of the feathered member 854. The light can be visually recognized at (see FIG. 14).

Thereby, without increasing the size of the illumination board 850, it is possible to perform an effect in which light is visually recognized on the radially outer side of the wing-like member 854. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the wing-like member 854 rotates at high speed, the back side of the wing-like member 854 becomes a shadow, which may make it difficult to effectively produce light emission in this range. . In order to solve this problem, it is thought to be effective to irradiate light from the outside in the radial direction of the rotation locus of the wing-like member 854, but for this purpose, it is necessary to increase the area where the LEDs and the like are arranged. In other words, it becomes necessary to increase the area of the illuminated board, which increases the manufacturing cost of the board.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the size of the illumination board 850 is maintained smaller than the rotation locus of the wing-like member 854, and only the visible position of the light is moved radially outward from the rotation trajectory of the wing-like member 854. It can be displaced. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance without increasing the manufacturing cost.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 81 and 82. The decorative member 853 is made of a light-opaque resin material and is coaxially fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847. Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is divided by the decorative member 853, it is possible to effectively perform a production in which the appearance of the light changes between the inside and the outside of the decorative member 853, with the decorative member 853 as a boundary.

For example, by emitting blue light from the front side light emitting means 852a and emitting red light from the rear side light emitting means 852b, an area that appears to emit blue light and an area that appears to emit red light can be distinguished. can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853.

The feather-like member 854 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a circular opening 854a formed in the front-rear direction in the center thereof, and a circular opening 854a extending radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. a plurality of blade portions 854b, a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back side, and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back side at intermediate positions between adjacent blade portions 854b. and.

The circular opening 854a has an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

The wing-like member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by a drive motor MT5, but a detection sensor for detecting the attitude of the wing-like member 854 is not provided. The posture of the wing-like member 854 is controlled by the length of the drive time. In this configuration, the wing-like member 854 is configured such that the rotation axis and the center of gravity coincide with each other, and by minimizing idle rotation after the power supply to the drive motor MT5 is removed, the drive motor MT5 It is possible to reduce the deviation between the posture of the wing-like member 854 assumed by the drive time and the actual posture of the wing-like member 854. Note that the drive motor MT5 may be configured as a stepping motor so that the attitude of the wing-like member 854 can be detected.

The intermediary member 857 is formed to be able to fit into the front opening of the circular opening 854a, and the inner diameter of the opening 857a is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 849 of the circular member 847. Thereby, the intermediary member 857 can be made rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 849.

The central design member 858 includes a central protrusion 858a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center toward the back side, a radial protrusion 858b that protrudes radially outward from the central protrusion 858a, and a circular main body. A design protruding portion 858c is provided to protrude upward from the base.

The central protrusion 858a is a portion that is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 with the radial protrusion 858b entering the notch 849a, and is inserted from the back side of the circular member 847 into the female thread formed at the tip. By screwing in the inserted fastening screw, the central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847.

In addition to functioning as a design portion, the design protruding portion 858c can also function so as to come into contact with the wing-like member 854 and adjust the rotational manner of the wing-like member 854. That is, when the back surface of the design protruding portion 858c and the front surface of the wing-like member 854 are arranged close enough to each other to the extent that they rub against each other, the stopped posture of the wing-like member 854 is stabilized by utilizing the increased resistance at the time of this rubbing. can be achieved.

As a result, the drive control modes of the wing-like member 854 include a drive mode in which it continues to rotate for a long period of time, and a drive mode in which it intermittently rotates about one rotation (which produces an irregular movement at the beginning of rotation). (driving mode), it is possible to stabilize the intermittent stopping posture of the wing-like member 854 in the latter driving mode.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 79 and 80. The transmission means 860 is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and mesh with a second-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and a small-diameter pinion 861a of the second-stage pinion 861. The rack member 862 includes a rack member 862 and a fall prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from falling off the vertical slide member 820.

The second-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862, and a pinion with a longer pitch circle radius than the small-diameter pinion 861a. The small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b are integrally formed.

The rack member 862 has a gear portion 862a formed as a rack gear that is elongated from side to side and can mesh with the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861, and a gear portion 862a on the opposite side in the longitudinal direction with respect to the formation position of the gear portion 862a. A cylindrical protrusion 862b is provided that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the end toward the front side.

In this embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are configured with gear teeth of the same shape, and the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a , and the pitch circle radius of the large-diameter pinion 861b is designed to have a ratio of 9:16. Therefore, the ratio between the amount of displacement of the rack member 862 in the left and right direction and the amount of displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 in the left and right direction is maintained at 9:16.

The cylindrical protrusion 862b has an outer diameter that allows it to be placed inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810. The plate thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the cylindrical protrusion 862b is formed is such that the rear end of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off when the cylindrical protrusion 862b is placed in the transmission guide part 813. The thickness of the plate is such that even if the cylindrical protrusion 862b moves toward the back side until it comes into contact with the plate 814, it will not fall off from the transmission guide portion 813.

Thereby, when the fall prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state, the rack member 862 can be prevented from falling off from the transmission guide section 813.

In this embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear part 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear part 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth of the same shape, so that the displacement of the rack member 862 is different from that of the small diameter pinion 861a. The horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the diameter pinion 861b.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased compared to the amount of displacement of the rack member 862. Thereby, it is possible to secure a large width of horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 while keeping the horizontal width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, but the details will be described later.

84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the route forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. Note that in the description of FIGS. 84 and 85, FIGS. 79 and 80 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is an elongated member made of a resin material, and includes an elongated main body portion 871 formed in an elongated curved shape and having one side open. A support hole 872 formed in a circular shape at one end in the longitudinal direction of the support hole 872, and a wiring arrangement hole 873 located close to and in the same direction as the support hole 872 and capable of arranging electrical wiring. , a plurality of claws 874 extending from one wall to the other wall at the open end of the elongated main body 871, and a resin mold for forming the claws 874 are removable. and a circular protruding portion 876 that protrudes from near the other end in the longitudinal direction of the elongated main body portion 871 in parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 872 and has a circular cross section.

The elongated main body part 871 is a part in which the electrical wiring guided to the open side through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged, and includes a constricted part 871a having a short width in the middle part. The electrical wiring is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the elongated main body portion 871, and is guided to the outside from the other end in the longitudinal direction (the end opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed).

The constricted portion 871a functions as a portion that loosely pinches the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the elongated main body portion 871 to the extent that no breakage occurs, and prevents the arrangement of the electrical wiring from being excessively misaligned. The constricted portion 871a can prevent the electrical wiring arranged on the open side of the elongated main body portion 871 from shifting beyond the constricted portion 871a.

The support hole 872 is formed in a size that allows the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) to be inserted therethrough, so that the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide portion 820.

The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electrical wiring arranged on the wiring arm member 870 passes when crossing to the vertical slide member 820. In this embodiment, since the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, the amount of displacement of the wiring arrangement hole 873 when the wiring arm member 870 rotates can be reduced. Thereby, the load applied to the electrical wiring due to the rotation of the wiring arm member 870 can be reduced.

The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged to be accommodated on the open side of the elongated main body portion 871 from falling off from the elongated main body portion 871 . Further, since the space for removing the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874 is secured by the through hole 875 with a minimum area, the electrical wiring is connected to the opposite side of the open portion of the elongated main body portion 871. It can be prevented from slipping out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in this embodiment).

The circular protruding portion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and a protruding length that can be placed in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In this embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide section 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wiring arm member 870.

As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 includes a prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to form an internal path. A path forming member 882 which is a member and is fastened and fixed to the base member 810 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box shape with one side open, and a prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open part, so that the path forming member 882 opens to the back side at a vertically distant position. A path passing through the upper open part 883 and the lower open part 884 is configured.

That is, the route forming member 882 includes a wall portion 882a extending to one side at the edge, an upper open portion 883 that forms an upper open portion of the route by chipping the wall portion 882a, and a lower end of the route forming member 882. A lower open part 884 is formed in the wall part 882a with a size that allows the insertion of an electrical wiring connector at the lower part, and a lower open part 884 is formed in the wall part 882a toward the upper open part 883 in a range that does not overlap with the prevention plate 881 when viewed in the left-right direction. An extended portion 885 that extends, a guide recess 886 that is recessed in the shape of a long groove within a range that does not overlap with the extended portion 885 when viewed in the left-right direction, and a portion below the lower edge of the guide recess 886. It is provided with a cylindrical protruding portion 887 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the side of the prevention plate 881 and into which a fastening screw inserted through the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female thread formed at the tip.

A space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the path forming member 882, and the horizontal slide member 840, which is displaced in the left-right direction along with the displacement, has a wall portion 882a closest to the front side. It enters the back side of the wall portion 882a at the position where it is placed (position near the lower end of displacement) (see FIG. 86(a)).

That is, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position near the lower end of displacement on the back side of the wiring guide member 880 that forms a route along which the electric wiring is guided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal sliding member 840 while allowing the arrangement of the electrical wiring and the horizontal sliding member 840 to overlap when viewed from the front.

In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided to the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening portion 883, and among the displacements of the wiring arm member 870, the displacement in the width direction of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is caused by the extension portion 885. and is regulated by the prevention plate 881. Further, the widthwise length of the route of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the total widthwise length of the elongated main body portion 871 and the circular protruding portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870. This makes it possible to prevent the circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling out of the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

The lower open part 884 functions as a wiring through hole through which the electrical wiring arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion part 887 passes through to the back side.

The guide recess 886 includes a front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, a rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, and a connecting recess 886c connecting the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. Equipped with.

The cylindrical protruding portion 887 serves as a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the electrical wiring, and a fastening portion that fixes the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882.

The displacement mode of the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89.
86 to 89, the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 changing from the performance standby state to the performance upper end state is illustrated in chronological order.

86(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86(b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a). 87(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87(b) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed from the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87(a). 88(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88(b) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 89(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 89(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800. FIG. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line.

In FIG. 86, the performance standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated, and in FIG. 87, the detected plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8, and the horizontal slide member 840 is moved along the displacement path. In FIG. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is placed at an intermediate position between the right end state and the upper end state of the effect, and the horizontal slide member 840 is placed at the intermediate right end state and the upper end state of the effect. 89, the upper end state of the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

86(a), FIG. 87(a), FIG. 88(a), and FIG. 89(a), for ease of understanding, the wiring guide member 880 includes a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886, and a cylindrical protrusion. The outer shape of the portion 887 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and illustration of other shaped portions is omitted, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized. Further, by partially breaking the shaped portion near the upper end of the base plate 810, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during the vertical movement.

86(b), FIG. 87(b), FIG. 88(b), and FIG. 89(b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated with an imaginary line, and the horizontal slide member 840 is It is illustrated by a circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the main body plate member 841 for the purpose of illustrating only the horizontal displacement width.

Further, in FIGS. 86 to 89, the state of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 as the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 changes is illustrated by imaginary lines. The electrical wiring DK2 is guided into the inside of the wiring guide member 880 from the lower open part 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880, and after passing through the inside of the wiring arm member 870, is inserted into the wall part 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It is guided to the lateral slide member 840 through the enclosed space, and the details of the displacement will be described later.

The displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that a vertical slide member 820 can be reciprocated in the vertical direction. First, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be explained.

In this embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction in the performance standby state (see FIG. 86). In the performance standby state, the detected plate portion 825a of the vertical slide member 820 is placed in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so the displacement rotation unit 800 is set in the performance standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine this.

Further, in the production standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer ends) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to retreat from the displacement locus of the horizontal slide member 840, it is avoided that the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is restricted to the left and right positions of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced to the full extent to the left and right sides.

The state in which the drive motor MT4 is drive-controlled in the direction of upwardly displacing the vertical slide member 820 from the production standby state, and the detected plate portion 825a is disposed on the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the halfway right end state (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine based on the output of the upper detection sensor SC8 that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the halfway right end state.

In the middle right end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced upward and to the right from the performance standby state, while the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced in the upward direction and maintains its posture.

That is, in the halfway right end state, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still disposed in the front vertical recess 886a of the guide recess 886, so it is not supported as a support point for the wiring arm member 870. The distance in the front-rear direction between the protrusion 829 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the performance standby state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the rightward displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 accompanying the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the performance standby state to the halfway right end state is performed without changing the attitude of the wiring arm member 870. Ru. This makes it possible to avoid collisions between the members due to a shift in displacement timing, which tends to occur when the horizontal slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are displaced together.

As shown in FIGS. 86(b) and 87(b), as the vertical sliding member 820 is displaced upward, the horizontal sliding member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction. In this displacement, the direction of displacement is switched along the shape of the transmission guide section 813, but the displacement exceeds the width of the transmission guide section 813 in the left-right direction.

This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the second-stage pinion 861. That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide part 813, and the gear part 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear part 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are geared to the second stage pinion 861. will be combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch radius of the second-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 and the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864.

In this embodiment, since the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a and the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861b of the second stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) is 9:16, the left and right position of the transmission guide portion 813 is The horizontal slide member 864 is displaced in the left-right direction with a left-right width obtained by multiplying the amount of change by a constant (ie, 16/9=about 1.78).

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the halfway left end state, the horizontal slide member 840 does not displace to the left and right outwards as much as in the performance standby state. In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to a position where it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 in the front-back direction.

In such an arrangement, the attitude of the wiring arm member 870 changes as shown in FIG. 88(a). That is, in the process from the halfway right end state to the halfway left end state, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 contacts the connecting recess 886c formed on the back side of the guide recess 886 than the front vertical recess. The distance in the front-rear direction between the support protrusion 829 as a support point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is reduced compared to the standby state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 is configured to change its posture after the horizontal slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction. In addition, during the downward displacement, the opposite holds true (after the attitude of the wiring arm member 870 does not change, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction).

As a result, even if a shift occurs between the displacement timing of the lateral slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870, a collision between the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 can be avoided.

The wiring arm member 870 is disposed at the left end (the outer end in the left-right direction) of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the only displacements are vertical displacement and posture change in the front-rear direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can continue to be placed at the left and right outer ends where it is difficult to attract the attention of the player, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 can be guided by the wiring arm member 870. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK2 from entering the player's field of vision.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), during the period until the displacement rotation unit 800 reaches the upper end state of the effect, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 The support protrusion 829 as a support point for the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 ( (see FIG. 84) is maintained at a minimum.

In this way, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at different front and back positions corresponding to the vertical position by using the wiring arm member 870 that is configured to be able to change its posture as the vertical slide member 820 moves up and down. By configuring this to be possible, an advantageous effect is achieved in that a space for arranging the constituent members can be secured.

For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at a rearward position, the horizontal displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is limited. To be more specific, in order to avoid contact with the electric wiring DK2, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged to the right (inward from the left and right) in the performance standby state. In this embodiment, the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at a position to the right (inner side of the left and right) of the horizontal slide member 840, so the displacement and rotation unit 800 may be downsized to avoid contact. There is a possibility that it will be necessary to take measures. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement rotation unit 800 is reduced.

Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is placed in a position closer to the front, sufficient horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 can be ensured, while the game board 13 placed on the front side of the displacement rotation unit 800 The degree of freedom in arranging components on the back side is reduced.

In this embodiment, since the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, it is particularly useful for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second prize opening 640 arranged on the right side area of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid etc. is likely to be reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by configuring the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK2 to be movable in the front-back direction by the wiring arm member 870, it is possible to avoid restricting the left-right displacement of the horizontal slide member 840, and to play the game. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the board 13.

That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal sliding member 840 is desired to be retracted to the left and right outside, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged in front of the horizontal sliding member 840 by arranging the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 to the front side, and the horizontal sliding member 840 This prevents the displacement from being limited by the electrical wiring DK2.

In addition, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the left and right inward, and in the upper position where the second prize opening 640 (see FIG. 2) is desired to be placed, the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is placed to the rear side, so that the electrical wiring The DK2 is placed towards the back, leaving space in the front. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the arrangement of members arranged on the game board 13 as a structure such as a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640.

The state changes of the electrical wiring DK2 in the state changes shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. Note that the change in the state of the electrical wiring DK2 here refers to a change in the winding state of the electrical wiring DK2 in a state in which the electrical wiring DK2 is wound around a pillar.

In the electrical wiring DK2, the upper part (the side closer to the wiring arm member 870) of the lower winding part DK2b exclusively extends vertically and is not preferably curved. In particular, at the time of downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electrical wiring DK2 into the front side of the cylindrical protruding portion 887 (see FIG. 86(a)), so the rigidity is lower than that of the portion of the lower winding portion DK2b that undergoes winding displacement. The higher the value, the better.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a resin cable tube is wound around the upper part of the lower winding part DK2b, so that the cable tube exhibits a behavior with higher rigidity than the part that is wound and displaced.

In the state shown in FIG. 89(a), the cable tube is placed between the wall portion 882a and the electrical wiring DK2, thereby avoiding friction between the electrical wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. There is.

Further, since the lower end opening direction of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to face vertically downward, the direction of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid unnecessary bending deformation of the electrical wiring DK2.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840, and the lower The winding portion DK2b is arranged below the wiring arm member 870 so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 887.

The upper winding part DK2a of the electrical wiring DK2, which is arranged to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823, can be displaced in a manner of expanding and contracting in the radial direction along a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 823. It is composed of

The lower winding portion DK2b of the electrical wiring DK2, which is arranged to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 887, is displaced in a manner that expands and contracts in the radial direction along a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 887. configured as possible.

That is, the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 is configured to be different from the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870. In this embodiment, the respective planes intersect at right angles, and the plane where the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 is the first omitted part 824a, the second omitted part 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. 873.

The displacement of the electric wiring DK2 is suppressed by the portion of the wiring arm member 870 disposed inside the elongated main body portion 871 being sandwiched between the constricted portions 871a as described above. Therefore, relative displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

From this, in this embodiment, the displacement required for the electrical wiring DK2 due to a change in the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be completed independently in each of the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b. Therefore, they will be explained separately below.

First, the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be explained. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion that is wound counterclockwise in front view around the cylindrical protrusion 823 from a position passing through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and extends from the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to the point where it is guided to the tip.

The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be able to be displaced in the radial direction of the center of the cylindrical protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as its limit, and is in the standby state where it widens most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86(b)). In this case, a wall portion 822 is formed at a position along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load (or at a position where there is a slight gap). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the wall portion 822 to the electrical wiring DK2 in the performance standby state.

When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right from the performance standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right, thereby pulling the upper winding portion DK2a and moving it radially inward around the cylindrical protrusion 823. The displacement length of the horizontal slide member 840 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying tensile force to the electrical wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the horizontal slide member 840 displaces to the left, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 displaces to the left, pushing the upper winding portion DK2a and causing the upper winding to roll outward in the radial direction around the cylindrical protrusion 823. The portion DK2a is displaced. At this time, by protruding from the left end of the wiring guide member 844 a guide piece 844a that slopes downward toward the left, the upper winding portion DK2a is directed outward (between the vertical slide member 820 and the wire guide member 844). This allows the upper winding portion DK2a to be properly pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 822.

Next, the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be explained. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise from a point hanging downward from the wiring arm member 870 around the cylindrical protruding portion 887 when viewed from the left side (viewed from the left and right outside). This refers to the part that passes through the front side and is wrapped in the forward rotation direction, and extends to the part located in the lower open part 884 (see FIG. 85).

The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be movable in the radial direction of the center of the cylindrical protruding portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as the limit, and is in the production standby state where it is widest in the radial direction (see FIG. 86(a)). ), a wall portion 882a is formed at a position along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load (or at a position where there is a slight gap). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the wall portion 882a to the electrical wiring DK2 in the performance standby state.

When the wiring arm member 870 is upwardly displaced as the vertical slide member 820 is upwardly displaced from the performance standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upwardly, and the lower winding portion DK2b is pulled upwardly. The displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is supplemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b radially inward about the cylindrical protrusion portion 887. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying tensile force to the electrical wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side disposed on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, thereby pushing the lower winding part DK2b and moving it downward in the radial direction around the cylindrical protruding part 887. The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, since the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in an inclined direction toward the front side as it goes downward, the lower winding part DK2b is formed between the cylindrical protrusion 887 and the wall 882a (the cylindrical The lower winding portion DK2b can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

In this embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is arranged is arranged below the lower end position of the displacement range of the lateral slide member 840. This makes it possible to avoid the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction from being limited by the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840. (see) can be displaced using the front and back width to its full extent.

Therefore, it is possible to secure a large space below the wiring arm member 870 in which the lower winding part DK2b can be accommodated, so the length of the lower winding part DK2b can be made sufficiently long, and The allowable amount of vertical displacement can be increased.

FIG. 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 includes a center frame 86 disposed on the front side of a window 60a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of channels made of a resin member and opened on the front side. The ball flow lower unit 150 is formed in a path shape and is disposed at the lower part of the back side of the base plate 60.

The ball flow down unit 150 is formed to be able to receive the ball that has flown down the lower end LB1 of the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second prize opening 640 near the upper end of the fixed plate portion 151 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. The first receiving channel 152 and a second receiving channel, which is an elongated box-shaped member whose front side is open, are fastened and fixed to the fixed plate part 151 from the back side in a manner connected to the downstream side of the receiving channel 151. It includes a flow path member 153 and a plurality of protrusions 154 that protrude inward from the inner side of the left and right walls of the second receiving flow path member 153 in a direction perpendicular to the downward direction of the ball.

The plurality of protrusions 154 are arranged alternately on the left and right sides with an interval approximately equal to the diameter of a ball between the left and right walls. Thereby, the flow of the ball flowing down the second receiving channel member 153 can be slowed down.

The functions of the first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 will be explained. The first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 have the function of guiding the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 to a ball ejection channel (not shown). It has a function of improving the presentation effect by making the subsequent game ball visible to the player. In addition, in the following description, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The second winning a prize opening 640 is provided with a detection sensor for ball passage detection near the lower edge shown in FIG. Thereby, it is possible to immediately execute the payout of the prize ball and display the hold on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable game. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second winning port 640, the player can notice the ball entering the second winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152. For example, it is possible to make it easier to notice a situation where a payout is not being made due to a problem on the gaming machine parlor side.

In addition, as explained below, it is clear that the ball has entered the second prize opening 640 by visually confirming the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1, so the position of the detection sensor is changed to the downstream of the intermediate flow path LM1, etc. The timing of paying out the prize balls and the timing of displaying the hold may be delayed.

The game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 is passed through an intermediate flow path LM1 (see FIG. (see 27).

Like the guide channel DL1, the intermediate channel LM1 is formed to be able to guide the ball vertically downward while displacing the ball in a zigzag pattern from side to side. That is, since the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path DL1 appear to have the same flowing manner, the ball on the right path of the third symbol display device 81 during a right-handed game. Even if the ball is visually recognized, it can be made difficult to distinguish whether the ball is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1.

Here, the information about which flow path the ball is flowing down during the right-handed game is information that is directly linked to the player's profit, and the information about which channel the ball is flowing down is information that is directly connected to the player's profit. This is a part where individual differences occur among pachinko machines 10 depending on the state.

In this embodiment, the flesh part of the base plate 60 is left in the vicinity of the through gate 67, and the ball collides with this position before passing through the through gate 67, or the ball collides with this position before entering the second winning hole 640. Since nails are installed that can cause balls to collide with each other, it is determined for each pachinko machine whether the balls are likely to flow down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during right-handed games. different.

During the probability change or time saving period when playing a right-handed game, the ball that does not enter the second winning hole 640 flows down the guide route DL1, unless it enters the general winning hole 63 located on the downstream side. The ball passes through the out port 71 and is ejected from the game area, and does not benefit the player (it becomes a wasted ball).

From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide route DL1 uniquely correspond. The reason why the degree of freedom of the attention position is higher when paying attention to the guide route DL1 than when paying attention only to the second winning opening 640 is because the guide route DL1 extends in the vertical direction. It is clear.

Therefore, some players check the frequency with which the ball flows down the guide route DL1, calculate the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640, the frequency of occurrence of wasted balls in right-handed games, etc. It is expected that players will take this into consideration when deciding whether to continue playing the game or not.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the ball flowing down the guide route DL1 and the ball entering the second prize opening 640 and flowing down the intermediate channel LM1. Thereby, it can be made to seem as if the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640 is high, and it is possible to encourage continuation of the game.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning port 640 and has been discharged from the gaming area, so it flows vertically downward and reaches the specific winning port 65a when viewed from the front. If the ball flows down to a position where it overlaps with the ball, it will be difficult to distinguish it from the ball that can actually enter the specific winning hole 65a, and there is a possibility that the game will be hindered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by causing the ball to flow down to the left and right inside through the first receiving channel 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible for the ball to reach a position where it overlaps with the specific winning opening 65a in front view. (See Figure 2). This makes it easy to distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specific winning port 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning port 640 and cannot enter the specific winning port 65a. .

The first receiving channel 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) when viewed from the front, passes near the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front, and passes through the display area. Let the ball flow down towards the left and right center position. That is, since the ball guided to the first receiving channel 152 enters the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the display on the third symbol display device 81, the player is paying attention to the display on the third symbol display device 81. , it is possible to make a player who is not paying attention to the right-handed ball path aware of whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 640.

This allows the player to recognize whether or not a ball has entered the second winning hole 640 without moving his/her field of view while keeping his/her attention on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where an important display is executed when the player looks away from the third symbol display device 81 for looking at the second winning hole 640, and the player misses the display, thereby making the game more comfortable. can be provided.

The ball flowing down the second receiving channel member 153 flows diagonally downward to the left on the right side of the first prize opening 64 when viewed from the front. Since this ball is decelerated by the protrusion portion 154, the residence time of the falling ball can be extended. Thereby, it is possible to easily increase the number of game balls that are visible in the game area when viewed from the front.

In addition, by ensuring a long left-right width of the downward flow path of the ball, the line of sight directed toward the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the downward flow path of the second receiving channel member 153 can easily intersect. Thereby, the ball flowing down inside the second receiving channel member 153 can easily enter the player's field of view.

92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, light guide plate presentation means 160, and decoration means 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, light guide plate presentation means 160, and decoration means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the light guide plate presentation means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side, and is configured to be able to come into contact with the front side and the top side of the light guide plate 161. An upper support member 162 is made of an opaque resin material and aligns the light guide plate 161, and an upper support member 162 is made of a light transmissive resin material and is attached to the center frame 86 in a manner that presses the lower side of the light guide plate 161 from the back side. A lower support member 163 configured to be fastened and fixed; a spherical flow path forming member 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and formed of a light-transparent resin material and constitutes a spherical flow path; A plurality of left and right side support members 165 are formed from a resin material and are configured to be fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a manner that presses both left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 from the back side, and an upper support member formed in a left and right elongated shape A horizontal board unit 166 is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 while passing over the upper side of the member 162 and extending to the front side of the center frame 86. A vertically placed board unit 167 is arranged along the left inner wall and fastened and fixed.

The decorative means 170 includes a first decorative member 171 made of a light-transmissive resin material and arranged at the center left and right near the upper part of the center frame 86, and a first decorative member 171 made of a light-transparent resin material and arranged at the left side of the first decorative member 171. , a second decorative member 174 is disposed on the front side of the left side frame of the center frame 86; A third decorative member 177 is provided.

The first decorative member 171 includes a horizontally long rectangular center decorative member 172 that can be fastened and fixed to the center thereof, and a margin member 173 that is composed of a separate member as a margin for a title or the like representing the pachinko machine 10. Equipped with

As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 has a horizontally long groove portion 171a recessed in the shape of a horizontally long groove on the back side. The horizontally elongated groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width that allows placement of the illumination board of the horizontal board unit 166 of the light guide plate presentation means 160.

The first decorative member 171 is disposed at a position slightly overlapping the lower side of the opening 86a formed in the front-rear direction in the upper part of the center frame 86. In this embodiment, the performance member 700 in the performance standby state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

As described above, in this embodiment, inside the center frame 86, the front position of the third symbol display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161, while the front position of the performance member 700 in the performance standby state is open. It is opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emitting performance by the performance member 700 in the performance standby state without being blocked by the light guide plate 161.

Referring to FIG. 96, the relationship between the horizontally long groove portion 171a and the horizontally placed board unit 166 will be described. FIG. 96 is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 96, the vicinity of the horizontally long groove portion 171a is separately illustrated as an enlarged view. In addition, in the description of FIG. 96, FIGS. 92 to 95 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are disposed on the front and back sides of the illumination board of the horizontal board unit 166, and light is irradiated in the vertical direction along arrows D1a and D1b. On the back side of the first decorative member 171, the light reaching the reflective shaped portions 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a can be visually recognized conspicuously.

As a result, even when the light emitting means are arranged in a concentrated manner on the horizontal substrate unit 166, the form of the light emitting effect (the light emitting range or the light emitting shape) that is visually recognized by the player depends on the formation range or the formed shape of the reflective shaped portion 171b. The images can be visually recognized in different ways.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row on the upper surface of the horizontal board unit 166, and light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged on the lower surface in a row in which the LEDs are arranged on the upper surface. They are arranged in two horizontal rows: a corresponding row above and below, and a row parallel to the corresponding row and formed on the back side. Of the rows in which the LEDs serving as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the row on the top surface and the front row on the bottom surface are arranged inside the horizontally long groove 171a, and the back row on the bottom surface is located outside the horizontally long groove 171a.

With this configuration, the LEDs arranged in the row on the top surface and the front row on the bottom surface can irradiate light onto the reflective shaped part 171b, and the LEDs arranged in the rear row on the bottom surface can illuminate another light emitting target. Light can be irradiated.

In this embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row of the lower surface are arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the irradiated LED light enters from the edge of the light guide plate 161. That is, the light emitting means 166b, such as an LED, arranged in the rear row of the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 is used to illuminate the light guide plate 161.

Note that the upper support member 162 is arranged between the front and rear two rows of LEDs arranged on the lower surface of the horizontal board unit 166. Thereby, the light emitted from the two rows of front and rear LEDs can be separated by the upper support member 162.

The horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged directly above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area when viewed from the front. Thereby, it is possible to clearly separate the light that is irradiated onto the display area side and the light that is irradiated onto the game area side without irradiating the display area side.

The central decorative member 172 is arranged in the same front and rear positions as the reflective shaped portion 171b, and has a flat front and rear surface. Thereby, even when light is irradiated from the horizontal substrate unit 166, strong reflection of the light can be avoided and visibility can be maintained.

In this embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the number of star shapes indicates the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of specs, so-called different specs). It is configured so that it can be done. By configuring the central decorative member 172 as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, when manufacturing pachinko machines 10 with different performance types, the pachinko machine 10 can be manufactured by replacing only the central decorative member 172. Can be configured.

The margin member 173 is configured as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, and the shape of the front and rear surfaces of the plate is different from the shape formed in the reflective shape portion 171b (in this embodiment, a striped groove is used). ) is formed so that the appearance of the reflected light is different from that of the reflective shaped portion 171b.

FIG. 97 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member 171 in range XCVII in FIG. In this embodiment, when the horizontal board unit 166 is irradiated with light in the vertical direction along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that reaches the reflective shaped portion 171b travels toward the front side by reflection and refraction, and becomes glittering. While it is visually recognized brightly, the light that reaches the margin member 173 is not mainly reflected, but is configured so that most of it is transmitted and proceeds as it is, so it is visually recognized as slightly dark.

As a result, the shape of the margin member 173 can be seen as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal board unit 166 travels in the vertical direction, so that light can be emitted in an arbitrary shape when viewed from the front. You can make it look like you are there. In other words, it can be visually recognized as if LEDs were arranged on the back side to produce a light-emitting effect.

The second decorative member 174 includes a shielding member 175 that is a thin plate member (sheet-like member) with low transparency colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decorative member 174. . Thereby, the rear side of the second decorative member 174 can be configured to be difficult to visually recognize.

As a result, the gaming area formed on the front side of the base board 60 (particularly the left side) and the forming area of the light guide plate 161 when viewed from the front (including the area that overlaps the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front and rear). can be clearly separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball flowing down the game area from being reduced due to the light accompanying the performance of the light guide plate 161 or the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81.

The third decorative member 177 has a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns three-dimensionally formed on the front side, and a plurality of hexagonal-shaped parts arranged front and back shifted on the back side. A plurality of three-dimensional decorative members 178 are provided.

Like the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged in a space between the part of the center frame 86 where the light guide plate 161 is arranged and the guide path DL1. Ru.

Thereby, instead of a two-dimensionally visible light effect between the light guide plate 161 arrangement portion and the guide route DL1, a three-dimensionally visible light effect can be performed. That is, when viewed from the front, it is possible to perform a luminous effect with depth.

For example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the back side, the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front and rear direction depends on which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with the light when viewed from the front. The brightness changes. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated or the back side is illuminated.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81, the front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, etc. (see FIG. 81) are assumed as means for irradiating light to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the back side. , the light emission position can be changed. Therefore, compared to the case where light is irradiated toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 from a fixedly arranged light emitting means such as an LED, the types of light effects can be easily increased.

For example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the left and right directions or the upper and lower directions, the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front and rear direction depends on which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with the light when viewed from the front. Which position becomes brighter changes. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated or the back side is illuminated.

In this embodiment, the first light irradiation device 330 of the firing effect unit 300 is assumed as a means for irradiating light from the left and right directions to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 (see FIG. 27). Due to its arrangement, the first light irradiation device 330 functions to block at least a portion of the light directed toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 out of the light irradiated from the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Thereby, the degree to which the mode of light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the display presentation mode of the third symbol display device 81 can be suppressed. For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light emitting device 330 is red, the color of the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is red. This makes it easier to avoid the color of light that a person visually recognizes being purple (a color that is a mixture of blue light and red light). That is, the light seen through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 can be easily seen independently of the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the balls flowing down the ball falling unit 150 are configured to be visible when viewed from the front, and all the balls are configured to flow down the same path, but the ball flowing down unit 150 of the second embodiment At 2150, the descending sphere is configured to flow down one of a plurality of paths. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. FIG. 98 shows an example of how the granular member 320 looks just after being fired. As shown in FIG. 98, the lower ball flow unit 2150 differs from the lower ball flow unit 150 described in the first embodiment in that it is formed to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 to the left. A third receiving channel 2155 is provided, which is a channel having a size that allows a ball to flow down.

The third receiving channel 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has a slope angle set to be gentler than that of the first receiving channel 152, and has an inclined portion 2155a whose lower end (left end) is set on the left side of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. , and a discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward in front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

The speed of the ball flowing down the slope 2155a is slower than the speed of the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152 due to the shallow angle of the slope. The ball flowing down the slope 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the slope 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball flowing down the slope 2155a can be kept in the player's field of vision for a long time.

This allows the ball flowing down the slope 2155a to enter the field of view of the player who plays the game while viewing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, attention to the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be improved without causing any discomfort.

Guidance of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be explained. In this embodiment, the ball that enters the second winning hole 640 flows down to the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 in the same way, and flows along the second receiving channel member 153 at the lower end of the first receiving channel 152. The switching means switches between flowing down in the first direction D21 or flowing down in the second direction D22 along the third receiving channel 2155.

In this embodiment, the downward flow resistance of the ball flowing through the second receiving channel member 153 is increased by the protruding portion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed on the second receiving channel member 153. Therefore, if the next ball reaches the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving channel member 153, that ball will be guided to the third receiving channel 2155. .

Such a situation is likely to occur when, for example, a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 consecutively in a short period of time. Therefore, by visually observing the situation in which the balls flow down the third receiving channel 2155, the player can understand that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning a prize opening 640 in a row.

Note that the mode of the switching means is not limited at all. For example, an opening/closing plate configured to be able to switch between a state of allowing the ball to flow down in the first direction D21 and a state of restricting it using a driving means such as a solenoid is disposed in the ball flow down unit 2150. Alternatively, an electromagnet capable of generating a magnetic force may be provided at a branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22, and the generated magnetic force may be used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to cause the ball to flow down. The route may be switched.

According to these methods, it is possible not only to switch the downward flow path of the ball to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also to make the ball stay or return. Unlike the ball that flows down the gaming area, changing the falling path of the ball that enters the second prize opening 640 does not affect the subsequent game results, so the ball that uses magnetic force as described above does not affect the subsequent game results. It becomes possible to switch the downstream route of the flow.

As described above, when switching the flow path of the ball with a device that uses electricity, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can control whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22. can. Therefore, the lottery result based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 can be associated with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22.

For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 in 60% of cases where the lottery by entering the second prize opening 640 is a jackpot, the third receiving channel It is possible to improve the expectation of a jackpot for the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down 2155.

In this case, the player's line of sight is most likely to be drawn to the lower end position of the first receiving channel 152, which serves as a guide path to the third receiving channel 2155, and as a result, the ejected ball (game It is possible to improve attention to the ball (which has already been ejected from the area).

As mentioned above, the fact that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 is due to the fact that the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640 is high, or the expected value of the jackpot in the lottery due to the ball entering the second winning hole 640. This suggests that the value is high.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is disposed in the middle of the ejection part 2155b, and control is performed so that the granular member 320 is ejected when it is determined that the ball has passed. .

As mentioned above, in order to fire the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 from the production standby state (see FIG. 38) to the firing standby state (FIG. 40) in advance. it takes time. On the other hand, it is decided whether or not to execute the firing of the granular member 320 at the timing when the ball enters the second prize opening 640, and it takes some time for the ball to reach the ejection part 2155b from there. This flow time is used to control the injection device 400 to change its state.

Thereby, the granular member 320 can be controlled to be fired at the same time that the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay that is expected to be required for the ball to flow down the third receiving channel 2155 after the ball enters the second prize opening 640. Compared to the case where the control is performed as follows, it is possible to make it easier to match the timing of the falling ball and the firing timing of the granular member 320.

For example, oil adhering to the ball may adhere to the first receiving channel 152, causing a drop in the flow speed of the ball, and in this case, the granular member 320 is fired after waiting for a certain time delay. If controlled in this way, the granular member 320 will be ejected before the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155, which may reduce the performance effect.

In contrast, by controlling the granular member 320 to fire at the same time that the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed, the player can wait until the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155. After concentrating the attention on the third receiving channel 2155, it is possible to improve the performance effect of a series of performances in which a powerful performance that spreads to about the area of the light guide plate 161 is performed by firing the granular members 320. can.

Note that the arrangement of the third receiving channel 2155 through which the ball flows and the arrangement of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) that is visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially different when viewed from the front. The above-mentioned sequence of effects can be visually recognized without requiring the player to change his/her line of sight.

Note that control may also be combined in which the granular member 320 is not ejected when the ball passes through the detection sensor SC21. For example, if a jackpot occurs when the granular member 320 is not fired, control may be performed so that the probability of the above-mentioned variable jackpot is increased.

In this case, since it is possible to increase the types of performances after the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155, the player who receives the ball from the third receiving channel 2155 at the stage where the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155 can avoid a decline in attention span.

In addition, when the firing of the granular member 320 is not executed, attention to the subsequent display performance on the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Note that a detection sensor having the same function as the detection sensor SC21 may be placed at another location. For example, it may be placed at a location through which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a can pass. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect of firing the granular member 320 at the passing timing of the ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific area where the benefit given to the player is more advantageous when the game ball passes through.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is configured to be symmetrically and discretely enlarged/reduced in the radial direction, but in the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment, , is configured to be able to form sections that are not bilaterally symmetrical in the radial expansion/contraction displacement. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit 3600 in the third embodiment. The difference between the enlargement/reduction unit 3600 and the first embodiment is only in the production member 3700, and the main body member 601, front cover member 610, upper arm member 620, lower arm member 630, and transmission gear 650 have the same configuration. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 99 shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the presentation member 3700 is placed at a midway position (intermediate position) of the radial enlargement/reduction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, this embodiment employs five shielding design members 760, which is similar to the first embodiment, but among the shielding design members 760, two on the lower side and one on the upper left While the sheets are radially enlarged with the same length, the upper one and the upper right one are still in a clustered arrangement state (not enlarged in the radial direction). A configuration for realizing this displacement will be explained.

FIG. 100 is a front view of rotary plate 3730. The rotating plate 3730 has the same configuration as the rotating plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that some guide holes 733 are changed to separate guide holes 3733.

As shown in FIG. 100, the rotary plate 730 includes separate guide holes 3733 in place of the upper and upper right guide holes 733 when viewed from the front. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-mentioned small-diameter circular arc portion 733a, large-diameter circular arc portion 733b, and an adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter circular arc portion 733a and the large-diameter circular arc portion 733b.

The adjustment connecting portion 3733c extends along the same arc shape from the connecting portion with the large diameter circular arc portion 733b to near the intermediate position, and on the opposite side of the large diameter circular arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 adjacently provided in the clockwise direction or (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733) is formed so as to rapidly approach the small diameter circular arc portion 733a side.

That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the assembled arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the connecting portion 733c expands and displaces in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjusting connecting portion 3733c The telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the large diameter arc portion 733b does not expand in the radial direction while being guided in the same arc shape as the large diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, it is possible to cause a shift in the arrangement of the shielding design member 760. The effect caused by the misalignment of the shielding design member 760 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 99, by arranging the shielding design member 760 asymmetrically, the center of gravity of the presentation member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the left-right direction or the center in the vertical direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 disposed at the upper right position remains in the grouped arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the presentation member 3700 shifts to the lower left position by that amount.

As a result, the production member 3700 is subjected to a load in the direction of correcting the deviation of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front due to its own weight. This load can cause the presentation member 3700 to change its posture in the rotational direction around the longitudinal axis, so that the shielding design member 760 can be changed in the radial direction around the rotational axis of the presentation member 3700 and in the rotational direction. can be displaced in a combination of directions.

As a result, the direction (i.e., , rotational direction).

In this embodiment, only the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and other than that, the shapes of the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 are the same, and the small diameter circular arc portion 733a and the large diameter circular arc portion 733c are different from each other. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same between the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733.

Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 shifts in the state shown in FIG. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the horizontal and vertical center positions of the presentation member 3700. Thereby, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained shifted, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems.

An example of a performance using this return of the center of gravity G31 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the production member 700 are not performed at the same time, but are performed separately, but the purpose of this is to avoid collision with other components. .

In this embodiment, measures are taken to avoid collisions with other components, and the effect member 3700 is controlled to be able to be vertically displaced and radially displaced at the same time. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, it is possible to expand and displace the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction while moving the presentation member 3700 downward.

In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the presentation member 3700 and the radial expansion displacement of the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity G31 of the presentation member 3700 returns, so that the presentation member 3700 is It is possible to cause a posture change in the opposite direction to the rotation direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) assumed from the state.

In this way, since rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions can be applied to the radial expansion and displacement of the presentation member 3700, a simple configuration specialized for expanding and contracting the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction can be achieved. However, as a result, it is possible to create a complex movement that also includes displacement in the rotational direction. Thereby, the presentation effect of the presentation member 3700 can be improved.

The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the performance standby state, but in the fourth embodiment, The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480, is completed before the translation member 410 is displaced. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the abutment member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes over time in the arrangement of a projection 432 and the arrangement of a cylindrical protrusion 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 101 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but rather shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement changes occur. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed before the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420. Therefore, the downward displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is started with the lid member 480 placed at the displacement end position on the retracting side, so that the player's line of sight is not obstructed by the lid member 480. The displacement of the granular member due to the downward displacement of the collision member 420 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 12(a) and FIG. 38).

In this situation, by reciprocating the linear member 410 between the angle of 66 degrees and the angle of 125 degrees shown in FIG. 101, the granular member 320 can be vibrated (minorly displaced) and visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, so when the driving of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are upwardly displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

Therefore, by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated. This eliminates the need to switch the drive direction of the drive motor MT1, making control easier.

In addition, in this mode in which the granular member 320 is vibrated (micro-displaced) and visually recognized by the player, the load (fatigue) applied to the torsion spring SP2 is reduced compared to the case where the lid member 480 is also displaced. I can do it.

Note that the manner in which the collision member 420 is displaced in order to vibrate (micro-displace) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibrations may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to cause the collision member 420 to vibrate. In this case, the other vibration device is preferably arranged below the collision member 420 in the direction of displacement. This makes it possible to avoid loading other vibration devices when the collision member 420 is displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the production standby state, but in the fifth embodiment, After the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed and the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the abutment member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes over time in the arrangement of a projection 432 and the arrangement of a cylindrical protrusion 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 102 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement changes occur. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after the granular member 320 is launched, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 (see around the angle of 290 degrees).

Therefore, at least a portion of the granular member 320 can be placed on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained therein. Although it is possible that the rotation of the lid member 480 is inhibited by the granular member 320 colliding with the lid member 480, in this embodiment, the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed toward the rotating shaft side. Thereby, rotation of the lid member 480 can be made less likely to be inhibited.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven in the forward rotation direction with the granular member 320 placed on the lid member 480, the granular member 320 will collide as the transmission arm member 470 is displaced to the retracting side (the small diameter side in FIG. 102). It falls onto member 420.

On the other hand, at this timing, the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is broken, so that the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 can be prevented from being transmitted to the translation member 410. .

Further, when the drive motor MT1 is driven to rotate in the reverse rotation direction from the firing standby state, if the driving motor MT1 is set at high speed, the rising speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be increased, and the granular member 320 can be fired.

In this case, at the time of firing, since the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the firing of the granular member 320 is inhibited at the left and right center portions where the overhanging portion 482 is arranged, and the firing in the left and right direction is prevented. You can make it visible so that it becomes the owner.

That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is ejected can be changed depending on the ejection mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated forward and the ejection mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the reverse direction. Thereby, it is possible to provide variation in the firing direction of the granular member 320, and it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are provided with a flat substrate and irradiate light in the front-back direction and the left-right direction. An illumination board is provided on which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are arranged in a bent manner. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 103 is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the firing unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 2. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the firing unit 6300 are illustrated, and the illustration of the operating unit 500 is omitted. Further, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 103, in addition to the illumination board 332, the first light irradiation device 6330 has a front end close to the front end of the illumination board 332, and a rear end close to the front end of the illumination board 332. A second illumination board 6334 is provided that is tilted away from 332.

The second illumination board 6334 includes light emitting means such as an LED that is arranged to be able to emit light from at least the front side. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light toward the partitioning member 310, and it is possible to improve the production effect of lighting up the granular members 320 scattering in the internal space IE1 of the partitioning member 310.

In addition to the illumination board 342, the second light irradiation device 6340 is arranged in an inclined manner such that its back end is close to the back end of the illumination board 342 and its front end is away from the illumination board 342. A second illumination board 6344 is provided.

The second illumination board 6344 includes a light emitting means such as an LED that is arranged to be able to emit light from at least the back side. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the effect member 700, displacement rotation unit 800, etc. of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 arranged on the back side of the firing unit 6300, and the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.

Note that the arrangement of the illumination board is not limited to this. For example, only the second illumination substrates 6334 and 6344 may be employed and the illumination substrates 332 and 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be employed. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side where the light emitting means is not arranged in the second illumination substrates 6334, 6344, or the light emitting means may be configured to be able to emit light from both sides.

Furthermore, for the purpose of obliquely directing the direction of light irradiation, a device that can change the orientation of the light emitting means may be constructed without increasing the number of illumination boards. Further, a light emitting means may be arranged at the intersection of the illumination substrates 332, 342 and the second illumination substrates 6334, 6344, so as to be able to emit light.

A substrate box A100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. First, the schematic configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the board box A100. , FIG. 107(a) is a front view of the substrate box A100, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the substrate box A100.

Note that arrows F and B, arrows L and R, and arrows U and D in FIGS. 105 to 107 respectively indicate the front-rear direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction of the substrate box A100. Note that the same applies to each of the following figures, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the board box A100. Therefore, other explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the board box A100 includes a box cover A200, a box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and a box cover A200 and box base A300 that are connected in an unopenable manner (caulked structure). a box cover A200 connected by the sealing unit A400 and a sub-cover A500 disposed at the end of the box base A300 opposite to the sealing unit A400, and a main controller. A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

A rotating shaft A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the board box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and is a shaft that supports the board box A100 (box cover A200) in the short direction (arrows U, D). direction) and is formed as an axis perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

In addition, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the rotation axis A410 is located at one side in the longitudinal direction of the board box A100 (box cover A200) (on the side opposite to the first connection wall part A220 across the covering part A270, which will be described later); R direction side). Note that the rotation axis A410 may be arranged on the other longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow L) opposite to one longitudinal side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

A switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged (mounted) in the main control device A110. Note that the main control device A110 is configured by further disposing (mounting) a switch device A120 and a key device A130 with respect to the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other explanations will be omitted.

The switch device A120 is a momentary pushbutton that is operated (turned on) when the operating section A122 is pushed in from the initial position and turned off when the push is released (the operating section A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and is used for input to the main controller A110. Note that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to some of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main controller A110 (main controller 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pushing force) when the operating portion A122 is pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on), and based on the click feeling, the main control is activated. The operator can detect the completion of input to the device A110.
Therefore, this is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed in the initial position (hereinafter referred to as the "off position"), and the key A140 inserted in the off position is rotated (clockwise in this embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as the "on" position). A key-operated selector switch (mode It is configured as a changeover switch).

Note that in this embodiment, the phase difference between the off position and the on position is set to approximately 90 degrees. Furthermore, in the off position of the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed, while in the on position, the key A140 cannot be removed.

Furthermore, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched depending on the on/off state of the key device A130. For example, in this embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) that initializes the main control device A110 (executes RAM erasure), and When A130 is turned on, the switch device A120 functions as a setting change switch for changing the winning probability value in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "setting change"), as described later. .

Here, as described above, since the board box A100 (box cover A200 and box base A300) is unopenably connected, in order to operate the main control device A110 (for example, switch device A120 and key device A130), In this case, it is necessary to open the substrate box A100, which is time-consuming.

On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 of this embodiment, openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. That is, it is not necessary to open the substrate box A100, and the effort can be reduced. Details will be described later.

Legs A121, A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the back side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the pushing direction side of the operation part A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, the arrow B direction side). The protruding legs A121 and A131 are inserted from the front side into the holes opening in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the protruding portions on the back side are soldered, whereby the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is arranged on the front side of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

In this case, an external force (for example, a force that displaces the operating part A122 or the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (insertion direction)) is applied to the switch device A120 and the key device A130 in a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R. When a force in a parallel direction is applied and the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is tilted, the legs on one side (the side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting) of the switch device A120 and key device A130 A tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, while a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). Therefore, the legs A121 and A131 may break or bend, the legs A121 and A131 may come off from the holes, and the solder may peel off, which may lead to disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, the board box A100 employs means to solve this problem. Details will be described later.

The main controller 100 includes a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays (not shown), and the 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Note that since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the operator can visually check the display on the 7-segment display through the box cover A200.

Here, a method of changing settings using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be explained.

First, with the power of the pachinko machine A10 turned off, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the on position, and while pushing the operation part A122 of the switch device A120 to the operating position, the pachinko machine A10 is turned off. Turn on the power. This activates the setting change mode, and the settings are changed each time the operating section A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed.

In this embodiment, six values from the first to the sixth are defined as the set value, and these values are cycled (for example, by pressing the operation part A122, the set value changes from the first value to the sixth value). 6, and when the operation unit A122 is pressed from the state set to the sixth value, the set value advances to the first value).

The set value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operating section A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed (when the set value is changed), the third symbol display device 81 is a liquid crystal display (display device). The setting value displayed at 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

Note that the information regarding the setting change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the setting value, and may include other information. Examples of other information include the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), previous setting values, and the like. In this way, by using the third symbol display device 81, the amount of information that can be displayed can be ensured (larger) than, for example, when using a 7-segment display. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the operating state, and it is possible to improve operability and suppress operational errors. Further, by using the device (third symbol display device 81) that displays information regarding the game also, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the setting value may be displayed only on one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and not on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may be in a form in which they are not displayed.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the off position. This ends the setting change mode (setting values are finalized). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and upon this detection, a power restoration process is executed, and the normal mode with the set (changed) setting value is activated.

Note that after changing the desired setting value, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off without placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position (that is, leaving it in the ON position). However, also by turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 with the key A140 of the key device A130 placed in the off position, the normal mode with the set (changed) setting value is activated.

Furthermore, in the setting change mode, RAM erasure is executed. Such RAM erasure is confirmed by placing the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 in the OFF position. Examples of the timing for executing RAM erasure include the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that timing, and the timing when the key A140 is placed in the off position. That is, the timing for executing RAM erasure can be set as appropriate.

In addition, in the setting change mode (that is, in a state where the setting value can be changed by pressing the operation part A122 of the switch device A120), the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not placed in the off position ( That is, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off (with the key A140 still in the on position), the key A140 is removed from the key device A130, or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is turned off. When the pachinko machine A10 is turned on with the pachinko machine A10 placed in the off position, it will not start up in the normal mode and will be in an error state, and an error display will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Simultaneously with the third symbol display device 81, or instead of this, an error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

Next, to check the setting values set in the setting change mode, first turn off the power to the pachinko machine A10, place the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 to the on position, and then turn off the power to the pachinko machine A10. Turn on. As a result, a setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value is activated, and the setting value set at that time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

In addition, the setting value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed only on one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and not on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may be in a form in which they are not displayed.

In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the off position. This ends the setting confirmation mode. Further, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, and upon this detection, a power restoration process is executed, and the normal mode is activated with the setting value set at that time.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode, you can also turn off the power of the pachinko machine A10 and turn on the power of the pachinko machine A10 with the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 placed in the off position. Normal mode is activated with the set values.

In this embodiment, when the setting value change in the setting change mode is completed (determined), a 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined manner. An example of the predetermined mode is a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, "7") blinks at regular time intervals.

In addition, the 7-segment display can display 4 digits by arranging 4 pieces in parallel, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (2 pieces) (for example, "01" in the setting change mode) However, in the setting confirmation mode, "02" is displayed respectively), and the setting value is displayed by the latter two digits (for example, the first value is "01", the second value is " 02" is displayed, and the sixth value is "06".)

Next, each component (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) constituting the board box A100 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110.

108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. FIG. 110(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109.

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 includes a front wall portion A201 formed in the shape of a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a front wall portion A201 extending from the four sides of the front wall portion A201 to the back side (in the direction of arrow B). The wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and lower wall portion A203) that are erected and formed in a plate shape are mainly used. In preparation for this, each of these wall portions A201 to A205 is formed into a box shape with an open back side. Note that the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

A two-step difference is formed on the standing end surfaces (the surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. The step is formed by forming a first surface (first step) on the inner space side of the board box A100 (box cover A200), and forming a second surface on the outer side of the first surface (opposite to the inner space). A surface (first stage) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the height from the front wall A201 is smaller) and is a surface on which the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter referred to as "seat surface A206"). ).

The seat surface A206 is formed into a generally rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, with the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 being continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. A fastening hole A206a with a female screw threaded on the inner periphery is formed in four corner portions of the seat surface A206 (portions where the surfaces (first surfaces) of each wall portion A201 to A205 are connected). be done.

Therefore, the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) brings the outer edge side of the front side into contact with the seat surface A206, and inserts the screw ASC (Fig. 117(b) and FIG. 118(b)) is screwed into the fastening hole A206a, and is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall portion A201, and is fastened to the board box A100. It will be stored.

A plurality of engagement pieces A207 are arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203. The engagement piece A207 has a base that stands upright from the upper wall A202 and the lower wall A203 toward the back side (arrow B direction), and extends in one direction (arrow R direction) from the erected tip of the base. It is formed into a substantially L-shaped bent shape from the extending portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300, as described later.

A portion of the front wall A201 is recessed toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). The recessed portion includes a plate-shaped operation wall A210 that is located backward from the front wall A201 (towards the main controller 110), and each side of the operation wall A210 is connected to the front wall. The front wall portion A201 is formed by plate-shaped wall portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

That is, the front outer surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the board box A100 is located in a first area formed by the front wall part A201 and on a side closer to the main controller A110 than the first area. and a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

The operation wall part A210 is a part that forms the operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and has a generally horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front (the length in the arrows L and R directions is the same as the length in the arrows U and D directions). It is formed into a rectangular shape with elongated dimensions, and is arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

Note that the operation wall portion A210 is disposed on one side (on the rotation axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) of the longitudinal center of the box cover A200 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B).

The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 to the front wall portion A201, and connects the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. It is formed so as to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction closer to the main control device A110. Therefore, a space can be formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall part A220, which is connected to the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall part A210, and the first connection wall part A220 and The space as a whole (the space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded by combining the space on the front side of the operation wall A210.

In addition, in this embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall part A220 with respect to the front wall part A201 and the operation wall part A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. Thereby, it is possible to both expand the space on the front side of the operation wall A210 (in the direction of arrow F) and secure the space inside the board box A100.

The second connection wall A230 connects one side of the operation wall A210 in the transverse direction (arrow U direction side), and the third connection wall A240 connects one side of the operation wall A210 in the longitudinal direction (arrow R These are wall portions that connect one side of each side (direction side) to the front wall portion A201, and are arranged in a posture substantially orthogonal to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210.

The operation wall A210 has an opening A250 for protruding the operation part A122 to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted into and removed from the key device A130, and a main controller A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 are respectively formed to enable connection to a connector (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

The opening A250 has a front view shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the operation section A122 (approximately square when viewed from the front in this embodiment), and is approximately square in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R direction) of the operation wall section A210. placed in the center. A guide wall A251 is erected around the opening A250 from the front (outer surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210.

The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation part A122 in the pushing direction (direction of arrow B), and also guides the displacement in the direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (direction parallel to the plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). It is a part for regulating the fall (falling down), and is formed in the shape of a substantially square frame in front view surrounding the opening A250, and its inner circumferential surface is formed to be smoothly connected to the inner circumferential surface of the opening A250.

In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operation part A122 pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on). The dimensions are set such that the tip is at a lower position (the tip of the operating portion A122 protrudes further outward (in the direction of arrow F) than the erected tip of the guide wall A251). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the push-in operation of the operating portion A122 from being obstructed by the guide wall A251, and it is possible to improve the operability of the operating portion A122.

However, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is such that the tip of the guide wall A251 is higher than the tip of the operation section A122 pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on). It is also possible to set the dimensions to a position where the tip of the operating portion A122 is recessed inward (in the direction of arrow B) from the erected tip of the guide wall A251. This can prevent the operating portion A122 from being unintentionally pushed into the operating position (turning on) due to careless operation by the operator or contact (interference) with other members.

In addition, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is such that the tip of the operation portion A122 that has been pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on) is approximately the same as the tip of the operation portion A210 from the operation wall A210. The dimensions may be set so that the height positions are the same. When pushing in the operating part A122, the operator's fingers come into contact with the upright tip of the guide wall A251, so the operator can recognize that the operating part A122 has been pushed to the operating position based on this contact. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

A covering portion A270 is provided on the operation wall portion A210 so as to protrude from its front surface (outer surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow F). The covering part A270 is a part that covers a part of the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112(a)), and is a peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape that stands up from the operation wall part A210. It mainly includes a portion A271 and a plate-shaped end wall portion A272 that closes the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 (forms an end surface), and a part of the tip side of the key device A130 is stored in the internal space. Ru.

The peripheral wall portion A271 includes a base portion A271a formed in a cylindrical shape with a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of protrusions that protrude outward in the radial direction from two opposing locations on the base portion A271a (positions having a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees). A part A271b. The entire peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and protrusion A271b) is formed to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction (direction of arrows F and B). Therefore, the operation wall A210 has a shape that is approximately the same as the cross-sectional shape of the peripheral wall A271 (base A271a and protrusion A271b) (i.e., a shape in which two opposing portions of the circle protrude outward in the radial direction). An opening is formed (see FIG. 110(b)).

The opening A260 is formed in the protruding tip surface of the covering portion A270, that is, in the end wall portion A272. As a result, the end wall portion A272 is formed into a plate shape extending radially inward from the inner circumferential surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end wall portion A272 is formed into a plate shape (cantilever beam) whose base end is fixed to the inner circumferential surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and whose one end (opening A260 side) is free.

Here, the opening A260 is formed only in an area corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the OFF position and the ON position (the area necessary to allow the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 includes a first sector-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees to allow displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, and a first sector-shaped opening on the other side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portions (on one side and the opposite side) is formed in a combined shape with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

As a result, the end wall portion A272 has an annular portion A272a extending radially inward from the inner circumferential surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and having a substantially annular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). and a square portion A272b extending radially inward from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). The square portions A272b are disposed in a posture that tapers radially inward when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), and are formed at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

Note that the key A140 has a radius of rotation of a portion on one side of the rotation center and a radius of rotation of a portion of the portion on the other side of the rotation center of different dimensions. Therefore, in the opening A260, the first sector-shaped opening and the second sector-shaped opening have different sizes (radii).

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 are protrudingly provided on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210. These first protrusions A211 and second protrusions A212 are protrusions that extend in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. .

Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) opposite to the edge of the key A140 in the off position, and One end of the protrusion A212 is connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) opposite to the edge of the key A140 in the on position. That is, one end of the first protrusion A211 and one end of the second protrusion A212 are respectively connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions where the phases are different by approximately 180 degrees.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210, there is a display section at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). are formed respectively. The display section is a section that shows information about the operation position (rotation position) of the key A140, and "OFF" and "ON" are displayed. That is, the key A140 with its edge facing toward one end of the first protrusion A211 is placed in the off position (see FIG. 115(a)), and the key A140 with its edge facing toward one end of the second protrusion A212 is placed in the off position. A140 is placed in the on position (see FIG. 115(b)).

The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed in series (in one row) (arranged in parallel) along the edge of the front wall A201.

Upright walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall section A210. The standing wall A280 includes a first standing wall A281, a second standing wall A282, a third standing wall A283, and a fourth standing wall A284. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110(b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the standing wall A280.

The first standing wall A281 is arranged between the opening A250 and the second connecting wall A230, and is formed into a plate shape that is substantially parallel to each of the second connecting wall A230 and the lower wall A203. The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are arranged to face each other with the opening A250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A281. The fourth erected wall A284 is arranged between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first erected wall A281.

The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are connected to the first erected wall A281 on one side and to the lower wall A203 on the other side, respectively. That is, the first erected wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283. Further, the fourth erected wall A284 is connected to the second erected wall A282 on one side and to the third erected wall A283 on the other side.

Further, the standing wall A290 includes a first standing wall A291, a second standing wall A292, and a third standing wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by each of these standing walls A291, A292, and A293 (Fig. 110 (see (b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the standing wall A290.

The first standing wall A291 is arranged between the opening A260 and the second connecting wall A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connecting wall A230 and the lower wall A203. The second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293 are arranged to face each other with the opening A260 in between, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A291.

The second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293 are connected to the first standing wall A291 on one side and to the lower wall A203 on the other side, respectively. That is, the first erected wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. Further, the fourth erected wall A284 is connected to the second erected wall A292 on one side and to the third erected wall A293 on the other side.

The erected wall A290 is formed in a size that surrounds the periphery of the covering portion A270 (at a position outward from the covering portion A270) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is aligned with the inner surface (straight line) of the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. The outer surface (arc) of the protrusion A271b on the peripheral wall A271 of the covering portion A270 is inscribed in the inner surface (straight line) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall A203, respectively.

The first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 in the standing walls A280, A290 are the The standing heights from the surface) are the same, and the standing end surfaces (faces in the direction of arrow B) of the standing walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are the same as the seating surface A206. placed at the same height.

Therefore, in the standing walls A280, A290, the standing end surfaces of the second standing walls A282, A292 and the third standing walls A283, A293 are connected to the seating surface A206, and the standing walls A280, A290 are connected to the seating surface A206 and each of the standing walls A281, A293. , A282, A292, A283, and A293 are located on the same plane (forming the same plane). As a result, when the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206), the first erected walls A281, A291, the second erected walls A282, A292, and the third erected walls The erected end surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the walls A283 and A293 are brought into contact with the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Here, in the standing wall A280, the length dimension (arrow U, D direction dimension) of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 is different from the length dimension (arrow L, direction dimension) of the first standing wall A281. R-direction dimension). Therefore, as will be described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 comes into contact with the inner surface of the standing wall A280 (second standing wall A282 and third standing wall A283), the second standing wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 may be deformed and the tilting of the switch device A120 may not be suppressed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the opposing sides of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are connected by the fourth standing wall A284, the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall Deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, tilting of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, by arranging the fourth erected wall A284 in a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume near the fourth erected wall A284 increases. This corresponds to the formation of parts where the plate thickness is large, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other parts, molding defects may occur in areas where the plate thickness is partially large and in the vicinity. bring about

On the other hand, the height of the fourth wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the heights of the first wall A281, the second wall A282, and the third wall A283. As a result, while ensuring the function of suppressing deformation of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283, the material volume near the fourth standing wall A284 is reduced, resulting in molding defects due to the difference in shrinkage rate. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, as will be described later, when the switch device A120 is tilted in the direction of the arrow D, the switch The outer surface of the device A120 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth erected wall A284, and its tilting can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, tilting at a smaller angle than when it is brought into contact with the lower wall portion A203). .

The inner surfaces of the first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 of the standing walls A280, A290 have a mark on the standing tip side (arrow B Taper surfaces A280a and A290a, which are sloped surfaces that approach the outer surface side as one goes in the direction (direction), are formed, respectively. As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) at the erected tip of each of the erected walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 is gradually reduced toward the erected tip side, and each erected wall A281 , A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are made smaller in area.

Note that the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. Further, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are applied to the outer surfaces of the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 on the side of the standing ends of the standing walls A280 and A290. It may be provided.

An erected wall A208 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the front wall portion A201. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned upright walls A280 and A290, an upright wall A209 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall A210.

The standing wall A208 is formed in the shape of a box that connects plate-like bodies on four sides and is open on the side opposite to the front wall part A201. 4)). Further, the standing wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, is formed in a box shape with an open side opposite to the operation wall A210, and is a connector mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). is formed at a position corresponding to . Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the standing wall A208, and the connector is surrounded by the standing wall A209.

Here, the plurality of erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 surrounding the plurality of objects, respectively, are such that the height position of the erected end surface of one or more erected walls is higher than that of the remaining erected walls. The height position is set to be different from the height position of the tip surface. In this embodiment, the height position of the erected end face of the erected wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erected end face of the erected walls A208, A280, and A290 (that is, it is spaced apart from the printed circuit board A119). ). As a result, even if there are dimensional tolerances of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, A290, mounting tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 to the box cover A200, or dimensional tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variations in flatness), Compared to the erected wall A209, the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A208, A280, and A290 can be more easily brought into close contact with the printed circuit board A119. That is, it is possible to ensure that the standing wall surrounding the highly important object is in close contact with the printed circuit board A119.

Next, the box base A300 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111(a) is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111(b) is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 includes a rear wall portion A301 formed in the shape of a substantially horizontally rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a rear wall portion A301 that stands upright from the four sides of the rear wall portion A301 toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). It mainly includes wall parts (an upper wall part A302, a lower wall part A303, a left wall part A304 and a right wall part A305 that connect the upper wall part A302 and the lower wall part A303) that are provided and formed in a plate shape, These wall portions A301 to A305 form a box shape with an open front side. Note that the box base A300 is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

A plurality of engaged parts A307 are arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals on the upper wall part A302 and the lower wall part A303. The engaged portion A307 is a portion to which the engaging piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed to protrude downward (in the direction of arrow D).

To connect the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, a phase is set on the side opposite to the extending direction of the extending portion of the engaging piece A207 (in the direction of arrow L) by the length of the extending portion. The boxes are made to face each other in shifted positions, and the box cover A200 is pushed toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters into the space between the adjacent engaged parts A307, so that the box cover A200 is moved relative to the box base A300 in the extending direction ( slide in the direction of arrow R).
As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters into the back side (in the direction of the arrow B) of the engaged part A307, and the two are engaged (displacement of the box cover A200 in the direction of the arrow F is restricted).

Next, the main controller A110 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. 112(a) is a front perspective view of the main controller A110, FIG. 112(b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller A110, and FIG. 113 is a main controller in portion CXIII of FIG. 112(a). FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the control device A110.

114(a) is a front view of the main controller A110 as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 114(b) is a front view of the main controller A110 as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a). FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a).

In addition, in FIGS. 112 to 114, in order to simplify the drawings and make it easier to understand, only the main components of the various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are illustrated, and illustrations of other components are omitted. .

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main controller A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Printed circuit board A119 has various electronic components (IC, resistor, capacitor, transistor) mounted on a board made of insulating resin material, and the circuit (pattern) connecting these electronic components is made of conductive material such as copper foil. The insertion hole A112 is formed at four corners.

The printed circuit board A119 is attached to the board box A100 with the front side (the side on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the side in the direction of arrow F) facing the back side of the box cover A200 (front wall part A201). will be stored in.

In this case, at least areas AS1 and AS2 of the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 are in contact with the upright end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 of the box cover A200 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 114). (see (a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and the areas AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. In addition, in FIG. 114(a), only a portion of the area where the seat surface A206 comes into contact that is connected to the upright walls A280 and A290 is illustrated.

The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operating portion A122 so as to be able to be displaced (pushed), and a coil spring (disposed inside the main body A123) that applies a biasing force to return the operating portion A122 to the initial position. (biasing means (not shown)), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123 whose contact is switched according to the displacement of the operating part A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact. Be prepared.

The main body A123 includes a base A123a formed in a substantially cubic shape and mounted on the front of the printed circuit board A119, and a cylindrical protrusion A123b protruding from the front (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the base A123a, The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall A210 face each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, the part protruding from the bottom surface of the base A123a (part of the bottom surface of the base A123a, and the part from which the leg A121 protrudes) is abutted on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base A123a from which the legs A121 protrude) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base A123a may be raised and disposed from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

Moreover, in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall A210 may be in contact with each other.

The legs A121 protrude from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A123a of the main body A123, and are inserted into the holes opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side, as described above. The protruding part on the back side is soldered. Thereby, the switch device A120 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The key device A130 includes a cylinder part A132 formed as a lock that allows rotation of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a compatible key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder part A132 is arranged inside. A contact point whose contact is switched depending on the state of the main body A133 that holds the main body A133, the support A134 that supports the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and the cylinder part A132 (rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b) (not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact point thereof.

The main body A133 has a base A133a that is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape and holds the cylinder part A132 on its inner peripheral side (inside), and two locations on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A133a (positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees). ), and an end portion A133c that forms an end surface on the tip side (in the direction of arrow F) of the base portion A133a.

In this embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom of the main body A133 from which the legs A131 protrude) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 from which the legs A131 protrude) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be raised and disposed from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

The end surface of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position one step lower (on the arrow B direction side) from the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. An opening that is circular in front view is formed in the end portion A133c at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, and the key A140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (inner tube A132a) through this opening. .

When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, a part of the front end side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the main body A133 is housed in the internal space of the covering part A270.

Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protruding portion A133b of the main body A133 is It is formed in a size that is equal to or slightly smaller than the recessed shape of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 in the portion A270, so that the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is placed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

In addition, in this case, there is a predetermined gap between the front surface (end surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the back surface (surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end wall portion A272 in the covering portion A270. It is formed. Note that it may be configured such that the front surface of the end portion A133c and the back surface of the end wall portion A272 are in contact with each other.

The legs A131 protrude from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A133a of the main body A133, and are inserted into the holes opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side, as described above. The protruding part on the back side is soldered. Thereby, the key device A130 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The support body A134 has a base portion A134a that has an opening formed approximately in the center and through which the main body A133 (base portion A133a and protrusion portion A133b) is inserted, and a base portion A134a that extends from two opposing sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. It is equipped with a pair of extending portions A134b that extend and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c that extend from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. is formed.

The extension length of the extension part A134b from the base part A134a is made larger than the extension length of the reinforcement part A134c from the base part A134a, and the extension end surface of the extension part A134b (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) is brought into contact with the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. Further, a leg A134b1 is provided to protrude from the extending end surface of the extending portion A134b. The support body A134 is disposed on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 and becomes independent by inserting the leg A134b1 into a hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side and soldering the portion protruding to the rear side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the support A134 can prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119.

Note that a gap may be provided between the extending end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the extension part A134b and the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the support body A134 may be raised and disposed from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be improved by the gap.

On the other hand, the extension length of the extension part A134b from the base part A134a and the extension length from the reinforcement part A134c may be the same dimension. That is, the extending end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the reinforcing portion A134c may also be configured to abut against the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extending portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and it is possible to more firmly prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119. Further, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

In addition, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, the leg A134b1 is formed into a cross-sectional shape bent in a substantially dogleg shape or a substantially S-shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 while being elastically deformed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which That is, the leg A134b1 may be elastically engaged with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119 by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1. Since soldering can be omitted, manufacturing costs can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to elastic engagement with the hole of the leg A134b1, the leg A134b1 may also be configured to be soldered. It is possible to more firmly prevent the leg A134b1 from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support body A134 that supports the tilting of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

The leg A134b1 has a width dimension (dimension in the direction of arrows L and B, dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 114(b)) set to a larger value than the thickness dimension of the plate-like body constituting the support body A134 (that is, the cross section of the leg A134b1 The hole in the printed circuit board A119 through which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is increased, and when the tilting of the main body A133 is supported by the support body A134, the base portion of the leg A134b1 (the connecting portion with the extension portion A134b) can be prevented from being deformed or broken.

However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be approximately the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be square.

Further, by forming the reinforcing portions A134c on two opposing sides of the support body A134, it is possible to restrict bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. This increases the rigidity of the support body A134 as a whole and enhances the function of supporting the main body A133, so that tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more firmly regulated (suppressed).

Next, the detailed configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119.

FIG. 115(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 when the key A140 is operated to the OFF position, and FIG. 115(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 when the key A140 is operated to the ON position. FIG. 116(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 116(b) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 in FIG. It is a partially enlarged side view of board box A100 as seen in the direction of arrow CXVIb.

FIG. 117(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 118(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in a).

FIG. 119(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116(a), and FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of box A100.

In addition, in FIGS. 117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawings and make it easier to understand, the internal structure is not shown and the cross section is given a single hatch to schematically illustrate the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the board box A100 has a covering portion A270 protruding from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200. An opening A260 is formed in the end wall portion A272 that forms the tip end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign object such as a wire to reach the opening A260.

For example, if the opening A260 cannot be seen by a person committing fraud due to a shield or the like, and it is difficult to insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire directly into the opening A260, insert the tip of the foreign object such as a wire into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method is performed in which the opening A260 is reached by sliding on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the wall portion A210).

On the other hand, since the covering part A270 protrudes from the front (outer surface) of the operation wall A210, if the tip of a foreign object such as a wire slides on the front (outer surface) of the operation wall A210. , the tip of the foreign object such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering section A270 (the outer circumferential surface of the peripheral wall section A271) to stop further advancement (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign objects such as wires. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted through the opening A260.

The covering part A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, the side in the direction of arrow F) of the key device A130 of the main controller A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

Thereby, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (the gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c, and the peripheral wall A271 The path formed by the gap between the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) is bent, and the wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (the path formed by the gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c) is bent. A wall against which the tip of the foreign object abuts, that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 into a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support body A134 (the horizontal dimension in FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)) is the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). (horizontal dimension).

Thereby, the upper surface of the support body A134 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (formed by the gap between the peripheral wall A271, the base A133a, and the protrusion A133b) The wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (the wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire that passes through the gap between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b hits, that is, the support body A134) Upper surface.In addition, for foreign objects such as wires whose traveling direction is changed by hitting the upper surface of the support body A134, the inner surfaces of each standing wall A291, A292, A293 and the lower wall portion A203) are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

A protrusion A271b is formed in the peripheral wall A271 of the covering part A270, a protrusion A133b is formed in the main body A133, and the base A133a of the main body A133 is on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall A271. The protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271.

This allows the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b (the surface in the direction of arrows L and R) to face the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b (the surface in the direction of arrows L and R). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (in the circumferential direction due to the gap between the peripheral wall A271, the base A133a, and the protrusion A133b) The wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (the tip of a foreign object such as a wire that passes along the circumferential direction through the gap between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) (i.e., the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b and the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIG. 118(a)).

In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). Thereby, the upper surface of the protrusion A123b (the surface in the direction of arrow F) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface in the direction of arrow B). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A250, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (between the guide wall A251, the operation wall A210, the operation section A122, and the protrusion A123b) A wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (a wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire that passes through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operating part A122 hits), i.e., The upper surface of the protrusion A123b.Also, for foreign objects such as wires whose traveling direction has been changed by hitting the upper surface of the protrusion A123b, the inner surface of each standing wall A281, A282, A283 and the lower wall A203) is used as a route. can be formed inside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b)).

As described above, the covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip side (one end side, the side in the direction of arrow F) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

This allows the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 to face each other in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction of the key A140 (a direction parallel to a plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or collision of another member with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction thereof, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170, so that tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated).

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage or bending of the leg A131, detachment of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

An end wall portion A272 is formed at the protruding tip (on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the covering portion A270, and this end wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. Thereby, the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the cross-sectional area of the path through which a foreign object such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100 and tampering with the main control device A110.

In particular, in the end wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270, square portions A272b extend radially inward from two locations on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, the protruding distal end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the covering part A270 is open only in the region that allows the displacement of the key A140 (the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140), and the protruding end surface of the covering part A270 is open. All other regions of the tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) serve as the end wall portion A272. Therefore, the area of the opening A260 can be minimized, making it difficult for foreign objects such as wire to be inserted into the opening A260. Furthermore, since the opposing area between the inner surface of the end wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening A260, the foreign object such as the wire will pass through. It can be difficult to do.

In this way, in order to make the opening A260 have an irregular shape (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are opposed and combined), the end wall part A272 has a relatively complicated shape in which a pair of square parts A272b protrude from the inner edge of an annular part A272a. It is formed into a shape. In this case, the end wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) has a plate shape with a constant thickness (a cantilever beam whose base end is fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extended tip) is free). Since it is formed in a shape of 1.5 mm, the shape can be simplified and its moldability can be ensured. As a result, yield can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

Here, only the peripheral wall part A271 is formed in the covering part A270, and the end wall part A272 is not formed (that is, the inner edge of the protruding tip side (direction of arrow F) of the peripheral wall part A271 is the opening A260. configuration), when an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction thereof, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress the tilting of the key device A130. (Regulation) Yes.

In contrast, in this embodiment, an end wall portion A272 is formed on the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge of the end wall portion A272 (the portion forming the opening A260). can be brought into contact. That is, a position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 is tilted due to the action of the external force described above can be brought into contact with the end wall portion A272. As a result, the tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated), and damage to the box cover A200 (covering portion A270) can be suppressed.

Further, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall part A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall part A271. Therefore, as described above, the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R) and the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R) are made to face each other. (See FIG. 118(a)).

Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or collision of another member with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in the rotational direction is applied to the key A140, the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R) is turned into the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R). ), the rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130 can be restricted.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage or bending of the leg A131, detachment of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

Here, for example, the operation section A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 may be carelessly or violently operated by the operator, or the operation section A122 may Or, due to a collision of another member with the key A140, an external force is applied to the operation part A122 or the key A140 in the pushing direction or a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (a direction parallel to the plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). If the switch device A120, key device A130, or key A140 is actuated, there is a risk that the switch device A120, the key device A130, or the key A140 will be tilted, and the box cover A200 (especially the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) may be deformed and damaged due to their contact. .

On the other hand, standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall portion A210, and these erecting walls A280 and A290 are arranged such that their erecting end surfaces ( 117(a) and 117(b)).

As a result, in addition to improving the rigidity of the operation wall A210 due to the upright walls A280 and A290 (functioning as ribs), this also improves the rigidity of the operation wall A210 and the covering section A270 (deformation prevention The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as means).
As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed and damage thereof can be suppressed.

Further, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted due to the action of an external force, the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the standing wall A280, A290, and the switch device A120 or The tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated). That is, the portion that comes into contact with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 to suppress its tilting is shared not only with the operation wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270 but also with the standing walls A280 and A290, and the load is accordingly reduced. Can be dispersed. Also from this point of view, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the upright end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front of the printed circuit board A119, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as a wall against which the tip of the foreign object such as a wire (a wall that restricts further progress). Thereby, it is possible to suppress unauthorized access to the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

The standing walls A280 and A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 118(b)). That is, the area AS1 where the upright end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 (the surface in the direction of arrow B) and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface in the direction of arrow F) come into contact. , AS2 has a substantially rectangular frame shape and is formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114(a)).

Therefore, a path for foreign matter such as wire to enter the inside of the board box A100 can be blocked (divided) by the erected walls A280 and A290. In other words, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250, A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, its progress outside the space surrounded by the standing walls A280, A290 and the lower wall A203 is restricted. I can do it. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unauthorized access to the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Further, the standing walls A280, A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203, so that the standing walls A280, A290 are erected (functioning as ribs). Not only can the rigidity of the operation wall part A210 be further improved by doing so, but also the rigidity of the operation wall part A210 can be further improved by Even if an external force is applied in any direction within the plane including the above-described structure, the function as a support section (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall section A210 and the covering section A270 can be reliably exerted. As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed and damage thereof can be suppressed.

In addition, the first standing wall A291 is arranged in an attitude that is perpendicular to the key A140 in the off position and parallel to the key A140 in the on position, and The third erected wall A293 is arranged so as to be perpendicular to the key A140 in the on position and parallel to the key A140 in the off position. Therefore, the erected wall A290 can efficiently function as a support section (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall section A210 and the covering section A270.

That is, when an external force in the direction of arrows U and D or the direction of arrows L and R is applied to the key A140 among the external forces in the direction parallel to the plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R, the standing wall While the load that A290 receives (the load capacity that the standing wall A290 should exert as a support part) is maximum, an external force is applied in a direction that is inclined by a predetermined angle with respect to the directions of arrows U and D or the directions of arrows L and R. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 will be rotated due to the inclination of the acting direction of the external force, and the external force will escape due to the rotation, and the load received by the standing wall A290 (the standing wall A290 will act as a support part) will be increased. load capacity) will be lower. As a result, by arranging the attitude of the erected wall A290 as described above, the erected wall A290 can efficiently perform its function as a support part (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall part A210 and the covering part A270. be able to.

The standing walls A280, A290 (second standing walls A282, A292 and third standing walls A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall part A203, so using the rigidity of the box cover A200, the standing walls The rigidity of A280, A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the box cover A200 as a whole can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall A210 and the lower wall A203 via the standing walls A280, A290. Therefore, the function of the standing walls A280 and A290 as supporting parts (deformation suppressing means) that support the operation wall part A210 and the covering part A270 can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

The surface of the printed circuit board A119 to which the electronic components are connected by soldering is the side facing the box base A300 (the side opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted), and the surface of the printed circuit board A119 is the side facing the box base A300 (the side opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted). , A290 and the areas AS1 and AS2 where the seat surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 abuts (see FIG. 114(a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and such area AS1 , AS2 are formed as flat surfaces.

Therefore, the end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 (the surface in the direction of arrow B) are made to easily come into close contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface in the direction of arrow F), and the upright walls A280 and A290 are It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap with the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can reliably function as walls against which the tips of foreign objects such as wires inserted through the openings A250 and A260 collide.

The first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 in the standing walls A280, A290 have tapered surfaces A280a, A290a, so that the standing tips The area of the surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). Thereby, the surface pressure on the upright end surface that is brought into contact with the printed circuit board A119 can be increased, and it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted between the printed circuit board A119 and the upright walls A280 and A290.

In this case, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surfaces of the upright ends of the upright walls A280 and A290 (the surfaces facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130), so that the moldability is improved. At the same time, insertion of foreign objects such as wires into the inside of the board box A100 can be suppressed.

That is, by reducing the area of the erected end surfaces by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a, A290a) that gradually approach the outer surface side toward the erected ends (in the direction of arrow B), the shape of the erected walls A280, A290 is changed. The fluidity of the resin within the mold can be ensured by making the change gradual. Therefore, moldability can be improved.

Furthermore, when the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 come into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. (See FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it can be made difficult to pass between (intrude between) the front end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the inside of the board box A100.

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 are protrudingly provided on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210. One end of these first protrusions A211 and second protrusions A212 is connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (base A271a or protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIG. 115(a) and FIG. 115( b)).

Thereby, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can function as ribs for increasing rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, when the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 comes into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the rigidity of each protrusion A211, 222 is used to further prevent the switch device A120 or the key device A130 from tilting. This can be reliably suppressed, and damage to the covering portion A270 can also be suppressed.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210, there is a display section at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). (“ON” and “OFF”) are respectively formed. Thereby, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can be made to function as an instruction line for pointing to a position corresponding to predetermined information displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) is the end surface (the surface gripped by fingers) of the key A140 in the off position. (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A140) (see FIG. 115(a)), and one end of the second protrusion A212 is located at the same phase position as the narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A270 (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A140) (see FIG. 115(a)). The position connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the base A271a) is at the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the OFF position, causing the key A140 to cover the end surface in the direction of arrow U (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by fingers) on the covering portion A270 (end wall portion A272). ), the first protrusion A211 is located on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(a)), and the first protrusion A211 is in the on position. When an external force acts on the key A140 located in the key A140 and the key A140 is tilted in the direction (in the direction of the arrow L) in which the end face on the arrow L direction abuts against the covering part A270 (end face wall part A272), The second protrusion A212 is located on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted due to the action of an external force, the end surface of the key A140 (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface to be gripped by fingers) receives a load (the end surface of the key A140 comes into contact with the end surface of the key A140). (portion) can be efficiently reinforced by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

Note that the second connection wall portion A230 can suppress the external force acting on the key A140 in the off position in the opposite direction to the case described above (force to displace the key A140 in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 115(a). ), the first connection wall A220 can suppress the application of an external force in the opposite direction to the above case (force to displace the key A140 in the direction of arrow R) on the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115). (see (b)).

That is, as will be described later, the operation wall A210 is formed into a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and the other side (arrow D direction side) is open (no connection wall is formed). Further, the key device A130 is located on one side (the first connection wall portion A220 side) of the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the key device A130 The distance to the connection wall A240 is increased.

Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall A240 side, the hand or other structure of the worker located on the side of these spaces may collide with the key A140, and the key A140 may be moved by the arrow D. An external force that causes a displacement in the direction or in the direction of arrow L is likely to be applied. Therefore, by forming the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 on the side that suppresses the tilting of the key device A130 against such external force (the side that receives it), material costs can be reduced and rigidity can be ensured. It can be done efficiently.

As described above, the square portions A272b of the end wall portion A272 are disposed at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees, and are formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). In this case, the length dimensions of the two sides (the outer edge, the edge forming the opening A260) of the triangular shape of the square portion A272b are set to different values (that is, the front view shape is formed as a scalene triangle).

Specifically, with respect to the key A140 in the off position, the square part A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall part A220 is the side (outer edge) facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped with fingers) of the key A140. With respect to the key A140, which has a longer (larger) length dimension and is in the off position, the square part A272b on the side far from the first connection wall part A220 (opposite side across the key A140) is the gripping surface of the key A140. The length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the side (outer edge) is shortened (reduced) (see FIG. 115(a)).

Therefore, in other words, the length of the square part A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall part A220 is the side (outer edge) of the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by fingers) of the key A140 in the on position. is shortened (smaller), and the rectangular portion A272b located on the side far from the first connection wall portion A220 has a longer (larger) length dimension of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the on position. (See FIG. 115(b)).

As described above, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall A240 side, the hand or other structure of the worker located on the side of these spaces may collide with the key A140, causing the key A140 to collide with the key A140. According to the square portion A272b of this embodiment, the side on the side that receives the key A140 on which the external force is applied in the direction of arrow D or arrow F is likely to be applied. Since the length dimension (outer edge) is increased, the rigidity of the square portion A272b can be efficiently increased, and tilting of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. Further, by suppressing the surface pressure, damage to the square portion A272b can be suppressed.

The front outer surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the board box A100 includes a first area formed by the front wall A201 and an operation wall located closer to the main controller A110 than the first area. and a second region formed by the portion A210, and openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

As a result, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at positions recessed from the outer surface (the first region formed by the front wall portion A201) of the board box A100 (box cover A200), and the first region and the second region are connected. Steps (first connection wall part A220, second connection wall part A230, and third connection wall part A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, compared to the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (first region), it is possible to make the distance to the openings A250 and A260 longer for those who commit fraud, and The openings A250 and A260 can be made difficult to visually recognize, making it difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260.

Here, considering heat dissipation from the main controller A110, the distance between the board box A100 and the main controller A110 (for example, the distance between the front of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (inner space )). On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far away from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, operability will deteriorate.

In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily ensured, and as described above, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the operation wall portion A210 (second region). It is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A100 from A260. However, when operating the switch device A120 or the key device A130, the steps connecting the first area and the second area (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A240) must be removed. The hands of the operator (operator) interfere with the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 deteriorates.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall A220 is formed to be inclined (downward inclination) in a direction approaching the main control device A110 as it goes from the front wall A201 to the operation wall A210. The space on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210 can be expanded by the amount of this inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall A220). As a result, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

When viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (arrows L, R) that extends in the other direction (arrows U, D) orthogonal to the one direction. 115(a) and 115(b)).

The key device A130 is arranged so that the key A140 in the off position is in the other direction (direction of arrows U and D) described above (see FIG. 115(a)). That is, the key A140 in the OFF position has the surface gripped by fingers facing the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows L and R) of the operation wall A210 (second region), and the key A140 in the OFF position when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). The longitudinal direction of is in a posture along the lateral direction (direction of arrows U and D) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

Thereby, a space can be secured on the side where the surface of the key A140 in the OFF position that is held by the fingers is desired (the right side and the left side in FIG. 115(a)). Therefore, when inserting the key A140 into or pulling it out from the key device A130, the fingers (e.g., thumb and index finger) holding the key A140 touch the step (first connection wall) connecting the first region and the second region. It is possible to suppress interference with the portion A220, the second connecting wall portion A230, and the third connecting wall portion A240). As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (on the first connection wall A220 side) of the center in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall A210 (second region), as described above. As the first connecting wall portion A220 is formed with a downward slope, when the key A140 is held and operated (rotated from the OFF position to the ON position, or vice versa), the key A140 is rotated downwardly. It is possible to prevent fingers different from the gripping hand from interfering with the step connecting the first region and the second region (first connection wall A220, second connection wall A230, and third connection wall A240). As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

For example, when grasping the key A140 in the off position with the index finger and thumb, the little finger and ring finger can be placed using the space secured by the downward slope of the first connection wall part A220, and from the off position to the on position. When operating (rotating) the key A140, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward slope of the first connecting wall portion A220.

In addition, when holding the key A140 in the on position with the index finger and thumb, the operation wall A210 (second area) is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the key device A130 is used for operation with the little finger or ring finger. By locating the wall portion A210 (second region) on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction, the space on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 is used for arrangement. When operating (rotating) the key A140 from the OFF position to the ON position, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side). can.

In addition, in the switch device A120, the position (standing height from the operation wall A210) of the protruding end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operating part A122 in the initial position is the same as that of the protruding part of the covering part A270. It is set at a lower position (smaller dimension) than the position (standing height from the operation wall A210) of the tip end surface (the front surface of the end wall A272, the surface in the direction of arrow F). Therefore, interference between the operating portion A122 and fingers when operating the key A140 can be suppressed.

The operation wall A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (a first connection wall A220 and a third connection wall A connection surface (second connection wall A230) is formed on one side in the width direction (arrow U direction side), and a connection surface (second connection wall portion A230) is formed on the other side in the width direction (arrow D direction side). It is assumed that the connecting surface is not formed.

Thereby, the other side of the operation wall A210 (second region) in the lateral direction (the side in the direction of arrow D) can be opened. That is, this opening allows the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) to communicate with the outside space. Therefore, when holding the key A140 with fingers and operating it (inserting it into the key device A130, pulling it out from the key device A130, rotating it from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is Utilize the space (external space) connected to the above-mentioned opening as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) fingers (little finger, ring finger) different from the gripping fingers (for example, thumb and index finger). I can do it. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

Here, as described above, considering the heat dissipation from the main controller A110, the distance between the board box A100 and the main controller A110 (for example, the distance between the front of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200) distance (internal space)).

In this case, the steps (first connection wall A220, second connection wall A230, and third connection wall A240) connecting the front wall A201 (first region) and the operation wall A210 (second region) In this case, the first connecting wall portion A220 is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, while the second connecting wall portion A230 and the third connecting wall portion A240 are connected to the front wall portion A201 (first region) and It is formed in a form substantially perpendicular to the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

That is, by tilting the first connecting wall A220 downward, interference with fingers is suppressed and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, while the second connecting wall A230 and the third connecting wall A240 are tilted downward. By not tilting (by making only the first connection wall portion A220 tilt downward), it is possible to secure the volume of the internal space of the board box A100 to accommodate heat dissipation from the main control device A110.

In this way, even if only the first connecting wall part A220 was tilted downward and the others (second connecting wall part A230 and third connecting wall part A240) were not tilted, interference with fingers could be suppressed. The operation wall A210 (second region) has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the operation wall A210 (second region) is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the longitudinal center of the operation wall A210 (second region). ), the key device A130 is arranged in close proximity to the key device A130.

In addition, by forming the third connection wall part A240 on the other longitudinal side (the opposite side to the first connection wall part A220) of the operation wall part A210 (second region), the third connection wall part A240 The switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140) can be protected. For example, the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 during manufacturing can be prevented from colliding with the switch device A120 or the key device A130.

FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. Note that in FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and make it easier to understand, some of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main control device A110) are omitted, and Only the main components are shown with reference numerals.

As shown in FIG. 120, as described above, in the pachinko machine A10, the hinges 18 (rotation shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side in front view. An inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 as an opening/closing axis on the side where the inner frame 12 is provided so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

Here, in a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened toward the front side as an axis for opening and closing the hinge 18, if the opening angle can be made sufficiently large (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, approximately 90 degrees) ), the operator stands in a position facing the front of the board box A100 and opens the switch device A120 and key device in the manner described above (as explained in FIGS. 115 to 119). A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

On the other hand, if the opening angle cannot be made sufficiently large (for example, if the opening angle can only be approximately 45 degrees, the opening will cause the outer frame 11 and the inner frame to move into the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12. 12), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured.

That is, the board box A100 is arranged such that the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region) (for example, the direction of arrows R and L in FIG. 115(a)) is substantially perpendicular to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation axis). 115(a) in a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation shaft), and one longitudinal direction (arrow in FIG. 115(a)) L direction side) is positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is disposed on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is disposed on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

As a result, when you insert your hand into the back of the inner frame 12 (the front of the board box A100) from between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 at the same height position as the operation wall A210 (second area), The thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb are connected to the key device by forming the space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (i.e., the operation wall portion A210 (second region) into a horizontally long rectangle in front view). A space on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operating wall A210 by locating A130 on one side of the longitudinal center of the operating wall A210 (second region) It can be placed using

With this arrangement, the switch device A120 can be operated (depressed) with the thumb or index finger, and the key device A130 can be operated (pushed) when the key A140 is rotated. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and forefinger that grip the key A140, the space secured by tilting the first connecting wall A220 downward can be used. As a result, operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

Note that the above-described setting changes (operations of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the substrate box A100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. 120. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be located closer to the front side (the front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

In a state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side as the axis for opening and closing the hinge 18, the board box A100 is further opened to the front side (toward the front side in the paper of FIG. 120) as the rotating shaft A410 is the axis for opening and closing. Also good. This allows the operator to stand in a position facing the front of the board box A100 in a position that does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and to operate the switch device A120 or The key device A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

In this case, the main control device A110 (input/output port 205) is connected to various devices (power supply device 115, dispensing control device 111, audio lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoids 209, The other ends (connectors) of the electrical connection lines, one end of which is connected to the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the second symbol retention lamp 84 (see FIG. 4), are respectively connected.

Here, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed regardless of the connection state of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, there is a possibility that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be easily operated illegally. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of multiple electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be reduced. There is a risk of sexual deterioration.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is changed depending on the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. This makes it possible to suppress fraud and improve work efficiency.

Specifically, in this embodiment, at least one end of the electrical connection line (connector) of the plurality of electrical connection lines is connected to the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113, and the other end (connector) is connected to the main control device A110. (input/output port 205), regardless of the connection status of other electrical connection lines (i.e., whether it is connected or disconnected, or even if both connections and disconnections are mixed). ), the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted. This makes it possible to suppress fraud and improve work efficiency.

That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 Since the operations of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are prohibited, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operations of the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

On the other hand, if the connection of a predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) to the main control device A110 is secured and fraud can be suppressed, connects other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol holding lamp 84 to main controller A110). By allowing the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 even if the electrical connection line (electrical connection line for ).

That is, when the main control device A110 is opened to the front side (toward the front side of the paper in FIG. In order for the rotation of the device A110 to be unrestricted), it is necessary to release (unplug) the electrical connections.

Therefore, in a configuration in which operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted unless all electrical connection lines are connected to the main controller A110, the main controller A110 is moved to a predetermined position (switch device After rotating the key device A120 and the key device A130 to a position where they can be easily operated, it is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection wire that was released (unplugged) from the main control device A110 to the main control device A110.

In particular, if the main controller A110 is separated from the back surface of the inner frame 12 due to displacement (rotation) and the length of the electrical connection wire is insufficient, an extension wire may be used to disconnect (unplug) the main controller A110. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main controller A110, which is time-consuming.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, Since operation (change of settings) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed, other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display It is not necessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line connecting the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main control device A110 by interposing an extension line.

As a result, it is possible to arrange the main control device A110 at a position where it is easy to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130, while reducing the labor and work involved in operating (setting changes) the switch device A120 and the key device A130. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a substrate box A2100 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the entire back surface of the end wall A272 is formed as a flat surface, but in the eighth embodiment, the end wall A2272 is provided with protrusions A2273 protruding from its back surface. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 121(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A2100 along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb in FIG. 121(a). It is.

Note that FIG. 121(a) corresponds to FIG. 110(b). In addition, in FIG. 121(b), only a portion that is viewed in cross section is shown in order to simplify the drawing and make it easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 121, a protrusion A2273 is provided on the end wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment so as to protrude from its back surface (inner surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow B). The protrusion A2273 is a part (protrusion) that extends in a strip shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is located at the outer edge of the end wall A2272 (the tip in the protrusion direction that protrudes radially inward from the peripheral wall A271). It is formed in a predetermined range along the side edge.

Specifically, the range in which the protrusion A2273 is formed is a position facing (opposed to) the end part A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, and a range (position facing) along the outer edge of the square part A272b. the range between positions AP1 and AP3 including AP2, and the range between positions AP4 and AP6 including position AP5), and one side across the square part A272b (radially inward from the peripheral wall part A271). In this range (range between positions AP1 and AP6), Formed continuously.

The protrusion dimension from the back of the end wall portion A2272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) of the protrusion A2273 is set to a constant value in the range between position AP3 and position AP4, and from position AP3 to position AP2. It is gradually changed to a larger value as it goes toward the position AP2, and it is gradually changed to a smaller value as it goes from the position AP2 to the position AP1, and at the position AP2, it is set to the same value as the position AP3. Similarly, the protrusion dimension is gradually changed to a larger value as it goes from position AP4 to position AP5, and is gradually changed to a smaller value as it goes from position AP5 to position AP6, and at position AP6 it becomes the same value as position AP4. Set. Moreover, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (projection dimension).

In this way, by providing the protrusion A2273 in a protruding manner on the end wall A2272, the rigidity of the end wall A2272 can be increased. Therefore, a force is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (a direction parallel to a plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R), and as the key device A130 is tilted, a force is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130. , when the key A140 comes into contact with the inner edge of the end wall A2272, damage to the end wall A2272 can be suppressed.

The protrusion A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposed to) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the protrusion A2273 is formed at a position that faces (opposes) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130. ) can be made smaller to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap.

Here, in this embodiment, the protrusion A2273 has a protrusion dimension in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4 between the back surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. The value is set to approximately the same value as the facing interval between the two. Therefore, the protruding tip (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the protrusion A2273 comes into contact with the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

This eliminates the gap between the back of the end wall A2272 and the front of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133), and prevents foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap. can be suppressed.

In particular, at positions AP2 and AP5, the protrusion dimension of the protrusion A2273 is set to a large value, so the elastic deformation of the square portion A272b formed as a plate (cantilever) with the outer edge free is utilized. As a result, the protrusions A2273 in the range from position AP1 to position AP3 and from position AP4 to position AP6 can be firmly brought into close contact with the front surface of key device A130 (end part A133c of main body A133). This makes it possible to more reliably prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap between the back of the end wall A2272 and the front of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133). .

Moreover, in this way, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the protrusion A2273 is in contact with the front of the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130 Even if the end wall portion A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when inserting the key A140 into the key A140, deformation of the end wall portion A2272 in the insertion direction can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the base end side (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271) of the end wall portion A2272 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged on the side closer to the rotation axis A410 (in the direction of the arrow R) than the center in the longitudinal direction (in the directions of arrows L and R) of the board box A100 (box cover A200). However, the switch device A120 and key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the board box A3100 (box cover A3200). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122(a) is a front view of the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122(b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine A3010. Note that FIG. 122(b) illustrates a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range). Further, in FIG. 122(b), only the main components are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment has a different position in which the operation wall part A210 is formed and an opening A260 (covering part A270, key Although the arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (guide wall A251, switch device A120) is different, the other configurations are the same, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, the operation wall A210 is formed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 (in the direction of arrow L) than the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200, and the operation wall A210 is Three sides of the wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by a first connecting wall portion A220, a second connecting wall portion A230, and a third connecting wall portion A240.

An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covering part A270), and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall part A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. be done.

In this case, in this embodiment, the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (the side closer to the first connection wall A220, the side in the direction of arrow L).
That is, the arrangement is opposite to that in the seventh embodiment.

Here, the movable range (rotatable range) when the board box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 is the first position located on the back side of the inner frame 12 (disposed at the time of the game). position (see FIG. 120), the box cover A3200 (operation wall A210) is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12, and the box cover A3200 (operation wall A210) faces the front side of the Pachinko machine A3010. That is, it is set in a range of approximately 180° to a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 122(b)).

As a result, the board box A3100 is placed (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while visually checking the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information regarding setting changes, setting values). )be able to. As a result, since the user can operate while checking the display (information), it is possible to easily understand the operating states of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved and operational errors can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, they can be placed on the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) (i.e., in a position that is difficult to see from the outside, see FIG. 120), so fraud cannot be carried out. (Unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) can be suppressed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the surface of the board box A3100 on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged (the front of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are arranged in the same direction (arrow The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position in which the substrate box A3100 assumes a desired posture (in this embodiment, a posture in which both surfaces are substantially parallel). In addition, it is preferable that the angle between the front of the operation wall part A210 and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set in the range of approximately 0° to approximately 45°.

That is, the board is placed in a position where the surface of the board box A3100 on which the switch device A120 and key device A130 are arranged (the front of the operation wall A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be viewed simultaneously. Box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture such as wrapping one's hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 in order to operate the switch device A120 or the key device A130 while viewing the third symbol display device 81. .

As a result, it becomes easier to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while checking the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information regarding setting changes), improving operability and reducing operational errors. can be more reliably achieved.

Further, as described above, the operation wall A210 is formed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200 (the side in the direction of arrow L), and the operation wall A210 is provided with the switch device A120 and the key. A device A130 is provided.

As a result, the board is placed in a position where the surface of the board box A3100 on which the switch device A120 and key device A130 are arranged (the front of the operation wall A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be viewed simultaneously. When the box A3100 is displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122(b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are positioned farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side in FIG. 122(b)) It can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly press the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the switch device A120 is operated more frequently than the key device A130.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120, which is operated more frequently than the key device A130, is located on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (that is, on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220). will be placed. Thereby, the switch device A120, which is frequently operated, can be placed at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (on the right side in FIG. 122(b)). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation part A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Furthermore, since the switch device A120 is disposed adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 can also be used when operating the switch device A120 (operation portion A122). It can be used as a space (space to avoid interference between fingers and box cover A3200). As a result, operability can be improved from this point as well.

Here, in the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment, the board box A3100 reaches the above-mentioned second position (the position where the front of the operation wall part A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122(b)). When the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated), it engages with the substrate box A3100 to restrict the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (i.e., fixes the substrate box A3100 in the second position). ). Thereby, when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, it is not necessary to hold the board box A3100 by hand, so that operability can be improved.

The regulating means is one that uses the magnetic force (attractive force) of a magnet to fix (hold) the board box A3100 in the second position (by applying a force that exceeds the attracting force, the first position (which is allowed to be displaced (rotated) in the direction toward the position), has a protruding member that is disposed in the protruding position by the elastic recovery force of an elastically deformed biasing means (e.g., a coil spring), and is disposed in the protruding position. The protruding member engaged with the substrate box A3100 disposed at the second position and regulating the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (the urging member from the protruding position When the protruding member is retracted against the urging force of , the substrate box A3100 is allowed to be displaced (rotated) in the direction toward the first position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation axis A410 of the board box A100 is arranged in the vertical direction (direction of arrows U and D) of the pachinko machine A10, but the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment is It is arranged in a posture along the width direction (left-right direction, arrow L, R direction) of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 123(a) is a front view of the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123(b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that FIG. 123(b) shows a state where the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range), and when it is displaced to the first position. A (rotated) substrate box A4100 is illustrated with a dashed line. Further, in FIG. 123(b), only the main components are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment is different from the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (positioning position and orientation) of the rotation axis A4410 and the number of arrangement, but the other configurations are the same. Therefore, its explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 that protrude from each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 in a direction away from each other. A pair of rotating shafts A4410 are located on one side (in the direction of arrows U and D) of the substrate box A4100 (on the side opposite to the operation wall A210, in the direction of arrow U), and are located in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of arrow U) of the substrate box A4100. The substrate box A4100 is formed in such a manner that it protrudes outward from both ends (L, R directions) along the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100. Further, the pair of rotation axes A4410 are arranged coaxially.

Here, when the board box A4100 is rotated around the rotation axis A4410, the movable range (rotatable range) is at the first position located on the back side of the inner frame 12 (disposed at the time of the game). 123(b)) in the direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (in the direction of arrow B), and the front surface of the box cover 4200 (operation wall A210) is vertical. It is set in a range of approximately 90° to a second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (i.e., a position where the board box A4100 protrudes most toward the back side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123(b)). .

As a result, in the second position, the operation wall A210 can be directed upward, and its open side (the side opposite to the second connection wall A230) can be directed toward the side where the operator is present, and the switch device A120 can be directed upward. And the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the first position, the front side of the operation wall A210 can face the back side of another component disposed on the inner frame 12. Therefore, separate parts can be made to face the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and these switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be placed in positions that are difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraud (unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 will not hit another member of the inner frame 12. By being in contact with the substrate box A4100, the substrate box A4100 cannot be placed in the first position. Thereby, forgetting to remove the key A140 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key A140 that has been forgotten to be removed from being illegally acquired.

In particular, in this embodiment, the second position of the board box A4100 is located lower in the gravity direction (vertical direction) than the first position, so the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 as described above. If the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position in this state, then the substrate box A4100 can be displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the operator aware that the board box A4100 is in a state where it cannot be placed in the first position.

Note that when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is located closer to the front side of the operation wall A210 than the front wall A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable that the shape is such that it fits into the hole. This makes it possible to reduce the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210, thereby suppressing unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusions 154 decelerate the balls flowing down the ball falling unit 150, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you can increase the flow resistance of the ball by placing an adhesive member on the inner surface, you can send air into the flow path, or you can adjust the speed of the ball's flow using magnetic force. You may do so.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed in the back case 510, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be disposed on the movable accessory side. The displacement regulating device 180 may be disposed on the back side of the production member 700, and the width of the projection toward the back side may be changed by a pushing operation.

In this case, by configuring the main body portion 183a of the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 to be inserted into the back case 510 in a state where the overhang width is long, the displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated. can. On the other hand, the effect member 700 can be displaced by configuring it so that the insertion into the back case 510 is released when the operating member 183 is operated to shorten the extension width. Along with the displacement, the displacement regulating device 180 is also displaced. Therefore, by adding a design shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, it is possible to make the displacement regulating device 180 visible to the player.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the state change of the displacement regulating device 180 is caused by manual operation, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may include a drive device, and the arrangement of the operating member 183 may be switched electrically. In this case, by controlling the displacement regulating device 180 to be in the deregulated state prior to the initial operation from power-on, it is avoided that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 starts displacing while the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. can do. This can prevent overload from being applied to the operating member 183.

Further, a highly cushioning material may be provided around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183. In addition, if a detection sensor is provided that can detect the arrangement of the operating member 183 without driving the displacement regulation device 180, and this detection sensor determines that the displacement regulation device 180 is in the regulation state. In this case, the zoom unit 600 may be controlled not to start driving.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed on the back side of the back case 510, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be placed on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the back case 510, it may be placed on at least one of the left and right sides of the back case 510, or a combination thereof may be used.

For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the production member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement change of the lower arm member 630, so a recess is provided on the upper surface of the lower arm member 630 in the production standby state, and the By configuring the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 to engage with a recess provided in the lower arm member 630 when the cylindrical portion 183d is extended, a change in the position of the lower arm member 630 in the left-right direction is prevented. I can do it.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 is provided as an example of a device for regulating the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 disposed above the game area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by providing a device for regulating (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member that can freely displace the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 can displace the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the granular member 320 from rubbing against the wall surface of the partitioning member 310, breaking the granular member 320, or damaging the partitioning member 310.

For example, by shipping the lid member 480 in a state where it is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side (acting standby state), it is possible to prevent the granular member 320 from displacing the internal space IE1 beyond the lid member 480. Therefore, it is possible to limit the range of the partitioning member 310 that the granular members 320 can come into contact with during shipping, and since the amount of displacement of the granular members 320 can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid a situation where cracks occur due to collisions between the granular members 320. can.

In addition, as another example, a granular member 320 is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate presentation means 160, is configured to be able to extend into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and is arranged in the internal space IE1 in an extended state. An overhanging member configured to be able to limit displacement may be provided.

By configuring this overhanging member to be pushable from the front side of the lower support member 163 (front side of the game board 13), and configuring it so that it can be switched between an overhanging state and a non-overhanging state each time the push-in operation is performed. After the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game machine parlor, the front frame 14 can be opened to operate the projecting member from the front side, thereby improving the operability of the projecting member.

Note that the manner in which the state of the overhanging member changes is not limited at all. For example, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism similar to the displacement regulating device 180, or the state may be changed by engagement or disengagement between claws.

Furthermore, as another example, the arrangement of the granular members 320 may be maintained by shipping the partitioning member 310 with the internal air pressure increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in a game machine parlor and lowering the air pressure inside the partitioning member 310 before operating it, the granular member 320 can be freely arranged.

As another example, the granular member 320 may be formed by mixing ferromagnetic metal powder with resin, and a magnet may be placed near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. Thereby, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet at the time of shipment. On the other hand, during operation, by removing this magnet, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made free.

Note that the magnet is not limited to one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be disposed on a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be disposed on the lid member 480.

In addition, in an embodiment in which ferromagnetic metal powder is mixed with the granular member 320, for example, after the firing effect is executed, the operation is performed to generate magnetic force near the partition member 310 (for example, by moving the magnet close to the partition member 310). By arranging a performance accessory (that moves), a performance mode in which the granular member 320 is stopped in the air (visible as if it is floating) can be included in the firing performance.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 that regulates the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is fixed to the back case 510, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, an insertion hole is formed in the back case 510 that is aligned with the center axis of the regulated hole 657 when the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is placed at a predetermined end position, and when shipped, A metal rod or resin rod is inserted into the regulation hole 657 through the insertion hole and fixed with tape, etc. After arriving at the game machine store, the clerk at the game machine store can remove the metal rod or resin rod. The enlargement/reduction unit 600 may be configured to be movable.

On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may get dirty due to the tape used to fix it, and the metal or resin rods cannot be thrown away when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped to another store, so it is difficult to store them. There may be a need to do so.

Additionally, if the storage of the metal rod or resin rod is left to each game machine store, the possibility of loss increases, and if the metal rod or resin rod is shipped to another store without it, the quality of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be ensured. There is a possibility that it cannot be done. It can also be recognized that the displacement regulating device 180, which is fastened and fixed to the back case 510, is an improvement from this point of view.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1 and the front-to-back width of the left-right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the back section lower part 314 are approximately the same, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the front-to-back width of the left and right center portions 312b and the lower back section 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front-to-back width of the left and right portions 312a and the lower back section 314. In this case, the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased below the internal space IE1 regardless of the left and right positions, so the momentum of the granular member 320 to be injected can be reduced, so that the front plate portion 311 The probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged due to collision can be reduced.

Further, for example, the front-to-back width of the left and right portions 312a and the lower back section 314 may be expanded to the same extent as the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can be made to enter the internal space IE1 without reducing the momentum of the granular member 320 to be injected.

Furthermore, the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1 does not need to be constant. For example, the shape may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the injected granular member 320. In this case, the momentum of the granular member 320 can be gradually reduced, making it easier to avoid locally excessive loads being applied to the partitioning member 310. Furthermore, by moving the tapered direction toward the front side, it is possible to easily move the scattered granular members 320 toward the front side.

Alternatively, for example, a bump-shaped portion may be provided in a part of the front plate portion 311 where the injected granular members 320 are expected to reach in a mass, and protrude in a raised manner toward the back side. good. This bump-shaped portion may be formed by installing and fixing a separate member on the back surface of the front plate portion 311, or may be formed by forming a part of the front plate portion 311 to the rear side. The mold may be configured to have a convex portion.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the granular member 320 has a soccer ball shape, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be spherical, rugby ball-shaped, or star-shaped (a shape in which protrusions are formed three-dimensionally). By configuring it with members of a certain size, it is possible to create gaps between the members, so that when the firing performance is performed, the granular members 320 can be scattered violently.

In the first embodiment, the injection device 400 is arranged below the back side of the light guide plate 161 and configured to emit the granular members 320 diagonally forward and upward, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the injection device 400 may be placed on the left and right sides of the light guide plate 161, or may be placed above the light guide plate 161. Even in this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 diagonally forward. Note that when the injection device 400 is disposed at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the production standby position.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the granular member 320 is formed from a monochromatic (in this embodiment, red) resin member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one granular member 320 may be formed by two-color molding or by combining two members of different colors. In this case, by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, it is possible to improve the appearance of the piles. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position of the granular member 320 in a stable posture in consideration of the center of gravity position, the colored layer can be visually recognized when the granular member 320 is deposited.

Further, the number of granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having the same size as the collision member 420 may be used as the granular member 320, and a concave curved shape comparable to the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 may be formed on the outer surface. As a result, the way the granular member 320 flies and looks changes depending on whether the firing effect is executed with the curved shape fitting well or when the firing effect is executed with the curved shape not fitting. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the granular members 320 are disposed in the internal space IE1 so as to be able to scatter and are gathered on the collision member 420 by gravity, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is configured to include a biasing means for biasing the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side of the performance standby state), and to return the granular member 320 to the initial position side by the biasing force of the biasing means. It's okay. In this case, it can be avoided that the initial position side of the granular member 320 is limited to the lower side.

Examples of the biasing means include a spring, a stretchable rubber-like member, a net-like member whose end portion is fixedly arranged, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

The relationship between the biasing means and the granular members 320 is not limited at all. For example, the granular member 320 and the biasing means may be bonded to each other, or they may not be bonded but not separated, and a part of the biasing device may be disposed inside the granular member 320 and integrated. Alternatively, the biasing means may be supported in the internal space IE1 while being disposed apart from the granular member 320.

Further, the biasing means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320. For example, in the same way as the gravity acting on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment, an air pressure adjusting means may be used to adjust the air pressure in the internal space IE1. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be influenced by increasing or decreasing the atmospheric pressure in the internal space IE1.

For example, when increasing the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1. When the air pressure in the internal space IE1 is lowered in such a manner as to remove gas from the granular member 320, the granular member 320 can be displaced (floating) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, but can be set to any side, including up, down, left, right, front, and back.

Note that in the case of causing a change in atmospheric pressure, it is preferable to close the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315.
It is easily possible to provide the lid member 480 with a function of closing the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315. For example, when a flexible, thin, highly deformable deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315, the lid The gap between the member 480 and the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. Thereby, the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 can be closed or opened in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 480 with respect to the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding portion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is formed along a straight line, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface of the right end portion facing the transmission projection 446 may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440. In this case, the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the lower displacement end position not only when the transmission protrusion 446 is disposed at the lower end position, but also when it is in contact with the curved surface, so that the coil spring SP1 It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the maximum biasing force.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right center portions of the collision member 420 have an upwardly curved curved shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a slope shape with a sharp center and descending in the left-right direction, or it may have a hipped shape. In this case, compared to a curved shape, it is possible to make it difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the sharp center portion in the left-right direction. Therefore, the deviation in the left-right arrangement of the granular members 320 can be increased.

Further, for example, it may have a planar shape perpendicular to the displacement direction, or it may have a curved shape in which the left and right center portions are concave downward. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular member 320 is displaced in a lump until it collides with the inner wall of the partition member 310, and is dispersed by the collision.

Note that when changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured with a curved shape in which the left and right center portions are concave downward, it is preferable that the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured in a curved shape with the left and right center portions convex upward; This makes it easier to avoid collision between the granular member 320 and the lid member 480.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 is configured to have a flat shape when viewed from the side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower half may protrude and be bent when viewed from the side. In this case, the location where the granular members 320 are concentrated can be moved toward the upper half side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front is approximately the same as the size of the light guide plate 161, but the size is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front is designed to be approximately the same size or larger than the visible area where the player can view the display in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. You can also do it. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the edge of the partition member 310 overlaps with the display on the third symbol display device 81 and is visible, so that the visibility of the display on the third symbol display device 81 can be improved. can.

In the first embodiment, a single collision member 420 is used as a member that applies a load to the granular member 320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 may be arranged so as to be able to apply a load to the granular member 320, and may be operated cooperatively or individually by separate drive devices.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the linear motion member 410 contacts the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 does not contact the collision member 420, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, a pillar part protruding from the plate part 422 toward the back side may penetrate the intermediate member 401 and may be configured to be able to come into contact with the front transmission member 440. In this case, the abutting portion of the front transmission member 440 with the column is formed with convexes and convexes in such a manner that the radial length changes according to the angular arrangement, so that the position of the column is adjusted as the front transmission member 440 rotates. can be changed. Utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down, and the granular member 320 may be vibrated (slightly displaced).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lid member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement, but the manner in which the lid member 480 is displaced is not limited to this, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the entry may be made by sliding displacement along a straight line. In this case, the shape of the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 can be easily formed.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the extending plate portions 485 disposed on the left and right sides of the lid member 480 are formed in a shape concave toward the back side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular members 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right sides.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the granular member 320 is spaced apart and accommodated below the lid member 480 in the performance standby state of the injection device 400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, a protrusion may be formed that protrudes from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and this protrusion may be configured to be able to come into contact with the granular member 320. In this case, when the granular members 320 are locally accumulated, by pushing the granular members 320 with the protrusion, the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be broken as the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side. . Thereby, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made uniform.

The shape of the protrusion of the lid member 480 is not limited at all. For example, the structure may be such that a plurality of protrusions are scattered. In this case, regardless of the position where the granular members 320 are deposited, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the granular members 320 being deposited, and the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be broken up.

Alternatively, it may be configured as a pair of protrusions that are arranged to be inclined to both left and right outer sides as they move toward the retreating side tip of the advancing/retracting part 481, starting from the left and right center of the entrance side tip of the overhanging part 482. . In this case, as the lid member 480 is displaced on the entry side, a load can be applied to the granular member 320 in a direction that pushes the granular member 320 toward the left and right outer sides.

Furthermore, the direction of the protrusions is not limited to this. For example, the inclination may be opposite, the protrusions may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions, the protrusions may be formed along a single inclination direction, or the protrusions may be formed with a combination of different inclination degrees, or the protrusions may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions. A protrusion without a ridge (a protrusion extending on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis or a protrusion extending on a plane parallel to (or overlapping with) the rotation axis) may be used. Further, the number of protrusions is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

Note that the length of the protrusion is not limited at all. For example, the protruding tip may be protruded until it reaches a circle that is coaxial and the same diameter as the rotation axis of the lid member 480, or it may be configured such that the protruding length of the lid member 480 from the reciprocating portion 481 is constant. Also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the protruding tips of the protrusions has a shape that follows the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing/retracting portion 481, so that the same effect as described above can be obtained from the shape of the lid member 480. It can be played depending on the part.

When a protrusion is formed on the lid member 480, the timing at which the protrusion acts is not limited to when the granular member 320 stops and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is housed below the lid member 480, the front transmission member 440 is rotated by 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction based on the production standby state, and the drive motor MT1 is rotated in small steps in the forward and reverse directions. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the translation member 410 and the collision member 420 can be vertically displaced in small increments, and the granular member 320 on the collision member 420 can be moved vertically. can be moved up and down.

Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420, it can be flipped up by the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 and collided with the protrusion of the lid member 480. Due to this collision, the granular members 320 can be rearranged, and the stacking of the granular members 320 can be prevented from collapsing.

Furthermore, when the collision member 420 flips up the granular member 320 (displaces upward), the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side, making it easier to apply a load to the granular member 320 via the protrusion. be able to.

Note that the small forward and reverse rotations of the drive motor MT1 may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward and reverse directions, or may be caused to rotate in the forward direction at short time intervals. In this case, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 displaces the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, thereby causing the drive motor MT1 to rotate in the reverse direction.

In the first embodiment, the curved plate part 312 that is disposed to face the advancing/retracting part 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane from side to side, so that the lid member Although the case where the distance between 480 and the curved plate part 312 changes has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 disposed opposite the lid member 480 is not flat but has an uneven (wavy) shape, and the relative relationship between the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 is 480 and the curved plate part 312 may be configured to change. Further, the entrance side end of the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 may be configured to be formed parallel to the axis of the rotation axis O1.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is ensured by changing the inclination angle of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member that can change its posture may be disposed on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by changing the posture of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and a plurality of members (linear motion member 410, collision member 420, abutment member 430, transmission arm In the situation where the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, a case has been described in which the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, there may be a timing for displacing all the members among the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the drive motor MT1 to be employed may be slightly larger.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front transmission member 440 transmits the driving force by coming into contact with the linear motion member 410, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if at least a part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is made of a magnetic material, and a repulsive force is generated between them, the front Load can be transmitted to the translation member 410 in a state where the transmission member 440 and the translation member 410 are not in contact with each other.

For example, in the circumferential half of the transmission protrusion 446 that is disposed opposite to the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410, a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force with the protrusion 414 is disposed. On the other hand, by arranging a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force between it and the protrusion 414 on the opposite circumferential half, the repulsive force moves the linear motion member 410 to the lower end position. Since the load can be generated on the side to be maintained, it is possible to reduce the load at the time when the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 start contacting each other.

In the first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted at two positions: the groove forming part 442 formed on the front surface of the front side transmission member 440 and the groove forming part 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear side transmission member 460. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming a groove in the circumferential surface of at least one of the front transmission member 440 or the rear transmission member 460 and transmitting the driving force via this groove, the number of objects to which the driving force is transmitted may be increased.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which there is a possibility that it is unclear whether or not it is the timing to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440 due to detection by the detection sensor SC4, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor that detects the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is provided, and the detection results of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 are used to detect the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440. It is also possible to determine whether or not it is possible. With this, it is possible to determine whether or not the drive in the forward rotation direction has passed through the firing state, so if the firing state has not been reached, reverse rotation is possible, and if the firing state has been exceeded, reverse rotation is not possible. It can be determined that this is possible.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by a displacement other than rotation (for example, linear sliding).

In the first embodiment, by making the shapes of the extension claws 734 of the effect member 700 different on the upper and lower sides, problems related to the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state can be prevented. Although the case where the configuration is configured has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by making the shapes of the extending claw portions 734 different, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement is different for the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 than for the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. This balances the fact that the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 start displacing earlier due to their own weight, and for the player, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 simultaneously move in all directions. It can be made to appear as if displacement has started.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a load is generated in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730 by bringing the rotary plate 730 into contact with the telescopic displacement member 740, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a spring member that applies a biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740 may be provided to apply a biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740, or a magnet may be arranged to apply a magnetic force to the telescopic displacement member 740. good.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotary plate 730 is used both as a means for transmitting a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and as a means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, means for applying a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

In the first embodiment, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced toward the assembled state, the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load first, and is moved radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. Although a case has been described in which the second guided protrusion 744b that is placed receives a load from behind, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, or the load is transmitted to the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b at the same time. It may be configured as follows.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the telescopic displacement member 740 includes two protrusions, the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one protrusion may be configured to protrude diagonally with respect to the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740, one protrusion can have a function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the extending claw portion 734 disposed outside the circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the telescoping displacement members 740 toward the collective arrangement state, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, an overhang is formed on the outer circumference of the rotary plate 730, and the first guided protrusion 743b is configured to be able to be pushed outward in the radial direction by the overhang, so that the telescopic displacement member 740 is in the discrete state. Directed displacement can be assisted.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower arm member 630 suppresses the posture change of the presentation member 700 at the lower end position of displacement, and loosens the degree of posture change of the presentation member 700 allowed at the vertical intermediate position. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the degree of tolerance for the change in posture of the effect member 700 increases as it moves toward the lower end position of the displacement.

Further, although the degree of posture change is determined by increasing or decreasing the position where the acting force is generated on the presentation member 700, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

That is, the contact area between the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, by changing the thickness of the tip of the lower arm member 630 for each part, the thickness (hole depth) of the arcuate hole 634 can be changed, so that the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 can be The contact area can be changed.

The degree of posture change of the presentation member 700 is not specified only by the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700. For example, unevenness may be provided on the front surface of the main body member 601 facing the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 or on the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 to change the distance from the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacement of the lower arm member 630, the posture change of the presentation member 700 is easily tolerated in the front surface of the main body member 601 or in the part where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. This makes it easier to suppress posture changes in areas where the distance is narrow. Alternatively, the interval may be configured to gradually narrow as the presentation member 700 approaches the end of its descent.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the configuration at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is configured so as not to change, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, a resistance increase/decrease device that can increase or decrease the displacement resistance of relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided. The resistance increase/decrease device may be a brake device that can increase/decrease frictional resistance, a device that increases/decreases displacement resistance using magnetic force, or a device that extends the lower arm member 630 to a position where the displacement can be mechanically regulated. . In the case of a device using magnetic force, it can be easily constructed by disposing a magnetic material in a portion disposed close to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 (for example, the auxiliary arm portion in which the arcuate hole 634 is formed). be able to.

In the first embodiment, as the arrangement position of the presentation member 700 moves downward, a large displacement in the expansion direction is allowed, and after the vertical position of the presentation member 700 is fixed, the direction of expansion of the presentation member 700 is increased. Although the case where displacement occurs has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be performed such that the effect member 700 is displaced in the enlargement direction during its displacement in the vertical direction. In this case, by displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction of reducing the production member 700 (displaced inward in the radial direction) while the production member 700 is being displaced downward, the lower arm member 630 can be moved from side to side. The effect of changing from a vertically elongated posture to a vertically elongated posture can be offset, and a change in posture of the presentation member 700 in the forward tilting direction can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 is displaced up and down, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the center of the center frame 86, and the presentation members 700 extend to the front side of the center frame 86 in the collective arrangement state, and change to a discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86, thereby opening the opening. The configuration may be such that the state changes to a state larger than that of the current state.

In this case, in order to avoid a collision between the glass unit 16 and the presentation member 700, it is preferable to make an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second layer of glass unit that covers the front side of the glass unit 16, separate from the glass unit 16 that covers the front side of the gaming area. In addition, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper plate 17, the second layer glass unit is tilted from the same front and back position as the lower end of the glass unit 16 to the front side toward the top. It is preferable.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the postures of the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjustment member 744 tend to be inclined depending on the positional relationship of the second elongated member 743, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a biasing means such as a spring that generates a biasing force is disposed between the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744, and the posture of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is controlled by the biasing force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the attitude tilt of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be formed intentionally, the effect of the attitude tilt of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily produced.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cable tube may be wrapped around the electrical wiring DK1. In particular, by wrapping the cable tube around the portion disposed above the base end side through hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 from rubbing against the electrical wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886 in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a driving device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By controlling the operation of the drive device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be changed appropriately.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the electrical wiring DK2 is temporarily fastened by being sandwiched between the constricted portions 871a of the wiring arm member 870, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electrical wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixing device such as a binding band, or the direction of displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 may be limited.

Furthermore, the position at which the electrical wiring DK2 is fastened can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the electrical wiring DK2 that is disposed through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, the constriction part 871a) may be provided closer to the wiring arm member 870 than the connection position. , a fastening position may be provided closer to the vertical slide member 820 than the connecting position.

Moreover, the means for fastening the electrical wiring DK2 is not limited to use for the electrical wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to fasten the electrical wiring DK1 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. That is, by narrowing the width of a part of the arrangement portion 635 where the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed, the arrangement may be such that the electrical wiring DK1 is sandwiched and the displacement is limited, or the inner side of the arrangement portion 635 may be narrowed. Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fastened with a fixing device such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the arrangement portion 635 serving as a wiring route for the electrical wiring DK1.

In this case, the object to which the electrical wiring DK1 is temporarily fastened may be the lower arm member 630 provided with the arrangement portion 635, or the presentation member 700 disposed on the tip side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. However, the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 disposed on the base end side (other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the back case 510 to which the main body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

In the first embodiment described above, in the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction toward and away from the vertical, horizontal, and horizontal planes (front-back direction) corresponding to the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 on the vertical, horizontal, and horizontal planes. Although a case has been described in which this is the case, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the direction of displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is on the front-rear, left-right, left-right plane, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the up-down direction; The direction may be inclined and displaced.

In the first embodiment, the relationship between the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the relationship is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may have the same diameter.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the electric wiring DK2 is spirally displaced in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose posture can be changed in accordance with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b, and electrical wiring is passed through these arm members. In this way, the arrangement of the electrical wiring may be configured to be changeable by changing the posture of the arm member.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged apart from each other.

In this case, by providing a drive device such as a solenoid for displacing the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during rotational displacement of the wing-like member 854, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced if necessary even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. The drive can be controlled as follows.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the state change of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 to the extended state or enlarged state occurs when the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, in a case where the wing-like members 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800 whose positions in the front and rear directions are the same with respect to the presentation member 700 are arranged in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the presentation members 700 in a discrete state, the presentation member 700 It may be configured such that the state can be changed to an enlarged state.

In this case, a collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be avoided, and it is also possible to avoid predicting a change in the state of the effect member 700 based on the arrangement of the displacement rotation unit 800. Note that in this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the wing-like member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the intermediate flow path LM1 has the same shape as the guide route DL1, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a curved channel with a longer left-right width than the guide route DL1, it may be curved in the front-back direction, or it may be formed as a channel that extends vertically without bending. .

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path through which the ball that has entered the second prize opening 640 flows down, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a path for the ball that enters the general winning port 63, or as a path for the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a, or may be used for both purposes. good. Furthermore, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a path for the ball that has passed through the out port 71.

Moreover, since the arrangement of each winning a prize opening 63, 64, 640, 65 is set at an arbitrary position within the gaming area, the arrangement of the intermediate passage LM1 can also be set arbitrarily. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the gaming area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to being arranged on the back side of the gaming area.
For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right sides of the gaming area, or may be arranged in front of the gaming area (inside the glass unit 16, etc.). Also in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 includes a section that flows down along the path of the ball flowing down the game area in a front view.

Further, for the purpose of bringing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the field of view of the player, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be closer to the left and right center side of the gaming area. Therefore, a route that does not reach inside the center frame 86 when viewed from the front may be used.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board of the horizontal board unit 166 is arranged with the thickness direction matching the vertical direction, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, like the hemispherical lighting device 613, the illumination board may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

Furthermore, the entire range of the illumination board is not limited to being hidden by the first decorative member 171. For example, a part of the illumination board may be configured so that the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED can be directly recognized without being shielded.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement start timing of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes by changing the shape of the guide hole 733, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the guide hole 733 may be formed into a step-like shape so that sections in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and sections in which it stops occur alternately.

Further, by fixing the guide holes 733 formed in a step-like shape to some of the guide holes 733, it is possible to displace the shielding design member 760 so as to approach or come into contact with it at different displacement trajectories or at different displacement timings.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right sides of the firing effect unit 6300 include a plurality of illumination boards, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the horizontally placed board unit 166 and the vertically placed board unit 167 of the light guide plate presentation means 160 may be configured with a plurality of illuminated boards. In addition, the portions (left and right long portions) of the decoration means 170 corresponding to the horizontally long grooves 171a are configured to have good light transmission, and the horizontally long grooves 171a are used as intersection positions of a plurality of illumination boards, and the intersections are By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, the structure may be such that light can be visually recognized through the horizontally long groove portion 171a.

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of increasing the number of light irradiation directions, the use is not limited to the case where a plurality of hard illumination substrates are used. For example, a light emitting means such as an LED may be provided on a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board). In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by wrapping the flexible substrate or fixing it in sections. As a result, the optical axes of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions, and the number of directions in which light can be irradiated can be increased. Moreover, in this case, it can be configured with a single substrate.

In each of the embodiments described above, regardless of whether the number of configurations is single or plural, the configuration may be omitted (in the case of multiple configurations, the number of configurations may be reduced). Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusions A133b are formed at two locations on the key device A130, but the number of such protrusions A133b (the number of formed protrusions) may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which one key device A130 is installed in the main control device A110, but the number of key devices A130 (number of installed keys) may be increased to two or more. .

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the arrangement position of each structure with respect to other structures, the arrangement direction (direction, attitude, phase) of each structure with respect to other structures, or the arrangement of each structure with respect to other structures You may change the order of each. The arrangement order may be changed for all configurations, or only some configurations may be replaced. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and arrangement order of each component are arbitrary.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) center of the operation wall A210 (second region). Although the case where the opening A260 (key device A130) is arranged in the longitudinal direction center of the operation wall part A210 (second area) is explained, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged in the longitudinal center of the operation wall part A210 (second area) It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (on the third connection wall A240 side).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the direction in which the key device A130 (covering part A270) connects the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the longitudinal direction (arrow L) of the operation wall part A210 (second region). , R direction), but the direction connecting the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the direction in which the operation wall A210 ( The arrangement direction (posture, phase) is parallel to the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows L, R) of the second region), and the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows L, R) of the operation wall A210 (second region) The key device A130 (covering portion A270) may be arranged in an arrangement direction (posture, phase) having an angle (greater than 0° and smaller than 90°).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the opening A260 (covering part A270), the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side closest to the first connection wall part A220. For example, the order in which the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering part A270) are arranged is opposite to the order of arrangement in each of the above embodiments (that is, the order in which the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering part A270) are arranged in order from the side closest to the first connection wall part A220. ), or the order of only a part of the arrangement may be changed (for example, the arrangement order in which the opening AOP1 is located between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is exemplified. ).

In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the covering portion A270 is provided protruding from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall A210 is formed at the same height as the end walls A272, A2272 (that is, the operation wall A210 also serves as the end walls A272, A2272), and the configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A210.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall part A210 and the opening A260 is formed in the covering part A270 (end wall part A272), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and other It may be formed in the part. That is, it does not need to be formed at a lower part of the outer surface of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100. Other parts include, for example, parts forming the outer surfaces of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100, i.e., the front wall part A201, the upper wall part A202, the lower wall part A203, the left wall part of the box covers A200, A3200. Examples include A204 or the right wall A205, the back wall A301, the upper wall A302, the lower wall A303, the left wall A304, or the right wall A305 of the box base A300. Similarly, other portions include, for example, the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, or the third connection wall portion A240.

In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the covering portion A270 is provided protruding from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall A210 is formed at the same height as the end walls A272, A2272 (that is, the operation wall A210 also serves as the end walls A272, A2272), and the configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A210.

In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length of the operating portion A122 to a position where it protrudes from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operating wall portion A210. In addition, with the extension of the length dimension of the operation part A122, it is preferable to provide the guide wall A251 also on the back surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall part A210.

In each of the above embodiments, when a recess is formed on the outer surface (front) of the box cover A200, A3200, and the part forming the recessed bottom of the recess is the operation wall A210 (that is, from the front wall A201) Although the case where the operation wall A210 is located at a lower position (on the side of the main controller A110) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. A protrusion may be formed, and the portion forming the protruding tip surface of the protrusion may be used as the operation wall A210 (that is, the operation may be performed at a position one step higher than the front wall A201 (on the opposite side from the main controller A110). positioning wall A210).

In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100, but this is not necessarily the case. The stored items are arbitrary as long as the operator can be operated through the opening. For example, it may not have an electrical configuration. Such a storage item, for example, has a connecting part that is connected to an opening/closing lid that opens and closes an outlet for discharging the balls from the ball flow path, and when the connecting part is operated as an operator, the opening/closing lid can be opened and closed. Examples include members (structures, devices) that open and close.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a push button switch or a key-operated selector switch is employed as the operating means (switch device A120, key device A130), but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other types may be used. The operating means may also be adopted. Examples of other types of operating means include tactile switches, rocker switches, dip switches, thumb rotary switches, and toggle switches.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the operation mode of the operator (operation part A122, key A140) is pushing and rotation, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Any operation mode may be used as long as it is arranged to be operable through the openings (openings A250 and A260 in the above embodiments). Other operation modes include pulling out, sliding, seesaw displacement (for example, a mode in which the operation button is displaced like a seesaw when both ends are pressed alternately, like the operation button of a rocker switch), and tilting (for example, toggle). An example is a mode in which the operating lever is tilted to one side with the proximal end as a fulcrum, such as the operating lever of a switch.

In this case, the sliding direction of the operator, the direction connecting both ends of the seesaw-displaced operator, and the direction in which the tilting operator falls are in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall A210 (second region). It is preferable that the operating means be arranged in a parallel orientation. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region) can be effectively utilized to improve the operability of the operation means.

In any of the above-mentioned operation modes, the front view shape of the openings A250 and A260 is a shape formed only in the area corresponding to the displacement locus of the operator (the area necessary to allow displacement). Also good.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and end surface of the key A140 held by fingers and the end wall portions A272, A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and when no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130, at least one of the surface or end surface of the key A140 gripped with a finger and the end wall portions A272, A2272 (circular ring) The outer edge of the portion A272a or the rectangular portion A272b may be in contact with each other. That is, at least one of the surfaces or end surfaces of the key A140 in the OFF position or the ON position that is held by fingers is brought into contact with the end wall portions A272, A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When the key A140 is (rotated), the end face of the key A140 may be configured to slide against the end wall parts A272, A2272 (outer edge of the annular part A272a).

Note that there is a gap between the surface and end surface of the key A140 to be held with fingers and the end wall portions A272, A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), and a gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the standing wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the key device A130 can be tilted at a specified angle with respect to the printed circuit board A119 (an angle that allows the key device A130 to be tilted). In other words, the angle is set to such a value that at least one of the gaps disappears (the key A140 or the key device A130 comes into contact) before reaching the angle at which the leg A131 is difficult to come off or be damaged or the solder peels off. . The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and even more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction, but the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be formed at only one location, or may be formed at three or more locations. Moreover, when forming in two or more places, those positions (phases) in the circumferential direction are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above embodiments, or may be formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusion A271b of the covering part A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed intermittently in the circumferential direction, but the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be formed continuously in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are provided to protrude outward in the radial direction, and the protrusion A133b of the device A130 is arranged in the space formed by the protrusion A271b. Although the case has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and a protrusion is provided to protrude radially inward from the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and a protrusion is provided radially inwardly on the outer surface of the base portion A133a of the key device A130. A configuration may also be adopted in which a recessed portion is provided and the protrusion of the covering portion A270 is arranged in the internal space of the recessed portion of the key device A130. In this case, in order to cover the key device A130 with the covering part A270 (insert the protrusion into the recess), it is possible to continue the recess to the end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the base A133a (the protrusion). It is sufficient if an opening is formed in the end surface for inserting the part into the recess.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are connected to the covering portion A270, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. may be concatenated.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where two protrusions (the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212) are connected to the covering part A270 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of such protrusions is , may be one, or may be three or more. When forming a plurality of pieces, the connection position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect other protrusions at positions that are different in phase by approximately 180 degrees from the first protrusions A211 and the second protrusions A212. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the OFF position and the ON position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the first protrusion A211, the second protrusion A212, and other protrusions, and the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (standing dimension from the front of the operation wall A210 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) ) and width dimension (dimension in the direction perpendicular to the height direction of the cross-sectional disappearing shape) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the end shape include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a combination thereof. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either one may have a larger value.

In each of the above embodiments, the height dimension of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (the vertical dimension from the front (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall A210) is along the extending direction. Although a case has been described in which the distance is constant, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be changed along the extension direction.

Note that the height dimension may be configured to gradually decrease as the distance from the one end connected to the covering portion A270 increases. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A270 can be efficiently increased while reducing the material cost.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the rotation angle (phase difference between the on position and the off position) of the key A140 is set to 90 degrees, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and other rotation angles (positions) are set. It may also be set to (phase difference). That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90° or may be set to an angle larger than 90°.

In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end wall A272) is an area corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the OFF position and the ON position. It is preferable that it be formed only in the area necessary to allow displacement. That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 is a first fan-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140; A second sector-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on the other side (opposite side to one side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed into a shape.

In each of the embodiments described above, the key A140 has a radius of rotation of a portion on one side of the center of rotation (distance from the center of rotation to the end surface (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by fingers)) and In this example, the rotation radius of the other side is different from the rotation radius of the other side, but this is not necessarily the case. The distance to the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface may be substantially the same. That is, the first sector-shaped opening and the second sector-shaped opening of the opening A260 may have substantially the same size (radius).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed into a substantially horizontally long rectangle (rectangular shape) has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and other front view shapes may be formed. good. Examples of other front view shapes include a substantially square, substantially circular, substantially elliptical, substantially triangular, substantially polygon of pentagon or more, and a combination thereof.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 is approximately parallel to the longitudinal direction of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200), but this is not necessarily the case. They are not limited to this, and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, they may be substantially orthogonal (that is, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 may be along the directions of arrows U and D).

In each of the above embodiments, a part of the outer edge (in each of the above embodiments, three sides) of the operation wall A210 is connected to the connection walls (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A230). A240), and the remaining portion of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but this is not necessarily the case. The entire outer edge of the operation wall A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall.

That is, in the front view of the box covers A200, A3200, in each of the above embodiments, the operation wall A210 is located at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 matches a part of the outer edge of the box cover A200, A3200. is arranged (formed), however, the operation wall A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edge of the operation wall A210 does not coincide with the outer edge of the box covers A200, A3200.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one row), but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. Other arrangements may also be used. Other examples of the arrangement include a staggered arrangement, an irregularly distributed arrangement, a lattice arrangement (arrangement at intersections of a plurality of mutually perpendicular lines), and the like. In addition, when disposed substantially in series (substantially in one row), the serial direction may be non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (box cover A200, A3200), or may be disposed substantially orthogonally. It may be.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the front surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the end wall portions A272, A2272 is formed as a flat surface, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. One or more protrusions or ribs may be erected from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F).

In this case, the protrusion (rib) (for example, a portion formed by extending in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) is formed on the end wall when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). It is preferable to extend radially straight from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axis of the peripheral wall portion A271) radially outward. Moreover, it is preferable that a plurality of such protrusions (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. As a result, even when the key A140 is pulled out, the key A140 engages with the edges of the end walls A272, A2272, and the end walls A272, A2272 are lifted in the direction in which the key A140 is pulled out (direction of arrow F). This is because the rigidity of the ribs can be used to suppress damage to the end wall portions A272 and A2272.

Alternatively, the ribs may be formed in an annular shape continuous in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front.
A plurality of such ribs may be provided with different diameters (that is, at predetermined intervals in the radial direction). Note that it may be intermittent (discontinuous) in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the height position of the erected end face of the erected wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erected end face of the erected walls A208, A280, and A290 (i.e., from the printed circuit board A119). Although a case has been described in which the walls A208, A280, and A290 are located on the side separated from each other, the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, the amount of retreat of each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the amount of retreat of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane. Furthermore, the amount of retreat of each of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may change.

In this case, it is preferable that the farther the erected wall is from the fastening hole A206a, the smaller the amount of retreat of the erected end surface from the reference plane. The further the printed circuit board A119 is from the fastening hole A206a, the weaker the regulation by the screw ASC is compared to the closer area. By making the distance of the upright end surface smaller from the reference plane, the farther the upright wall is from the fastening hole A206a, the smaller the amount of retreat from the reference plane. This is because it is possible to easily ensure close contact between the erected end surfaces of the erected walls and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 on all the erected walls.

For example, in the present embodiment, if the erected end surface of the erected wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is assumed to be the reference surface, the erected wall A280, the erected wall A290, and the erected wall A208 are arranged in the order of the fastened hole A206a ( Since the distance from the standing wall A209) increases, the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above is reduced in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (i.e., the standing end face of the standing wall A208). It is preferable to minimize the amount of retreat from the reference plane.

Furthermore, each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may also be changed so that the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above decreases as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the erected end surfaces of each of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may each be inclined with respect to the front wall portion A201 of the box cover A200 and A3200, for example.

In each of the above embodiments, the setting value is displayed on at least one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display in the setting change mode, but this is not necessarily the case. Alternatively, or in addition to this, it may be displayed on another display device.
Examples of other display devices include the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the second symbol holding lamp 84.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the set value is not displayed on either the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display.

In this case, when starting the setting change mode, regardless of the setting value before starting, update the setting value to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value), and press the operation part A122 of the switch device A120. A configuration may also be adopted in which the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. It is possible to prevent setting values from being illegally acquired by illegal means (for example, means for photographing the display of the third symbol display device 81 with a hidden camera installed in the hall). Furthermore, when changing settings during a game, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the setting values. Note that in this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

Although the description has been omitted in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor that detects the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (rotational position with the hinge 18 as the rotation center) is provided, and the inner frame with respect to the outer frame 11 is If the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-mentioned setting change is allowed, and the inner frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more with respect to the outer frame 11. If opening (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the configuration may be configured such that setting changes are prohibited (for example, input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is invalidated). . This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized settings changes.

Further, a second detection sensor is provided to detect the relative positions of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational positions with the rotation axis A410 as the rotation center). , A2100, A3100, and A4100 are opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more by the second detection sensor, the above-mentioned setting change is prohibited (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device If the input from A130 is invalidated) and opening (rotation) of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 by a predetermined angle or more with respect to the inner frame 12 is not detected by the second detection sensor, the settings cannot be changed. It may be configured to be permissible. This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized settings changes.

Note that both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one may be provided (the other may be omitted). In the case where both are provided, the first detection sensor detects opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more, and also detects opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle The above-described setting change may be allowed when the second detection sensor does not detect an opening (rotation) of more than an angle. Note that examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle, and a limit switch whose mechanical detection portion is displaced when opened and closed.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 Although we have described a case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), this is not necessarily the case. However, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main controller A110. That is, as long as at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main control device A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of the other electrical connection lines (i.e., whether it is connected or disconnected), , even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the configuration may be such that operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted.
In this case, the setting value accompanying the setting change cannot be confirmed on the third symbol display device 81, but can be confirmed on the 7-segment display of the main controller A110.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 Although we have explained cases in which the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (i.e., setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), this is not necessarily the case. However, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not disconnected from the main controller A110, regardless of the connection status of other electrical connection lines (i.e., even if they are connected or disconnected), operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted (i.e., when a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110) It may also be configured such that setting changes are prohibited. Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from being operated illegally and paying out game balls.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion A2273 is extended in a stripe shape as the form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end wall A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a plurality of protrusions may be arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals between positions AP1 and AP6, including positions AP2 to AP5.
Alternatively, the protrusion A2273 may be formed intermittently from the position AP1 to the position AP6, including the positions AP2 to AP5.

Note that the range in which the protrusion A2273 or a plurality of protrusions are formed is not limited to the range from position AP1 to position AP6, including positions AP2 to AP5, and this range may be reduced or expanded. . This range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b.

In the ninth embodiment, the board box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410, so that the board box A3100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410, so that the board box A3100 is in the second position (the position where the front of the operation wall part A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, FIG. 122). Although a case has been described in which the displacement structure is arranged in b), it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to adopt other displacement forms.

As another form of displacement, for example, the board box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction of the inner frame 12 (in the direction of arrows L and R), and the board box is slidably displaced in the direction opposite to the hinge 18 (in the direction of arrow L). By doing so, the board box is placed in the second position, and the rotation axis A410 is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (direction of arrows F and B) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). An example is a mode in which the substrate box is disposed at the second position by being displaced (rotated) about A410 as the rotation center.

In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating shaft A4410 is formed in each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and at least one or both rotating shafts A4410 are It may be formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, each of the box covers A200, A3200 and the box base A300 is formed with a divided body of the rotating shaft A4410, and with the box covers A200, A3200 connected to the box base A300, one rotating shaft is formed from each divided body. A4410 may be formed.

The same applies to the seventh to ninth embodiments, and although the case where the rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400 has been described, it is also possible to form the rotation axis A410 in the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. It's okay. Further, similarly to the case described above, one rotating shaft A410 may be formed from the divided bodies formed on each of the box covers A200 and A3200 connected to the box base A300.

<First control example>
Next, various control contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 124 to 225. In addition, in this first control example, a control example will be explained with some configuration changes from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, and the detailed explanation will be given for the same configuration as each of the above-mentioned embodiments. Explanation will be omitted. Note that some of the configurations used in this control example that are the same as those in each of the above embodiments are given different numerals, but this is for the purpose of explaining the invention of this control example in an easy-to-understand manner. Since the specific contents of the configuration are the same as the corresponding configurations of each of the above embodiments, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is changed. are different, and otherwise are the same. Detailed explanations of the same configurations will be omitted, and differences from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment and points whose explanations were omitted in the first embodiment will be explained in detail.

FIG. 124 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example. As shown in FIG. 124, in this first control example, a first frame button 22za and a second frame button 22zb are added to the front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 1). They are different in that they are the same, but otherwise the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the frame button 22 described above, the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb serve as operation means that can be operated by the player. In this first control example, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the player is configured to be able to arbitrarily select the presentation mode for various presentations executed in the pachinko machine 10, and This embodiment differs from the embodiment in that the number of operating means that can be operated by the player is increased from one to three.

As shown in FIG. 124, the frame button 22 is arranged on the substantially horizontal surface of the upper plate 17, whereas the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged on the substantially vertical surface of the upper plate 17. It is configured so that it is placed in Furthermore, the frame button 22 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the operating handle 51 (a position spaced 300 mm to the left from the operating handle 51) in the width direction when looking at the pachinko machine 10 from the front (viewpoint in FIG. 124). The first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged at a position not further apart than the frame button 22 (a position 100 to 150 mm away from the operating handle 51 to the left). There is.

In other words, when the player operates the operation handle 51 using the right hand, the frame button 22 is configured to be easier to operate with the left hand than the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb. In addition, since the operation buttons 22 arranged on the horizontal plane can be operated by moving the left hand in the direction of gravity, they are easier to operate than the first frame button 22za and second frame button 22zb arranged on the vertical plane. It is also designed to be easy to operate.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, this control example is configured to be able to execute a performance (so-called continuous hit performance) in which the player can operate the operating means multiple times within one performance performed on the pachinko machine 10. are doing. In this case, by using the frame button 22 as the operating means to be operated by the player in the continuous hit performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the continuous hit performance.

Furthermore, while the above-described continuous hit performance is being executed, an operation for ending the ongoing continuous hit performance can be executed. Specifically, the operation means (frame button 22) operated during the continuous hit performance and It is configured such that the continuous hit performance can be ended midway by operating the operating means (the first frame button 22za or the second frame button 22zb) arranged at separate positions. With this configuration, a player who is actively participating in the continuous hit performance, that is, a player who has operated the frame button 22 multiple times, can use the operating means (the third It is possible to prevent the user from accidentally operating the first frame button 22za or the second frame button 22zb. In addition, since the movement direction of the left hand when operating the frame button 22, the first frame button 22za, and the second frame button 22zb is different, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating the operating means. This can be further suppressed. Furthermore, since the first frame button 22za and the second frame button 22zb are arranged in positions that are more difficult to operate with the left hand than the frame button 22, it is possible to further prevent the player from erroneously operating the operating means. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be explained. FIG. 125 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is the same as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2), Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in this control example, in order to explain in detail the control content of the game executed based on the ball shot to the game board 13 among the configuration of the game board 13, in FIG. Although the configuration necessary to explain the downstream contents is described and the other components are simplified, the same configuration as the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is actually provided.

As shown in FIG. 125, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example has a left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 provided at the center of the game board 13, and a left side area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. There is a game (left-handed game) in which the intensity of the shot ball flowing down the left side area when the player operates the operation handle 51, and a game where the shot ball flows down the left side area. It is configured to be able to execute a game (right-handed game) that has the strength of flowing down the area.

Two general ball entry ports 63 are provided in the left region, and a first ball entry port 64 is provided at a position where a ball that has flown down the left region can enter. Among the balls that flowed down the left side area, the balls that did not enter the general ball entry port 63 and the first ball entry port 64 flow into the out port 71 provided at the most downstream part of the game area, not shown. It is configured to flow down the discharge path and be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, in the right area, there is a through gate 67, a second ball entrance 640, an open state in which a ball can enter the second ball entrance 640, and a state in which the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640, and a state in which the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640. An electric accessory 640a that can be changed into a closed state that makes it difficult for a ball to enter the ball, a specific winning opening 65a, and an open state that is associated with the specific winning opening 65a and allows a ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. A variable prize winning device 65 is provided which can be changed to a closed state which makes it more difficult to enter a ball than an open state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example in which the game board 13 is configured as described above, a special symbol lottery is executed based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and a special symbol lottery is executed based on the lottery result. A variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the variably displayed third symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, "7.7.7"), a jackpot game (bonus game) advantageous to the player is executed.

When a jackpot game is executed, an operation is performed in which the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). , referred to as a right-handed game), and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65. When one ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, so the player can win many prize balls during the jackpot game.

As mentioned above, in the normal game state where a jackpot game is not being executed, a game is performed in which a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, and in the jackpot game state where a jackpot game is being executed, the game is variable with a right-handed game. The player will aim for the winning device 65. Therefore, by varying the area in which the ball is fired depending on the game state, it is possible to make the player feel that he or she is playing a game.

Further, the variable winning device 65, whose opening operation is performed during the jackpot game, is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 through which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a can pass. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128, but there are two paths in the variable prize winning device 65 that the ball can pass through, and the ball that has flown down one of the paths can pass through. It is configured to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. Then, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is over, a probability change state (high probability of special symbol status) is given.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to execute a normal symbol lottery as a lottery separate from the special symbol lottery, and when a ball passes through the through gate 67 provided on the game board 13, It is configured so that the right for the regular symbol lottery can be acquired. Like the special symbols, this normal symbol can also be set to a state in which it is easy to win (high probability state) and a state in which it is difficult to win (low probability state), and you can win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. When the jackpot game executed based on the winning result ends, a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and when a predetermined ending condition is met, a low probability state of normal symbols is set. .

Although the details will be described later, when a winning is won in the normal symbol lottery, a normal symbol winning game is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is kept open for a predetermined period of time. This normal pattern winning game is configured to be executed with different operation contents depending on the state of the normal symbol at the time when the normal pattern winning game is executed. It is configured such that when the normal pattern winning game is executed during the high probability state of the normal pattern, the normal pattern winning game is executed for a longer period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state than when the normal pattern winning game is executed. are doing.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, which is configured to be able to change the special symbol lottery state and the normal symbol lottery state, the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). Three game states can be set: short-time state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) The normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set is a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the left-handed game is better than the right-handed game. This is a gaming method that is advantageous to players.

On the other hand, the time saving state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the variable probability state are states in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the right-handed game is better than the left-handed game. This is a gaming method that is advantageous to the player. In this way, by varying the gaming method that is advantageous to the player depending on the gaming state that is set, it is possible to have the player play the game while operating the operating handle 51 and varying the firing intensity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, the high probability state of the normal symbols can be set after the end of the jackpot game, and furthermore, as mentioned above, the player is configured to perform a right-handed game during the jackpot game. , the game (right-handed game) can be played with the same firing intensity during a period in which conditions advantageous to the player (jackpot game state, high probability state of normal symbols) are continuously set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the operation handle 51 from becoming complicated and reducing the player's desire to play.

Next, a description will be given of the flow of the game when a ball is launched using each game method. When the player plays a left-handed game, approximately 1/20 of the balls flowing down the left side area enters the general ball entry port 63, and approximately 1/20 enters the first ball entry port 64. The player is configured to play a ball, and when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, a privilege is given in which three balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and the player is given the privilege of being able to acquire the lottery right for the first special symbol. In other words, if the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, a more advantageous benefit is given to the player than if the ball enters the general ball entry port 63.

In other words, if a player executes a left-handed game and fires 250 balls, he will be able to win an average of 3.5 prize balls for every 10 balls he fires. The structure is such that about 20 balls can be entered into the first ball entrance 64 before 250 balls including the prize balls are used up. In this way, there is a ball entrance (general ball entrance 63) where only the prize ball can be obtained, and a ball entrance (first ball entrance 64) where the right to special symbol drawing can be obtained in addition to the prize ball. By configuring the game to be able to execute a game that aims at Since the number of rights can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent players from being granted excessive special symbol lottery rights within a short period of time. Note that the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured so that the ball that has flown down the left side area cannot enter the second ball entry port 640, so that the ball is not awarded when a left-handed game is executed. The benefits provided are always constant regardless of the gaming state.

On the other hand, when the player plays a right-handed game, approximately 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right side area pass through the through gate 67, and some balls pass through the through gate 67 or avoid the through gate 67. Approximately 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right side area reach the electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is embedded in the game board 13 in the closed state, and is configured such that the ball can pass through the electric accessory 640a in the closed state and flow down to the downstream side of the right area.

Approximately 1/4 of the balls that flowed down to the downstream side of the right area (below the electric accessory 640a) entered the general ball entrance 63 provided on the upper right side of the variable prize winning device 65, and approximately 3 /4 is configured so that it reaches the variable prize winning device 65. The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128, but when the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the ball flows down the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 in the closed state, It flows into the out port 71 as it is. In addition, when a plurality of balls flowing down the right side area collide and the trajectory of the balls becomes irregular, a part (approximately 1/400) of the balls flowing down the right side area enters the first ball entry port 64. It is configured so that the ball can enter the ball.

In other words, when playing a right-handed game with the normal game state set, approximately 1/4 of the fired balls will enter the general ball entrance 63 (3 prize balls), Since it is possible for a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 in very rare cases, if a normal state is set, a game state in which a left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than a right-handed game. becomes.

If a right-handed game is executed when the time-saving state or variable probability state is set as the game state, a game with a regular pattern that has a longer open period than the normal state will be executed with a high probability, and the game will flow down the right side area. The ball is configured such that approximately 1/2 of the balls entered into the second ball entry port 640 enters the second ball entry port 640. In addition, in this control example, since it is configured such that a maximum of four normal symbol lottery rights can be stored, the proportion of balls fired in a right-handed game passing through the through gate 67 is approximately 1/2. Even if the drawing is designed to be similar to the above, it is possible to continue the normal symbol lottery without interruption.

When a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, one prize ball is given, and a privilege of being able to acquire the right to the second special symbol lottery is given. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is sent to the second ball entry port 640 (winning rate approximately 1/2, 1 prize ball) and the general ball entry port 63 by a right-handed game. (winning ratio 1/4, 3 prize balls), and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) without almost reducing the number of balls. Therefore, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the right-handed game is a more advantageous gaming method for the player than the left-handed game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of nails are planted in the right side area, and the ball flowing down the right side area can reach the electric accessory 640a through the channel r1 and the electric accessory 640a. At least a flow path r2 that cannot be obtained is formed. The ball that has flown down the channel r2 is configured to more easily enter the general ball entry port 63 than the ball that has flowed down the channel r1 and passed through the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, when a ball fired in a right-handed game flows down the flow path r1, the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 more easily, and the second special symbol lottery is efficiently executed. Therefore, if the ball flows down the flow path r2, the ball enters the general ball entry port 63 where more prize balls are awarded than if the ball enters the second ball entry port 640. The configuration is such that it is easy to use. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being presented with an excessively disadvantageous situation depending on the falling situation of the ball shot in a right-handed game.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 125, the ball flowing down the left side area is configured so that it cannot enter any of the through gate 67, the second ball entrance opening 640, and the specific winning opening 65a. However, it is sufficient if the structure is such that the ball is more difficult to enter than the ball that has flown down the right side area, for example, it is possible to pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of about 1/100 of the ball that has flown down the left side area. , may be configured to reach the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, the variable winning device 65 is provided below the variable display unit 80 (above the out port 71), and balls flowing down the left side area and balls flowing down the right side area enter the specific winning hole 65a at the same rate. It may be configured in such a way that it can be done. With this configuration, the jackpot game can be executed without changing the game method being executed, whether the jackpot is won in the normal state, the time saving state or the variable probability state.

Next, a case where a right-handed game is executed during a jackpot game will be explained. In this control example, when a jackpot game is executed, a low probability state of normal symbols is set. As a result, when a right-handed game is executed during a jackpot game, the ball that flows down the right side area enters the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is efficiently entered into the specific winning port 65a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations where it is impossible to do so. In addition, during a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to enter the specific winning hole 65a where many prize balls (15 prize balls) are awarded, the ball can also be easily entered into the second ball entering hole 640. This makes it possible to prevent players from being given too many prize balls.

Therefore, if a right-handed game is played during a jackpot game, most of the game will flow down to the downstream side of the right area. Although details will be described later, the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 is configured to be switched between an open state and a closed state by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 65f. When the opening/closing door 65f is closed, a flow path through which the ball can flow is formed on the top surface of the closing door 65f, and from the upstream side of the opening/closing door 65f (the right side in FIG. 125), the opening/closing door 65f is closed. The ball flows down to the downstream side of 65f (left side as viewed in FIG. 125). In this control example, during one jackpot game, the opening/closing door 65f is opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed or until a predetermined number (10 balls) enter the specific winning opening 65a. The round game is configured to be able to be executed multiple times, and an interval period (for example, 0.5 seconds) of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set between the round games (a period during which the door 65f is closed). There is. The period (for example, 0.8 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the flow path formed on the upper surface of the open/close door 65f in the closed state is longer than the above-mentioned interval period (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is configured so that Therefore, during the jackpot game, even if the player continues to play the right-handed game and a ball reaches the variable winning device 65 during the interval period, the ball will flow down the top surface of the opening/closing door 65f. During this time, the next round game is started, so the balls fired during the jackpot game can be made to enter the specific winning hole 65a without any waste.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured such that most of the balls that reach the variable prize winning device 65 among the balls fired by the right-handed game during the jackpot game can enter the specific winning hole 65a, The total number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game varies depending on the number of balls that enter the general ball entrance 63 among the balls fired in the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible for the player to pay close attention to what flow path the ball shot in the right-handed game flows down during the jackpot game.

When the jackpot game ends, if the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the above-mentioned variable probability state is set; If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3, a time saving state is set.

Here, in the variable probability state in this control example, as described above, there is a high probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a jackpot, and the lottery result will be a win for the normal symbol, which is executed by passing through the through gate 67. The probability is also set to be high. Further, the time it takes for the special symbol and normal symbol lottery results to be finalized (hereinafter referred to as variable time) is also set to be shorter than in the normal gaming state. In addition, the probability change state in this control example is set to continue until the special symbol lottery result becomes a lottery result other than the jackpot 200 times in a row after the end of the jackpot game; After consecutive wins other than the jackpot, the game is set to shift from the variable probability state to the normal gaming state. In this way, by setting a limit on the period during which a variable probability state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game in hopes of winning the jackpot, and the interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect that it can be done. The period for which the variable probability state continues may be set to something other than this, for example, it may continue until the next jackpot is won, or it may be set at the same timing as the special symbol lottery. A transition lottery may be performed to transition the variable probability state to the normal gaming state. Further, the period during which the variable probability state continues may be set in terms of time.

Furthermore, in the probability variable state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is driven to open when a winning is won in the normal symbol lottery executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is in the normal game state. The opening pattern is set to be more advantageous to the player. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 183, but the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a set during the variable probability state allows the ball to enter the second ball entry opening 640 more than the opening pattern set during the normal state. It is set so that the period of the open state in which the ball can be played becomes longer.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example executes a right-handed game in a variable probability state, and by aiming at the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640, the game can be executed efficiently. It is composed of Therefore, it is only necessary to continue playing the right-handed game during the period from the start of the jackpot game until the end of the variable probability state, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand gaming properties.

On the other hand, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a jackpot is the same low probability state as in the normal state, but the lottery will be completed by passing through the through gate 67. The lottery probability that the normal symbol to be executed will be a win is set to be high as in the variable probability state. Furthermore, the time (hereinafter referred to as variable time) until the lottery results of special symbols and normal symbols are determined is also set to be shorter than in the normal state. In addition, the time saving state in this control example is set to continue until the special symbol lottery result becomes a lottery result other than the jackpot 100 times in a row after the end of the jackpot game, It is set to shift from the time saving state to the normal state after a successive non-jackpot hit. By setting a limit on the period during which the time-saving state advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game in hopes of winning the jackpot, and the interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect that it can be done. The period for which the time saving state continues may be set to other contents than this, for example, it may continue until the next jackpot is won, or it may be set at the same timing as the special symbol lottery. A transition lottery may be performed to transition the time saving state to the normal state. Further, the period during which the time saving state continues may be set in terms of time. Further, the period during which the time saving state is set (the number of times the time saving state is set) may be varied depending on the type of jackpot game that is the trigger for setting the time saving state.

Furthermore, in the time saving state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is driven to open when a winning is won in the normal symbol lottery executed when a ball passes through the through gate 67 is in the normal game state. The opening pattern is set to be more advantageous to the player. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 183, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a set during the time saving state allows the ball to enter the second ball entry opening 640 more than the opening pattern set during the normal state. It is set so that the period of the open state in which the ball can be played becomes longer.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example executes a right-handed game in the time saving state, and by aiming at the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640, the game can be executed efficiently. It is composed of Therefore, it is only necessary to continue playing the right-handed game during the period from the start of the jackpot game until the end of the time saving state, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand gameplay.

<About the variable winning device in the first control example>
Next, the configuration of the variable prize winning device 65 in this control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 126, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b that is arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the back side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an LED board 65d arranged, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opening/closing unit 65f that has been opened and closed, the channel cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a channel, and the game device that protrudes into the channel formed by the back cover body 65e and the channel cover body 65g. A switching member 65h that switches the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the side and actuating the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 127 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65. FIG. 127(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 127(b) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 127(b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined to the lower left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 127(b). The bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. The game balls that have passed through the detection port 65a1 are guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 128(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the opening of the specific prize opening 65a can be opened in an open state in which a game ball can enter, or in an open state in which a game ball cannot enter, by means of an opening/closing door 65f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can come in and out from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the top of the opening/closing door. In addition, in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retreated from the specific winning opening 65a by being retreated inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second ball entrance 640 side. It is configured as follows. Therefore, even during the time saving state (including during the probability change state), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 while the right-handed game is being executed, and the left-handed game can be played immediately after the jackpot game. This reduces the effort required to change the game method. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently enter the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 127(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line La-La shown in FIG. 127(b). As shown in FIG. 127(a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c such that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

Referring to FIG. 128, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 128(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 128(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 that guides the game ball, and the channel cover body 65g It is rotatably pivoted from the back side. Here, the channel cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distributed channel from the back side of the channel cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be placed anywhere.

As shown in FIG. 128(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. Ru. The game balls that have passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 are detected by a variable rate switch 65e3 that is configured with a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of game balls provided in the special discharge channel 65e2, and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as out balls. be done.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, when the game ball passes the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during a jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is a probability change state (special symbol high probability state) is set. That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as a specific area for providing (setting) a variable probability state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the state of the special symbol into a high probability state (variable probability state) or a low probability state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, since the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is changed depending on the falling route of the game ball that entered the specific prize opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the player's interest even during the jackpot game. can. The time required for passing from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guiding piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the shortest. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set depending on the jackpot type. In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the fifth round. In addition, when jackpot B or jackpot C is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the fifth round.

Therefore, in jackpot B and jackpot C, the winning game ball in the variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, but in jackpot A, it is impossible to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 ( It is constructed so that it is difficult to pass through. Therefore, it is possible to control the rate at which variable probability states are applied depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to configure the system so that excessive advantages and disadvantages do not occur.

In addition, in this control example, by changing the switching control content of the switching member 65h depending on the jackpot type, there is a jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 (probable variable jackpot game), and a ball that is more likely to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 than in the variable probability jackpot game. It is configured such that it is possible to set a jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (normal jackpot game), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the switching control contents of the switching member 65h are the same regardless of the jackpot type. By setting and controlling the operation so that the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 in the jackpot game is different, the ball can be entered into the specific prize opening 65a during the period when the ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. It may be configured to set a jackpot game that is easy to land a ball (probable jackpot game) and a jackpot game that is difficult to land a ball (normal jackpot game). By varying the length of the period (opening period) until the round game (first round round game) is executed and the length of the interval period, it is possible to set the above-mentioned variable jackpot game and normal jackpot game. It is good to configure.

With reference to FIG. 128(b), a case where game balls are guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 128(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h is blocking the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of this normal discharge channel 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 is provided which is constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball. Thereby, whether all the game balls that entered the variable winning device 65 have been ejected can be determined based on the sum of the ejection confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of winning in the fifth round with the game ball that won five rounds before being ejected and winning in the probability change switch 65e3 even if it is a jackpot A.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player is given a prize ball (in this embodiment, 15 points per ball won) as a bonus. You can pay out prize balls). In addition, by using the detected game ball, it is possible to determine whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, thereby making it possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to give a variable probability gaming state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning hole for granting variable probability gaming states separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Returning to FIG. 125, the explanation will be continued. A center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 provided approximately at the center of the game board 13 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 protrudes to the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81, and prevents game balls from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the identification information (first symbol) indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. This is a display means for displaying images. The display contents of this variable display of the third symbol are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 152). As a result, the third symbol that is variably displayed in various variable display modes can be made visible to the player, so that a period (special symbol variable display period) elapses until the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

Moreover, in this control example, it is configured that different lengths of variation time can be set as the variation time of the first symbol based on the result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, the configuration is such that a longer variation time is more likely to be set when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot than when it is a loss. Since the fluctuation time of the third symbol whose display is controlled by the display control device 114 is synchronized with the fluctuation time of the first symbol, the longer the third symbol is fluctuated and displayed, the more the corresponding special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. It is possible to increase the possibility that

Therefore, the display control device 114 provides a third symbol variation that is displayed on the display screen (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81 in order to increase the length of the variation time of the third symbol variation that is being executed. The variable display mode, that is, the variable display mode indicating whether or not the third symbol variation is stopped and displayed is configured to be executable. By configuring this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation time of the third symbol variation, and to make the player play the game while expecting that the third symbol will be displayed in a variable manner for a longer variation time. can.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 will be briefly explained. In this control example, one symbol row is formed by a plurality of types of third symbols, and three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Each symbol row is formed by a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed (variable) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. display). Then, each of the symbol rows that are being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order (for example, left, right, middle order), and at the time when all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, a predetermined number that is visible to the player is displayed. It is configured to inform the player of the result of the special symbol lottery based on the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed at the position (valid line).

Specifically, when a third symbol of the same type as the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the active line, that is, "7.7.7" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the screen is stopped and displayed, it is configured to notify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win.

In addition, in a state where at least one symbol row is being displayed in a variable manner, other symbol rows are stopped and displayed in a combination that can indicate jackpot winning, specifically, when the left symbol row and the right symbol row are The state in which the middle symbol row is displayed in a fixed state and the middle symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, that is, in a state in which the third symbol can be stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win, is considered to be a "reach state", and the player The system is configured to perform a performance that increases the expectation of winning a jackpot.

In this way, by varying the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot depending on the variation mode of the third symbol variation to be executed, it is possible to create interest in the content of the variation mode of the third symbol variation to be executed, and the game can be improved. It is possible to suppress monotony. In addition, in the above example, the left symbol column and the right symbol column are stopped and displayed at "7", and the middle symbol column is displayed in a fluctuating state, that is, the third symbol stops at the combination indicating jackpot winning. The state in which it can be displayed is called a "reach state", but it is also a state in which it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that they have won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery that corresponds to the third symbol variation that is being executed. For example, once the left and right symbol rows are stopped and displayed in the above-mentioned "reach state," all symbol rows are displayed without the middle symbol row being stopped and displayed. The state where the variable display is displayed again may be referred to as a "reach state", and even if the third symbol is not stopped and displayed as part of the winning combination to win the jackpot, it indicates to the player that the expectation of jackpot is high. Therefore, a case where the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode in which "reach development" is displayed) may also be referred to as a "reach state".

The third symbol display device 81 of this control example is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 152). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a plurality of liquid crystal displays to stop display the third symbol. The device 81 may also be configured.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, and FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 152), so that, for example, three symbols on the left, middle, and right can be displayed. A row of symbols will be displayed. By configuring the third symbol display device 81 with a liquid crystal display in this way, it becomes possible to easily perform a variety of effects on the third symbol display device 81, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts, upper and lower, with the upper two-thirds being the main display area Dm that displays the third symbol in a variable manner, and the other part being the main display area Dm that displays the third symbol in a variable manner. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved pitches, and the like.

The third symbol (identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into 10 types of main symbols that imitate numbers from "0" to "9". It is configured. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 152) is a jackpot, a variable display (for example, a final A fluctuating display in which "7, 7, 7" is displayed in a static manner) is performed, and after the fluctuating display ends, a jackpot game is executed. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each symbol row L1 to L3.

Further, the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the active line Z1 in the main display area Dm. When the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line Z1 in a jackpot symbol combination (in this first control example, the same main symbol combination), a jackpot video indicating a jackpot win is displayed.

Note that the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and is arbitrary, and may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the third symbol in the symbol row, The number of third symbols forming each symbol row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the third symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol. . Further, the area in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the variable display area smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing or not. You may also do so. Further, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the variation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then fluctuated again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol is the same as the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify the third symbol). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

In addition, in this first control example, a specific symbol can be stopped and displayed as a third symbol that is variably displayed in the middle symbol row L2 that is stopped and displayed last among the plurality of symbol rows. . This specific symbol is configured in a display format with identification information (for example, "development") that is not used for combinations indicating jackpot winnings, and this specific symbol stops on the active line Z1. By displaying, it is possible to notify that the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result with a variation time of 60 seconds or more). And, it is configured to be able to notify that the variable display of each symbol row will be executed again.

With this configuration, for example, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol rows L1 and L3 that were previously stopped and displayed in a combination other than the one that indicates jackpot winning, the special symbol lottery that is being executed Since the player can continue to have the expectation of winning a jackpot until the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In this control example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the third symbol showing the same number is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column L1 and the right symbol column L3, the changing middle symbol column L2 is specified. It is configured so that a specific symbol is displayed by interrupting a location (for example, a location between the numbers "0" and "9"). As a result, the specific symbol is suddenly displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable display of the third symbol, so that it is possible to provide a surprising variable effect to the player.

Note that the conditions for displaying the specific symbols may be other than those described above. For example, the conditions for displaying the specific symbols may be such that the numbers indicated by the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol column L1 and the right symbol column L3 are a predetermined combination. It may be set as a condition, or it may be set as a condition that the player operates the operating means during the variable display of the third symbol. Alternatively, the condition may be established based on the special symbol lottery results. In addition, a variable effect in which a specific symbol is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable display of the third symbol is started may be set in advance at the time of setting the variable effect (at the time of starting the variation).

In addition, when displaying a specific symbol, a method other than displaying it by inserting it into a preset symbol row may be used; for example, it may be replaced with one third symbol preset in the symbol row. good. In this case, for example, among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2, if a specific third symbol is stopped and displayed, a combination of third symbols that will indicate a jackpot winning of the special symbol will be displayed in a stopped state. If it is in a ready-to-win state, the specific symbol may be displayed in place of the third symbol set before or after the specific third symbol. As a result, no matter which of the plurality of consecutive third symbols is stopped and displayed, it will indicate a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, so it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fluctuating performance while creating a sense of anticipation in the player. .

In this control example, two types of special symbol lottery results can be set: "jackpot" and "missing", and if a jackpot is won, one jackpot type out of multiple jackpot types is set. By configuring the system so that the game content of the jackpot game is changed according to the set jackpot type, there is a probability variable jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, and a probability variable jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. It is configured to be able to execute a normal jackpot game that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. The combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to notify the lottery result of the special symbol and to suggest (inform) the player of the jackpot type to be set. .

Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot B" or "Jackpot C" where the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is set, then the lottery result of the odd numbered main symbol "3, 7" is set. A fluctuating display is performed in which any of them are stopped and displayed in a row. In addition, if it is a "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which any of the even numbers "4, 6, 8" among the main symbols "0 to 9" are aligned in a row. In addition, in order to notify players only that they have won a jackpot and make it difficult for them to grasp the set jackpot type, one of the jackpot types, ``jackpot A,'' ``jackpot B,'' and ``jackpot C,'' is set. Even in this case, a variable display in which any one of "1, 2, 5, 9, or 0" is arranged in a row is performed.

In addition, in this control example, one symbol row is configured to be formed by the above-mentioned 10 main symbols, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, as a symbol that does not indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. A sub-design (for example, a display mode of a star mark) may be provided. Then, it may be configured to notify the player of information other than the lottery result of the special symbol depending on the combination of the main symbol and the secondary symbol that are stopped and displayed, for example, the combination of the main symbol indicating a jackpot win. When the main symbol or the sub-symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination other than that (first stop display mode), the lottery right for the special symbol that is stored and stored includes a lottery right that can win a jackpot. If the main symbol or sub-symbol is stopped and displayed in a second stop display mode that is different from the first stop display mode, the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is It may be configured to suggest that it is longer than the period. With this configuration, information other than the results of the special symbol lottery being executed (results of judgment) can be provided to the player based on the result of the third symbol variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in a pachinko machine 10 where the probability of jackpot is set lower than the probability of winning, the player's desire to play may decrease due to continuous notification of only the winning result of the special symbol lottery. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

Returning to FIG. 129(a), the explanation will be continued. In the sub-display area Ds, the number of lottery rights (number of reserved symbols) of special symbols that are reserved and stored is displayed. In this control example, a maximum of four lottery rights for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, and the lottery rights are stored in the reserved order or in the order used for the special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the corresponding pending symbols are displayed. Further, the configuration is such that comments explaining the contents of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm and the effect results are also displayed.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured so that it is easy to acquire the second special symbol's reservation memory (special symbol 2 reservation) during the probability change state or time saving state. That is, in the normal state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and during the variable probability state and the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. Therefore, the type of pending symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is configured to change depending on the set gaming state, and when the normal state is set, the type of pending symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is changed depending on the set gaming state. Identification information (special figure 1 pending symbol) indicating the number of stored balls (special figure 1 reserved ball number) is displayed, and if the probability change state and time saving state are set, the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved ball number) is displayed. 2) is configured so that identification information (special figure 2 reserved symbol) indicating the number of reserved balls) is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many reserved balls have been acquired corresponding to the special symbol lottery mainly executed in the current gaming state.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 129(b). As shown in FIG. 129(a), in the upper left corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, there is a first display in which a guidance display mode for guiding the player on the gaming method corresponding to the set gaming state is displayed. A region Dm1 is formed. As mentioned above, in this control example, when the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, left-handed games are more likely to affect the player than right-handed games. If it becomes advantageous and a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, or a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. In this case, the right-handed game is designed to be more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game. Furthermore, even during a jackpot game, the game is configured so that a right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than a left-handed game.

In this way, if the game has a gameplay feature that changes the gaming method that is advantageous to the player depending on the gaming situation (the set gaming state, the presence or absence of a jackpot game), by changing the gaming method, the player However, it is possible to prevent players from getting bored with the game early, but if the player is not able to grasp the advantageous playing method under the current situation and is forced to play the game using an unfavorable playing method, the player may suffer a disadvantage. There was a problem in that the player's desire to play the game decreased.

On the other hand, in this control example, in the first display area Dm1 (see FIG. 129(a)), a guide is displayed to guide the game method (right-handed game or left-handed game) that is currently advantageous to the player. The mode is configured to be displayable. This makes it possible to inform players of advantageous gaming methods in an easy-to-understand manner. In this control example, the guidance display mode is configured to be hidden for a gaming method (left-handed game) that is advantageous in the normal state that is set when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, when a game situation in which a right-handed game is advantageous to the player is set, a guidance display mode (for example, a "right-handed game" display mode) is displayed in the first display area Dm1 that was hidden. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the advantageous gaming method has been switched.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, a prior guidance notification mode is used in which the player is notified in advance that the more advantageous game method will be switched, even before the more advantageous game method is switched. is configured to be configurable. This makes it possible for the player to understand the fact before the game method is actually switched, making it easier for the player to play a suitable game immediately after the game method is switched.

In this way, the notification mode (guidance display mode) that notifies the player of a gaming method that is advantageous to the player, and the advance guidance notification that notifies the player in advance that the gaming method that is advantageous to the player will change. By making it possible to display the aspects, it is possible to provide a game that does not cause stress to the player.

In addition, in this control example, the guidance display mode is configured to be displayed when a period in which a right-handed game is advantageous to the player is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. In a state (for example, a normal state) that is more advantageous than a right-handed game, a "left-handed" display mode may be displayed as the guidance display mode.

Further, as a mode for guiding the player with the display contents of the guidance display mode, a first mode and a second mode for guiding the player more emphatically than the first mode may be configured to be settable. For example, it may be configured such that a highlighted guidance display mode, which is an enlarged version of the guidance display mode displayed in the first display area Dm1, is displayed for two seconds after the gaming method that is advantageous to the player is switched. Also, detection means for detecting the gaming method that the player is executing (for example, a detection means capable of detecting that a ball has flown down the left side area, and a detection means capable of detecting that a ball has flown down the right side area). Based on the detection result of the detection means, if a predetermined period of time has passed after the switching of the gaming method that is advantageous to the player, the game is not played using the advantageous gaming method, or the gaming method is disadvantageous. It may be configured such that the second mode described above is set when it is determined that a game is being executed. With this configuration, the player can more reliably play the game using a gaming method that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when it is determined that a game is played using a gaming method that is advantageous to the player while the guidance display in the second mode is being executed, the guidance display is switched from the second mode to the first mode. It is preferable to configure the display contents of the modes to be switched. As a result, the game method is excessively guided to the player who is playing the game using the proper game method, and the performance effects of various performances performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are reduced. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, only the guidance display mode using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 was explained as the guidance mode for guiding the player about the gaming method, but the guide display mode is not limited to this, for example. In response to the display timing of the guidance display mode, the audio output device 226 outputs the sound "Right hit" as a guidance sound for guiding the game method, and the lamp display device 227 outputs the sound "Right hit" as a guidance sound for guiding the game method. Alternatively, a plurality of light emitting means may be sequentially turned on or off to execute light emission control for guiding the game method. This allows the player to easily understand that the game method has been switched or the game method to be executed using senses other than vision (such as hearing).

Furthermore, the above-described first display area Dm1 is configured such that the display position thereof is difficult to be changed with respect to other display areas. With this configuration, no matter what the gaming situation is, the game method to be executed can be grasped simply by checking a specific location (for example, the upper left side) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

Next, in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, a fourth symbol linked to the variable display of the first special symbol or a fourth symbol linked to the variable display of the second special symbol is variably displayed. A second display area Dm2 is formed. This fourth symbol, like the third symbol described above, is a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery results of each special symbol lottery, and is configured to be less conspicuous than the third symbol described above. . This fourth symbol is configured to be constantly displayed in a variable manner in the second display area Dm2 when a special symbol lottery is being executed. With this configuration, in order to enhance the production effect of the third symbol variation, even when a production using the entire main display area Dm is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not a special symbol lottery is being executed. It is possible to notify players in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is provided with a movable means (actual accessory) movable so as to cover at least a portion of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, as in each of the above-described embodiments. However, the above-mentioned second display area Dm2 is formed at a position on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 that does not (hardly) overlap the movable range of whichever movable means is movable. Therefore, even if the movable means moves during the third symbol variation, it is possible to inform the player of the variable display mode of the fourth symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

Note that in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 129(b), the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2 are shown to be large enough to be visible to the player, but in reality, they are large enough for the player to see. It is formed with a difficult size. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the variable performance of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

In addition, when a performance using the entire display screen is executed as a variation performance of the third symbol, or when a movable accessory for performance provided near the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a falling accessory 700 or a rotating accessory) 840 (see FIG. 7)) is movable to reduce the size of the display areas of the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2 in response to the case where the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is covered. The display position may be changed or the display may be temporarily hidden. This makes it possible to provide a powerful performance without any discomfort.

Furthermore, instead of the first display area Dm1 and the second display area Dm2, a fourth display area dynamically displayed outside the third symbol display device 81 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol. It may be configured to display a pattern. In this case, it is preferable to provide LEDs for the fourth symbol in the same locations as the many decorative LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 10, corresponding to each symbol. Thereby, it is possible to execute the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of each symbol in a manner that is difficult for the player to understand.

<About the production content in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 145, the contents of various effects executed in the first control example will be specifically explained. First, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, the contents of the operation effect that allows the player to operate a plurality of operation means (frame buttons 22) will be explained.

Conventionally, an operation means (for example, a frame button 22) that can be operated by a player is provided, and the performance mode is changed in stages according to the number of times the operation means is operated during a predetermined period during which a particular performance is being performed. There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes a variable operation effect (so-called continuous play effect). Generally, in this type of continuous hit production, the production mode is configured to change in stages, and when the production mode is changed to a specific production mode, the performance is lower than if the production mode was not changed to that specific production mode. The game is also configured so that the performance results are advantageous to the player.

According to a gaming machine that is capable of executing such a continuous hit performance, the performance form of the performance to be executed can be varied by the player actively operating the operation means, so that the player can be motivated. You can let them participate in the game. However, since the performance mode set in the continuous hit performance is preset according to the result of the special symbol lottery, for example, if you lose in the special symbol lottery and win, the operation method will be used multiple times within a predetermined period. Even if you operate , the performance mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot won will not be set. In addition, if the production content is set so that the more the production mode changes during the continuous hit production, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the more the production mode changes, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. It is necessary to execute a continuous hit performance in which the performance mode is difficult to change in the continuous hit performance executed at the time.

In this case, even if the player operates the operating means multiple times within the predetermined period during which the continuous hit effect is performed, the period in which the effect mode is not changed continues, and the player's motivation to operate the operating means decreases. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in this control example, all the performance modes set in the continuous hit performance, that is, when the performance mode is changed to the final performance mode based on the operation on the operation means, the subsequent operation means Depending on the operation details, the continuous hit effect can be ended without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined period during which the continuous hit effect is executed. With this configuration, the player is forced to perform a continuous hit performance for a long time without changing the performance mode, which reduces the player's desire to play and, by extension, the desire to operate the operating means. You can prevent it from happening.

Next, the content of the continuous hit performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be specifically explained. FIG. 130(a) is a diagram schematically showing the start screen of the continuous hit effect. As shown in FIG. 130(a), in this control example, as a continuous hit performance, a performance in which the main character 801 fights against a plurality of enemy characters 802 is executed, and the number of enemy characters 802 is determined according to the operation of the frame button 22. The configuration is such that an effect that reduces the number of characters is executed.

First, when the continuous hit effect is executed, "100" is displayed in the display area HR1 as a display mode indicating the number of enemy characters 802, and in the display area HR2, a display mode to prompt the user to operate the frame button 22 is displayed. A button 803, which is a display mode, and a time gauge 804, which indicates a period of continuous hit performance (a period during which an operation on the frame button 22 is determined to be valid), are displayed. More specifically, the button 803 has an operation mode in which the pressing action is shown as an animation prompting the player to press the frame button 22 (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure), and a normal state (non-operated state) of the button 803. It is displayed as an animation having a pressed state (operation state) and an operation mode that repeats the pressed state (operation state).

Here, the enemy character 802 is configured to be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and in the example shown in FIG. 130(a), a strong enemy character 802a with horns on its head and a normal enemy character 802b are displayed. ing. In this control example, the benefits that are given according to the remaining number of enemy characters displayed in the display area HR1 (as a result of the special symbol lottery, the type of variable performance that is executed after the end of the continuous hit performance)) are advantageous to the player. The configuration is such that it is possible to suggest whether or not the game is a game, and the smaller the remaining number of enemy characters 802 displayed in the display area HR1, the more advantageous benefits are given to the player. Furthermore, when the remaining numbers displayed in the display area HR1 are the same, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage of the benefits given to the player based on the type of enemy character 802 displayed corresponding to the remaining number. It consists of

Specifically, the configuration is such that advantageous benefits are more easily granted to the player when the strong enemy character 802a is defeated than when the strong enemy character 802a remains. With this configuration, the player will watch the continuous hit effect while expecting the number of remaining enemy characters 802 to be reduced by the continuous hit effect, and furthermore, while expecting that a specific enemy character 802 will be defeated. , it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, the character 801 is equipped with a sword 801k as a weapon for defeating the enemy character 802, and by swinging the sword 801k, an effect is performed to reduce the number of remaining enemy characters 802. The display mode of the sword 801k is configured to change as the variable mode of the continuous hit effect approaches an upper limit value (maximum variable value). Specifically, the display mode is configured to be variable so that the player can understand that the sharpness of the sword 801k is gradually decreasing. In other words, the sword 801k is a suggestion means that allows the player to predict the maximum number of enemy characters 802 that can be reduced in the current continuous hit performance.

With this configuration, when a specific number (for example, 10) of enemy characters 802 are displayed in the middle of a continuous hit performance, the remaining number of enemy characters 802 can be determined by looking at the display mode of the sword 801k. It becomes possible to predict whether or not it is possible to further reduce the Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the performance result of the continuous hit performance, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

The display mode of the time gauge 804 is changed according to the elapsed time of the continuous hit effect, and the remaining time area 804b indicating the remaining period of the continuous hit effect decreases from the left end of the time gauge 804. Is displayed. Then, as the remaining time area 804b decreases, the elapsed time area 804a is displayed increasing on the time gauge 804. With this configuration, the player can see at a glance the time that has already passed (the display format of the elapsed time area 804a) and the remaining time (the display format of the remaining time area 804b) out of the entire period of the continuous hit effect. It can be grasped by Further, in this control example, the length of the period set as the continuous hit effect is not displayed numerically. In other words, the length of the period set as the continuous hit effect can be set by the player based on the elapsed time since the continuous hit effect was executed and the variable status of the display mode of the time gauge 804 displayed in the display area HR2. It is designed to be understood intuitively.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the length of the period set as the continuous hit effect. Further, even if different length periods are set as the period during which the continuous hit effect is executed, it is only necessary to change the variable mode of the time gauge 804, and the processing related to display control can be simplified. In this control example, the display mode of the time gauge 804 is configured such that the player visually determines the display ratio between the elapsed time area 804a and the remaining time area 804b to grasp the performance period of the continuous hit performance. However, in addition to this, for example, the value "100" is displayed at the left end of the time gauge 804, and the value "50" is displayed at the center of the time gauge 804, as information indicating the ratio to the display area of the time gauge 804. The configuration may be such that a value of "0" is displayed at the right end of the time gauge 804. Thereby, the display ratio of the elapsed time area 804a and the remaining time area 804b in the time gauge 804 can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this control example, the remaining time area 804b is configured to be displayed variably at a constant speed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the remaining time area 804b is large, The remaining time per unit time is smaller when the remaining time area 804b is displayed up to It may be configured such that the degree of decrease in the area 804b is increased. As a result, as the remaining period of the continuous hit performance decreases, the degree of decrease in the remaining time area 804b can be slowed down, so that the continuous hit performance can be executed without giving up until the end.

For example, when the remaining time area 804b is large, that is, when the remaining time area 804b is displayed to the left end of the time gauge 804, it is better to It may be configured such that the degree of decrease in the remaining time area 804b per unit time is smaller than when the remaining time area 804b is displayed in The length of the period until the end is set in advance, and the remaining time area 804b is no longer displayed when that period has elapsed, and the degree of decrease in the remaining time area 804b can be accelerated or slowed down. You may perform display control as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period during which the continuous hit effect is set, so that the player is forced to actively operate the frame button 22 (operating means) immediately after the continuous hit effect is executed. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 130(a), the explanation will be continued. In the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Defeat the enemy by repeatedly pressing the button" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the repeated-hitting effect has started. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the continuous hit performance has been executed and the contents of the operation to be performed during the continuous hit performance, thereby making it easier for the player to participate in the continuous hit performance.

Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 multiple times during the continuous hit performance, a display screen as shown in FIG. 130(b) is displayed. FIG. 130(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed after the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times during the continuous hit performance. As shown in FIG. 130(b), when the player operates the frame button 22 multiple times during the continuous hit performance, the number of enemy characters 802 decreases according to the number of operations, and the number of enemy characters 802 decreases depending on the number of operations. An effect is performed in which the number of enemy characters 802 is reduced to a variable value). FIG. 130(b) shows a continuous hit effect in which “3” is set as the maximum variable value, and the number of remaining enemy characters 802 on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is three. The display mode of the enemy character 802 indicating the number of enemy characters 802 remaining and the text "3 characters remaining" indicating the number of remaining enemy characters 802 are displayed in the display area HR1. In the example shown in FIG. 130(b), since the display mode of the enemy character 802 has reached the upper limit value (maximum variable value), the sword As the display mode of 801k, a display mode in which the blade is worn out is displayed.

Furthermore, even if the performance mode of the continuous hit performance is changed to the maximum variable value, the player is not immediately notified that the maximum variable value has been reached, and the display area HR2 does not display the current value. The display of a time gauge 804 indicating the performance period of the continuous hit performance and the display of the button 803 are continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player who is executing the continuous hit performance expect that the presentation mode of the continuous hit performance will be more variable and play the game.

In this control example, the degree of variation of the performance mode of the continuous hit performance is configured such that the maximum variable value is likely to vary depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the smaller the maximum variable value (displayed in the display area HR1) The system is configured such that the smaller the number of remaining enemy characters 802), the higher the possibility of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

The performance result of the continuous hit performance is displayed in different display modes depending on the number of enemy characters 802 at the end of the continuous hit performance. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(c), if the number of enemy characters 802 (remaining number displayed in display area HR1) at the end of the continuous hit performance is "0", the current special symbol lottery The characters "Big Chance" indicating that the result is likely to be a jackpot are displayed in the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 131(a)). ”, but the word “chance” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, leaving the possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (see FIG. 131(b)), and “10 to 89” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. ”, “???” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a display mode that does not indicate the result of the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to further reduce the number of enemy characters 802 during the continuous hit performance.

Furthermore, if the number of enemy characters 802 (remaining number displayed in display area HR1) at the end of the continuous hit performance is "90 to 100", this is a case where the player is not actively participating in the continuous hit performance. Therefore, as a performance result of the continuous hit performance, instead of the lottery result of the special symbol, the words "More consecutive hits!!", which urges participation in the continuous hit performance, are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As a result, it is possible to notify a player who forgot to operate the frame button 22 or did not understand how to operate the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous hit performance again of the content of the game to be executed during the continuous hit performance. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to operate the frame button 22 the next time a continuous hit effect is executed.

In addition, in this control example, if the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (e.g., 8 times) after the presentation mode of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value, the condition for ending the continuous hit effect is satisfied, and the continuous hit effect is terminated. It is configured such that the performance result of the consecutive hit performance is displayed before the performance period ends. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132(a), when the end condition is satisfied when the performance mode of the continuous hit performance reaches the maximum variable value (3), the remaining time area 804b of the time gauge 804 remains. , a performance result similar to the performance result of the continuous hit performance executed when the remaining number of enemy characters 802 is "3" (see FIG. 131(b)) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. be done.

With this configuration, the maximum variable value of the currently executed continuous hit performance can be clearly notified to the player before the performance period of the continuous hit performance ends. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, when the performance result of the continuous hit performance is displayed before the performance period of the continuous hit performance has elapsed, the remaining performance period (remaining period of time gauge 804 ) has elapsed, a performance different from the continuous hit performance is executed in accordance with the operation on the frame button 22. With this configuration, even when the performance result of the continuous hit performance is displayed early, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.

Furthermore, in this control example, in some cases where the end condition is satisfied when the performance mode of the continuous hit performance reaches the maximum variable value (3), the special performance result as shown in FIG. 132(b) The performance is executed. FIG. 132(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special performance result is set as the performance result of the continuous hit performance.

FIG. 132(b) shows that when the end condition is satisfied in a state where the presentation mode of the continuous hit effect has reached the maximum variable value (3) (see FIG. 130(b)) as a result of the continuous hit effect, the above-mentioned maximum A special performance result is executed in which the variable value (3) is further varied, the number of enemy characters 802 is reduced to 0, and the words "Great Chance" are displayed in the sub display area Ds, which shows the special performance result. In the display area Dm, the words "Pursuit Occurrence" are displayed, and an animation in which the character 801 makes an additional attack against the enemy character 802 and defeats the remaining enemy characters 802 is displayed. Then, the words "0 bodies remaining" are displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, the button 803 is hidden in the display area HR2, and the player is informed that the performance mode will not be changed even if the frame button 22 is pressed any further. A time gauge 804 is displayed to inform you of the time.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to display the performance results of the continuous hit performance before the performance period of the continuous hit performance has elapsed, that is, the pachinko machine 10 has an end condition other than the elapse of the period as an end condition for the continuous hit performance. In the machine 10, by making it possible to display performance results that are different from normal in some cases when the end conditions are met, players are encouraged to play the game in an attempt to end the continuous hit performance under various end conditions. can be made to participate.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, in addition to the elapse of the presentation period, the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (eight times) after the presentation mode of the multi-hit presentation has been varied to the maximum variable value. It has an end condition (shortened end condition) that is satisfied when the shortened end condition is met, and the special effect result is displayed in some cases when this shortened end condition is satisfied. This makes it easier for a player who has operated the frame button 22 voluntarily to execute the special effect result than a player who has not operated the frame button 22 voluntarily when a continuous hit effect is executed. be able to.

Note that in this control example, the shortening end condition is established depending on the number of times the player operates the frame button 22; however, when the player operates the frame button 22, the frame button 22 The configuration may be such that the shortening end condition is satisfied more easily than when the button is not operated. For example, after the presentation mode of the continuous hit presentation has been varied to the maximum variable value, the predetermined condition may be set every time the frame button 22 is operated. It may be configured such that the shortening termination condition is satisfied when a lottery is executed and a winner is won in the lottery. Even with this configuration, if the player operates the frame button 22 more often, the shortening end condition can be more easily satisfied than if the player does not operate the frame button 22 more often. In addition, in this case, the shortening end condition is met immediately after the presentation mode of the continuous hit presentation is varied to the maximum variable value (by the first operation on the frame button 22 after the presentation mode is varied to the maximum variable value). Therefore, the shortening end condition can be satisfied without requiring the player to predict the maximum variable value set in the ongoing continuous hit performance.

In addition, in this control example described above, the termination condition can be satisfied after the presentation mode of the continuous hit performance has been varied to the maximum variable value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, In the case where the mode can be varied to three or more production modes, the configuration is such that the end condition for the continuous hit performance can be satisfied before the production mode of the continuous hit performance is varied to the production mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. It's okay. Specifically, if the frame button 22 is operated while the first performance mode (first performance mode) in a continuous hit production is being executed, the probability of changing to the next production mode is approximately 1/2. A variable lottery (first lottery) is executed to make the game stop, and an end lottery (second lottery) is executed to end the continuous hit performance with a probability of about 1/100. If the variable lottery (first lottery) is won before the end lottery (second lottery), the presentation mode is changed to the second presentation mode (the presentation mode corresponding to the semi-variable value). If the frame button 22 is operated while the continuous hit performance is being executed in the second performance mode, the first lottery will be executed with a probability of approximately 1/10, and the second lottery will be executed with a probability of approximately 1/10. Execute. In other words, it is configured so that it is easier to win the second lottery when the continuous hit effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when the continuous hit effect is executed in the first presentation mode. It may be configured such that the presentation mode of the continuous hit presentation is varied according to various lottery results executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 in .

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated during a continuous hit performance, the performance mode of the continuous hit performance is changed when the first condition is satisfied, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the continuous hit performance is changed. Furthermore, the more variable the performance mode of the continuous hit performance is, the more likely it is that the second condition will be met than the first condition, so that While making it difficult for a player to predict the set maximum variable value, it is possible to execute a continuous hit performance in a variety of performance modes based on the operation of the frame button 22.

Also, in this case, the maximum variable value in the continuous hit performance is set in advance, and when the maximum variable value is reached, the performance mode is not changed even if the first lottery is won, and the second lottery is started. It is sufficient to continue the continuous hit performance without changing the performance mode until winning. Furthermore, if the first lottery is won in a state where the maximum variable value has been reached, a process may be executed to increase the probability of winning the second lottery without changing the presentation mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the period during which the player does not win the second lottery during the continuous hit performance from becoming unnecessarily long.

In the example described above, both the first condition and the second condition are established depending on the result of a predetermined lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in this control example, the frame button 22 It may be configured such that at least one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied depending on the number of operations on the operation means. In this way, the conditions are satisfied depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous hit performance, and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous hit performance. By setting conditions for the successive hit performance to be satisfied, and by configuring it so that the performance mode of the continuous hit performance is varied depending on the degree to which each condition is met, and the end timing of the continuous hit performance is set, the timing of the continuous hit performance can be set. Since it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the performance mode is variable or at what timing the continuous hit performance ends, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this control example, the player is configured to be able to be informed that the more the performance mode changes during the continuous hit performance, the higher the possibility of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. For example, even if the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the continuous hit performance, if the performance mode of the continuous hit performance does not change, a jackpot will be won in the special symbol lottery. It may be configured to notify that there is a high possibility of winning. With this configuration, even if a state is set in which it is difficult to change the performance mode during a continuous hit performance, the player can enjoy the performance mode until the end. In addition, when the performance result of a continuous hit performance is displayed in a performance mode that has not been changed from the initial state, it is also possible to check whether the current performance result is a performance result that was executed because the frame button 22 was not operated. It is possible to make it difficult for nearby players to understand whether the performance result is based on the result of operating 22.

In addition, a plurality of performance modes that can be set during a continuous hit performance are made easy, and when a variable condition for varying the performance mode during a continuous hit performance is established, any one of the multiple performance modes can be set. In a game machine configured to be able to be randomly set, a specific performance mode may be set more easily when the result of a special symbol lottery is a jackpot than when it is a loss. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the variable number of presentation modes during the continuous hit performance unrelated to the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. In contrast, the frame button 22 can be operated voluntarily.

In this case, an upper limit value is set for the number of times the performance mode is varied during the continuous hit performance, and when the number of times the performance mode is varied during the continuous hit performance reaches the upper limit value, the maximum value in the first control example is set. It may be configured to perform the same processing as when the display mode is changed to a variable value display mode. As a result, if the frame button 22 is actively operated during a continuous hit performance, the number of times the performance mode can be varied is set to an upper limit while the remaining period of the continuous hit performance (period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22) remains. When the value is reached, the performance period of the continuous hit performance can be shortened.

Next, the display contents of the icon display effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. FIG. 133(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an area where icon display can be performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the icon display effect is started.

In this control example, multiple types of icons can be displayed at multiple locations on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and icon display effects (icon Display notice) is configured to be executable. In this icon display performance, the result of the special symbol lottery can be suggested to the player according to the location where each icon is displayed and the type of the displayed icon.

In the pachinko machine 10 that is capable of performing such a performance, in order to prevent the player from easily predicting the performance mode of the icon display performance, the location where each icon is displayed in the icon display performance, A plurality of performance pattern data with different types of icons to be displayed are prepared in advance, and the performance mode of the icon display performance to be executed is determined according to the lottery results of special symbols. However, when using a method of preparing a plurality of performance pattern data in advance, there is a problem in that the amount of performance data to be stored in advance increases depending on the number of performance patterns.

On the other hand, in this control example, when performing the icon display performance, the icon display performance is configured to be able to be performed in a manner that combines a plurality of lottery results. In other words, rather than storing performance pattern data in advance that indicates a series of performance contents in an icon display performance, the performance contents are determined for each part of the icon display performance, and icons are displayed in a performance mode that combines the determined contents. It is configured to perform a performance. With this configuration, icon display effects can be executed in various presentation modes using a limited amount of effect data.

Although a specific explanation will be given later, in this control example, when determining the presentation mode of the icon display presentation, the number of icons displayed by the current icon display presentation, the order in which the icons are displayed, and the display locations of the icons are set separately. The icons are selected by lottery, and the icon display performance is executed in a performance mode that combines the selected contents. In other words, for example, if the number of icons displayed is four, the icon type displayed on the first icon, the icon type displayed on the second icon, the icon type displayed on the third icon, and the icon type displayed on the fourth icon. The icon type to be displayed is selected, and the display location where the first icon is displayed, the display location where the second icon is displayed, the display location where the third icon is displayed, and 4 icons are selected. A display location where the eye icon is displayed is selected.

Furthermore, the icon display location is configured so that the same display location can be selected twice, and if the same display location is selected twice, the latter icon will not be displayed. It consists of With this configuration, it is possible to display a different number of icons than the number of icons selected as the presentation mode of the icon display presentation, so it is possible to simply combine multiple presentation contents to execute the icon display presentation. It becomes possible to perform the icon display performance in more various presentation modes than in the case where the icon display performance is performed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), in this control example, five locations, areas 811a to 811d, are preset as areas where icons can be displayed in the icon display performance. Then, when the icon display effect is executed, a suggestion mode indicating the location where the icon is displayed is displayed in five locations, areas 811a to 811d.

FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when the suggestion mode is displayed in the icon display effect. As shown in FIG. 133(b), when the icon display performance is executed and the suggestion mode is displayed, the area 811a and the area 811b are displayed as display locations where an icon may be displayed in the current icon display performance. , a display mode (circle mark in the figure) indicating the area 811c is displayed. Of the regions displayed in the suggestion mode, the region 811a is displayed in a highlighted mode (double circles in the figure) to indicate the region in which the icon will be displayed next (first).

In this way, when the icon display effect is executed, by displaying a suggestion mode that suggests the location where the icon will be displayed before the icon is actually displayed, the icon is displayed to the player. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the presentation mode of the display presentation. Furthermore, in this control example, a display location (specific display location) is provided where the icon is more likely to be displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot than when it is a loss. Therefore, when a specific display location is suggested as a suggestion mode, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful that he or she has won a special symbol jackpot.

In this control example, a plurality of display locations are displayed as suggestion modes displayed in the icon display effect. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the display locations where icons are displayed in the currently executed icon display effect without suggesting the display order. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the performance mode of the icon display performance, specifically, in which display order the icons will be displayed.

In addition, in this control example, the icon is always displayed at the display location where the suggestion mode is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The icon may be configured so that it is easier to display than in a display location where it is not displayed, and when multiple display locations are displayed in the suggestion mode, the icon may be displayed in some display locations among the multiple display locations. It may be configured so that it is not displayed. This makes it difficult to predict the performance mode of the icon display performance to be executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 134, the flow of actually displaying icons in the icon display effect will be explained. FIG. 134(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the first icon is displayed in the icon display effect, and FIG. 134(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when all icons are displayed in the icon display effect. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 134(a), the icon 812a that is displayed first as an icon display effect is displayed in the area 811a displayed in the highlighted display mode in FIG. 133(b). In this control example, the icon 812a is displayed after the area where the icon is displayed in the main display area Dm is destroyed and an animation in which the icon pops out from inside is performed, so the area 811a is displayed. The mode, that is, the display mode showing the area where the icon is displayed is different from the display mode showing other areas.

Then, the area 811c is displayed in a highlighted mode to suggest the display location where the icon will be displayed next, and is not displayed in the suggested mode on the display screen shown in FIG. 133(b). Area 811d is displayed in a suggestive manner. In this way, as the icon display effect progresses, by adding information about the order in which icons are displayed in the icon display effect and the display location where the icons are displayed, even after the icon display effect is executed, It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the final result of icon display performance.

Further, since the content of the suggestion mode can be grasped while grasping the type of the displayed icon, the icon display performance can be enjoyed in a complex manner. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in the example shown in FIG. 134(a), the first icon display mode of the icon display effect is a "square shape" which is the most common icon display mode. There is. In this control example, the ease of display is also varied for the types of icons displayed in the icon display effect, and icons of types that are difficult to display are more likely to be displayed than when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. It is configured so that the case of a jackpot is more easily displayed. Thereby, in the icon display performance, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the number of icons displayed and the display locations, but also in the types of icons displayed.

In addition, the expectation level of winning a jackpot can be varied based on the combination of the display location of the icon and the icon type, or the expectation level of winning the jackpot can be varied based on the combination of the number of icons displayed and the icon type. The expectation level of winning a jackpot may be changed based on the combination of icon types. As a result, it is possible to predict the performance result as the continuous hit performance progresses, that is, while understanding the type of icon actually displayed and the display location, making it possible to make the player more interested. There is an effect.

Then, from the diagram shown in FIG. 134(a), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, icons are displayed for all of the four areas (areas 811a to 811e) displayed in the suggestion mode. Specifically, the icon displayed second is a region 811c adjacent to the region 811a, and then icons 811b and 811d are displayed in this order. In the example shown in FIG. 134(b) of this control example, the display order of the icons is set in the order of area 811a, area 811c, area 811b, and area 811d. An icon 812a has an icon 812a, an icon 812b has a "diamond shape" icon type in an area 811b, an icon 812c has a "round shape" icon type in an area 811c, and an icon 812c has a "V sign shape" icon type in an area 811d. 812d is displayed.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the "V sign shape" icon 812d is displayed more clearly when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery than when the jackpot is not won (or when the jackpot is won). It is configured to be easily displayed. In order to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing and in which display location this "V sign shaped" icon 812d is displayed, the icon type, display location, and display order are set separately. The icons are configured to be able to be selected independently and to perform an icon display effect that combines the selected contents. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the presentation contents of the icon display presentation.

Note that in this control example, each icon displayed in the icon display effect is configured to be continuously displayed until the icon display effect ends; however, the present control example is not limited to this, and the icons displayed once The icon may be configured to be deleted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed; for example, the previously displayed icon may be configured to be deleted after the next icon is displayed. By configuring this way, while suppressing the occurrence of a period in which no icon is displayed during the icon display performance, it is possible to prevent the effect of the icon display performance from changing if the icon display performance is not continuously watched. Since it can be made difficult to grasp, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, another pattern of icon display effects will be explained. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when icon display locations are set to overlap as an icon display effect. The icon display effect shown in FIG. 135 is the same as that shown in FIG. 134(b) described above in the number of icons displayed and the icon types, but differs only in the order in which the icons are displayed. Specifically, in FIG. 134(b) described above, the display order of the icons is set in the order of area 811a, area 811c, area 811b, and area 811d, whereas in FIG. The areas are set in this order: area 811a, area 811c, area 811a, area 811c.

In this control example, if multiple icon display locations are selected, only the icon type corresponding to the display order selected first is displayed. Therefore, an icon display effect is executed in which the third icon (the "diamond-shaped" icon 812b) and the fourth icon (the "V-sign shaped" icon 812d) selected as the icon types are not displayed. It turns out. As a result, internally, the icon display effect that can display four icons and the "V sign shape" icon 812d, that is, the possibility that you have won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Even though it is possible to execute the icon display effect to indicate that the icon display effect is high, only two icons are displayed as the mode of the icon display effect that is actually executed, and the expectation level of winning the jackpot is high. An icon display effect is executed in which only icon types for which the value is not high are displayed.

Therefore, since it is possible to set the performance mode of the icon display performance to be executed in a complicated manner based on the result of the special symbol lottery, it is possible to provide a performance that makes it difficult for the player to predict the game result. In addition, as an icon display effect executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, only two icons can be displayed internally, and only icon types that are not expected to win the jackpot are displayed. Even when an icon display effect is executed, the icon display locations in the icon display effects overlap, making the player think that an icon display effect in which only two icons are displayed has been executed. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game while maintaining the expectation of winning a jackpot until the icon display effect is finished.

In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 135, when the icon display locations in the icon display effects overlap, the configuration is such that the icon set first is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the icon set later The icon type may be configured to display icons that have been selected, or the icon type may be configured to display an icon that is determined to be an icon type that is likely to be selected by providing a determining means that can determine the type of icons whose display locations overlap. Alternatively, it may be configured to display icons that are determined to be icon types that are difficult to select. Alternatively, a fused icon may be generated by merging icons whose display locations overlap, and the fused icon may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, the content of the delay effect in this control example will be explained. In this control example, the player operates the frame button 22, changes the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 according to the operation result, and outputs audio in accordance with the variable mode. The device 226 is configured to be able to perform a performance (operation performance) that causes the device 226 to output audio. Furthermore, when the operation effect is executed, if a predetermined delay condition (for example, a delay condition that is satisfied when the determining means for determining whether to execute the delayed effect determines to execute the delayed effect) is satisfied. , is configured to be able to perform a delay effect that delays one or both of the variable timing of the display mode and/or the audio output timing in response to an operation on the frame button 22.

The above-mentioned delayed effect provides a sense of discomfort to the player by varying only the execution timing without changing the content of each effect to be executed (display effect that changes the display mode, audio effect that outputs audio). This means that only players who notice the strange feeling can understand that the delayed effect has been executed, and as a benefit, advantageous benefits (for example, winning a jackpot) are given to the player with a high probability. It has been used in recent years to show that something is going on.

However, since the player uses it as a performance that gives advantageous benefits with a high probability, the frequency of occurrence (frequency of execution) is low, and even if the player plays the game all day long, it will only be executed once or twice. It was something. Conventionally, for delayed effects that are performed infrequently and where the content of each effect remains the same, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to the pattern of each delayed effect, that is, after the frame button 22 is operated, the display effects are displayed. Prepare in advance performance data exclusively for delayed effects, which includes display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the audio effect is executed, and audio data including audio data corresponding to the waiting period until the audio effect is executed. There was a problem in that the capacity of the effect data became large compared to the frequency of execution.

On the other hand, in this control example, when executing a delayed effect, a waiting period can be set from when the frame button 22 is operated until the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. , when it is determined that the set waiting period has elapsed, the operation effect is executed. In other words, the timing at which the operation effect is executed is delayed from the operation timing of the frame button 22.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform a delayed effect without providing performance data exclusively for the delayed effect. Further, in this control example, different lengths of standby periods can be set as the standby periods from when the frame button 22 is operated until the operation effect is executed. In addition, in this control example, the above-described standby period can be set for each of the display effect and the audio effect. That is, when a delayed effect is executed, the length of the delay period of the display effect and the length of the delay period of the audio effect can be made different. In this way, simply by changing the length of the waiting period, it is possible to set a plurality of delay timings in the delay effect, increasing the variations of the delay effect, and thereby improving the interest of the game.

First, with reference to FIG. 136, an example of the operation effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 136(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when an operation effect is executed, and FIG. 136(b) is an example of a display screen displayed as a result of the operation effect. FIG. First, when the operation effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 136(a), a treasure chest 810 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a message "Open the treasure chest with the button PUSH!" is displayed in the sub display area Ds! ” is displayed. In the display area HR2 formed in the main display area Dm, there is a button 803 that is a display mode that prompts an operation on the frame button 22, and a time gauge 804 that indicates a period during which an operation on the frame button 22 is effectively accepted. is displayed. Note that the display mode displayed in this display area HR2 is the same as the display mode in the above-described continuous hit performance (see FIG. 130(a)), and the same reference numerals are given and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next to the diagram simulating the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 136(a), a schematic diagram showing the status of the frame button 22 and the audio output device 226 is shown. The situation shows a schematic diagram showing a situation in which the frame button 22 is not operated and a situation in which the audio output device 226 does not output audio indicating the performance result of the operation performance.

Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 after the operation performance is executed, the treasure box 810 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm opens, and the performance results are displayed inside. The word "chance" is displayed as a result display mode 810a to indicate the result. The comment "Chance!!" is also displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The state shown in FIG. 136(b) is a state in which the frame button 22 is operated, a sound (“Pakkaan”) indicating the result of the operation performance is output from the audio output device 226, and the display is The display mode that prompts the user to operate the frame button 22 from the region HR2 has been erased.

As mentioned above, in the case of a normal operation performance, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the operation performance (during the period in which the remaining time area 804b is displayed on the time gauge 804), the operation is performed immediately after that. As a result of the performance, a sound indicating that the treasure box 810 has been opened (``pop'') is output at a timing corresponding to the display performance in which the treasure box 810 is opened and the variable status of the display mode in the display performance. Thereby, it is possible to perform a performance that provides a sense of unity between the visual and auditory senses.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, the content of the performance when a delay performance is executed with respect to the operation performance (when a delay pattern is set) will be explained. FIG. 137(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the frame button 22 is operated when a delay pattern is set for the operation performance, and FIG. 137(b) is , is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen 0.8 seconds after the frame button 22 is operated when a delay pattern is set for the operation performance.

First, when the frame button 22 is pressed with a delay pattern set for the operation performance, as shown in FIG. 137(a), the audio output device 226 makes a sound ( "Pakkaan") is output, but the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the display mode displayed when the operation effect is executed and the frame button 22 is not operated (Fig. 136 An effect in which (see (a)) is continuously displayed is executed. Then, when the delay period (0.8 seconds) set as the current delay pattern has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 137(b), the display mode showing the effect of the operation effect (see FIG. 136(b)) changes. It is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In other words, the delay pattern explained with reference to FIG. 137 is a delay pattern in which the display effect is delayed by 0.8 seconds and the audio effect is delayed by 0 seconds (not delayed). By executing the delayed performance in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to perform a performance that feels strange. In addition, the performance situation after the display mode shown in FIG. 137(b) is displayed is the same as the performance situation when the delayed performance is not executed (see FIG. 136(b)), so the player , it is necessary to determine whether or not a delayed effect has been executed during a short period in which only a voice effect is performed without display effects being executed, and it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the effect content of the operation effect. .

Furthermore, in the production example shown in FIG. 137, since the sound is output from the audio output device 226 immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (because the audio production is executed), the frame button 22 is not operated properly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a delay period may be set for both display effects and audio effects as a delay pattern for operation effects. good.

In addition, the state shown in FIG. 137(a) is actually a state in which the frame button 22 has already been pressed, but the button 803 and time gauge 804 are continuously displayed in the display area HR2. It consists of Then, the display mode of the time gauge 804 is changed as in the case where the frame button 22 is not operated. That is, a display mode in which the remaining time area 804b is decreased is displayed. That is, the display mode when the frame button 22 is not operated continues to be displayed. In this way, when the delay pattern of operation effects is set, when the frame button 22 is operated, during the delay period, the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated continues to be displayed. By configuring the game to be performed in such a manner, it is possible to perform a performance mode that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player as a performance mode during the delay period without using a new performance. Furthermore, even if delay periods of different lengths are set, it is only necessary to vary the length of the period during which the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated continues.

Here, for example, if the frame button 22 is operated in a state where there is almost no remaining performance period (the period indicated by the remaining time area 804b of the time gauge 804) of the operation performance (specifically, less than 0.8 seconds), the delay When a pattern is set, the residual effect period of the operation effect becomes 0 during the delay period, so the same display mode as when the frame button 22 is not operated is continuously displayed during the delay period. The problem is that I can't.

Therefore, in this control example, it is possible to determine whether or not the current time is in the delay period, and when the residual performance period of the operation performance becomes 0, it is determined whether or not it is in the delay period. The configuration is configured such that when it is determined that there is a specific effect, a specific effect can be executed.

Next, the presentation contents of this specific presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the specific performance. As shown in FIG. 138, when a specific effect is executed, a comment "delay occurring" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to notify the player that the current delay period is in progress. In the center of the main display area Dm, a special effect (indicated by a star in the figure) is displayed around the closed treasure chest 810, and a special effect (indicated by a star in the figure) is also displayed around the button 803 displayed in the display area HR2. (indicated by an asterisk) is displayed. Further, since the timing at which this specific performance is executed is the performance period of the operation performance being 0, the time gauge 804 without the remaining time area 804b is displayed. Then, in accordance with the execution timing of the specific performance, the audio output device 226 outputs the sound of "chance" as an audio mode based on the result of the special symbol lottery that is the target of the current operation performance. This sound mode is variable based on the actual result of the special symbol lottery, and when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a sound to suggest the result of the special symbol lottery (for example, chance, If the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a sound to notify the player that a delay effect is being executed (for example, a delay has occurred) is likely to be output. It may be configured so that it is easily output.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting at what timing during the operation performance the frame button 22 is to be operated. In addition, in this control example, when the production period of the operation production (valid period during which the frame button 22 can be operated) has elapsed during the set delay period, the specific production mentioned above is configured to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even during the delay period, the delay period may be reset when the performance period of the operation performance has elapsed, and the performance result of the operation performance may be displayed. With this configuration, there is no need to use new performance data, and furthermore, the length of the delay period can be made more complicated.

Further, an execution condition for the above-mentioned specific performance may be set separately. For example, an execution condition may be provided that is satisfied when a delay period is set when the remaining period of the performance period of the operation performance is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. Alternatively, the specific performance may be configured such that only the operation performance executed during the special symbol variation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is executed.

An example of the delay effect in this control example has been described above with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. However, the presentation mode of the delay effect is not limited to the content described above, and the execution of the audio effect is more important than the display effect. A delay pattern may be set so that the timing is delayed. In addition, in this control example, when a delay pattern is set for an operation performance executed within one special symbol variation period, the operation performance of the delay pattern is configured to be completed within that special symbol variation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a delay pattern is set, it may be configured such that the operation performance is executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations. In this case, for example, if a pre-determination process is executed to pre-determine the winning information of the newly acquired special drawing pending during the execution of the operation performance, and the result of the pre-determination process is that the jackpot is won, It is better to configure it so that a delay pattern is set. Furthermore, by making it possible to set the delay period set as a delay pattern up to the specific timing of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special symbol reservation that has resulted in a jackpot winning in the advance determination, the player can It is possible to perform a delay performance with a surprising length. In addition, when performing a delayed performance across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, it is preferable to configure so that the same operation performance is performed as a performance corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation for which the delayed performance is executed. Thereby, the performance results of the operation performance executed after the delay period has elapsed can be provided to the player without any discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 144, the presentation contents of the gathering presentation and the battle presentation will be explained. In this control example, as a performance for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, a variable performance corresponding to the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation is configured to be executable. Furthermore, as one of the variable effects, a variable display effect using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be executable. As one of the variable display effects, a gathering effect and a battle effect are configured to be executable.

In this control example, as a variable display effect executed within a special symbol variation period to show the result of the first special symbol lottery, a collective effect is executed in the first half period of the variable display effect, and a collective effect is executed in the second half of the variable display effect. During the period, the battle performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the performance result of the collective performance. In this way, by configuring the effect to be performed in the second half of the variable display effect to be variable depending on the result of the effect performed in the first half of the variable display effect, the variable display effect is continuously executed for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to have the viewer continuously stare at the image.

First, of the variable display effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the contents of the collective effect executed in the first half period will be explained with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141. The gathering performance is a performance for gathering a plurality of characters (ally characters), and a battle performance in the second half period is executed in a presentation mode according to the number of ally characters gathered in this gathering performance. This control example is configured so that the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is more likely to be a jackpot when the number of ally characters gathered in the gathering effect is larger than when the number is small. Therefore, when the gathering effect is executed, the player can play the game while expecting more ally characters to gather.

In this control example, the display mode of the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display surface (main display area Dm) of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to execute a group effect, and the main Each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 variably displayed in the display area Dm is variably displayed with third symbols corresponding to different types of ally characters. Then, among the third symbols that are displayed in a stopped state during the group production (this concept includes a temporary stopped display that appears to be stopped, and the same applies to the stopped display described below), a third symbol that corresponds to an ally character is displayed. is included, an effect indicating that the stopped and displayed ally characters have gathered is executed.

The number of times the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a collective performance differs depending on the performance period of the collective performance, and when a long performance period is set as the collective performance, the third symbol stops and displays. It is configured so that it is displayed many times. In this way, by configuring the number of times the third symbol is stopped and displayed to be variable in accordance with the group effect that is executed, the number of ally characters that can be acquired (gathered) can be determined in the game. Since the game can be made difficult for players to understand, it is possible to have them play the game while expecting more friendly characters to gather until the gathering effect ends.

Furthermore, in this control example, different types of ally characters are set for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 that are variably displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to create interest in the display mode in which each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this control example, the number of ally characters set for each symbol row is different, and specifically, for the middle symbol row L2, other symbol rows (left symbol row L1, right symbol row L1, right symbol row It is configured so that more ally characters are set than in the symbol row L3).

By configuring this way, the player can watch the group performance while being strongly aware that the third symbol corresponding to the ally character will be stopped and displayed for a symbol row in which many ally characters are set. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. For example, the number of times the third symbol is stopped and displayed as a group effect is set to two, and one type of ally character (Character 1) is in the left symbol column L1 and one type (Character 2) is in the right symbol column L3, and the middle symbol If two types of ally characters (Character 3 and Character 4) are set in column L2, in order to gather four types of ally characters (Character 1 to Character 4) in this variable effect, the first At the 3 symbol stop display timing, at least character 3 or character 4 needs to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row L2, and there is no need for an ally character to be stopped and displayed in the left symbol row L1 and right symbol row L3. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which ally character is stopped and displayed in which symbol row at which timing, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, the specific presentation contents of the group presentation executed in this control example will be explained. FIG. 139(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when a group effect is started, and FIG. 139(b) is a diagram showing a list of allied characters that can be obtained in the group effect. FIG. 140(a) is a diagram showing an example of the displayed display screen, and FIG. 140(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when an ally character is acquired in the group performance, and FIG. 140(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen that is displayed. is a diagram showing an example of the end screen of the collective performance.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), when the collective effect is executed, the display mode of the third symbol set in the symbol rows L1 to L3 is changed, and the third symbol in the left symbol row L1 is displayed in a stopped state. A left preliminary symbol display area 900a in which preliminary symbols are displayed is formed so as to be attached to the left third symbol display area 901a. Similarly, a middle preliminary symbol display area 900b where a middle preliminary symbol is displayed is formed so as to be attached to a middle third symbol display area 901b where the third symbol of the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed, and a middle preliminary symbol display area 900b is formed where a middle preliminary symbol is displayed. A right preliminary symbol display area 900c in which a right preliminary symbol is displayed is formed so as to be attached to a right third symbol display area 901c in which a third symbol of is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the character "Da" is displayed in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a, the character "Shu" is displayed in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, and the character "Shu" is displayed in the right preliminary symbol display area 900c. On the other hand, when the characters ``go'' are stopped and displayed, the group effect is started, and the characters ``start group effect'' indicating that the group effect has been executed are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 139(a) is for displaying the start timing of the collective effect, and preliminary symbols for indicating that the collective effect is started are stopped in each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c. Although the displayed display screen has been explained, each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c may be used for other effects. ), each preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed in each preliminary symbol display area 900a to 900c in a display mode (for example, the characters "Continuing") to indicate that a continuous effect is being performed, It may be configured such that each preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode to indicate the currently set gaming state (for example, the characters "probability change").

Further, a preliminary symbol may be used as an effect to stimulate whether or not a collective effect is executed. For example, a preliminary symbol is displayed in each preliminary symbol display area 900a to 900c in correspondence with the stop display timing of each symbol row L1 to L3. is stopped and displayed, first the left preliminary symbol display area 900a is stopped and displayed as "large", then the right preliminary symbol display area 900c is stopped and displayed is the preliminary symbol "match", and finally It may be configured such that a preliminary symbol of a "cross mark" is stopped and displayed in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b that is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the collective performance will be executed, depending on the stop display mode of each of the preliminary symbol display areas 900a to 900c.

In addition, in this control example, the third symbol is configured to be stopped and displayed in the normal display mode at the start timing of the collective effect shown in FIG. 139(a). The preliminary symbol is configured to be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop display mode of the third symbol. With this configuration, there is no need to use a dedicated stop display control for the third symbol or a dedicated third symbol type as display control when a collective effect is started, and the processing load of display control is reduced. can be reduced.

In this control example, the third symbol is also stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the timing when the preliminary symbol indicating the start of the collective performance is stopped, so that the player can know that the collective performance is about to start. Although the configuration is such that it can be easily displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that only the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed while the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. With this configuration, the preliminary symbols can be stopped and displayed regardless of the timing of stopping and displaying the third symbol, and therefore the collective performance can be started at various timings. Furthermore, there is no need to execute stop display control for stopping and displaying (temporarily stopping) the third symbol in synchronization with the start timing of the group performance, and the processing load of display control can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, the display screen indicating the start of the collective effect shown in FIG. 139(a) can be displayed at a plurality of timings. When performing a collective effect from the start timing of the special symbol variation, the preliminary symbol will stop in a display mode indicating the start of the collective effect at the stop display timing of the third symbol corresponding to the stop timing of the special symbol variation in progress. When performing a collective performance with a special symbol variation that is displayed and being executed, the preliminary symbol can be stopped and displayed at multiple timings during the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation. It is composed of With this configuration, the performance period of the collective performance can be easily varied. In addition, in FIG. 139(a), since the preliminary symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific timing during the variable display of the special symbol variation, the display area Dm1 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm is A fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation is displayed in a variable manner.

Next, when the group effect is started, a display screen for the group effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 139(b). When the collective effect is started, a display area HR5 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm. This display area HR5 is a display area in which the acquired (gathered) ally characters are displayed, and the achievable display frame corresponds to the maximum number of ally characters that can be acquired, depending on the production mode of the collective performance to be executed. (In the figure, seven display frames are indicated by dotted lines) are displayed. At the time shown in FIG. 139(b), since no ally characters have been acquired, no acquired ally characters are displayed in the display area HR5.

By forming the display area HR5 in this way and displaying the obtainable display frame and the acquired ally characters, the player is informed in advance of the maximum number of ally characters that can be acquired in this collective performance. Therefore, it is possible to easily evaluate the performance contents of the collective performance. Furthermore, since the number and type of ally characters that have already been acquired can be displayed as a history, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player. In addition, a display area HR6 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and the maximum number of ally characters that can be acquired in this collective performance and the number of ally characters that have been acquired are displayed in numerical information. In the state shown in FIG. 139(b), the maximum number of ally characters that can be acquired is "7" and the number of acquired ally characters is "0". "0/7" is displayed as the information display mode indicating the situation.

When the collective performance is executed, a display mode dedicated to the collective performance is set as the display mode of the third symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c. Specifically, the third symbol in the display mode corresponding to each ally character and the third symbol in the display mode not corresponding to the ally character are configured to be stopped and displayed. Then, the third symbol that is variably displayed in each of the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c is stopped and displayed before the preliminary symbol that is variably displayed in each of the auxiliary symbol display areas 900a to 900c.

In FIG. 139(b), a third symbol in a display mode that does not correspond to an ally character (indicated by "?" in the figure) is stopped and displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a and the right third symbol display area 901c, In the middle third symbol display area 901b, a third symbol in a display mode that resembles a "bird" is stopped and displayed as a third symbol in a display mode corresponding to an ally character. At this point, as mentioned above, the reserve symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, so the ally character that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol in the collective performance has not been acquired, but it indicates that the ally character will be acquired. When the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in the display mode, the ally character to be acquired is notified in advance.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in advance of the number and type of ally characters that will be acquired in the event of successful acquisition of ally characters in the collective performance. In this way, the contents of the collective performance to be executed this time can be announced step by step. In addition, during the execution of the group production, by displaying a plurality of display modes corresponding to ally characters in the third symbol, and stopping displaying a preliminary symbol in a display mode indicating that acquisition of an ally character has failed. , it becomes possible to stop and display the third symbol corresponding to an ally character that cannot actually be acquired. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance that effectively uses the image data of the third symbol, which is a display mode dedicated to collective performance.

Thereafter, when the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that an ally character is acquired, the display screen shown in FIG. 140(a) is displayed. In FIG. 140(a), the display mode of the preliminary symbols indicating acquiring an ally character is "large" in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a, "collection" in the middle preliminary symbol display area 900b, and right preliminary symbol display area 900c. The character “Go” will stop displayed on the screen. Then, as a group effect, a guidance display indicating that an ally character (tri-character) corresponding to the display mode imitating the "tori" that has already been stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b has been acquired is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. A comment “Get the bird!!” is displayed.

Further, in the display area HR5, a simple display mode imitating a "bird" is displayed in the fifth display frame from the top to indicate acquired ally characters. Here, in this control example, a predetermined order is assigned in advance to the ally characters that can be obtained, and among the plurality of display frames displayed in the display area HR5, the order corresponding to the order assigned in advance is assigned to the ally characters that can be obtained. It is configured so that the acquired ally character is displayed at the position. That is, in the state of the display area HR5 shown in FIG. 139(b), only the total number of ally characters that can be acquired in the current group performance is notified to the player, but as shown in FIG. 140(a), , when one ally character is acquired, it is possible for the player to predict the type of ally character that can be acquired in the currently executed collective performance based on the location of the display frame in which the acquired ally character is displayed. Become.

Therefore, as the collective performance progresses, it becomes possible to predict the performance mode of the collective performance in more detail, so that it is possible to keep the players interested in the contents of the performance to be executed.

Note that in this control example, the shape of each display frame displayed in the display area HR5 is all the same, but the shape is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to predict the ally character corresponding to each display frame. The shape of the display frame may be varied to a certain degree. Further, supplementary information that allows prediction of the ally character corresponding to each display frame may be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the type of ally character that can be obtained in the current collective performance immediately after the collective performance is started.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, the acquired ally characters are displayed in positions corresponding to the predetermined order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ally characters are displayed in the order in which they are acquired. It may be configured so that they are displayed side by side, or if the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is varied depending on the type of ally character acquired, the characters are displayed in descending order of probability of winning a jackpot. It may be configured so that the acquired ally characters are displayed side by side.

Furthermore, in this control example, the total number of ally characters that can be obtained in the collective performance that is being executed in the display area HR5 immediately after the collective performance is started is notified to the player. Without limitation, only a portion of the total number of ally characters that can be acquired in the collective performance being executed is notified to the player, and as the collective performance progresses, the number of display frames displayed in the display area HR5 is increased. In this way, the number of ally characters that can be acquired in the collective performance may be increased. As a result, even if a small number of ally characters that can be obtained is announced immediately after the group production is executed, the number of ally characters that can be acquired may be increased midway through, reducing the desire to play. This can be suppressed.

In this control example, the timing of acquiring an ally character, that is, the preliminary symbol can be stopped and displayed multiple times at a "large gathering" within the presentation period of the gathering presentation. Then, after acquiring ally characters a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 140(b), when the preliminary symbols are displayed in a display mode different from the "large gathering", the gathering effect ends.

In FIG. 140(b), as displayed in the display area HR5 and the display area HR6, a total of four ally characters "elephant", "dugong", "bird", and "bear" have been acquired. "4/7" is displayed as the information display mode. Then, a third symbol indicating "?" is displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a, a "boar" is displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, and a "rhinoceros" is displayed in the right third symbol display area 901c, and the left reserve symbol is displayed. The preliminary symbols "Large" are displayed in the symbol display area 900a, "X" is displayed in the medium preliminary symbol display area 900b, and "Go" is displayed in the right preliminary symbol display area 900c.

In other words, while each preliminary symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner, each third symbol is displayed in a static manner, and after encouraging the player that he can obtain "boar" and "rhino" as ally characters, The preliminary symbols that are stopped and displayed are "large" and "match" to further emphasize that an ally character can be acquired, and finally, a "cross mark" is stopped and displayed. Even when executing a performance that ends the collective performance in this way, by making it difficult for the player to predict until the end whether the collective performance will end or whether he will acquire an ally character and continue the collective performance, It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

As shown in FIG. 140(b), in the group effect in this control example, one of the display modes of the preliminary symbols (“large”, “cross mark”, “match”) is used to notify that the group effect ends. The display mode is the same as the display mode when acquiring an ally character ("large", "collection", "combination"), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, to notify that the collective performance has ended. In order to notify that the group presentation is over by making the display mode of the preliminary symbols completely different from the display mode when acquiring an ally character (for example, "E", "N", "D") It may be possible to display a continuous display mode (for example, "E", "?", "D") that is partially different from the display mode of the preliminary symbols.

In this case, when "E" is stopped and displayed in the left preliminary symbol display area 900a during the group presentation, it is determined that an ally character cannot be obtained, and whether or not the group presentation ends is determined. Only the players will be interested. That is, even if the performance result does not increase the number of friendly characters, it is possible to provide the player with an advantageous performance result. Therefore, when performing a collective performance in which only a limited number of friendly characters can be acquired, it is possible to increase the number of times the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the preliminary symbols are configured to be stop-displayable in a continuous display mode, display control may be performed so that only the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed while the third symbol is not being stopped-displayed. Thereby, the frequency of stopping and displaying the preliminary symbols can be increased. Furthermore, when the above-mentioned continuous display mode is stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a row, the next stop-displayed preliminary symbol is the display mode for acquiring an ally character ("Large", It is preferable to configure the display so that it is stopped and displayed (there is a high possibility that it will be stopped and displayed) at ``collection'' and ``gou''. With this configuration, when the preliminary symbols are stopped and displayed in the continuous display mode, the group presentation not only continues, but also increases the expectation of acquiring ally characters. The production effect can be further enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 140(b), when the end of the group performance is notified by the stop display mode of the preliminary symbol, the next display using the ally characters acquired in the group performance is displayed in the sub display area Ds. A comment "Battle Start" is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that the performance will be performed. Then, a battle performance is performed. Note that the content of the battle performance will be described later with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144.

Here, in this control example, when performing a collective performance, the configuration is such that various performance contents are independently selected, and the collective performance is executed in a performance mode that combines a plurality of independently selected performance contents. are doing. Thereby, compared to the case where performance data (image data) is provided for each performance pattern to be executed in a collective performance, it becomes possible to perform a collective performance with a rich variety using less performance data.

Specifically, the types of ally characters that can be displayed in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 are set in advance, and ally characters are acquired during the collective performance according to the variation pattern in which the collective performance is performed. The number of times to do this is set in advance. The total number and type of ally characters to be acquired in this collective presentation are configured to be independently selected according to the result of the special symbol lottery (type of variable pattern command).

Therefore, for example, there may be a situation where the number of ally character types that are set only in one symbol row among the ally character types acquired in the current collective performance is greater than the number of ally characters acquired during the collective performance. This may occur. In other words, when various production contents are selected independently and a predetermined production is executed in a production mode that combines multiple independently selected production contents, there are cases where combinations of production contents are impossible (difficult) to perform. There is a problem that arises.

On the other hand, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the result of combining a plurality of independently selected presentation contents is a feasible presentation mode, and the judgment results indicate that it is impossible (difficult) to realize the presentation mode. When it is determined that it is a performance mode, a special performance is executed and the result of combining a plurality of independently selected performance contents can be provided to a player without feeling strange. With this configuration, compared to the case where performance data (image data) is provided for each performance pattern executed in a collective performance, players can enjoy a variety of collective performances without problems using less performance data. can be provided to

Here, with reference to FIG. 141, the contents of the above-mentioned dedicated presentation will be explained. FIG. 141(a) is a diagram showing an example of a suggestion screen suggesting the last acquisition chance in a collective performance, and FIG. 141(b) is an example of a display screen showing the result of the last acquisition chance in a collective performance. This is a diagram.

In this control example, it is determined whether or not the result of combining a plurality of independently selected presentation contents is a possible presentation mode, and if the result of the determination is that the presentation mode is impossible (difficult) to realize. The configuration is configured such that a last acquisition chance performance can be executed as a special performance executed when the determination is made. This last acquisition chance performance is a performance to acquire an ally character regardless of whether the third symbol is fluctuating or stopped, and among the ally characters that were set to be acquired in advance, 139 and 140, a performance is performed to obtain an ally character that could not be obtained with the performance contents of the collective performance described above.

Specifically, after the end screen of the collective performance shown in FIG. 140(b) is displayed, the third symbol is displayed in a swinging manner as shown in FIG. 141(a). Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Get a chance to get it when it starts moving" is displayed as a guidance display mode suggesting that the last chance to get a chance effect will be executed. When the variable display of the third symbol is restarted in the state shown in FIG. 141(a), the last acquisition chance effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 141(b), the end screen of the collective effect (see FIG. (See (b)), the effect of acquiring the ally character that was stopped and displayed is executed. Further, ally characters that are not stopped and displayed on the end screen of the collective performance (see FIG. 140(b)) are additionally displayed, and a performance is performed in which the additionally displayed ally characters are also acquired.

When the last acquisition chance performance is completed, as shown in FIG. 141(b), "Elephant" and "Dugong" are displayed in the display area HR5 and the display area HR6 as the performance results of the collective performance including the performance results of the last acquisition chance performance. ”, “Rhinoceros”, “Tori”, “Bear”, and “Boar”, a total of six friendly characters have been acquired, and “6/7” is displayed as the information display mode. Then, in the sub display area Ds, the number of ally characters acquired in the last acquisition chance and the guidance display mode to guide the performance that will be executed after the gathering performance are displayed as "Get 2 characters in the last!! Battle begins" Comments will be displayed.

In this way, by making it possible to execute the last chance performance, when performing a collective performance by combining a plurality of independently selected performance contents, the result of the combination can be provided without making the player feel uncomfortable. can do. Note that in the production example described above with reference to FIG. 141, the last acquisition chance production is executed after the suggestion production (see FIG. 141(a)) that suggests that the last acquisition chance production will be executed. As shown in the example, after the suggestion effect (see Fig. 141(a)) suggesting that the last acquisition chance effect is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed again, so that the last acquisition chance effect is executed. It is configured so that the collective performance ends without executing.

As a result, when the suggestion effect (see FIG. 141(a)) that suggests that the last chance effect is to be executed is executed, the player can play the game while being interested in whether or not the last opportunity effect will be executed. can be made to do so.

Next, the content of the battle performance will be explained with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. This battle performance is a performance executed after the collective performance is completed, and is performed according to the performance result of the collective performance, that is, the number of ally characters acquired in the collective performance. In this battle performance, a performance is performed in which the friendly characters acquired in the collective performance battle with enemy characters.

FIG. 142(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a battle effect is started. In addition, in FIG. 142(a), a description will be given of a battle effect executed after the above-described last acquisition chance effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is executed. As shown in FIG. 142(a), when the battle effect is executed, a display area HR7 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and displays the number and type of ally characters acquired in the group effect executed in advance. A total of six friendly characters, ``elephant,'' ``dugong,'' ``rhinoceros,'' ``bird,'' ``bear,'' and ``boar,'' are displayed in a manner that allows them to be identified. A display area HR8 is formed above the display area HR7, in which "6 attacks" is displayed as a display mode indicating the number of battles to be executed in the current battle performance. In other words, in this battle performance, the player is informed that a battle performance will be executed in which the six ally characters acquired in the collective performance will individually battle against enemy characters. In this way, by allowing the player to grasp the content of the battle performance in advance, the progress of the battle performance can be appropriately determined, and an easy-to-understand performance can be executed.

Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, an enemy character (boss character) 910 for battle performance is displayed, and a physical strength gauge 911 indicating the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 is displayed near it (below). This physical strength gauge 911 consists of a numerical display mode that shows the current physical strength value (HP) numerically (displayed as "1000" in the figure), and a gauge display mode that shows the current physical strength value (HP) as a gauge. The remaining HP display mode 911a shows the physical strength value (HP) of the player, and the consumed HP display mode 911b shows the already consumed HP (see FIG. 142(b)).

Then, the physical strength gauge 911 shows that the remaining physical strength (HP) is full as a guide display to help the player understand how much the remaining physical strength (HP) is. "MAX", "200" indicating that the remaining physical strength (HP) is a predetermined value, and "0" indicating that the remaining physical strength (HP) is 0 are displayed. Then, in accordance with the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 reduced in the battle performance, the remaining physical strength is displayed as a guide display to guide the player about the performance mode to be executed after the battle performance and the expectation level of winning the jackpot. (HP) decreases to a predetermined value (200), after the battle performance, "SP reach" indicating that SP reach with a high expectation of jackpot will be executed, and the remaining physical strength (HP) ) becomes 0, that is, when the boss character 910 is defeated in the battle performance, "Great Chance" is displayed, indicating that there is a high expectation of winning a jackpot.

With this configuration, it is possible to understand the performance result of the battle performance in association with the subsequent game content, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance. In addition, even if the boss character 910 is not defeated in the battle performance, the player can be made aware in advance that the expectation of winning the jackpot will increase by reducing the remaining physical strength (HP) to a predetermined value. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player.

In the battle performance executed in this control example, an attack performance is basically performed in which one ally character attacks the boss character 910, and the ally character's attack pattern is to execute either a weak attack or a strong attack. It is composed of When a light attack is performed, the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 decreases by the minimum unit (for example, 100), and when a strong attack is performed, the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 decreases by the minimum unit (for example, 100). , 100) (for example, 200).

Here, the presentation contents of an attack presentation in which an ally character attacks the boss character 910 in a battle presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 142(b) and FIG. 143(a). FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a weak attack effect is executed, and FIG. 143(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a strong attack effect is executed. It is a figure showing an example of a screen.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), when the attack performance is started in the battle performance, attacks are executed in order from among the friendly characters displayed in the display area HR7, starting with the friendly character that was acquired first in the collective performance. An attack performance is executed. Then, the display mode showing the ally characters used in the attack presentation is erased from the display area HR7, and "5 remaining attacks" from which the remaining number of attacks has been subtracted is displayed in the display area HR8. In FIG. 142(b), "Tori" is performing a light attack as an ally character 820, and "-100" is displayed in the display area HR9, indicating the physical strength of the boss character 910 reduced by the current attack (light attack). At the same time, the numerical display mode of the physical strength gauge 911 is subtracted to "900", and the remaining HP display mode 911a and the consumed HP display mode 911b correspond to "900", which is the current physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910. will be displayed in the specified display mode. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, "Tori's attack!!" is displayed as a guidance display mode to inform that the current attack is a weak attack. The display mode of the boss character 910 displayed in the main display area Dm is configured to be slightly variable (expressed by sweat in the figure) with respect to the state in which it is not attacked (see FIG. 142(a)). ing. The display mode of this boss character 910 is configured to be variably displayed in different display modes depending on the magnitude of the physical strength value decreased (consumed) by one attack performance and the remaining physical strength value. By variably displaying the display mode of the boss character 910 in this way, it becomes possible for the player to visually understand the content of the battle performance, and therefore it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance for the player.

Next, the contents of the strong attack performance executed after the attack performance shown in FIG. 142(b) will be explained with reference to FIG. 143(a). As shown in FIG. 143(a), "Bear" is performing a strong attack as an ally character 820, and the display area HR9 shows "-" which shows the physical strength of the boss character 910 reduced by the current attack (strong attack). 200'' is displayed, and the numerical display form of the physical strength gauge 911 is subtracted and displayed to be '700', and the remaining HP display form 911a and the consumed HP display form 911b are displayed as '700', which is the current physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910. ” is displayed in a display mode corresponding to Further, in the sub-display area Ds, "Critical HIT!!" is displayed as a guidance display mode to inform that the current attack is a strong attack.

Further, the display mode showing the ally characters used in the attack presentation is erased from the display area HR7, and "5 remaining attacks" from which the remaining number of attacks has been subtracted is displayed in the display area HR8. Then, when the physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 becomes 0 as a result of executing the attack performance a predetermined number of times in the battle performance, the display screen shown in FIG. 143(b) is displayed. FIG. 143(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the boss character 910 is defeated as a result of the battle performance. As shown in FIG. 143(b), as the final attack performance (sixth attack performance) in the battle performance, the ally character 820 “Sai” executes a strong attack, and the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 decreases to 200. Due to the decrease, an effect display in which the boss character 910 is defeated is executed.

On the other hand, as a result of the battle performance, if the boss character 910 cannot be defeated, a different performance is executed depending on the remaining physical strength (HP). If the physical strength value (HP) is 200 or less, an effect display in which the boss character 910 escapes is executed as shown in FIG. 144(a). Further, when the remaining physical strength value (HP) of the boss character 910 is larger than 200, a counterattack performance in which the boss character 910 counterattacks is executed, and the battle performance ends and the corresponding special symbol variation is also stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this control example, the battle effect is configured such that when a predetermined condition is met, a cooperative battle effect (see FIG. 144(b)) in which a plurality of ally characters attack the boss character 910 at the same time is executed. are doing. In this case, the physical strength (HP) of the boss character 910 reduced by one attack performance becomes larger than that by a strong attack, resulting in an advantageous performance for the player. For example, on the battle performance start screen shown in FIG. It is structured to suggest that a performance will be carried out.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the contents of the pseudo-missing effect will be explained. In this control example, in order to enable continuous execution of special symbol fluctuations, the right to execute special symbol fluctuations (lottery rights for special symbol lottery) is stored in a memory that can hold and store up to a predetermined number (four). have the means. Thereby, even if the lottery right (special pattern reservation) for the special symbol lottery is acquired during the execution of special symbol variation, the lottery right (special pattern reservation) can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it becomes possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so it is possible to continue executing the special symbol variation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbol fluctuation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to vary according to the number of lottery rights (number of reserved special symbols) stored in the storage means. Specifically, it is configured such that the smaller the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means (number of reserved special symbols), the easier it is to execute special symbol variations with a longer variation time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the period during which special symbol fluctuations are not performed, and it is also possible to acquire new lottery rights in a state where the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Specifically, in this control example, if the number of reserved special symbols stored in the reservation memory is 0 and the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed is a loss, the number of reserved special symbols is greater than 0. It is configured so that a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds is more likely to be set than when the result of a special symbol lottery executed in a state where there are many numbers is a loss. When a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds is set, a variation effect of 14 seconds is executed to indicate that the special drawing lottery result is a failure.

In other words, if the variable effect executed in response to the special symbol lottery executed when the number of reserved special symbols is 0 is the above-mentioned 14-second variable effect, the effect of the variable effect is There has been a problem in that the player can easily determine that the result of the current special symbol lottery is a loss before it is displayed, reducing his or her desire to play.

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, for example, it is possible to set multiple types of variation performance modes corresponding to the variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds, but in this case, the result of the special symbol lottery Since the amount of performance data for the fluctuating performance to indicate that the player is out of position is increased, a new problem arises in that the amount of data for the entire fluctuating performance increases. Furthermore, multiple variation times (for example, 14 seconds, 16 seconds, 18 seconds) are selected as variation patterns when the result of the special symbol lottery executed when the number of reserved special symbols is 0 is a loss. It may be possible to configure the system so that it is easier to select, but in this case, the control process for selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation will be burdened, and the number of types of variation time to be set will increase. There was a problem in that a load was placed on the variable display processing of the special symbol and the variable display processing of the third symbol.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or when a variation pattern in which a variation time longer than 14 seconds is selected, the above-mentioned variation of 14 seconds It is configured so that the performance can be executed. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a failure and the result is not a win, the player's desire to play is realized by executing the above-mentioned 14-second variable effect. can be suppressed from decreasing.

In addition, since the result of the special symbol lottery may be a jackpot, even if the player knows that a 14-second variable performance is being executed, the player's desire to play may decrease. Therefore, there is no need to configure a structure in which a plurality of types of variation effects can be set corresponding to a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data for the entire variable performance. In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery executed when the number of reserved special symbols is 0 is a loss, it is not necessary to configure the variation pattern of multiple variation times to be selected. In addition to putting a load on the control process for selecting the variation time of symbol variation, as the types of variation time to be set increase, the load increases on the variation display processing of special symbols and the variation display processing of the third symbol. It is possible to suppress the problem that this occurs.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 150, the flow of various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be explained.

First, with reference to FIG. 146, the flow of the continuous hit effect (see FIGS. 130 to 132) will be explained. As described above with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, this continuous hit performance is a performance that is performed using a part of the performance period of the variable performance that is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), a production (operation production) is executed in which a specific display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be varied. be.

Specifically, for example, when a special symbol variation with a variation time of 60 seconds is executed as a special symbol variation (special symbol variation) executed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 146(a) ), a variable effect is executed by the audio lamp control device 113 during a long effect period (60 seconds) corresponding to the variable time (60 seconds) of the special figure variation (see FIG. 146(b)).

If the performance mode of the fluctuating performance set by the audio lamp control device 113 includes a continuous hit performance, the player presses the frame button 22 for 10 seconds after 10 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation performance. A button validity period (operation validity period) is set to determine whether the operation (pressing) is valid (see FIG. 146(c)), and a repeated press effect is executed in accordance with the operation validity period (FIG. 146(d-). 2)).

In this continuous hit effect, the display mode (in FIG. 130(a), the display mode of the enemy character 802 and the display mode of the display area HR1) is changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid operation period. The performance will be executed. This display mode indicates to the player whether or not benefits advantageous to the player (for example, a performance that makes it easy to win a jackpot (SP reach), a jackpot win) will be provided after the end of the continuous hit performance. In the control example, the upper limit value (maximum variable value) at which the display mode is varied during the continuous hit performance is set based on the validity determination result of the corresponding special symbol variation (result of the jackpot lottery).

In the example shown in FIG. 146, the maximum variable value is set to 20 times (upper limit of 20 times) for the number of times the frame button 22 is operated, and if the frame button 22 is operated 20 times during the valid operation period, the display mode changes further. is not variable. In addition, in this control example, after the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid operation period reaches the maximum variable value, if the operation on the frame button 22 is continued and the end condition is met, a continuous hit effect is produced. It is configured so that the timing for displaying results can be shortened. In the example shown in FIG. 146, the end condition for shortening the timing of displaying the performance result of the continuous hit performance is the end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated reaches eight times after reaching the maximum variable value. The number of ending times is set to 8 in order to set the number of times.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 146(d) and 146(e), the contents of the player's operations on the frame button 22 during the continuous hit performance period and the performance to be executed will be explained. FIG. 146(d) shows the flow of the effect executed when the end condition is not satisfied during the valid operation period, and FIG. 146(e) shows the flow of the effect that is executed when the end condition is satisfied during the valid operation period. This shows the flow of the performance to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 146(d), after the repeated hit effect is executed until the frame button 22 is operated 20 times, the effect in which the display mode is varied according to the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. (Period A). After that, during a period (period B) in which the number of operations on the frame button 22 exceeds 20 times and the number of operations on the frame button 22 is 21, 22, and 23, the number of operations on the frame button 22 reaches the maximum variable value. This is a period in which the display mode will not be changed. Then, when the continuous hit performance ends (when the remaining period of the effective operation period becomes 0), a 10 second result performance is executed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 146(e), the end condition is met by the time the repeated hit effect ends (before the remaining period of the operation validity period reaches 0), that is, when the frame button 22 during the repeated hit effect is When the number of operations reaches 28, the result effect is executed. In this case, since the result effect is executed with the operation validity period remaining, the display mode displayed as the result effect can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22 during that period (period C). In order to make the result presentation lively, a lively presentation is performed in which a light emitting means (such as an LED) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is made to emit light, and a sound is output from the audio output device 226.

As explained above, in this control example, if the end condition is satisfied based on the operation on the operating means during the period in which the repeated hit effect is executed, the repeated hit effect is executed before the end condition based on the passage of time is satisfied. It is configured so that the performance is ended and the performance result of the continuous hit performance is displayed. With this configuration, when a continuous hit effect is executed, the player can perform an operation on the operating means to change the display mode of the continuous hit effect and an operation to shorten the performance period of the continuous hit effect. Therefore, the player can be made to operate the operating means willingly.

In addition, in this control example, by setting a limit on the variable content (variable number of times) in the continuous hit performance based on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous hit performance, the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested by the variable content of the continuous hit performance. It is configured as possible. Therefore, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery, an effect is executed in which the number of times the display mode is varied is small (according to the example of FIG. 130(a), the remaining number of enemy characters 802 is difficult to decrease). In this case, if the performance period of the continuous hit effect is fixed, there will be a long period in which the display mode will not change when the operating means is operated in the continuous hit effect, and the player's operation on the operating means will be delayed. There was a problem of decreased motivation.

On the other hand, in this control example, after the number of times the display mode can be varied in the continuous hit performance reaches the upper limit (maximum variable value), the end condition is satisfied, so that the performance period of the continuous hit performance can be shortened. , it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned problem from occurring. Furthermore, in this control example, the contents of the operation performed on the operation means to change the display mode in the continuous hit performance are the same as the contents of the operation to satisfy the end condition, so that the player , the termination condition can be satisfied without causing any discomfort.

In addition, in this control example, even if the performance period of the continuous hit performance is shortened, the operation effective period is not shortened, so unlike the case where the continuous hit performance is ended based on the passage of time, the operation effective period is set. During the period in which the continuous hit performance is performed, it becomes possible to execute a performance executed after the continuous hit performance (a performance indicating the result of the continuous hit performance), and it becomes possible to execute a dedicated operation performance. In other words, it is possible to change the performance mode of the next performance to be performed depending on the type of termination condition that is satisfied (a termination condition that is satisfied due to the passage of time, a termination condition that is satisfied based on an operation on the operating means).

In addition, in this control example, the operation for changing the display mode during the continuous hit performance and the operation for ending the continuous hit performance are the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), but the present invention is not limited to this. , you may set different operations. In addition, the operation contents of the operating means that can be effectively determined during the valid operation period include not only whether or not the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), but also, for example, the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. The length (so-called long press) may be determined, or the interval between consecutive presses of the frame button 22 may be determined. Further, it may be configured to determine a period in which the frame button 22 is not pressed, that is, a period in which the player selects an operation of not pressing the frame button 22.

In this way, by configuring the operation means to be able to identify and distinguish between a plurality of operation contents, it is possible to set different performance modes depending on the operation contents performed by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed continuously without an interval of more than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) during a continuous hit effect, it is determined that the operating means has been operated, and the display mode is It may be configured such that a process is executed to vary the value, and then a process is executed to satisfy the end condition when the frame button 22 is pressed and held for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds).

Further, it may be configured such that the end condition is satisfied unless the player presses the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (for example, one second) during the continuous hit performance. In this case, if the frame button 22 is not pressed once after the repeated hit effect is executed, the condition for ending the repeated hit effect is met without changing the display mode, so the repeated hit effect is executed. A suitable game can be provided to players who do not want to play. In addition, even for a player who operates the frame button 22 during a continuous hit performance, unless the frame button 22 is continuously operated, the end condition may be met midway through (before reaching the maximum variable value). , the player can be made to operate the frame button 22 voluntarily.

Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to execute a guidance display on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to clearly guide the player about the conditions under which the end condition is met. It would be good to display the comment "If it continues for more than 1 second, the continuous hit effect will end" and a time gauge showing the remaining time until the end condition is met. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the continuous hit performance from ending at a timing that the player does not intend.

In this control example described above, only one termination condition is set as the termination condition to terminate the operation while the operation validity period remains, but the configuration is not limited to this, and multiple termination conditions may be set. It's okay. In this case, for example, the termination conditions that are likely to be satisfied may be different depending on the performance status of the continuous hit performance. For example, if the remaining period of the operation validity period is 5 seconds or more, the frame button 22 The termination condition that can be satisfied when the frame button 22 is not pressed is likely to be satisfied, and when the remaining period of the operation validity period is less than 5 seconds, the termination condition that can be satisfied when the frame button 22 is pressed is made to be more likely to be satisfied. It is good to configure.

In addition, the contents of the end condition may be different depending on the display mode displayed as a continuous hit effect. For example, the display mode when the maximum variable value is reached is the first display mode (remaining number is 50 or more) It may be configured such that it is more difficult to hold true in this case than in the second display mode in which the remaining number is smaller than in the first display mode (the remaining number is less than 50). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult for the end condition to be satisfied when there are many remaining enemy characters 802, so the period during which the player is made to think that the display mode will change with the continuous hit effect can be reduced. It can be made longer and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the flow of the button effect (delay effect) described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138 will be explained.

If the performance period of the variable performance is 60 seconds and button performance is set as the performance mode, a button performance period of 15 seconds is set 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation performance (Figure 147 (see (a)). This button presentation period is made up of a button valid period (operation valid period) of 10 seconds and a presentation period of 5 seconds.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, this button effect is a display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the frame button 22 being pressed during the valid operation period. (For example, the treasure chest 810) is to be executed, and the audio output device 226 is to output a sound (for example, "Pakkaan"), and the delay performance mode is not set. (For normal button effects), the display effect and voice effect are executed synchronously (at the same timing), and if the delayed effect mode is set, the display effect and voice effect are executed at different timings. executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 147(b), the flow of the effect when the normal button effect is executed will be explained. As shown in FIG. 147(b), when the button effect is executed, a button operation suggestion display prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed as shown in FIG. 136(a). This button operation suggestion display is continuously displayed for a period (period A) until the player operates the frame button 22. Then, when the player operates the frame button 22, the display effect and the audio effect are executed simultaneously, and the operation result display (see FIG. 136(b)) showing the effect result of the button effect indicates that the button effect period has ended. will be displayed continuously for the period up to (period B). After that, a variable effect is executed (period C).

Next, with reference to FIG. 147(c), in the case where the delay button effect is executed, the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 is just before the end of the valid operation period, specifically, during the delay period ( For example, the effect when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the operation valid period has ended (for example, 0.5 seconds before the operation valid period ends) after 0.8 seconds have elapsed. Explain the flow. As shown in FIG. 147(c), when the button effect is executed, the effect is executed in the same effect mode as the normal button effect. If the player operates the frame button 22 0.5 seconds before the end of the button valid period (operation valid period), a delay period of 0.8 seconds is set, and 0.8 seconds is set after the frame button 22 is operated. After 8 seconds, display effects and audio effects are executed.

Here, in this control example, if the operation valid period remains after the delay period has elapsed, the button operation suggestion displayed before the frame button 22 is operated during the 0.8 second delay period The display mode of the performance is configured to be displayed continuously. In other words, in this control example, when a delay period of 0.8 seconds is set, the display control device 114 is sent to the display control device 114 so that the execution timing of various effects based on the operation of the frame button 22 is delayed by 0.8 seconds. Since the timing of setting (outputting) the display command is delayed, the display control device 114 does not display the display command until it receives the display command, that is, until 0.8 seconds have elapsed since the frame button 22 was operated. Since the information indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated cannot be received, the display mode of the button operation suggestion effect will continue to be displayed.

With this configuration, when executing a delayed effect in a button effect, there is no need to set a separate display command to display the corresponding display mode during the delay period, and the delayed effect can be executed. The control processing for this can be reduced. Moreover, since various variations of delay effects can be executed simply by setting different lengths of delay periods, control processing for executing the delay effects can be reduced. Furthermore, in this control example, the delay period can be set for each of the display effects and the audio effects, so by combining the effects of each effect, more diverse delay effects can be executed. be able to.

It should be noted that in the above-mentioned normal button effect, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated, the display effect and audio effect are executed without setting a delay period, but in this case, The configuration may be such that 0 seconds is set as the delay period. With this configuration, when setting a button effect, the same process is executed when setting a normal button effect and when setting a delayed button effect, so the processing depends on the type of button effect. Since button effects can be set without changing the content, control processing can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 147(c), the explanation will be continued. In the example shown in FIG. 147(c), the frame button 22 is operated when the remaining period of the operation validity period is 0.5 seconds, and the operation validity period ends ( If the button operation suggestion display continues to be displayed during the delay period, the remaining period display area 804b of the time gauge 804 will disappear during the delay period, resulting in an unnatural performance. There was a problem with this. On the other hand, in this control example, if it is determined that the valid operation period will end (pass) during the delay period, a special effect (see FIG. 138) is performed during the delay period (period D). configured to run.

With this configuration, different performances can be executed depending on whether or not a delay period is set during the button performance and the timing of operating the frame button 22. can be operated. In addition, in this control example, the performance mode of the variable performance is set in advance, that is, at the time when the variable performance is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the button performance as the variable performance to be executed this time, and whether to set a delay period. , and when the frame button 22 is operated during the button presentation, the presentation is executed based on the predetermined content of the button presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , Only determines whether or not to execute the button performance at the time when the variable performance is executed, and determines whether or not there will be a delay performance and the delay mode (delay target, delay period) when the frame button 22 is operated during the button performance. In this case, for example, the button performance may be configured to allow multiple operations to be executed, and the execution probability and delay mode of the delayed performance may be determined according to the operation details performed during the button performance. It may be configured such that it can be determined by different values.

Specifically, the delay period may be configured so that it is easier to set the delay period when the player executes the second operation than when the player executes the first operation, or the delay period may be set based on the first operation. It may be configured such that when the delay period is set based on the second operation, the possibility that the corresponding special symbol lottery has won a jackpot is made higher. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the expectation level and execution frequency of the delayed performance depending on the content of the operation performed by the player.

In addition, in this control example, a period of 5 seconds (last 5 seconds of the button performance period) is set as the result display period in which the operation result display to show the performance result of the button performance, and during the operation valid period. The frame button 22 is operated and the operation result display is displayed until a result display period elapses after the performance result is displayed. In this way, by configuring the result display period to be longer than the longest period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period, the operation becomes effective, as shown in FIG. 147(c). Even if the frame button 22 is operated just before the end of the period and the longest delay period is set, a period in which the operation result display is displayed can be secured, so that an easy-to-understand performance can be executed for the player. I can do it.

In this control example, the performance mode of the delay performance is set before the button performance is executed, so even if the same delay period is set, the frame button 22 during the valid operation period The display period of the operation result display differs depending on the operation timing. Therefore, for example, when displaying a specific animation as an operation result display, it is necessary to vary the display mode of the animation depending on the length of the display period of the operation result display. In other words, as the display mode of the operation result display, for example, when executing a 1 second animation, if the display period of the operation result display is other than a multiple of 1 second, the operation result display will end in the middle of the animation. There was a risk that the production effect would be lowered.

In this case, a possible method is to execute control to extend or shorten the display period of the operation result display in accordance with the timing at which the animation being executed ends. Thereby, the display period of the operation result display can be ended at the timing when the animation is ended. However, if the length of the display period of the operation result display is varied, the duration of the variable effect that is executed after the display period of the operation result display has elapsed must also be varied, and the overall effect of the variable effect is There was a risk that a sense of discomfort might arise in the performance.

In order to solve such a problem, for example, at the timing of operating the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, the remaining period of the valid operation period or the remaining period of the button effect is determined, and based on the determination result, , the length of the delay period may be determined. Specifically, so that the display period of the operation result display is a multiple of 1 second, the basic delay period (delay period set in advance as a variable effect) is changed according to the operation timing of the frame button 22. , it is preferable to add and set a correction delay period. With this configuration, the display period of the operation result display can be ended at the timing when the animation ends. Further, since different delay periods are set depending on the timing of operating the frame button 22, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, as an alternative method, for example, if an animation is being executed at the timing when the display period of the operation result display ends, the remaining animations can be executed in duplicate while the variable effect is executed. Also good. In this case, the player is more interested in the newly executed fluctuating effect than the animation, so the player may make the area where the animation is displayed smaller than during the operation result display period, or increase the transparency of the animation. The remaining animation may be executed while performing display control such as increasing the animation.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147, the delay performance is configured to be able to be executed during the period in the middle of the special symbol fluctuation, so even if the delay period is set by the delay performance, the set delay Regardless of the length of the period, it is possible to change the performance mode of the variable display so that the display mode showing the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped at the stop timing of the special symbol variation. If the delayed performance is enabled in the variation performance that is executed immediately before the stop timing of the variation, there is a possibility that the delayed performance will be executed over the stop timing of the special symbol variation.

In this case, for example, when it is determined that it is the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation (stop timing of the fluctuation effect), it is determined whether or not a delay period is set, and if the delay period is set, It is preferable to control the display so that the player is not informed of the stopped display of the special symbol variation or the lottery result of the special symbol variation (special symbol lottery) until the delay period elapses (ends). In this case, if it is certain that the next special symbol variation will be executed after the special symbol variation in progress is stopped and displayed, the predetermined period from the start of the next special symbol variation will be used. Then, a variation effect (delayed effect) is executed to show the lottery results of the previous special symbol variation, and if the next special symbol variation is not executed, the waiting period until the demo screen is displayed is used to display the previous variation effect. A variation performance (delayed performance) is executed to show the lottery results of special symbol fluctuations, and when a jackpot game starts, the period until the first round game starts (opening period) is executed. It may be configured to perform a variation performance (delayed performance) to show the lottery result of the previous special symbol variation.

In addition, the length of the period during which the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed (determined display period) may be configured to be longer than the maximum period (1.5 seconds) that can be set as the delay period, and in this case, The period (1.8 seconds) that is the sum of the minimum period required to display the special symbol (for example, 0.3 seconds) and the maximum period that can be set as the delay period (1.5 seconds) is displayed as a final display. You can set it as a period. In addition, it may be configured such that the fixed display period of the special symbol variation becomes longer only when a delayed production can be executed as a variation production.

As mentioned above, when performing a delayed performance using a different performance period (next variable display period, standby period, jackpot game period, fixed display period), the actual game content to be executed during that performance period It is best to display this so that the player can understand it. This allows the player to understand the actual game content, thereby making it possible to prevent unintended games from being played.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149, the flow of the effects executed in the collective effect (see FIGS. 139 to 141) and the battle effect (see FIGS. 142 to 144) will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 148, this control example is configured to execute a group effect and a battle effect during one variable effect period, and depending on the length of the variable effect period, that is, the variation pattern. , the performance period of the collective performance (the number of times the performance for acquiring characters is executed) is defined in advance. In addition, the execution timing of the collective performance in the fluctuating performance can be set to multiple times, and as shown in FIG. (1st special pattern variation), in other words, as a stop display mode of the 3rd symbol to show the lottery result of the 1st special pattern variation, "Large set" is stopped and displayed. The special symbol variation (second special symbol variation) of the presentation mode is started (as well as the start of the variation presentation), and the collective presentation is executed. By configuring in this way, compared to the case where the collective performance is executed from the middle of the variable performance of the second special symbol variation (see FIG. 148(b)), when the timing of ending the collective performance is the same, that is, , When performing a battle performance and various reach performances of the same period in the second variable performance of special figure fluctuation, the performance period of the collective performance can be made different.

In this case, for example, at least before the second special symbol variation is executed, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the second special symbol variation is determined in advance based on the winning information, and the result of the preliminary determination is It is preferable to configure the presentation mode as shown in FIG. 148(a) to be easy to set when it is a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 148, in addition to the configuration in which the start timing of the collective performance is different, it is also preferable to configure the end timing of the collective performance to be able to set multiple numbers. For example, it is possible to set a plurality of end timings of the collective performance. As a fluctuating performance, there is a case where the collective performance is executed from the start timing of the variable performance, and a case where the collective performance is executed from the middle timing of the variable performance as a variable performance corresponding to a special figure fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. It is preferable to configure the system so that collective performances (the number of times the performance for acquiring a character is executed) of the same length are executed. With this configuration, when a collective performance is executed, it is possible to make players interested in the length of the variable performance period, and the same type of collective performance can be performed by varying the length of the variable performance period. It becomes possible to use it for production, and it is possible to simplify the control process for executing the variable production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the flow of setting the content of the battle performance will be explained. In this control example, a set performance and a battle performance are configured to be executable using one special symbol variation (special symbol variation) period. That is, the performance result of the battle performance and the performance result of the collective performance are determined according to the result of the first special symbol lottery. That is, when the special figure fluctuation is started (when the fluctuation performance is started), the performance mode of the battle performance is determined.

Specifically, the battle period (number of attacks) and performance results (enemy HP, remaining HP) are determined as the performance mode of the battle performance based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) that is the target of determining the fluctuation performance. It is configured to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to perform the collective performance and the battle performance in a performance mode that corresponds to the performance result of the battle performance.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance mode of the battle performance may be determined after the collective performance ends based on the performance result of the collective performance. In this case, for example, if the number of characters that can be acquired during the collective performance is configured to be varied according to the operation result of the operation means during the collective performance, the number of characters that can be acquired during the collective performance can be changed. Even in this case, it is possible to suitably execute a battle performance that corresponds to a collective performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the flow of the pseudo-missing effect (see FIG. 145) will be explained. In this control example, in order to suppress a long period in which special symbol fluctuations are not performed when the number of reserved balls of a special symbol is 0, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a long period of time is provided. The system is configured so that a specific out-of-specification variation pattern in which a variation time of (14 seconds) is set is selected, and an out-of-specification effect (14 seconds) is executed as a variation effect corresponding to that out-of-specification variation pattern. (See Figure 150(a)).

However, this out-of-specification performance is a variation performance in which the third symbol does not reach the reach state is executed for a predetermined period, and before the variation performance ends, the currently executing variation performance is an out-of-specification performance. Players could easily understand this. In other words, there is a problem in that the player can easily determine that the result of the special symbol lottery executed when the number of reserved special symbols is 0 is a loss, and the player's desire to play decreases.

On the other hand, in this control example, when a variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol variation is 14 seconds or more is selected, a part of the variation time is used to execute the above-mentioned out-of-specification effect. (See FIG. 150(c)). Further, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 28 seconds is selected, the non-specific effect is configured to be executed twice (see FIG. 150(b)).

In this control example configured in this way, even if the player determines that an unspecified performance has been executed, the timing at which the performance result of the unspecified performance is displayed and the special symbol fluctuations are stopped. It becomes difficult to predict whether the displayed timing will match or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss until the end of the specified loss performance, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 145, when the specified out effect is executed at a different timing from the stop display timing of the special symbol lottery (the first specified out effect shown in FIG. 150(b), The third symbol is configured to be displayed by swinging (temporarily stopping) during the specific error effect (c), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific error effect that is executed when the error occurs for 14 seconds. The same performance data may be used to execute the same performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 150(b), when performing two out-of-specification effects during one special symbol variation period, for example, a 14-second variation may be performed in accordance with the start timing of the special symbol variation. If you set the performance (first non-specific performance) and determine that the first non-specific performance has ended, determine the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation, and if the determination result is 14 seconds or more, It may be configured to perform a 14-second variable effect (second unspecified effect) again.

With this configuration, there is no need to store in advance 28 seconds of performance data in which two out-of-specification performances are performed, so the data capacity of the performance data can be reduced. In addition, by making it possible to set the variable effect corresponding to one special figure variable period multiple times (for example, the first half period and the second half period), while the variable effect of the first half period is being executed, Since it is possible to vary the performance mode of the second half period based on the performance conditions established in the previous period, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, as described above, by using a configuration in which the setting process of the variable effect corresponding to one special symbol variable period can be divided into multiple times (for example, the first half period and the second half period), the process shown in FIG. 150(c) When setting up a fluctuating performance that follows this flow, first determine only the 30-second fluctuating performance (normal winning performance) for the second half period and the 16-second interrupt performance for the first half, and then set the 30-second fluctuating performance (normal winning performance) for the second half period and the 16-second interrupt performance for the first half period. If a predetermined performance condition (for example, a new special figure reserved ball has not been acquired) is satisfied, it is preferable to configure the non-specific performance to be set. By configuring in this way, when the special figure variation is started, the number of special figure reserved balls is 0, and even if the execution conditions for the specific out performance are met, the special figure variation is started. If a new special symbol reservation is obtained after 16 seconds have elapsed since then, it is possible to suppress execution of an unspecified performance.

<About the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, the flow of the game in this control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 151, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has two gaming states: a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) and a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, normal It is configured so that three types of game states can be set: a high probability state of symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and the initial state (when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped (or the state after the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 operated (pressed)), the normal state is set.

Then, during the normal state, a game mainly consisting of a first special symbol lottery executed by entering a ball into the first ball entrance 64 is performed. In the normal state where the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to 1/300, and when a jackpot is won, the jackpot type is "Jackpot A" (selection rate 1/2) or “Jackpot B” (selection rate 1/2). When "Jackpot B" is selected, a jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) that allows the ball to easily pass through a specific area (probability variable switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) is executed during the jackpot game, and "Jackpot A" is selected. When is selected, a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through a specific area (probability variable switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the jackpot game is executed.

If the ball passes through a specific area (probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128)) during the jackpot game, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this variable probability state, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) reaches 200, or when a jackpot is won, the end condition is met and the game shifts to another gaming state. Specifically, if the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches 200 while the probability variable state is set, the gaming state will change to the normal state by the time the 201st special symbol lottery is executed. will be transferred. In addition, in this control example, the process of transitioning the gaming state from the variable probability state to the normal state, that is, the process of transitioning the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, and the process of transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to the normal symbol state. The process of transitioning to a low probability state is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the 200th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, but when the 201st special symbol lottery is a special symbol. It is fine as long as it is not executed while the high probability state and the high probability state of normal symbols are set. For example, the transition may be made immediately after the 200th special symbol lottery is executed (at the start of the 200th special symbol variation). Alternatively, it may be moved immediately before the execution of the 201st special symbol lottery (timing when the execution conditions for the 201st special symbol lottery are met but the special symbol lottery is not executed).

Furthermore, the timing of transitioning the probability state of the special symbol and the timing of transitioning the probability state of the normal symbol may be different, for example, immediately after the 200th special symbol lottery is executed, the high probability state of the special symbol It may be configured such that only the state is shifted to a low probability state, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state after the result of the 200th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, during the 200th special symbol variation period, the gaming state can be a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

Since the variable probability state is a high probability state of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640 is more likely to be in the open state due to a game with a common symbol than the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and is a game mainly based on the second special symbol lottery. is executed. In the probability variable state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to 1/100, and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, "Jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type. selected.

“Jackpot C” is a jackpot type in which a 16-round probability variable jackpot game is executed. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability-variable jackpot game is always executed. Therefore, in terms of the execution probability of the probability variable jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, in detail, in this control example, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a 6-round game is always executed, and if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a 16-round game is always executed. be done. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the average number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game.

Next, the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be explained. If you win "Jackpot A" in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, or if you are unable to make the ball pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the variable jackpot game, , the time saving state is set. This time-saving state is configured to disappear until the number of special symbol drawings executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 100, or if a jackpot is won before reaching 100. . In other words, if the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (if you win jackpot A), the time saving state will be set for the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times. 100 times is set).

During this time saving state, since it is a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set like the above-mentioned probability variable state, the electric accessory 640 is likely to be released, and the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. state. Further, the lottery probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is the same as that in the normal state. Therefore, the time saving state is a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. In other words, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in terms of ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, in the short time state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a lower jackpot probability than in the variable probability state, and the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the variable probability state. In other words, in terms of the probability of winning a jackpot by special symbol lottery, the time saving state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability state. In addition, in this control example, the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same in the variable probability state and the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, The fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery to be executed is different from the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery to be executed during the time saving state, for example, the fluctuation time is shorter during the variable probability state than during the normal state. It may also be configured such that special symbol variations can be executed.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
As described above with reference to FIG. 152, the main controller 110 is equipped with the MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, and display settings on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this first control example. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. A first winning type counter C2 used for this, a stop type selection counter C3 for determining the special symbol stop type (reach type, non-reach type, out-of-reach type), and a fluctuation type counter used for fluctuating pattern selection. CS1 and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 177), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 187). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas) for storing lottery rights (reserved balls) for the first special symbol, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a for storing lottery rights (reserved balls) for the first special symbol. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas) for storing lottery rights (reserved balls) is provided, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol A special symbol holding ball execution area common to the symbol is provided. Each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variable number according to the timing of ball entry into the first ball entrance 64. Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored respectively. Similarly, similar values are stored in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the gate 67.

Next, each counter will be explained in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 599), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 599 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 599). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 599, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 599. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 187).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. The ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot for the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first winning random number table 202a is divided into two types: when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability that the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state). The value (number) of random numbers that become a jackpot is set to be different depending on the period in which the high probability state of .

In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Furthermore, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) for special symbols with high probability and the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155(a)) for special symbols with low probability are , is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). The counter is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the appropriate timing.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If the random number is a miss, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is a miss.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become. In this control example, three jackpot types are set: "jackpot A," "jackpot B," and "jackpot C," and one of them is determined by the first jackpot type counter C2. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 599. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are two random numbers that result in a jackpot for special symbols when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random numbers "0, 1" are the first random numbers for winning when the probability is low. It is stored in table 202a. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 2 out of a total of 600 random numbers, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is 2/600 (1/300). becomes.

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are six random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot, and the values "0 to 5" are stored in the first winning random number table 202a for the high probability. . In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 6 out of a total of 600 random numbers, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is 6/600 (1/100). becomes.

In addition, in this control example, the random number value that results in a jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability times and the random number value that results in a jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability times is used. The configuration is such that the same random value is specified for both numbers. With this configuration, for example, if "0" is acquired as the value of the first winning random number counter C1, the gaming state when executing the jackpot determination using the value of the first winning random number counter C1. Regardless of the situation, you can win the jackpot. Therefore, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 and a reserved ball with a special symbol is acquired, it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot has been acquired. Since the special symbol lottery can be easily determined before it is executed, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect to suggest that a jackpot will be determined later without knowing the set gaming state, and the effect of the effect can be improved. can be increased.

In addition, the value of the first winning random number counter C1, which is determined to be a jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1, which is determined to be a jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is high, are made so that they do not overlap. It may be configured. In this case, depending on the situation (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of special symbols or a low probability state of special symbols), the random number that is determined to be a jackpot (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) ) are different, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol. Therefore, it is more likely that a jackpot will be fraudulently drawn than when the random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot are duplicated when the special symbol has a high probability (high probability state) and when the special symbol has a low probability (low probability state). It is possible to suppress the behavior of

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. As shown in FIG. 155(b), the first winning type selection table 202b for determining the jackpot type includes a data table that is referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol. A data table to be referred to corresponding to the lottery is defined.

Here, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 155(b). FIG. 155(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202b. This first winning type selection table 202b is a data table that is referred to when selecting a jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and includes the type of special symbol and the acquired first winning type. The configuration is such that different jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot C) are selected based on the value of the counter C2.

In this control example, the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game are configured to be different depending on the set jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make a player who is playing a game with the aim of winning a jackpot interested not only in winning a jackpot but also in the type of jackpot that is set. Further, in this control example, the player is provided with benefits having different degrees of advantage depending on the type of jackpot that is set. Thereby, it is possible to make the player more interested in the set jackpot type.

Next, the contents stipulated in the first winning type selection table 202b will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 155(b). In the case of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the jackpot type "Jackpot A" is in the range of "50 to 99". A jackpot type "Jackpot B" is defined in the range of . Furthermore, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot type "jackpot C" is defined regardless of the acquired first win type counter C2 value.

When "Jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, the round game is 6 rounds, and a jackpot game (normally 6R jackpot game) in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through a specific area (V winning hole) during the jackpot game is executed. Ru. Then, if the ball does not win a V prize during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, a special symbol lottery will be executed 100 times in a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). In order to set a gaming state (time saving 100 times) that continues until the end of the game, the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to "100" and the value of the probability change counter 203t is set to "0". On the other hand, if the ball wins a V prize during a jackpot game, the game state (the potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) continues until 200 special symbol drawings are executed) 200 times), the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to "0" and the value of the probability change counter 203t is set to "200".

In other words, the above-mentioned "Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which a normal jackpot game is executed in which the ball is difficult to pass through a specific area (V winning hole) during a jackpot game, and when the game is executed normally. In this case, the ball does not pass through the V-winning hole during the jackpot game. However, if an illegal game is performed during a jackpot game, for example, a game that destroys the structure in the variable winning device 65 and forces the ball to win a V prize, the ball may There is a possibility that it may pass through the specific area (V winning hole). In this control example, when a ball is made to win a V prize due to fraudulent play, the player is more likely to win than the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. It is configured to set a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) as a disadvantageous gaming state. Thereby, a penalty can be imposed on a player who has played an illegal game.

In addition, as a penalty to be imposed on a player who has executed an illegal game, for example, a fraudulent variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern of a special symbol variation executed when a probability state is set. For example, if a gaming state (for example, a potential state) is set that cannot be set when a normal game is being executed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 minutes is selected. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to efficiently prevent a special symbol lottery from being executed for a player who has executed an illegal game.

In addition, in this control example, the ease with which the ball passes through the V winning hole is varied depending on the type of jackpot game being executed, but no matter what type of jackpot game is being executed, If the ball enters a specific area (V winning hole) during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, even if a ball enters the V winning hole during a normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set after the jackpot game ends.

When "Jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, the round game is 6 rounds, and a jackpot game (probable 6R jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V prize opening) during the jackpot game is executed. Ru. If the ball wins a V prize during a jackpot game, the game state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 200 times. 200 times), the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to "200" and the value of the probability change counter 203t is set to "200". On the other hand, if the ball does not win a V prize during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, a special symbol lottery will be executed 100 times in a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). In order to set a gaming state (time saving 100 times) that continues until the end of the game, the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to "100" and the value of the probability change counter 203t is set to "0".

When "Jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, the round game is 16 rounds, and a jackpot game (probable variable 16R jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V prize opening) during the jackpot game is executed. Ru. If the ball wins a V prize during a jackpot game, the game state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 200 times. 200 times), the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to "200" and the value of the probability change counter 203t is set to "200". On the other hand, if the ball does not win a V prize during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, a special symbol lottery will be executed 100 times in a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). In order to set a gaming state (time saving 100 times) that continues until the end of the game, the value of the time saving counter 203u is set to "100" and the value of the probability change counter 203t is set to "0".

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that one of the three types of jackpot is determined based on the type of the special symbol winning the jackpot and the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2. It is composed of In addition, the jackpot type that is selected when the judgment result is a jackpot is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol The configuration is such that a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, ie, a jackpot type in which a variable probability jackpot game is executed, is more likely to be selected than when a jackpot is won in a lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the lottery is being executed using the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). A rough variation mode is determined by the above-mentioned stop type selection counter C3 and variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol variation is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the general variations such as short time off, long time off, normal reach, super reach, etc. are determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The display mode is determined. Then, based on the variation mode determined by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 display the first symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The reach type and detailed pattern variation of the three symbols are determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 187) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Note that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156) that stores random values for determining the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 156, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 used during the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, and a normal table 202d1 used during the high probability state (time saving state, variable probability state) of normal symbols. A time/probability variation table 202d2 to be used is defined, and a variation pattern is selected using the corresponding data table according to the gaming state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed. In this control example, the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. The configuration is such that a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected when a variation pattern is selected using the time saving/probability variation table 202d2 than when a variation pattern is selected using the time saving/probability variation table 202d1. .

In this control example, the same data table (time saving/probability variation table 202d2) is used to select a variation pattern when the time saving state is set as the gaming state and when the probability variation state is set. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to understand the currently set gaming state based on the selected variation pattern. The present invention is configured to allow the player to grasp the currently set gaming state by various effects performed on the third symbol display device 81 for the player. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the various effects executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, this is limited to the case where the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be selected using different data tables for the time saving state and the variable probability state. In addition, it is sufficient that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, for example, Among the various fluctuation patterns specified in the data table (normal table 202d1) used when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is higher than the fluctuation pattern with the longest fluctuation time. Among the various fluctuation patterns defined in the data table (time saving/probability variation table 202d2) used when is set, the fluctuation pattern with the longest fluctuation time may have a longer fluctuation time .

As will be explained in more detail in the explanation of the selection of the variation pattern in the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, the main control device 110 uses the judgment result, the number of balls on hold, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type. Based on the value of counter CS1, the rough content of the variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and variation time are determined, and a variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

Next, the contents of various tables defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d used when the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. In the normal table 202d1, various fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns.

Next, referring to FIG. 158, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability variation table 202d2. In the time saving/probability variation table 202d2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and a value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns.

In addition, in this control example, the fluctuation pattern is defined in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it is not limited to this, and for example, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 or the first winning type selection table 202b Variation patterns may be defined in correspondence with the jackpot type selected by.

The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and is stored in the normal symbol storage in the RAM 203. The ball is stored in the ball storage area 203c.

The value of the random number that normally results in a winning symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and is determined by the value of the second winning random number counter C4. If it matches the value of the random number that is a win set by the second win random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In addition, this second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)) is for when the probability of a normal symbol is low (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state), and for the probability that the normal symbol will be a hit from that low probability time. It is divided into two types: one for high probability times (a period in which the normal symbol is in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each type is set to be different.

Here, in this control example, in the normal pattern winning game executed based on the winning of the normal pattern, the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 125) attached to the second ball entrance 640 is changed to the open state. A game is executed. In other words, the electric accessory 640a, which is normally located in the closed state that restricts the ball from entering the second ball entry port 640, will A game with a normal figure is executed such that the opening 640 is changed to an open state that allows a ball to enter the hole. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. In other words, since the frequency at which the second special symbol lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, is executed can be varied according to the result of the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbols that are executed independently A game can be played in which the lottery and the special symbol lottery are related.

Furthermore, in this control example, the game content of the normal symbol per game is configured to vary depending on the set gaming state, and specifically, the state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. The ball enters the second ball entrance 640 when the normal symbol winning game is executed in the normal symbol winning game than when the ordinary symbol winning game is executed in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured so that a game with a common symbol that is easy to play can be executed.

More specifically, when a normal pattern winning game is executed in a state where the high probability state of normal symbols is set, a long winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is released in a 4 second opening time is executed. , When a normal symbol winning game is executed in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, a short winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is released with an opening time of 0.2 seconds will be executed. It consists of With this configuration, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is easier to win in the normal symbol lottery than when the low probability state of the common symbol is set, and Since the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 in the winning game, the player can be motivated to play the game for executing the second special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this control example, the configuration is such that only a short hit is executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, but the short hit is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the above-mentioned long winning normal pattern winning game is executed in a part of the case where the winning pattern is won, or the general pattern winning game is executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. A part of the winning game may be configured such that the above-mentioned short winning game is executed. In addition, in this control example, there are two types of games for the normal pattern winning game, short winning and long winning, but the game type for the normal pattern winning game may be configured to be settable to three or more types.

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 187).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 152, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 153, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 187) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 186). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 185) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 154(a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 includes the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155), the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 155), and the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 155) described above. A random number table 202c (see FIG. 155) per 2 and a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156) are set. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game (for example, operation scenario data for a jackpot game), programs, etc. in addition to the above-mentioned items.

For example, operation scenario data for a jackpot game is defined in a data table in which the contents of the game operation during a jackpot game are associated with the determined winning type, and based on the information (scenario) stored in this data table. The configuration is such that movement control of various devices (variable winning device 65, etc.) during a jackpot game is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 154(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, and operation counter 203k. , notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203p, variable probability valid flag 203q, variable variable effective timer 203r, discharge number counter 203s, variable probability counter 203t, time saving counter 203u, and other memories. It has an area 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas includes: The respective values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding area). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored. In addition, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. do.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A normal win random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is applied to the vacant areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). The areas with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) are stored in order from among the areas in which the area is located. That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, winnings stored in other holding areas Shift processing is performed to shift the data to a reservation area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts the lottery right of the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during special symbol fluctuation or jackpot game, a new first special When the lottery right for the center line of the symbol is acquired, 1 is added until the maximum value of 4 is reached. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed.

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending balls N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winnings in the second ball entrance 640, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d. A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the main control device by a pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of balls held in the variable display held in 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number of held pitches deviates from the actual fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received command for the number of held pitches.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 to a maximum of four times. This is a counter that counts up to The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is obtained, The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to set a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set is determined by whether or not a ball enters (passes) the probability variable switch 65e3 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during a jackpot game. ). Here, when it is detected that a ball enters (passes) this probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as V winning), the probability variable setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 191). . On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203h is referred to at the end of the jackpot game (see S1202 in FIG. 190), and when it is determined that it is set to on, it is turned off after setting the value of the variable probability counter 203t to 200. is set (see S1205 in FIG. 190). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

In addition, if the variable variable setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the variable variable switch has been passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that the variable variable switch has been passed before the power is turned off, the variable variable setting flag 203h is set to ON. It may be configured to formally turn on and return. In this case, it can be determined whether the variable probability switch 65e3 has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether a variable probability passage counter 203h, which will be described later, has a value greater than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the gaming parlor side by determining fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to on while the power is turned off and then turning the power back on. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (flowed down a specific area) in one round during the jackpot game (in this control example, one round of jackpot). In addition, it can be determined whether all the balls that have won into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been ejected from the sum of the value of the variable passing counter 203i and the value of the ejected number counter 203s, which will be described later. This variable probability passing counter 203i is updated by incrementing by 1 when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 (winning a V prize). Further, after the variable winning device 65 executes a process of determining whether or not the number of winning balls matches the number of ejected balls, it is reset to the initial value "0". Note that this probability variable passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The number of winnings counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won into the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game, and when a winning into the specific winning hole 65a has been detected. Based on this, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the number of winnings counter 203j) and the number of winnings (the total value of the number of winnings counter 203s and the variable passing counter 203i) are the same. After determining whether the value is correct, it is reset to the initial value "0". Note that the value of this prize winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is for counting the operation time of various devices (opening/closing door 65f, switching valve 65h) that are variably controlled during the jackpot game. This is a counter for counting the time during which the solenoid (solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excited). In this pachinko machine 10, for jackpot A, the passage solenoid 65k is set to be on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 5th round, and for jackpot B and jackpot C, the passage solenoid 65k is set to be on based on the start of the 5th round. Set to on for 5 seconds. In the operation counter 203k, for jackpot A, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set as the start data of the 5th round, and for jackpot B and jackpot C, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. Note that this operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in an initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control winnings to the probability variable switch 65e3 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing to output a notification effect (in this control example, a voice saying "Look at the liquid crystal") to attract the player's attention. In this control example, a value corresponding to 1 second is set in the notification counter 203m at the end timing of the fourth round (30 seconds have elapsed since 10 balls hit the variable winning device 65). This notification counter 203m is decremented by 1 and updated each time the jackpot control process (see S904 in FIG. 188) of the main control device 110 is executed. Based on the fact that the value of the notification counter 203m becomes 0, a notification command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is set. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this command, it executes the process for outputting the audio described above.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the fifth round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can watch the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal Keep an eye on 81. Here, although the details will be described later, in the fifth round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to look at the third symbol display device 81. The word "Attention" is displayed as a notification. In the fifth round, the channel solenoid 65k operates, so if the player watches the operation, the type of jackpot being executed will be determined based on the operating period of the channel solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to maintain the expectation that the variable probability game state will be given to the player until the end of the jackpot game, the player can control the movement of the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. An announcement is being made that makes it difficult to see. However, when the fifth round ends, there is a risk that the player may look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, the player is notified by voice to watch the third symbol display device 81. A notification effect will be executed. Thereby, the player's attention can be drawn to the displayed content after the interval performance is executed, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

Note that in this control example, the player's attention is diverted from the switching member 65h by notifying the user to show the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. By notifying the player to place his or her hand over the device 65, the player may be notified of the movement of the switching member 65h so that it is hidden by the player's hand. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and a configuration may be adopted in which the player's attention is diverted by notifying the player to look at the decorative lamp 34 or the like. Furthermore, the player's attention may be diverted by displaying a two-dimensional code or the like during the fourth round and notifying the player to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, regardless of the jackpot type of the jackpot game being executed, the above-mentioned attention-diverting performance is executed for the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 5th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. It is configured so that Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the player is able to determine the jackpot type of the current jackpot game based on the length of the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the ball period after one round is completed and the specific winning hole 65a is closed. When this remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to on, it means that it is a ball throw period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set on, a remaining ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is updated by incrementing it by one. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed, and determines whether the time necessary for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be ejected has elapsed. This is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the winning ball to be ejected from the variable winning device 65 when the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round ends. This is a counter for determining whether the time has elapsed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning ball to be ejected from the variable winning device 65 is 0.5 seconds, and in this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance in the remaining ball timer 203p. is set as the upper limit value. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203p has reached its upper limit (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of prizes entered into the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of prizes ejected match. Ru. If they do not match, an error command is set and this fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65.

In addition, if the number of prizes won and the number of ejected pieces do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if that flag is on, even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch, the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this setting is not set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a probability variable state from being improperly assigned.

The probability variable valid flag 203q is set when the game ball passes through a specific area (probability variable switch 65e3) after the switching member 65h switches to an arrangement in which it is impossible to allocate the ball to the specific area (probability variable switch 65e3) (when a V prize is won) ) is a flag for determining whether or not the passing (V winning) is valid. When this probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the specific area (probability variation switch 65e3).

The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation validity flag 203q described above is set to ON. After the switching member 65h switches the specific area (the variable probability switch 65e3) to a position where the ball cannot flow down, the variable probability valid timer 203r can determine the period required for the ball to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. In this control example, the time required for the ball that has reached the switching member 65h to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability change valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the specific area (probability change switch 65e3) is passed (V winning) after that, it is determined to be fraudulent and passed. do not.

As a result, it is possible to illegally cause a ball to enter a specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) (V win), push up a game ball with a piano wire etc. from below the probability variable switch 65e3 and pass it, or pass a magnetic sensor by radio waves etc. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as false positive detection.

The ejected number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls ejected from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to the initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls won by the variable winning device 65 matches the number of balls discharged.

The probability variation counter 203t is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the case where a high probability state of a special symbol is set is set. This probability variable counter 203t is set to a value after the jackpot game ends, based on the fact that the ball passed through a specific area (probability variable switch 65e3) during the jackpot game (see S1203 in FIG. 190). Then, each time the special symbol lottery is executed (every time the variation time of the special symbol variation has elapsed and the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed), the set value is subtracted by 1. Further, if a jackpot game is won, it is cleared to 0. As a result, the high probability state of the special symbol is not set during the jackpot game, so it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation), and the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set. When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol ends and the state transitions to the low probability state of the special symbol. It may be configured such that the high probability state of the special symbol continues until it is executed (until the jackpot is won). In this case, the configuration may be such that "10000" is set as the value of the variable probability counter 203t.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol and a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203t, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is set based on the number of special symbol drawings (variations). Although only the conditions for subtraction are set, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted, for example, when a termination condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is set. It may be configured to do so. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed with the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special winning), or when the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning a special common symbol), the value of the probability change counter 203t may be decremented.

Furthermore, the value set to the probability variable counter 203t may be different based on the type of jackpot won and the passing situation of the ball to the specific area (probability variable switch 65e3), or the value of the time saving counter 203u may be subtracted. Similarly, the value of the variable probability counter 203t may be configured to be subtractable depending on conditions other than the number of variations of the special symbol, or when the subtraction conditions for subtracting the value of the variable variable counter 203t are satisfied, the value of the variable variable counter 203t may be subtracted. The configuration may be such that a plurality of values can be subtracted at once. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp how long the high-probability state of the special symbol will continue, so that the player can watch the results of the special symbol lottery executed during the high-probability state of the special symbol without getting bored. I can do it.

In addition, in this control example, as a condition for ending the probability variation state, that is, as a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203t, the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted based on the number of special symbol drawings (variations). Although only conditions are set, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a termination condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is established, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted. It may be configured as follows. Specifically, if the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed with the high probability state of the special symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special winning), or if the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning a special general figure), the value of the variable probability counter 203t may be decremented, or the ball enters a specific ball entrance (for example, the first lottery result). The value of the probability variation counter 203t may be decremented based on the fact that the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, etc.).

In addition, in this control example, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is decremented by 1, but depending on the type of termination condition that has been satisfied, the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted by a plurality of values (for example, 2). It may be configured to be subtracted, or it may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the probability variation counter 203t becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the probability variation counter 203t. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the variable probability state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the variable probability state may be changed depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the variable probability state (type of jackpot). As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in playing the jackpot game but also in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, thereby increasing the interest of the game. .

The time saving counter 203u is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to the case where a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. After the end of the jackpot game, the time saving counter 203u is set with a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type (see S1205 in FIG. 190). Then, if the jackpot game is won, it is cleared to 0. As a result, the high probability state of the normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, so it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the time saving counter 203u is set, and based on the special symbol lottery (variation), the value of the time saving counter 203u is subtracted, and the value of the time saving counter 203u is set. When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of normal symbols ends and the state shifts to the low probability state of normal symbols. It may be configured such that the high probability state of the normal symbol continues until it is executed (until the jackpot is won). In this case, the configuration may be such that "10000" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203u.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set based on the number of special symbol drawings (variations) as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol and a condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203u. Although only the conditions for subtraction are set, the value of the time saving counter 203u is subtracted, for example, when a termination condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is set. It may be configured to do so. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed with the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special winning), or when the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is The configuration may be such that the value of the time saving counter 203u is subtracted even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning a special common map).

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203u is decremented by 1, but depending on the type of termination condition that has been met, a plurality of values of the time-saving counter 203u may be decremented (for example, 2). The time saving counter 203u may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the time saving counter 203u becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203u. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be changed depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the time saving state (jackpot type). As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in playing the jackpot game but also in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, thereby increasing the interest of the game. .

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, etc. are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 152, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 185) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and continuous preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a variable performance pattern selection table 222a, a continuous performance selection table 222b, a random display selection table 222c, a delayed performance selection table 222d, and a collective performance selection table 222e. , and a battle effect selection table 222f are stored.

The variation effect pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time and variation pattern type corresponding to the variation pattern command, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

Here, the contents of the variable effect pattern selection table 222a will be explained with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable effect pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 160(a), the variation effect pattern selection table 222a is referred to when the main controller 110 receives a variation pattern command (normal time variation pattern command) selected using the normal table 202d1. The normal production pattern table 222a1 that is displayed, and the time-saving/probability variation table that is referred to when the main controller 110 receives a variation pattern command (time-saving time variation pattern command) selected using the time-saving/probability variation table 202d2. It has a production pattern table 222a2.

Each performance pattern table defines various performance data corresponding to the variation pattern command (variation time) selected by the main control device 110, and various performance data corresponding to the variation pattern command (variation time) selected by the main control device 110. Used when selecting performance content.

Next, the contents of the normal effect pattern table 222a1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 160(b). FIG. 160(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal performance pattern table 222a1. As shown in FIG. 160(b), the normal performance pattern table 222a1 includes the type of the normal time variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the number of pending special symbols, and the acquired first performance. Various effect patterns (variable effects) are defined in correspondence with the value of the counter 223p1. In addition, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 160(b), for convenience of explanation, there is a range shown as "various reach effects" as the effect pattern, but this actually depends on the acquired first effect counter 223p1. This indicates that different types of performance patterns are defined.

To explain more specifically the contents stipulated in the normal performance pattern table 222a1, the win/fail determination result is "hit (jackpot)", the type of the received variation pattern is "type A (60 seconds)", If the number of reservations of the corresponding special symbol is "0", regardless of the value of the acquired first performance counter 223p1, "pseudo-missing performance" is used as the performance pattern, and the number of reservations of the corresponding special symbol is "1 to 3". ”, “various reach effects” are defined according to the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1. In addition, if the type of the received fluctuation pattern is "Type B (90 seconds)" and the number of pending special symbols is "0 to 3", the value of the acquired first performance counter 223p1 is "0 to 149". The range of ``various reach performances'' is defined, and the range of ``150 to 198'' is defined as a ``series of role performances.''

Here, when the "pseudo-miss performance" is selected as the performance pattern, a performance including a 14-second specified failure performance (see FIG. 145(a)) is executed. By configuring this way, the number of reserved special symbols is "0", so even though the player is made to think that an unspecified performance has been executed, the final result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win. It is possible to provide the player with a presentation result indicating the following. Therefore, even if the 14-second specific winning performance that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a winning result, there is still a possibility that the lottery result will be a jackpot, so the contents of the variable performance that will be executed Therefore, it is possible to prevent the results of the special symbol lottery from being known in advance.

Further, when the "series of role performance" is selected as the performance pattern, a performance using a plurality of performance devices included in the pachinko machine 10 is executed. A detailed explanation of this production device will be omitted, but it is a movable means (a production member that operates using an electric drive source) provided in the pachinko machine 10, and is a production device that performs production according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The apparatus is movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position for use. Some of these presentation devices require a preparatory operation (for example, an operation for moving to a standby position) to be performed in advance in order to actually move the object to a different position. Therefore, as in this control example, by setting it as a performance pattern for a variable performance, it is possible to reliably execute the preparation operation. Note that for a performance device that requires a preparatory action, a performance pattern may be provided in which only the preparatory action is performed, in addition to when the performance is actually performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance whether or not the performance using the performance device will be executed based on the presence or absence of the preparatory action.

If the judgment result is "miss", the type of the received variation pattern is "type D (14 seconds)", and the number of pending special symbols is "0", the value of the acquired first performance counter 223p1 Regardless, if the production pattern is "unspecified production", the type of the received variation pattern is "type E (28 seconds)", and the number of pending special symbols is "0 to 3", the acquired Regardless of the value of the first performance counter 223p1, the performance pattern is "Second Specific Output Performance", the type of the received variation pattern is "Type F (60 seconds)", and the number of pending special symbols is "0". ~ 3'', the ``various reach effects'' according to the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 are the type of the received variation pattern is ``type F (60 seconds)'', and the number of pending special symbols corresponding to is "0 to 3", the "various reach effects" according to the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 will be changed to the corresponding special symbol if the type of the received variation pattern is "type F (60 seconds)". If the pending number of is "0 to 3", "various reach effects" are in the range of "0 to 194" and "series of reach effects" are in the range of "195 to 198", and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223p1 is in the range of "0 to 194" ``Role performance'' is stipulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the contents of the time-saving/probability-changing effect pattern table 222a2 will be explained. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving/probability-changing performance pattern table 222a2. As shown in FIG. 161, the time-saving/probability variation performance pattern table 222a2 includes the type of time-saving time variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the number of pending special symbols, and the acquired first performance counter. Various performance patterns (variable performance) are defined in correspondence with the value of 223p1. In addition, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 161, for convenience of explanation, there is a range shown as "various reach effects" as the effect pattern, but this actually indicates different types depending on the acquired first effect counter 223p1. This indicates that the performance pattern is defined. In addition, regarding the detailed contents stipulated, the specific distribution values and the corresponding performance patterns are different from the above-mentioned normal performance pattern table 222a1 (see FIG. 160(b)). They are different in that they are different from each other, and are otherwise the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The continuous hit performance selection table 222b displays a continuous hit performance that is executed when “multiple hit performance” is selected as the variable performance pattern selected by the variable performance pattern selection table 222a based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110. It is for selecting a performance mode, and includes an upper limit number selection table 222b1, an end number selection table 222b2, and a performance result selection table 222b3.

Note that this "repeat effect" is included in the effect patterns described as "various reach effects" in the variable effect pattern selection table 222a described above with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. , the effects of the effects described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132 are executed.

First, the contents of the upper limit number selection table 222b1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 162(b). FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the upper limit number selection table 222b1. This upper limit number selection table 222b1 is referred to when selecting the number of operations (upper limit number) of the frame button 22 required to change the display mode to the maximum variable value in the continuous hit performance.

Specifically, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is "hit (jackpot)" and the reach type is "SP reach", the value of the acquired second performance counter 223p2 is "0 to 39". In this case, "20" is selected as the upper limit number of times. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit performance is "0 bodies". If the acquired value of the second performance counter 223p2 is "40 to 198", "15" is selected as the upper limit number of times. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is "5 bodies."

In addition, if the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is "hit (jackpot)" and the reach type is "super reach", the upper limit number of times is " 15" is selected. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies."

Here, when the final variable mode is "11 to 40 bodies", it is a case where only a possible range is selected without determining a specific numerical value when selecting the presentation mode of the continuous hit presentation. When this "11 to 40 bodies" is selected, when the display control device 114 receives an operation command for the frame button 22, the variable mode that is currently being displayed is changed within the range that does not reverse the variable mode. It is configured such that a determination is made as to whether or not to vary, and if the determination is successful, the variable aspect is varied within the above-mentioned range. In this way, by configuring the audio lamp control device 113 not to determine the details of the performance mode of the continuous hit performance, it is possible to have variations in the performance mode of the continuous hit performance that is actually executed.

If the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is "miss" and the reach type is "SP reach", "15" is selected as the upper limit number of times, regardless of the acquired value of the second performance counter 223p2. . In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is "5 bodies." When the reach type is "super reach", "15" is selected as the upper limit number of times, regardless of the acquired value of the second performance counter 223p2. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies." When the reach type is "other than reach", "10" is selected as the upper limit number of times, regardless of the value of the acquired second performance counter 223p2. In this case, the final variable mode (maximum variable value) of the continuous hit effect is "11 to 40 bodies."

Next, the contents of the end number selection table 222b2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 163(a). FIG. 163(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the end number selection table 222b2. The end number selection table 222b2 is for selecting an end condition for shortening (ending) the performance period of the continuous hit performance after the operation of the frame button 22 reaches the upper limit number of times during the continuous hit performance. In this control example, as an end condition for shortening (ending) the performance period of the continuous hit performance, a condition for ending the number of operations that is established based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated can be set. ), different ending times are defined based on the result of the special symbol lottery, the set upper limit, and the acquired value of the third performance counter 223p3.

FIG. 163(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the performance result selection table 222b3. This performance result selection table 222b3 is a data table used when selecting the performance result of the continuous hit performance, and is based on the result of the special symbol lottery, whether or not the performance period of the continuous hit performance is shortened, and the set upper limit number of times. It is specified that different performance results are selected depending on the performance.

The random display selection table 222c has a data table that is referred to when selecting the presentation mode of the random display presentation, and as shown in FIG. 164(a), the presentation icon storage area 222c1 and the display order selection table 222c2. , a permutation storage area 222c3, an ideographic mode selection table 222c4, and a display number selection table 222c5.

The performance icon storage area 222c1 is a storage area in which information corresponding to various icons used in the random display performance is stored. Here, the contents of the performance icon storage area 222c1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 164(b). FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the performance icon storage area 222c1. As shown in FIG. 164(b), the performance icon storage area 222c1 is formed of six areas, first area za1 to sixth area za6, arranged in order.

One piece of icon information is stored for each area. Specifically, the first area za1 contains "quadrangular" icon information, the second area za2 contains "triangular" icon information, the third area za3 contains "quadrangular" icon information, and the third area za3 contains "quadrangular" icon information. The fourth area stores "round-shaped" icon information, the fifth area stores "diamond-shaped" icon information, and the sixth area stores "V-sign-shaped" icon information.

In this control example, icon information is stored for each area formed in the icon storage area 222c1, and each area is ordered. When determining the performance mode of the random display performance, the icons are configured to be displayed according to the order of each area of the icon storage area 222c1. With this configuration, it is possible to perform effects according to predetermined rules while providing randomness to the icon display contents. Therefore, compared to the case where the performance contents are set completely randomly, it is possible to easily execute the performance according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

Although FIG. 164(b) only shows one area range (first area za1 to sixth area za6) as the performance icon storage area 222c1, in reality, the icons are stored in correspondence with each area. Although there are a plurality of area ranges with different icon information, the explanation thereof will be omitted for convenience of explanation. In this way, the performance icon storage area 222c1 has a plurality of area ranges, and when selecting the performance mode of the random display performance, the area ranges to be used are different, thereby creating a random display performance with greatly different performance modes. can be easily carried out. For example, if you set specific icon information that is stored only in some area ranges out of multiple area ranges, and you win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, it is better to select the area range where the specific icon information is stored. It is best to configure it in a way that makes it easier. With this configuration, the expectation of winning a jackpot can be increased simply by displaying the icon corresponding to the specific icon information.

Further, the icon information stored in the area range (first area za1 to sixth area za6) of the performance icon storage area 222c1 may be configured to be switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, the predetermined switching condition may be a switching condition that is satisfied when a jackpot game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice), or a switching condition that is established when the jackpot game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice), or a timing device that can measure the current time in the pachinko machine 10. For example, RTC) is installed, and the switching condition is established when a predetermined time (for example, 1:00 p.m.) is reached, and the operation is performed based on the operation means that the player can arbitrarily operate, and the operation on that operation means. In a pachinko machine 10 having a performance selection means that can select a performance mode of a performance, it is preferable to provide a switching condition that is established based on the operation of the operation means by the player. As a result, even if only one area range is provided, it is possible to provide a wide variety of variations in presentation modes.

The display order selection table 222c2 is a data table used when selecting the display order of icons to be displayed in the random display effect, and the icon is selected as the first icon (first icon) to be displayed in the random display effect. This is to select which area of the storage area 222c1 will be used.

Here, the contents of the display order selection table 222c2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 164(b). FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display order selection table 222c2. As shown in FIG. 164(b), the display order selection table 222c2 has a different area (the first area The area za1 to the sixth area za6) are configured to be selectable.

In this control example, when the area corresponding to the first icon (first area za1 to sixth area za6) is selected, the area is selected in a predetermined order (first area za1 (A), second area za2 (B) , . . . the icons corresponding to the sixth area za6 (F), the first area za1 (A), . . . ) are displayed in this order. Therefore, when "A" is selected as the first icon and when "C" is selected, the same display mode will be displayed when the first icon is displayed in the random display effect. Become. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of the icons that are consecutively displayed in the random display effect, specifically, the display mode of the icon that is displayed second.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 164(c), when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, it is easier to display the "V sign shape" icon as the first icon than when the result is a loss. It is configured as follows. Furthermore, the configuration is such that the rate at which "C" is selected is high. Therefore, during the random display performance, the "V sign shape" icon is more likely to be displayed when a jackpot has been won than when a jackpot has not been won. Therefore, the "V sign shape" icon becomes a specific icon that increases the expectation of a jackpot just by displaying it.

The permutation storage area 222c3 is a storage area in which information regarding positions where icons are displayed in the random display effect is stored. In this control example, multiple orders (permutations) in which icons are displayed in the random display effect are prepared in advance, and when selecting the presentation mode of the random display effect, the icons are displayed in accordance with the selected permutation. It is configured to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to perform effects according to predetermined rules while providing randomness to the icon display order. Therefore, compared to the case where the performance contents are set completely randomly, it is possible to easily execute the performance according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 165(a), the permutation storage area 222c3 stores performance data (permutation data) corresponding to permutations A to D, and displays the display mode selection table 222c4, which will be described later. The selected permutation data is read out.

Here, the contents defined in the display mode selection table 222c4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 165(b). FIG. 165(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display mode selection table 222c4. This ideographic mode selection table 222c4 is a data table used when selecting the icon display position in the random display performance, and as shown in FIG. 165(b), the result of the special symbol lottery and the display order selection table 222c2 based on the type of the first icon selected using , and the value of the fifth performance counter 223p5. The configuration is such that different permutation data are selected. Then, the permutation data selected using this display mode selection table 222c4 is read out from the permutation storage area 222c3 and determined as the performance mode of the random display performance.

The display number selection table 222c5 is a data table used when selecting the number of icons to be displayed in the random display effect. The contents of this display number selection table 222c5 will be explained with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display number selection table 222c5. As shown in FIG. 166, the display number selection table 222c5 is defined so that different numbers are selected based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the sixth production counter 223p6, Each value is defined so that when is a jackpot, it is easier to select a larger number than when it is not a jackpot.

With this configuration, the more icons are displayed in the random display performance, the higher the expectation of winning a jackpot. As explained above, in the random display performance in this control example, multiple performance elements are selected independently and a performance mode is determined by combining the selection results, so a small amount of performance data is required. This can be used to increase the variety of presentation modes.

Furthermore, since the presence or absence of a jackpot win is incorporated into the selection condition when selecting each performance element, the performance mode can be determined with a balance based on the presence or absence of a jackpot win even in a combined performance mode. For example, the "V sign-shaped" icon is set to be displayed first in the random display effect when the player has won a jackpot, and when the player has won a jackpot, Since it is set so that the number of icons displayed in the random display effect can be increased, in the random display effect that is executed, it is more likely that you will win a jackpot than when you lose. This makes it easier to display a “V sign-shaped” icon.

The delay effect selection table 222d is a data table used to select the effect mode of the delayed effect to be executed when the delayed effect is determined as a variable effect pattern, and is a data table that is used to select the effect mode of the delayed effect to be executed when the delayed effect is determined as a variable effect pattern, and it is a data table that is used to select the effect mode of the delayed effect to be executed when the delayed effect is determined as a variable effect pattern, and is a data table that is used to select the effect mode of the delayed effect to be executed when the delayed effect is determined as a variable effect pattern. It is for selection.

Here, the contents of the delay effect selection table 222d will be explained with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the delay effect selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 167, different delay types are defined in the delay effect selection table 222d in correspondence with the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the seventh effect counter 223p7.

In this control example, when performing a delay effect, a plurality of delay periods (times) are configured to be selectable. The level of expectation of winning a jackpot varies depending on the length of the delay period. In other words, as the player has more experience with games, he or she will gradually be able to determine whether there is a delayed performance based on the relationship with other performances. Therefore, in this control example, the delay period in the delay effect is also configured to have a difference. Thereby, it is possible to provide the fun of having the player who can determine that a delayed performance is executed, also having the player determine the type of delay.

Furthermore, in this control example, the presence or absence of a delay effect and the delay period can be set for each of a plurality of effects that can be executed simultaneously. This makes it difficult to compare the execution timing with surrounding effects.

As mentioned above, when performing a delayed performance, if a configuration is configured such that different delay performance modes can be set for each of multiple performances that can be executed simultaneously, normally, multiple performances that can be executed at the same time are included. The performance data of 1 was used as the delayed performance. That is, performance data including at least performance information corresponding to a delay period set for each performance and performance information during the delay period was used.

In other words, regardless of the presence or absence of a delayed performance in which the performance is visually executed with a predetermined timing delay for the player, performance data corresponding to the same timing (for example, the start timing of special symbol fluctuations) is set, and the performance is delayed. After the performance based on the performance data during the period has been executed, the performance to be delayed is executed. When configured in this way, the performance including the delayed performance is executed using the performance data that starts in accordance with the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, so it is possible to easily execute the performance without any deviation. It was possible to enhance the effect.

However, since it is necessary to prepare in advance performance data that corresponds to the performance content of the delayed performance, there is a problem in that the amount of performance data increases even if the delay period is slightly different. In contrast, in this control example, the timing for setting the performance data that is the target of the delayed performance, that is, the timing for setting the display command related to the delayed performance in the audio lamp control device 113, is configured to be delayed. There is. Therefore, in order to vary the delay period, it is sufficient to simply vary the value of the timer (delay timer 223s) for measuring the delay period of the audio lamp control device 113.

The collective performance selection table 222e is a data table used when determining the performance mode of the collective performance, and as shown in FIG. 168(a), character information indicating the characters used in the collective performance is stored. It has a character storage area 222e1 and a character number selection table 222e2, which is a data table used when selecting the number of characters obtainable in a group performance.

The battle performance selection table 222f is a data table used when determining the performance mode of the battle performance, and as shown in FIG. 169(a), the physical strength value (HP) of the enemy character to be used in the battle performance is selected. HP selection table 222f1 used when selecting the final remaining HP selection table 222f2 used when selecting the final remaining HP of the enemy character in the battle production, and final remaining HP selection table 222f2 used when selecting the battle content of the battle production. It has a battle mode selection table 222f3 to be used.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag. 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, state setting area 223g, performance selection information storage area 223h, operation performance flag 223i, pressed flag 223k, number of presses counter 223m, operation valid timer 223n, performance counter group 223p, upper limit number setting area 223q, end number setting area 223r, delay timer 223s, continuous notice setting flag 223t, continuous notice counter 223u, continuous notice flag 223v, round number counter 223x, and other memory area 223z are provided at least. .

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a display of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) for special symbol fluctuation effects up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and the number of pending balls when receiving a prize information command or receiving a variable pattern command. Update according to the timing of increases and decreases.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable display of the second special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. , when a winning information command is received by a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol, It is updated in accordance with the timing when the number of held pitches increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and updates the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Unable to get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and counts the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223b. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when a starting winning is detected and the number of pending balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, a variable display in a special symbol is executed and the number of pending balls is subtracted. If so, a held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 based on the held ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, either the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2207 in FIG. 195). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved pitch number counter 223b, and , Sends a command for the number of reserved balls for display to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage. .

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 reserved The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved pitch number symbols corresponding to the value of the pitch counter 223b are displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As mentioned above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Its value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 also corresponds to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while being synchronized. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223c has the same contents as the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, but differs in that the target is changed from a special symbol to a normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 195), and the third symbol is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display setting on the display device 81 is made (see S2602 in FIG. 199). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (see S2102 in FIG. 195) of the main process (see FIG. 194). , and is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 controls the display control device 114 so that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 195), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. It is turned off when it is turned off (see S2613 in FIG. 199). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas) and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to normal symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a starting winning for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry opening 640, a special winning random number counter C1 is acquired according to the starting winning. From each value of the special winning type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, various information (win or failure, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

In addition, when the passage of a ball to the through gate 67 is detected, a normal symbol corresponding to the passage is drawn from the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired according to the passage. The lottery result is predicted in advance, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the audio lamp control device 113 displays various information notified by the winning information command (in the case of special symbol winning information, win/fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern, normal symbol). In the case of winning information, win/fail) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is based on the type of ball entry port where the ball was detected (first ball entry port 64 or second ball entry port 640), or the four areas corresponding to the normal symbols ( Among the vacant areas (first area to fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth area). In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

In addition, in this first control example, the main control device 110 operates based on various information (win/fail, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn. Although a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting winning occurs, the various information predicted corresponding to the starting winning includes various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. and a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding a winning information command, and when receiving a winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f and information included in the received winning information command are provided. A configuration may also be provided in which a discriminating means for discriminating whether the various information (winning information) matches or not. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

In addition, in this first control example, when a new starting winning occurs, a winning information command is set and the audio lamp control device 113 is notified. The timing of the notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, by providing a storage means to temporarily store the winning information command, in addition to the timing of starting a winning, the timing of notification is not limited to the timing mentioned above (the timing when the winning information command is set). (for example, at 5-second intervals), when the gaming conditions change (for example, when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, when a jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when special symbols start changing (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the winning information command is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform an effect (so-called pre-read effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, setting of performance modes such as changing the display color of reserved symbols is executed as a pre-reading performance. In this way, by executing various performances (pre-reading performances) based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, players can be informed about each reserved ball before the variable display starts. It can create a sense of expectation that it will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform long-term effects using multiple variable display periods.

The status setting area 223g shows the current gaming status set in the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming status a predetermined period ago (for example, if a jackpot game is currently being played, the gaming status at the time when the jackpot was won). This is a storage area to be set (stored).

In this state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main controller 110 are received through command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 195), information indicating the gaming state included in the received state command is extracted. Then, the current gaming state is set. In addition, in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195), when it is determined that a command indicating that a jackpot game is to be executed is received, the information set (stored) as the current game state is It is configured to be set (stored) as the previously set gaming state. As a result, it is possible to vary the performance mode of the variable performance executed after the end of the jackpot game depending on the gaming state that was set at the time of winning the jackpot. In addition, for example, even if the jackpot is of the same jackpot type, if the game state that is executed after the jackpot game is changed according to the gaming state at the time of winning, if the game state is changed after the jackpot game ends, during the jackpot game The audio lamp control device 113 side can predict the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and perform an effect during the jackpot game to suggest the prediction result.

The performance selection information storage area 223h is an area for temporarily storing the content (performance mode) selected as a variable performance pattern, and is an area for temporarily storing the content (performance mode) selected as a variable display pattern, and is an area for temporarily storing the display mode executed in the variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199). Various presentation modes set in the setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) are stored. Then, when the operation on the frame button 22 is determined to be valid, or when changing the performance mode being executed, etc., it is read out in order to understand the production mode of the variable production that is currently set (being executed). It will be done. This performance selection information storage area 223h stores the performance mode of the variable performance for the special symbol lottery that has already been executed (past performance mode), the performance mode of the variable performance currently being executed, and the winning information storage area 223f. It is configured to be able to temporarily store the production mode of the variable production scheduled to be executed (scheduled production mode) for the winning information, and the production mode for up to 5 special symbol drawings as the past production mode can be stored as scheduled. It is configured to be able to store presentation modes corresponding to up to four pieces of winning information.

By configuring in this way, for example, when selecting a new presentation mode, it becomes possible to set the presentation mode based on the presentation mode that was set (executed) in the past. In this case, for example, if the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current variable performance is a jackpot, the configuration may be configured to intentionally set a performance mode that overlaps with a previously set performance mode. , it is preferable to configure the system to increase the expectation of winning a jackpot when the same performance mode is set consecutively. As a result, by increasing the jackpot expectation level, whereas normally the same presentation mode is set continuously and no new presentation is executed, the player's desire to play decreases. It is possible to increase the player's desire to play. In this case, for example, a display mode such as "same reach" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a notification means for notifying the player that the same performance mode has been set consecutively. It is best to configure it like this. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the same performance mode has been set consecutively.

Further, the configuration may be such that a production mode different from the production mode set in the past is set, or the configuration may be configured such that a plurality of production modes having a story are set in sequence. In this way, by setting a performance mode related to a performance mode set (executed) in the past, it is possible to easily make the player interested in the performance performed, so that the player It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

The pressed flag 223k is for indicating that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operation means), and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation performance. It is something.

This pressed flag 223k indicates that the frame button is pressed during the operation validity period of the frame button 22 (when the value of the operation validity timer 223n is greater than 0) in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (see S2107 in FIG. 208). If it is determined that the button has been pressed (operated), it is set to on (see S3404 in FIG. 208). Then, it is referred to in the operation performance management process (see S2111 in FIG. 210) (S3609 in FIG. 210). Then, after the performance mode of the operation performance is set based on the reference result, it is set to off (see S3610 in FIG. 210).

In this way, the pressed flag 223k is provided as a storage means for temporarily storing that the operating means (frame button 22) has been operated during the valid operation period, and the pressed flag 223k indicates that the operating means has already been operated. If the setting is set to indicate that the operation has been performed (set to on), new operations on the operation means are not accepted, so that the operation performance that is executed based on the operation on the operation means can be changed. can be carried out reliably.

In addition, simply by setting the pressed flag 223k to ON, it is possible to prohibit the acceptance of operations on new operation means, so after operating the operation means (frame button 22), The period until the performance is executed can be easily varied.

The number-of-presses counter 223m is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the valid operation period. In the case of an operation performance whose performance mode is variable based on the number of times), the number of times the operation is performed is measured.

The operation valid timer 223n is a timer for measuring the operation valid period set during the operation performance, and when the operation valid period is set, a value indicating the length of the currently set operation valid period is set. Set. Then, the set value is subtracted as time passes. When the value of this operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0, it is determined that the operation on the frame button 22 is valid.

The performance counter group 223p is for counting random number values to be referred to when selecting the performance mode of the variable performance executed in this control example, and includes a plurality of random value counters. Specifically, it has 11 types of counters, from a first performance counter 223p1 to an eleventh performance counter 223p11, and when selecting a performance mode of a variable performance, various performance modes are selected using a dedicated performance counter. be done. By configuring to select the performance mode of the fluctuating performance using different counter values in this way, multiple processes can be performed within one main process, that is, at intervals shorter than the period in which the value of the performance counter is updated. Even if the process of selecting a presentation mode is executed, it is possible to prevent a plurality of presentation modes from being selected by referring to the same counter value.

These various performance counters are counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199. Although not shown, each time the main processing (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the updated contents of the various effect counters are updated so that it becomes difficult to synchronize. Specifically, the configuration is such that the value of each effect counter is updated by a different prime number by one update process. With this configuration, it is possible to easily set the content of the performance to be executed at random in various performances in which the performance mode is selected using the performance counter.

Note that in this control example, various presentation modes are selected using the values of multiple counters whose values are updated independently; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, It may be configured such that a predetermined arithmetic process is executed on the value, and a presentation mode is selected using a value indicating the result of the arithmetic operation. With this configuration, the number of performance counters can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, various performance modes are selected using the value of a performance counter whose value is updated independently, so that the performance that is executed does not have any regularity and the performance effect is improved. Although the present invention is increased, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of presentation modes may be selected using the same presentation counter value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to select a performance mode with regularity among a plurality of performance modes, and it is possible to easily provide a performance that is easy to understand for the player.

The upper limit number of times setting area 223q is an area in which the number of times the frame button 22 is operated until the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value set in the continuous hit effect is displayed is stored, and the upper limit number of times setting area 223q is an area that stores the number of times the frame button 22 is operated until the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value set in the continuous hit effect is displayed. In the determining process, the upper limit number of times selected using the upper limit number of times selection table 222b1 is temporarily stored. Then, it is compared with information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous hit performance. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous hit performance has reached the upper limit number of times.

The end number setting area 223r specifies the number of times the frame button 22 is operated from the time the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value set in the continuous hit effect is displayed until the presentation period of the continuous hit effect is shortened (ended). In this area, the number of endings selected using the ending number selection table 222b2 in the process of determining the performance mode of the continuous hit performance is temporarily stored. Then, it is compared with information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous hit performance. Thereby, it is determined whether the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous hit performance has reached the end number.

The delay timer 223s is a timer that measures a delay time set as a delay effect.

The continuous notice setting flag 223t is a flag in which the received winning information includes information indicating that a continuous notice performance is to be executed, and is a flag indicating that the continuous notice performance will be executed from the next variable performance to be executed, This is set to ON when the received winning information includes information indicating that a continuous preview performance will be executed.

Then, it is referenced when a variable display process for setting a new variable effect is executed.

The continuous notice counter 223u is a counter for indicating the number of consecutive notice performances that are continuously executed, and the continuous notice setting flag 223t is set to ON in the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 196). If so, a value indicating the number of times until the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information received this time is executed is set. Then, the value is subtracted every time the variable performance ends. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the status of the continuous preview performance that is being executed.

The continuous notice flag 223v is a flag for indicating that a continuous notice performance is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous notice performance is executed. Then, when the continuous preview performance ends, it is set to off. It is referenced in the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 196), and while the continuous preview flag 223v is set to on, that is, during continuous preview performance, the continuous preview setting flag is not newly set to on. It consists of

The round number counter 223x is a counter for measuring the number of rounds in a jackpot game, and a value is added when a new round is started during a jackpot game. Then, when the jackpot game ends, it is reset to 0.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. It controls the performance (direction). Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 251).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 211) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 176), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until the third symbol display device 81 displays any image.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b indicates that the player starts a game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected. In this case, this is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 using a variation effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 212).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be explained. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 172). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen, a power-on fluctuation image with an "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and a power-on fluctuation image with an "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, are displayed during the fluctuation period. In the middle, the display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery held in the main control device 110 is determined. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", an image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuating effect has stopped, and if it is a "missing special symbol", an image showing it will be displayed after the fluctuating effect has stopped. It will then be displayed for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can be done.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on variation image area The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating "○" and "x" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to . With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 171, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 128), numbered from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance, the third symbol display device 81 does not display the variable effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character pattern area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes it to the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading resident image data in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, round presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , ending effects, and demo effects are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

In addition, since the first starting port 64a is a winning port from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a jackpot with a normal symbol, and the ball is sent to the second starting port. If it becomes easier to enter 64b, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to reduce or the number of balls it has does not decrease even if it plays a game, so the player is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to decrease or the number of balls it has is You can get a sense of a period of time when you can get a jackpot with a special symbol even if you don't have one. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. If the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table.

If it is specified that any of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (undersea, beach, preparation period background, background dedicated to time production) is to be displayed based on the background type, the MPU 231 determines which of the backgrounds is selected by the player. The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified as time passes.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. However, instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are defined. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the example of FIG. 174 is written as the last address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is written. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 176), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the process of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, among the image data of sprites used in the production specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all of the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 175). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 175 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 175, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 176), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 175, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 172 on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 211) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 211). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S7505 in FIG. 223(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 213(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 213(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 213(b), S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 214 to 219) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 220 to 222) are executed.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7401 in FIG. 223(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 223(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 224) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 176), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and writes an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 176), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (In other words, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 176), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 213(b ), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 222) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 176), and obtains the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2,...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2,..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite (design) is described for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and an obtained image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to display the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , pending pitch number symbol 1, pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , error symbol), and detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in this order.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 213 (b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 220). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 224) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7613 in FIG. 224). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7614 in FIG. 224). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i specifies a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7702 in FIG. 225).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 213(b)) is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 225).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<About control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 177 to 192. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, 599, 99, 599, and 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed to perform display on the first symbol display device 37 and to set a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104), and then, A starting prize winning process is executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a (starting winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 178 to 182.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process is executed as the ball passes through the through gate 67. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184. After executing the through gate passage process, a firing control process is executed (S108), other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process starts when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed in step 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 ( S204: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), and set a reserved ball number command that indicates the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation. (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187) to be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store in.

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process of S213 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187) to be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store in.

After setting the number of reserved balls command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 180.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the period has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). Setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) which will be described later with reference to FIG. 180. When this special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is executed, the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are Based on this, a special design lottery will be held. More specifically, whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, it is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. The jackpot type is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is lit. In addition, if it is off, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed in the special symbol variation start process (S213) is displayed. ) is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the lottery result this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the values of the probability change counter 203t and the time saving counter 203u are set to 0. (S218), and sets the start of the jackpot (S219). Then, a stop command is set (S220), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S216: No), a game state update process (S221) is executed. The gaming state update process (S221) will be described later with reference to FIG. 179. Then, a stop command is set (S220), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the game state update process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the gaming state update process (S221). This game state update process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and subtracts the values of the probability change counter 203t and the time saving counter 203u. This is a process for updating the gaming state based on the subtracted value.

In the game state update process (S221), first, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203t is greater than 1 (S351). If it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203t is smaller than 1 (ie, 0) (S351: No), the process moves to S355. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is larger than 1 (S351: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability variation counter 203t (S352). Next, in the process of S352, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the variable probability counter 203t is 0 (S353). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 (S353: Yes), it is time to end the probability variation, so a state command indicating the normal state is set (S354), and this process ends.

In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 155(b), as long as the game is being played normally, if the probability change counter 203t is set to the predetermined value (200), the same value is set to the time saving counter 203u. The configuration is such that the value (200) is set. Therefore, if it is determined in the process of S352 that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is 0, the value of the time saving counter 203u will also be 0, and therefore a state command indicating the normal state is set.

In addition, in FIG. 179, the state command indicating the normal state is set when the value of the variable probability counter 203t is determined to be 0, but the present invention is not limited to this. value and the value of the time saving counter 203u, and after updating both values, determine each updated value, determine the current gaming state, and issue a status command indicating the gaming state based on the determination result. It may be configured to set. With this configuration, for example, it is also possible to set a state command indicating a gaming state (potential state) in which the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 0 and the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0.

On the other hand, in the process of S353, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203t is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S355). If it is determined that the value is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S35: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S355, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203u is subtracted by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203u subtracted in the process of S356 is 0 (S357). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S357: Yes), a state command indicating transition to the normal state is set (S358), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S357, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is not 0 (S357: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and is performed in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" lottery (judgment) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is a process for determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of a variable performance.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process (S213), first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are , each value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203t is greater than 0 (whether the gaming state is in the variable probability period (high probability gaming state)) (S302). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, so the process moves to S303. In the process of S303, based on the value of the first win random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first win random number table 202a for high probability times (see FIG. 155(a)) corresponding to the type of special symbol. Then, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S303). Specifically, the values of the first winning random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the random number value of 600 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for high probability times. As mentioned above, six random numbers from 0 to 5 are set as the random numbers for a special symbol jackpot in the variable probability gaming state (special gaming state), and these are the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and When the random numbers that result in a hit match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203t is 0 (the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of special symbols) (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, based on the value of the first win random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first win random number table 202a for low probability times (see FIG. 155(a)) corresponding to the type of special symbol. Then, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value of 600 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability times. In the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), two random numbers, ``0, 1'', are set as the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and these winnings are set. When the random numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the acquired first win random number counter C1 and the first win random number table 202a). (S305), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), the first winning type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is determined. Based on the value of , the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the first winning type selection table 202d, and the jackpot of three types of special symbols (jackpot Among A to C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As mentioned above, in the case of a jackpot with the first special symbol, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A, and the value is in the range of "50 to 99". If so, it is determined to be a jackpot B, and in the case of a jackpot with the second special symbol, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (Fig. 155(b) )reference).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to C). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpots A to C) are set as stop types in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the stop type of symbol variation (ready-to-reach type, presence or absence of reach) is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Although the illustration of the relationship between the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is omitted, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, "51 to 250". If it is within the range, determine the variation pattern of super reach.

Note that in the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time until the notification of the validity determination result and notifies the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 determines the contents of the variable display mode (variation pattern) to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the validity determination result. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode in the audio lamp control device 113 for the same variable time even if the out-of-reach display mode is displayed. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

For example, as variation patterns for misses, various types of "short miss", "long miss", "miss normal reach", and "miss super reach" are defined. Various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined as common variation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the special symbol is a miss (S305: No), a display mode at the time of a miss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the ball is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

Next, a variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S308, check the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and check the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of C3.

When the process of S307 or S309 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning ball in the first entry hole 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for suspending the values indicated by various random number counters and pre-reading the lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or not (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402 ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether there is no winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No) or even if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S403: No), the process moves to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N) of the pitch number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S405).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 187), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S405, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. Each value is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406), and the process moves to S407. In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, regarding S407 to S412, for each process of S401 to S406 explained above, only the process for winning the first ball entry hole 64 is changed to the process for winning the second starting hole 64b. , similar processing is executed, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter Each value of CS1 is acquired and stored in the corresponding empty holding area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b.

In this way, for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the same first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, and stop type selection counter as for the first special symbol are used. C3, by acquiring each value of the variation type counter CS1, a lottery can be executed using the same random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so it is possible to win even with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The probability can be kept constant.

After executing the process of S412, a prefetch process is executed (S413), and this process ends. The details of the pre-reading process (S413) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. Based on this, a process is executed to determine in advance each lottery result to be executed at the start of the fluctuation.

In this control example, the value of each counter is selected based on the entry of the ball, but the value may be selected at the start of variation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area to store the values of each counter until the fluctuation starts, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Alternatively, some of the counters (for example, only the variation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of variation. With this configuration, the counters related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counters that are not related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182, the pre-reading process (S413), which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S413).

In the pre-reading process (FIG. 182, S413), first, it is determined whether there is a new winning ball (ball entered) in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (S451). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning (ball) in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (S451: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning (ball) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S451: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball From the storage area 203b, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to the current winning is acquired (S452).

Next, the lottery results indicated by the acquired values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are displayed in the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection A preliminary judgment is made with reference to the table 202b and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (FIGS. 155(a), (b), FIGS. 156 to 158) (S453), and the preliminary determination result, hit type, stop type, and fluctuation type is A winning information command including information for indicating the determination result is set (S454), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and is performed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and is used to display the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 and the variation display associated with the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S501). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S501: Yes), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S508). In the process of S508, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is larger than 1 (S508: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second random number for high probability Based on the table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S509). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is outside the normal pattern.

On the other hand, in the process of S508, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 1 or less (S508: No), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the low probability time Based on the 2-win random number table 202c (see FIG. 155(c)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "1 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss. It is determined that

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S509 or S510 is a normal symbol win (S511), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S511: Yes). , sets the display mode at the time of winning (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

On the other hand, in the process of S511, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S511: No), a display mode when the symbol is out is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S514), and if the value of the time saving counter 203u is not 0 (S514: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S515), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S514, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 0 (S514: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), This process ends. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high (when the time is short), the time of the variable display is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability is low for normal symbols (when the time is short). Therefore, the frequency of drawing of normal symbols increases. Therefore, as the frequency of winning in the normal symbol lottery increases, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 becomes easier to open, so that the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 more easily. state.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the gaming state of the normal symbol is configured such that the normal state is set when the winning is won during the jackpot of the special symbol. With this configuration, during a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the gaming state of the normal symbols also becomes advantageous, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player. In addition, the period in which the variable winning device 65 is easy to release (special symbol jackpot period) and the period in which the electric accessory 640a is easy to release (normal symbol winning period) overlap, and the variable winning device 65 is most advantageous for the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the open electric accessory 640a obstructs the ball from entering the device 65.

To explain the above-mentioned content in detail, when the electric accessory 640a is provided in the first flow path through which the ball flows down so that the variable winning device 65 can win, the electric accessory 640a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the balls flowing down the first flow path end up winning the electric accessory 640a, and there is a problem in that it becomes impossible to win enough balls into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, an electric accessory 640a is placed at a lower position (downstream side) of the variable winning device 65, and the ball that flows down the first channel during the jackpot period (during the period when the variable winning device 65 is open) The above-mentioned problem can be solved by using a configuration that makes it easier for the variable winning device 65 to win a prize, but in this case, there is a problem in that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is restricted.

On the other hand, in this control example, the normal symbol is shifted to a low probability state (normal state) during the jackpot of the special symbol, so the electric accessory 640a becomes difficult to release during the jackpot period, which solves the above-mentioned problem. can do.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S517, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S517, if it is determined that the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 187) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is The process ends, and the stopped symbols (normal symbols) are stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the currently running variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win. (S519). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1 (S520), and if the value of the time saving counter 203u is greater than 1. If it is determined (S520: Yes), set "1 second x 2 times" as the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 (S522), and proceed to the process of S523. and transition. On the other hand, in the process of S520, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203u is 1 or less (S520: No), as the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, "0.2 seconds x 1 time" is set (S521), and the process moves to S523.

In the process of S523, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set for the time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 187) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, if it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbols (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the second hit This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S603).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S603 :No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. Add 1 to the value (M) (S604). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the vacant holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when power is turned on to main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process moves to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S812 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S812 in such a case. Note that, as described later in the process of S914 in FIG. 187, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S813, S814) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203i (S808). Next, while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S809), and the process moves to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S810), and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances. Next, interrupts are permitted (S811), and the process shifts to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 178) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 181) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning command set in the start winning process and the prefetch process (see FIG. 182) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning apparatus 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S521 and S522 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening/closing control of this electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or S522 of FIG. 183 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180), a variation display according to the variation pattern is changed to the first symbol display. Starting at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is lit, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is lit, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the red LED lights up.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180) ends, the first symbol display device 37, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 180). A stop display (lit display) is displayed at 37.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S515 or S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183), variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83 when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183). After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 183). (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S909: Yes), the process moves to S901, and each process from S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S901 to S907 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 185 has been executed, so the process at power-off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S913). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S908 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S801). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 188, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, information for executing various effects according to the jackpot is used. This is a process for setting (commands) and opening or closing winning openings (specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S904), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S1001). If it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is the start timing (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) depending on the gaming state or jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. When a special symbol jackpot or small win starts, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A, 5000 for jackpot B). If this occurs, the opening command may be sent. By doing this, for example, if a jackpot occurs in a left-handed game, the time until the jackpot starts will be lengthened, and if a jackpot occurs in a right-handed game, the time until the jackpot starts will be increased. It can be made shorter. In this control example, if a jackpot occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a jackpot game. According to the above configuration, when a jackpot occurs in a left-handed game, it is possible to secure enough time to switch to a right-handed game (jackpot game). Thereby, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if it is determined that it is not the special symbol jackpot start timing (S1001: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S1003). In the process of S1003, the game information regarding the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203m is read out and determined.

During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if it is determined that the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S1003: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S1003: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1004).

If it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1005). This jackpot operation setting process (S1005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. (operation processing) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 189, the jackpot operation setting process (S1005), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S904 in FIG. 188), will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1005).

When the jackpot operation setting process (S1005) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. The operation scenario is read (S1101). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). Next, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 or the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set using the data read in the process of S1101 (S1103), and the number of winnings counter 203j is reset (S1104). A round number command is set (S1105). After that, this process ends.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this control example performs a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening operation is performed for the first attacker (V winning device 650) as a jackpot game, and a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening operation is performed for the first attacker (V winning device 650), and a jackpot game for the second attacker (variable winning device 65). The game is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game (round game) in which the first attacker (V prize winning device 650) is opened in a jackpot game (round game) in which the opening action is performed. This is stipulated only for the opening action scenario corresponding to the eye round game. Therefore, when playing other round games, the corresponding opening operation scenario is a scenario in which the channel solenoid (variable solenoid) 650k is opened (a scenario in which the switching member 650h is moved to communicate the special discharge channel 650e2). is not defined, the process of S1102 is skipped.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, the jackpot game will not end prematurely. Problems can be suppressed. Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004 in FIG. 188: Yes), a round to indicate that a new round game will be executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the audio ramp control device 113, and the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the progress status of the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 which round the game is currently being played.

In addition, in this control example, the main control device 110 sets a round command that includes information indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Alternatively, a round command including only information indicating that a round game has been newly started may be set. In this case, a means is provided to measure the number of round commands received during one jackpot game on the voice ramp control device 113 side, and the voice ramp control device 113 side can determine what round the round game to be executed this time is. It may be configured such that the display mode of the round number display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the calculation result. With this configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so the burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 188, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1004, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing door 650f1 and the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 650k (S1006). If it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1006: Yes), the open solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (S1007). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1006, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1008). The starting timing of the ending performance is the end of the final round in the jackpot game (the 10th round in the case of jackpot A), the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in this control example), which is the time for ball removal. , 3 seconds) have elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the opening solenoid 650f2 is set to OFF (S1009), the ending process is executed (S1010), and this process ends.

Here, details of the jackpot ending process (S1012) will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1010).

When the ending process (S1010) is executed, first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1201), and it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S1202). In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203t is set to 200 (S1203), and the process moves to S1204.

In the process of S1204, a value corresponding to the jackpot type and the presence or absence of a V win is set in the time saving counter 203u (S1204), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1202 that the probability change setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1204 described above.

Returning to FIG. 188, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1008, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1008: No), then a winning process is executed (S1011). Here, this winning process (S1011) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1011).

In the winning process (S1011 in FIG. 191), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1401). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the open door 65f1 or the open door 650f1 to the end of the interval period (0.5 seconds). If it is determined that the round is outside the valid period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed through the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning hole 650a. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403). After that, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball detection switch 650c1 (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process of S1404 is executed.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the value of the prize winning counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set (S1406). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set on (S1407), and the process of S1408 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown out after the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). . If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process of S1408 is executed.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). If it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1409). It is determined whether the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 (S1410). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the variable probability passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411), and the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412).

After that, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the V switch 650e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to OFF (S1414), the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON (S1415), and then this process is ended. Here, by setting the variable probability valid flag 203q to ON, even after the switching member 650h is switched, if the ball remaining in the special discharge channel 650e2 passes through the V switch 650e3, the special symbol can be controlled so that a high probability state is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, if it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1416). If it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process is ended. Further, if it is determined that the variable probability valid flag 203q is on in the process of S1416 (S1416: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability valid timer 203r to update it (S1417).

Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the variable validity timer 203r has reached the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1418). If it is determined that the variable variable effective timer 203r is at the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the variable variable effective flag 203q is set to OFF (S1419), and the variable variable effective timer 203r is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1420). . After that, this process ends. In the process of S1418, if it is determined that the probability variable valid timer 203r is not at the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process moves to S1410.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 until the probability variable effective timer 203r reaches the upper limit value, so the probability of receiving a special symbol is high considering the time of ball brushing. The state can be set. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent a ball from being illegally passed through the V switch 650e3 and being given a high probability state of a special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 188, the explanation will be continued. When the winning process (S1011 in FIG. 191) is completed, abnormality processing is then executed (S1012), and this process ends. Here, details of the abnormality processing (S1012) will be explained with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1012). This abnormality process (S1012) is a process for monitoring whether the V switch 650e3 is being illegally passed through.

In the abnormality processing (S1012), first, it is determined whether the round validity period is reached (S1501). If it is outside the round validity period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (S1503). After that, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is updated by incrementing the remaining ball timer 203p by 1 (S1505), since it is during the pitch time period. The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether an upper limit value (in this control example, 3 seconds) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of ejected pieces (total value of variable passing counter 203i and ejected number counter 203s) and the number of winning pieces (value of winning number counter 203j) match. (S1507).

If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). After that, the process of S1509 is executed. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud in which game balls are left in the V winning device 650 and the game balls are allowed to pass through the V switch 650e3.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1510). Thereafter, the prize winning number counter 203j, the ejecting number counter 203s, and the variable passing counter 203i are each reset to their initial values (S1511), and then this process ends.

<Control processing executed by audio lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 210. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 193, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When start-up processing is executed, first, initial setting processing associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S2119 (see Figure 194). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 194, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 194), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2119. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2119 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S2119 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process moves to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process moves to S2008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process moves to S2004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and after the execution of the power-off process in S2118 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process moves to S2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S2119, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2119 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 194). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2119 is executed, so the reason why the process in S2008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), the interrupt Permission is set (S2011) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S2008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S2004 to S2006 and then S2008. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S2010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), interrupt permission is set. (S2011), and moves to main processing.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is hitting for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 side can also determine the state. I can do it.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S2009 is skipped is because if the process has reached S2008 from S2004 through the process in S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main process was started or the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S2101 was executed. If not (S2101: No), the process moves to S2114 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2113. In the process of S2101, determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is because S2102 to S2113 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S2114, the variable display setting processing in S2115, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) in short cycles. That is, by executing the process in S2114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process in S2115 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command from being received by the command determination process. Based on the command, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S2103 to S2115 are sent to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108, which will be described later (S2103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a reservation lamp (not shown) is lit according to the values of the special symbol 1 reservation ball counter 223a, the special symbol 2 reservation ball counter 223b, and the value of the normal reservation ball counter 223c. will be held.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. Note that this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S2107) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 208.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process in S2109, a liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process moves to S2111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output processing in S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that the above-mentioned liquid crystal presentation execution management process (S2110) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 209.

When the process of S2110 is finished, operation performance management process is executed (S2111). The details of this operation performance management process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. Processing for making it variable is executed.

After executing the operation performance management process (S2111), the operation control process (S2112) is executed. In this operation control process (S2112), operation control of various performance movable accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is executed. The operation control of the movable accessories for various performances is performed based on the special symbol lottery results, the regular symbol lottery results, the operation results of the operating means (frame button 22), the game results during the jackpot game, etc. This is executed according to the content of the action scenario of the movable accessory, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S2112 is finished, counter update process is executed (S2113). In this counter update process (S2113), a process for updating the value of a counter (timer) for time measurement information necessary when performing various effects, for example, the operation valid timer 223n is executed.

When the process of S2113 is completed, command determination process is executed next (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 195. After executing the command determination process (S2114), a variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199.

When the process of S2115 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2118), and the power-off process is executed (S2119). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2120), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2117: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the command determination process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

In the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 195), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When a variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2202), a variation pattern is extracted from the received command (S2003), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if a variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether a stop type command is received (S2204). If a stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2206), and this process ends. .

In the process of S2204, if the stop type command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether or not the held pitch count command is received (S2207). When the number of reserved balls command is received (S2207: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved pitch number counters (special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223b) (S2208), and this process ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. Further, when a command for the number of reserved balls indicating the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is received, information for indicating the number of reserved balls is stored in the normal number of reserved balls counter.

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, if the reserved ball number command is not received (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not a prize-winning related command is received (S2209). If a winning-related command is received (S2209: Yes), winning information-related processing is started (S2210), and this processing is ended. Details of the winning information related process (S2210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 196, but the winning commands (winning commands corresponding to special symbols, winning commands corresponding to normal symbols) output from the main controller 110 Based on the above, the winning information included in the winning command is pre-determined, and a process of executing a presentation (pre-reading presentation) based on the preliminary judgment result, and a process of temporarily storing the preliminary judgment result are executed. be done.

In the process of S2209, if a winning-related command is not received (S2209: No), then it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (S2211), and if it is determined that it has been received (S2211: Yes). , executes jackpot related processing (S2212), and ends this processing. This jackpot related process (S2212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 197.

In the process of S2211, if it is determined that a jackpot related command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), a stop process is executed (S2214) and this process is completed. This stop processing (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 198. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2213 that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the winning information related process (S2210), which is one process in the command determination process (S2114: see FIG. 195) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing this winning information related processing (S2210). This winning information related process (S2210) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 195) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the winning information related process (S2210), the winning information included in the received winning information command is first read out (S2301), and the pending display mode is determined based on the validity determination result included in the read winning information (S2302).

Then, a display command is set to indicate the pending display mode determined in the process of S2302 (S2303). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223v is on (S2304), and if it is determined that the continuous notice flag 223v is on (S2304: Yes), this process is terminated and the continuous notice is in progress. If it is determined that the flag 223v is off (S2304: No), the presence or absence of a continuous preview performance is determined based on the winning information read in the process of S2301 (S2305), and the process moves to the process of S2306.

In the process of S2306, it is determined whether or not there is a continuous preview performance (S2306). If it is determined that there is no continuous notice performance (S2306: No), this process is ended, and if it is determined that there is a continuous notice performance (S2306: Yes), the continuous notice setting flag 223t is set to ON ( S2307), the number of times until the special symbol change corresponding to the target winning information is set to the value of the continuous notice counter 223u (S2308), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the contents of the jackpot related process (S2212 in FIG. 197) will be explained. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S2212). This jackpot-related process (S2212) is executed in the command determination process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2114 in FIG. 195), and is executed when the main control device 110 sends a message related to a win (big win, small win). This is executed when a command is received.

In this control example, when a jackpot C is won by drawing a special symbol, and when a small win is won, the third electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 207) provided on the left side area of the game board 13 is released. When a winning game (left winning game) is executed and a jackpot A, B, D, or E is won by drawing a special symbol, the variable winning device 65 provided on the right side area of the game board 13 is opened. It is configured to execute a winning game (right winning game), and in the jackpot related process (S2212 in FIG. 197), a display command is set for displaying information regarding the winning game on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured such that different winning effects are executed depending on the processing and the type of winning game to be executed.

When the jackpot related process (S2212 in FIG. 197) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an opening command (S2401). If it is determined that it is an opening command (S2401: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S2402), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command received this time is not an opening command (S2401: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (S2403), and it is determined that it is a round number command. If so (S2403: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 223x (S2404), a round number command for display is set based on the value of the round number counter 223x (S2405), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2403, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a round number command (S2403: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (S2406), and it is determined that it is an ending command. If so (S2406: Yes), a display ending command is set (S2407), the value of the round number counter 223x is set to 0 (S2408), and this processing is ended. Also. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that an ending command has not been received (S2406: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a V passing command (S2409), and if it is determined that it is a V passing command, (S2409: Yes), a V effect command is set (S2410), and this process ends. Further, if it is determined in the process of S2409 that the V passing command has not been received (S2409: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, the contents of the stop processing (S2214) will be explained with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop processing (S2214). In this stop processing (S2214), a process for setting the display mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the special symbol fluctuation stop timing is executed.

When this stop processing (S2214) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2501). If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 or less (S2501: No), the process moves to S2505. If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2501: Yes), the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is subtracted by 1 (S2502), and then it is determined whether the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 or not. (S2503). If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is not 0 (S2503: No), the process moves to S2505. If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 (S2503: Yes), the continuous notice flag 223v is set to OFF (S2504), and the process moves to S2505. In the process of S2505, the stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2505), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199, the variable display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S2115). This variable display setting process (S2115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S2115: FIG. 199), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2601: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so step S2612 is performed. Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2602), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation performance extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is It is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2603).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice setting flag 223t is on (S2604). If it is determined that the continuous notice setting flag 223t is on (S2604: Yes), the continuous notice setting flag 223t is set to off. (S2609), sets the continuous notice flag 223v to ON (S2610), and proceeds to the process of S2608.

On the other hand, in the process of S2604, if it is determined that the continuous notice setting flag 223t is off (S2604: No), then it is determined whether the continuous notice flag 223v is on (S2605). If it is determined that the flag 223v during continuous preview is on (S2605: Yes), a performance mode is determined based on the obtained variation pattern and continuous preview performance (S2611), and the process moves to S2608. In the process of S2605, if it is determined that the continuous notice flag 223v is off (S2605: No), the variable effect pattern selection table 222a (FIGS. 160(a) and 160(b)) is selected based on the obtained variable pattern. Refer to it and select a variable effect pattern (2606). Next, a production mode setting process is executed (S2607), a display variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. (S2608). Note that the contents of the presentation mode setting process executed in the process of S2607 will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process moves to S2612.

In the process of S2612, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2612). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2612: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2612: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2613), and the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is It is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2614). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is directly set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 (S2615), and the process moves to S2616.

In the process of S2616, a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S2616). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled. After the process of S2616 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the contents of the production mode setting process (S2607), which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 199) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. . FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production mode setting process (S2607). In this presentation mode setting process (S2607), a process for setting a detailed presentation mode (notice content) of the variation presentation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

When the performance mode setting process (S2607) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S2701). Here, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state based on the information set in the state setting area 223g. In the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (S2701: No), a time saving/probability change effect setting process is executed (S2707), and the process moves to the process of S2706. The details of this time-saving/probability variable effect setting process (S2707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the current state is normal (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently selected variable performance pattern has an operation effect (S2702), and if there is an operation effect If it is determined (S2702: Yes), an operation effect setting process is executed (S2703), and the process moves to S2704. The details of the operation effect setting process (S2703) will be described later with reference to FIG. 201.

In the process of S2702, if it is determined that the currently selected variable performance pattern does not include an operation performance (S2702: No), then it is determined whether the currently selected variable performance pattern includes a battle performance (S2704). If it is determined that there is a battle effect (S2704: Yes), a battle effect setting process is executed (S2705), and the process proceeds to S2706. The details of the battle effect setting process (S2705) will be described later with reference to FIG. 204.

In the process of S2704, if it is determined that the currently selected variable effect pattern does not include battle effects (S2704: No), a display command is set to indicate various setting contents (S2706), and this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201, the contents of the operation effect setting process (S2703) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be explained. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (S2703). In this operation effect setting process (S2703), a preparation process according to the operation effect type included in the current variation pattern is executed.

When the operation performance setting process (S2703) is executed, first, the type of operation performance is extracted (S2801), it is determined whether the current operation performance is a continuous hit performance (S2802), and it is determined that it is a continuous hit performance. In the case (S2801: Yes), a continuous hit effect setting process is executed (S2803), and the process moves to S2807. The details of this consecutive hit effect setting process (S2803) will be described later with reference to FIG. 202.

On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is determined that it is not a continuous hit performance (S2801: No), then it is determined whether the current operation performance is a delayed performance (S2804), and if it is determined that it is a delayed performance, (S2804: Yes), a delay effect setting process is executed (S2805), and the process moves to S2807. Details of this delay effect setting process (S2805) will be described later with reference to FIG. 203.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2804 that it is not a delayed effect (S2804: No), the process corresponding to the other extracted operation effect type is executed (S2806), and the process moves to the process of S2807.

In the process of S2807, an operation valid period is determined based on the selected variation presentation mode (S2807), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202, the contents of the continuous hit effect setting process (S2803) executed in the operation effect setting process (see S2703 in FIG. 201) will be explained. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit effect setting process (S2803).

When the continuous hit performance setting process (S2803) is executed, first, the validity determination result and reach type are extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S2901), and the extracted validity determination result, reach type, and second performance counter are extracted. With reference to the value of , the upper limit number of times and the final variable mode are determined using the upper limit number of times selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 162(b)) (S2902). Next, a value corresponding to the determined upper limit number of times is set in the upper limit number of times setting area 223q (S2903), and the number of ends is determined by referring to the extracted validity judgment result, the determined upper limit number of times, and the value of the third performance counter. The number of times of ending is determined using the selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 163(a)) (S2904), and a value corresponding to the determined upper limit number of times is set in the number of endings setting area 223r (S2905). Next, the performance result is determined by referring to the extracted validity judgment result and the determined upper limit number of times (S2906), the performance mode of the continuous hit performance corresponding to the various determined contents is set (S2907), and the performance selection information is stored. Information regarding the performance mode set in the area is stored (S2908), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the contents of the delay effect setting process (S2805) executed in the operation effect setting process (see FIG. 201, S2703) will be explained. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of the delay effect setting process (S2805).

When the delay performance setting process (S2805) is executed, first, a validity determination result is extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3001), and the extracted validity determination result and the value of the seventh performance counter 223p7 are referred to. Then, using the delay effect selection table 222d (see FIG. 167), a delay period and a delay target are determined (S3002), and information regarding the set effect mode is stored in the effect selection information storage area 223h (S3003). , and then ends this process.

In this control example, as described above, the content of the delay effect and the delay target are set at the start of the fluctuation, and the start timing of the delay effect is set in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 208), which will be described later. Although the configuration is configured to set it, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be configured such that the start time of the fluctuation is set as the start timing of the delay effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform more delayed effects, and it is possible to provide players with a variety of effects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the battle effect setting process (S2705) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be explained. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the content of the battle effect setting process (S2705). In this battle performance setting process (S2705), first, the validity determination result and the fluctuation time are extracted based on the received fluctuation pattern command (S3101), and the extracted validity determination result, fluctuation time, and the eighth performance counter are extracted. The number of performances and the number of characters are determined using the character number selection table 222e2 (see FIG. 168(c)) with reference to the value of (S3102), and based on the determined number of characters, the current performance is The character to be used is determined (S3103), and with reference to the character storage area 222e1 (FIG. 168(b)), the symbol row arrangement information of the determined character type is compared with the number of performances (S3104). Next, it is determined whether there is a symbol sequence in which the number of characters is determined to be greater than the number of performances (S3105). If it is determined that there is a symbol sequence in which the number of characters is determined to be greater than the number of appearances (S3105: Yes), the performance mode corresponding to the last acquisition chance is determined (S3106), and the process moves to S3107. If it is determined that there is no symbol sequence in which the number of characters is determined to be greater than the number of appearances (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S3107.

In the process of S3107, the performance mode of each performance is determined (S3107), the performance mode of the collective performance corresponding to the various determined contents is set (S3108), and information regarding the set performance mode is stored in the performance selection information storage area 223h. (S3109), executes the second half of the battle effect setting process (S3110), and then ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the contents of the battle performance setting process (S3110) executed in the battle performance setting process (see S2705 in FIG. 204) will be described. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the contents of the battle second half effect setting process (S3110). In the second half of the battle effect setting process (S3110), first, the number of characters to be acquired in the group effect is read from the effect selection information storage area 223h (S3151), and the result of the judgment, the number of characters, and the value of the ninth effect counter are read out (S3151). The HP selection table 222f1 (see FIG. 169(b)) is used to determine the HP value of the battle opponent (S3152), and the determination result, the determined HP value of the battle opponent, and the 10th The remaining HP value is determined using the final remaining HP selection table 222f2 (see FIG. 169(c)) with reference to the value of the performance counter (S3153), and the determined battle opponent's HP value is determined based on the judgment result and the determined battle opponent. , and the value of the eleventh performance counter, the number of battles is determined using the battle mode selection table 222f3 (see FIG. 170) (S3154). Next, based on the determined HP value and remaining HP value, the reduced HP value to be reduced in the second half of the battle performance is determined (S3155), and each battle performance is determined based on the determined number of battles and the reduced HP value. The attack mode is determined (S3156), the production mode of the continuous hit production corresponding to the various determined contents is set (S3157), the information regarding the set production mode is stored in the production selection information storage area 223h (S3158), and this processing end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the contents of the time-saving/probability change effect setting process (S2707) executed in the effect mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) will be explained. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving/probability change effect setting process (S2707). In this time-saving/variable performance setting process (S2707), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous performance flag is on (S3201). If it is determined that the continuous performance flag is on (S3201: Yes), this process is immediately ended. If it is determined that the continuous performance flag is off (S3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the acquired variation pattern includes a random display performance (S3202). If it is determined that the acquired variation pattern does not have a random display effect (S3202: No), the process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that the acquired variation pattern has a random display effect (S3202: Yes), a random display effect setting process is executed (S3203), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the random display effect setting process (S3203) executed in the time saving/probability change effect setting process (see S2707 in FIG. 207) will be explained. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the contents of the random display effect setting process (S3203). In this random display performance setting process (S3203), first, a validity determination result is extracted based on the received variation pattern command (S3301), and with reference to the extracted validity determination result and the value of the fourth performance counter, The display order selection table 222c2 (see FIG. 164(c)) is used to determine the effect icon (first icon) to be displayed first (S3302), and the extracted validity judgment result, the determined first icon, and the fifth effect are determined. The permutation is determined using the display mode selection table 222c4 (see FIG. 165(b)) with reference to the value of the counter (S3303), and the value of the sixth effect counter is referred to. Then, using the display number selection table 222c5 (see FIG. 166), the number of display icons to be displayed is determined (S3304), the performance mode of the random display performance corresponding to the various determined contents is set (S3305), and the performance selection is performed. Information regarding the set performance mode is stored in the information storage area 223h (S3306), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (S2107), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 194) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and based on the depression, execution of a preview effect, etc. is set.

In the frame button input monitoring/production process (S2107: see FIG. 208), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S3401), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3401: No). , and then ends this process. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether the current operation is valid (S3402). In the process of S3402, when the type of operation effect is set in the operation effect setting process (S2703 in FIG. 201), the operation valid period corresponding to the type is set in the operation valid timer 223n, and the operation valid timer 223n Determine whether the value of indicates the operation validity period.

In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the operation is not within the valid period (S3402: No), this process is directly ended. If it is determined that the operation is within the valid period (S3402: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3403), and if it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is set to on, then (S3403: Yes), this process ends immediately. If it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is not set to on (S3403: No), the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3404), and the operation content corresponding to the set operation validity period is read ( S3405), and then it is determined whether the operation content is a continuous hit effect (S3406). If it is determined that it is a continuous hit effect (S3406: Yes), the value of the press number counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S3407), and the process moves to S3411.

On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the operation content is not a continuous hit effect (S3406: No), then it is determined whether the operation content is a delayed effect (S3408). If it is determined that it is a delayed performance (S3408: Yes), a value corresponding to the delay period is set in the delay timer 223s (S3409), and then it is determined whether the audio aspect of the current delayed performance content is delayed. (S3413). If it is determined that the audio mode is not delayed (that is, normal) (S3413: No), a voice command corresponding to the presentation mode of the delayed presentation is set (S3414), and the process moves to S3411. On the other hand, if it is determined that the audio aspect of the current delay effect content is delayed (S3413: No), the process of S3414 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S3411.

On the other hand, in the process of S3408, if it is determined that the operation content is not a delayed effect (S3408: No), other processes corresponding to the operation content are executed (S3410), and the process moves to S3411. In the process of S3411, the operation mode corresponding to the current frame button operation is determined (S3411), a display command corresponding to the determined operation mode is set (S3412), and then this process ends.

In addition, in this control example, an example is shown in which a variable condition for varying the production mode of the operation production is established based on one operation (pressing) of the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the variable condition may be configured so that the variable condition is satisfied when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) within the valid operation period, or an operation means having multiple operation methods may be provided, The variable condition may be configured so that the variable condition is satisfied when the operating means is operated using a specific operating method.

Furthermore, in this control example, the fact that the operating means has been operated is indicated by setting one flag (the pressed flag 223k) to ON; however, the present invention is not limited to this; , it may be configured to show different operation results, and the presentation mode of the operation effect may be configured to be varied depending on the type of operation result.

In addition, in this control example, a display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation of the operating means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to perform an effect of moving a decorative movable device provided in the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means).

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while an operation effect other than the first operation effect or the second operation effect is being executed, the operation mode corresponding to the set operation validity period is determined. Although the configuration is as follows (see S3411 in FIG. 208), other configurations may be used.

Specifically, an operation validity period is set during which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively determined within the performance period of the display performance executed on the third symbol display device 81, and the set operation is performed. The value of the operation valid timer 223n is set to determine the valid period. A storage means for storing the length of the set operation validity period and a calculation means for calculating the remaining period of the operation validity period based on the value of the operation validity timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated are provided. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide an operation mode selection table in which different operation modes are defined depending on the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculation means.

With this configuration, different operation modes are selected depending on the timing at which the player operates the operating means (according to the remaining time at the time the operating means is operated), so the player can receive a variety of effects. can be provided.

In addition, an operation validity period setting means that can determine one operation validity period from among a plurality of operation validity periods and set it within the presentation period of the display effect, and an operation validity timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated. The configuration may include a calculation means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the operation validity period based on the value of . With this configuration, it is possible to set different operation validity periods for display effects of the same display mode, and further, based on the length of the set operation validity period and the timing at which the operation means is operated. According to the progress rate of the calculated operational valid period, that is, the value (%) calculated by taking the length of the entire operational valid period as 100 and calculating the ratio of the period that has already passed (or the period that has not elapsed) as a percentage, The operation mode to be executed can be different.

As a result, even if the operating means is operated at the same timing based on the display performance executed on the third symbol display device 81, different operation modes can be set, so that a more diverse range of performances can be provided to the player. be able to.

Furthermore, instead of setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation validity period, the operation mode is set according to the percentage value calculated by the calculation means. The range defined in the data table for selection can be limited to "1 to 100". In other words, when setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the valid operation period, for example, in a case where the length of the valid operation period can be set from 2 to 15 seconds, 6 seconds When the operating means is operated at the 3rd second when is set (remaining time: 3 seconds), and when the operating means is operated at the 7th second when 14 seconds is set (remaining time: 7 seconds) Since the remaining time differs between and, different operation modes will be set.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples, the operating means is operated at the halfway point of the effective operation period in both cases, and the operating difficulty level is the same, so when trying to set the same operating mode, the operating means is It is necessary to specify the data table so that the operation mode is selected based not only on the remaining time of the valid period, but also on the length of the set valid operation period and the remaining time of the valid operation period at the time the operating means is operated. There is.

In this case, if the length of the operation validity period is set to be variable to multiple lengths, the capacity of the data table mentioned above will increase significantly, which will put pressure on the data capacity. . On the other hand, by configuring the operation mode to be selected using a percentage value as described above, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation validity period, so the operation mode can be selected. The data capacity of the data table can be reduced.

In addition, as a dividing means for dividing the percentage value calculated by the calculating means into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first dividing means for dividing into "1% to 50%" and "51% to 99%"; "1%-10%" "11%-20%" "21%-30%" "41%-50%" "51%-60%" "61%-70%" "71%" % to 80%," "81% to 90%," and "91% to 99%," and further based on whether or not a predetermined condition is met, such as the lottery result of a special symbol. A determining means is provided for determining which sorting means to use, and the percentage value calculated by the calculation means is divided by the dividing means determined by the determining means, and an operation mode is selected based on the divided information. It may be configured to do so.

In addition, in this way, when using a configuration in which the operation mode to be executed subsequently is varied according to the operation timing of the operation means, for example, a pachinko machine is used as an operation performance executed when the operation means is operated. It is preferable to use a performance that moves the movable performance accessories provided in 10. Thereby, it is possible to perform the operation performance without worrying about the period of the operation performance executed based on the set operation mode and the display performance period displayed on the display means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the contents of the liquid crystal presentation execution management process (S2110) will be explained. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal presentation execution management process (S2110). In the liquid crystal performance execution management process (S2110), the process of updating the performance mode of the special symbol fluctuation performance being executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a predetermined variation pattern, and the process of updating the performance mode of the special symbol fluctuation performance on the third symbol display device 81. A process for replacing it with a performance based on the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol performance) is executed.

When the liquid crystal performance execution management process (S2110) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an operation performance in the variable performance being executed (S3501). If it is determined that there is no operation performance in the variable performance being executed (S3501: No), the process moves to S3511. If it is determined that there is an operation effect in the variable effect being executed (S3501: Yes), then it is determined whether it is 3 seconds before the operation valid period (S3502). If it is determined that it is 3 seconds before the operation valid period (S3502: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the operation valid period is set (S3503), and the process moves to S3511. If it is determined that it is not 3 seconds before the valid operation period (S3502: No), then it is determined whether it is the start of the valid operation period (S3504). If it is determined that it is not the start of the operation validity period (S3504: No), the process of S3505 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S3506. If it is determined that it is the start of the operation validity period (S3504: Yes), a value corresponding to the length of the operation validity period set this time is set in the operation validity timer 223n (S3505), and the process moves to S3506. .

In the process of S3506, it is determined whether the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3506). If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3506: No), the process moves to S3510. If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3506: Yes), the value of the delay timer 223s is subtracted by 1 (S3507), and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the delay timer 223s is 0 or not. It is determined (S3508). If it is determined that the subtracted value of the delay timer 223s is not 0 (S3508: No), the process moves to S3510. If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3508: Yes), the start of the corresponding delay effect is set (S3509), and the process moves to S3510. In the process of S3510, other liquid crystal presentation execution management processes are executed (S3510), and this process is ended.

In the process of S3511, other liquid crystal presentation execution management processes are executed (S3511), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111) will be explained. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation performance management process (S2111). In this operation performance management process (S2111), a process for setting a performance mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed during a period in which the operation performance is being executed.

When the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the operation effective timer 223n is greater than 0 (S3601). Then, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S3601: No), the process is immediately ended. If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S3601: Yes), the value of the operation valid timer 223n is subtracted by 1 (S3602), and then it is determined whether the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 or not. (S3603). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not 0 (S3603: No), the process moves to S3609. If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S3603: Yes), then it is determined whether the shortening flag is on (S3604). If it is determined that the shortening flag is on (S3604: Yes), the shortening flag is set to off (S3605), and the process moves to S3606. If it is determined that the shortening flag is off (S3604: No), the process of S3605 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3606.

In the process of S3606, it is determined whether the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3606). If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is 0 (S3606: No), a display command is set to indicate that the valid operation period has ended (S3607), and the process moves to S3609. If it is determined that the value of the delay timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3606: Yes), a display command is set to extend and display the display screen indicating the operation validity period (S3608), and the process moves to S3609. do.

In the process of S3609, it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3609). If it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3609: No), the process moves to S3623. If it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3609: Yes), the pressed flag 223k is set to off (S3610), the value of the pressed number counter 223m is read (S3611), and then the pressed It is determined whether the value of the number of times counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3612). If it is determined that the value of the number of presses counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3612: Yes), the value stored in the upper limit number setting area 223q is compared with the value of the number of presses counter 223m (S3613), Next, it is determined whether the value stored in the limit number setting area 223q and the value of the number of presses counter 223m match (S3614). If it is determined that the value stored in the limit number of times setting area 223q and the value of the number of presses counter 223m match (S3614: Yes), a display command is issued to indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached. The settings are made (S3515), and the process moves to S3620. If it is determined that the value stored in the limit count setting area 223q and the value of the press count counter 223m do not match (S3614: No), the value stored in the end count setting area 223r and the press The value of the number-of-presses counter 223m is compared (S3616), and it is determined whether the value stored in the end number setting area 223r matches the value of the number-of-presses counter 223m (S3617). If it is determined that the value stored in the end number setting area 223r and the value of the number of presses counter 223m match (S3617: Yes), the value of the number of presses counter 223m is reset (S3618), and the shortening flag is set. is set to ON (S3619), and the process moves to S3620. If it is determined that the value stored in the end number setting area 223r and the value of the number of presses counter 223m do not match (S3617: No), the process of S3618 and S3619 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S3620. .

On the other hand, in the process of 3612, if it is determined that the value of the press number counter 223m is 0 (S3612: No), then it is determined whether the shortening flag is on (S3621). If it is determined that the shortening flag is on (S3621: Yes), a specific effect is determined (S3622), and the process moves to S3623. If it is determined that the shortening flag is off (S3621: No), a corresponding button effect is set (S3620), and the process moves to S3623.

In the process of S3623, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect mode is set (S3623), and this process ends.

<About control processing in display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 225. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 211, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration, and , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be explained with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the command to be executed after this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 211) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 211) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 212, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process of S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 211. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 223(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S7402 in FIG. 223(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)), the simple command determination process is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in is drawn. (See S6308 in FIG. 213(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 213(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first starting port 64 (starting prize), and an instruction to start the variable performance is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation production period, and a simple variation production can be performed. can. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 213(a). FIG. 213(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 213(b). FIG. 213(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 176) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 213(b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 214 to 219.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 to 222.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113, a continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the performance and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 176, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 225.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table and stop type counter corresponding to the stop type (jackpot A to D) indicated by the display stop type command are compared. , the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process of S6304 is executed. Move to.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 219. First, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIG. 214, S6302), as shown in FIG. 214, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, (S6401: No), the command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S6403).

First, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 215(a). FIG. 215(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation time is actually longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set in the process of S6501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S6503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can be judged.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer is 233f is initialized to 0 (S6505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6506), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the content is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data was set in the process of S6504 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 214. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 215(b). FIG. 215(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A to D) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601), and the stop type table and the V interrupt processing (Fig. 213 (b)) is executed, and finally sets the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S6602 ).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. Set it to off (S6603). Thereafter, the process returns to S6401 in FIG. 214.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Incidentally, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 214, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether there is a jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If it is determined that a jackpot related command has been received (S6408: Yes), a display jackpot related command process is executed (S6409). Details of the display jackpot related command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218.

Here, with reference to FIG. 216, the display jackpot related command processing (S6409) will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot related command processing (S6409), and the processing corresponding to the display opening command, display round number command, and display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113. It is intended to carry out the following.

In the display jackpot related command processing (FIG. 216, S6409), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command (S6701). If it is determined in the process of S6701 that there is an opening command for display (S6701: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6702), and the process proceeds to S6703.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S6702) will be described with reference to FIG. 217(a). FIG. 217(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing (S6702). This opening command processing (S6702) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is an opening command for display in the display jackpot related command processing (see S6409 in FIG. 216), and is an effect that suggests the start of a jackpot. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

In the opening command process (S6702), first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802). After that, time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the opening display data table (S6803), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6804), and the demo display flag 233y and final display flag 233z are set to off (S6805). , this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 216, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6701, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6701: No), the process moves to S6703. After completing the processing in S6701 or S6702, it is determined whether there is a display round number command (S6703). In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is a round number command for display (S6703: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and the process moves to S6705.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S6704) will be described with reference to FIG. 217(b). FIG. 217(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S6704). This round number command processing (S6704) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the display round number command has been received in the display jackpot related command processing (see S6409 in FIG. 216). This is a process for displaying an effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the number of rounds is updated.

In the round number command processing (S6704), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6811). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6812), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6813). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6814), the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6815), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 216, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6703: No), the process moves to S6705. After completing the processing in S6703 or S6704, it is determined whether or not a display ending command has been received (S6705). In the process of S6705, if it is determined that there is an ending command for display (S6705: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6706), and the process moves to the process of S6707.

The details of the ending command process (S6706) will now be described with reference to FIG. 218(a). FIG. 218(a) is a flowchart showing the ending command process (S6706). This ending command process (S6706) is a process that is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the display jackpot related command process (see S6409 in FIG. 216), and is a process that is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the display jackpot related command process (see S6409 in FIG. 216). This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

In the ending command process (S6706), first, an ending display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6851). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6852), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the ending display data table (S6853). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6854), the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6855), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 216, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6705, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6705: No), the process moves to S6707. After completing the process of S6705 or S6706, it is determined whether there is a display V effect command (S6707). In the process of S6707, if it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S6707: No), this process is directly ended. If it is determined that there is a V effect command for display (S6707: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S6708), and then this process ends.

Here, details of the V effect command processing (S6708) will be explained with reference to FIG. 218(b). This V effect command processing (S6708) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a V effect command has been received in the display jackpot related command process (see FIG. 216), and the probability that a jackpot game will be awarded is This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the price is high.

In the V effect command processing (S6708), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6902), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6903). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6904), the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 214, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the back image is changed. If there is a change command (S6410: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 219(a). FIG. 219(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag is set to on, which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (see S7403 in FIG. 224) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. (S7001). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to D), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S7002), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7609 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S7610. . If the identified back image type is back B, as described above, some of the image data corresponding to those back images are not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of back images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to D should be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image determination flag set in S7002 is used to determine whether The type of back image to be displayed at a time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 214. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and if there is an error command, it is determined. If (S6412: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 219(b). FIG. 219(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7102, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 214. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6414), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6414 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6414 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Only the type commands are extracted, and the processing corresponding to each command, such as the fluctuation pattern command processing (see Figure 215(a)) and the stop type command processing (see Figure 215(b)), is executed. For commands, processing is performed to discard them without executing the processing corresponding to the commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 215(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 220 to 222, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 220, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, so the process skips steps S7202 to S7204 and moves to the process S7205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 221. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7251).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and drawing information such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. is determined for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7251, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7252), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 220. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process moves to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7301). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7301, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S7302). As a result, if it is End information (S7302: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7303), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7303: Yes), the display data table is Time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7304), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7305), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7306), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7302, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7302: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 220 and continues. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing, the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206, along with the warning image developed earlier, and display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the final display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. (S7210), and then writes Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag 233z, which indicates that a confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state, to ON (S7214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Incidentally, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag 233z is not off but on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S7216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so the demo display data table is changed to the display data. The data is set in the table buffer 233d (S7217), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag 233y, which indicates that a demonstration is being produced in the on state, is set to on (S7221), this process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect will be performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect has ended, so continue with the display setting process. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 213(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image (FIG. 172) is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 223(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 223(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S7501: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 224.

Next, with reference to FIG. 223(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 223(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not finished (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S7601, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 214 to 219) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 220 to 222) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 224) (see S7501: No in FIG. 223(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed using . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not finished (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type is Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally (S7712), and proceeds to the process of S7713.

Note that if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S7711, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the processing in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. As a result, it is possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer setting process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image will be changed. Among the image data used in the video RAM 235, image data that is not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this control example, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display can be easily performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list shown in FIG. 176 is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed closest to the back, and the last drawn sprite can be placed closest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

In the drawing process, after the process in S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 213(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process of the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

Further, in the above control example, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

In the above control example, first, a command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and when the audio lamp controller 113 receives the command, the audio lamp controller 113 sends the command to the display controller 114. The command to be executed is determined, and the command is then transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In contrast, first, a command is sent from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines the command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 may then send a command to the audio lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above control example, a case has been described in which the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, which is the transfer destination, is unused. If the image data is unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 as the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination is unused can be determined by checking that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, that it is in use). a resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, that it is in use); ) may be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may perform this by checking the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors the signals sent and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or the signals sent and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and based on the state of the signals, the resident video RAM 235 It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts or ends access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or receives a notification from the image controller 237 to determine whether the scanning is in a blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is not in use. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether it is not in use or not, so the determination can be easily made.

In addition, in this case, the MPU 231 stores transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the drawing of that sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for the video can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed within the display main process or main process loop executed by the MPU 231. This allows the MPU 231 to perform the image data transfer process using the time when important processes in the display control device 114, such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, are not being performed. In addition, since command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are processes that are executed with priority over display main processing, etc., the MPU 231 can process image data without affecting command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 have, but uses the addresses that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 have in common. Within the address system provided, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not have to directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) that it wants to access to the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area to the image controller 237, it is sufficient to simply specify an address set in the common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction that specifies the command. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, an address set in a common address system is simply used as information indicating the storage destination of sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected, but this is not necessarily the case. 237 may be provided. Further, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Good too.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as is, and the NAND flash memory 234a can be used as is. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

In the above control example, the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, but the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured with a large capacity and inexpensive nonvolatile storage means, such as a hard disk. may be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow readout speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the control example above, images can be displayed at the desired display time without any problems. be able to.

In the above control example, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the first program storage area 234d1 thereof stores a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231. However, this is not necessarily the case. Although not limited to this, a first program storage area may be provided in a memory configured with a nonvolatile storage medium that can read data at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area may be stored in the first program storage area in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), etc. is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided therein, and the MPU 231 After canceling system reset A part of the boot program that is executed first may be stored.

In the above control example, a first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in that area. Although the case where the memory is stored is not necessarily limited to this, the memory configured with a non-volatile storage medium that can read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a is stored on the internal bus (bus line 240). A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the first program storage area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM234D, install Feram (FerroelECTRIC RAM), MRAM (MagnetoreSistive Ram) or PRAM (Phase CHANGE RAM) on the internal bus (bath line 240). In addition, set up the first program storage area, MPU231 A part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. A case has been described in which the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read out from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read out from the buffer RAM 234c. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 specifies address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after canceling the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has already been set in the buffer RAM 234c or Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the auxiliary production section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified on the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the auxiliary production section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. I can do it. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It may also be provided directly connected to line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to allow direct connection of the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected to the bridge circuit. RAM 235 can be easily provided in display control device 114.

In the above control example, the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may also be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, each of which stores image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected depending on the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are constituted by a 1-port DRAM (one input/output port) is described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. A type of RAM may also be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time, so for example, while image data is being read from the normal video RAM 236 and drawing an image, data is being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to writing of image data.

Furthermore, in the above control example, a case has been described in which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured as separate memories, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM can be used as a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided so that the same contents as in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. In addition, when configuring a resident area and a normal area in one RAM, in order to prevent the input/output port of that memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area for read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multiport type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is merely an example, and the type may be set as appropriate depending on the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside, image data corresponding to an image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is sent to the third symbol display device 81 at least for permanent use. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above control example, a case has been described where part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made to reside therein, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You can.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the resident video RAM 235 continues to retain its contents without being overwritten while the power is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is to be significantly different based on a command received from the good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and continues to be held in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can leave it there. Also, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and transfers the read image data to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed while the image data is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer data information) to the image controller 237. The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (that is, during the period when image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). You may also do so.

Furthermore, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the transition image is updated using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out new image data to be resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Good too. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receives an instruction from the MPU 231 to transfer the image data to be resident, accesses the character ROM 234, reads new image data to be resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You can do it like this. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM judgment value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power is removed is stored, and the power is turned off. During the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power-on, before starting the transfer of main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 at power-on, check the RAM judgment value, If the RAM judgment value is a normal value, it means that the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, so the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to an instantaneous power outage and the MPU 231 starts execution of display main processing or main processing, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. If so, it is possible to prevent image data from being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 unnecessarily, and it is possible to shorten the time required to recover from a power outage. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by a character ROM 234a with a slow readout speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM judgment value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power outage, the time required to transfer the image data is Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start playing the game. Note that the RAM judgment value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Furthermore, instead of using this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237, but the buffer RAM 237a is not necessarily limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided within the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where many data signals are exchanged can be transferred. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be set to a data capacity that allows the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to be completed. Thereby, image data can be reliably transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. .

In the above control example, a case has been described in which one buffer RAM 237a is provided, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the other buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. may be configured. Furthermore, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area storing the image data is divided into two or more areas. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The processing time can be reduced.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image. can do. During this time, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. 235b, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, while displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, data from the character ROM 234 is displayed. Image data to be made resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly and processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring the image data corresponding to The image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to turn on the power. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. This allows image data to be transferred more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is being transferred; The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Good too. In addition, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the main image at power-on and the image data at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are transferred. By displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 234, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. This allows image data to be transferred more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button Although a case has been described in which the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the presentation mode of super reach are changed based on the operation command, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and depending on the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state. A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the performance mode of super reach according to the gaming state based on the back image changing command and the gaming state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image and the performance mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to the changed rear image or at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the changed production mode is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , the rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, transfer data table, additional data table, and composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed back image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to transfer data information written in the transfer data table, composite data table, and display data table. You may. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image based on the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, or display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the original back image was stored is The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the new back image is stored in the subarea, and the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored may be defined. Transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in a different area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so the processing by the display control device 114 is unnecessary. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the audio lamp control device 113, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although a case has been described in which the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is inputted to the main control device 110, and the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A vibration error may be detected in the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be sent from the main control device 110 to either the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. You can.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. If a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, thereby confirming that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 220). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 221) when it is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to send and receive error commands from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

Furthermore, in the above control example, a case has been described in which the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, a magnetic sensor may be attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Good too. This magnetic sensor is a sensor that detects the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the ball from intentionally entering the ball entrance by changing the flow of the ball due to the magnetic field of a magnet. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be conveyed may be sent from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114 via the audio lamp controller 113 or directly. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, when it is determined that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the audio lamp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command indicating the error may be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command conveying a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when it is determined that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 or recognizes the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 updates the character ROM 234. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that is resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to create the third symbol to notify the magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by a player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the player of the magnetic field error, thereby preventing the player from acting illegally. It can be suppressed.

When the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all in one production is specified by an additional data table or display data table, in the additional data table or display data table, one The type of sprite that changes the color tone and the change in the sprite at that time correspond to the address that represents the time that a frame's worth of images are displayed (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) as a unit. It may also define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the color tone after the change in the sprite at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. If color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information with color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one performance is defined by a display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may also define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 inputs the sprite type to be replaced and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, the various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information for that sprite may be included in the drawing list. This allows the image controller 237 to draw an image including a new sprite to be displayed.

Furthermore, in the above control example, a case has been described in which the display data table includes transfer data information of image data that is necessary when drawing an image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data that is necessary when drawing an image according to additional drawing contents defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional performance 1”, “additional performance 2”, etc.) for identifying the effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be added and displayed, it creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as follows.

Thereby, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, according to the drawing list, before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, the effects to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, a wide variety of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, drawing contents corresponding to all the super reaches that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player Although we have explained the case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is specified, this is not necessarily the case.The drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach can be added to the display data table. It's okay. Thereby, the drawn content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to define the drawing contents corresponding to all super reaches in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the data surge of the display data table from increasing.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been explained, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table specifies the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an additional effect to be displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to that effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . In addition, the additional data table may specify not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the additional drawing content. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect that should be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table. Compared to the case where drawing contents and transfer data information are respectively specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by a display variation pattern command, but this is not necessarily the case. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "Fluctuation start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Notice effect", "Normal reach", and "Super reach", and the display data table is displayed according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, display data tables corresponding to the paper necessary for the specified variable performance are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You can do it like this. "Variation start-up," "high-speed fluctuation," "normal reach," etc. are often displayed in common for each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by dividing the variable performance into elements in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently provide a data table.

In the above control example, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. For this purpose, a pointer may be provided.

In the above control example, a case will be described in which the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of images (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) at which the drawing process ends. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that one frame of images is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is sent every time one frame of images is displayed. By sending , you can keep the time interval accurate without having to clock it.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed, and the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. has been described and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the case is not limited to this, and each time the image controller 237 receives a drawing list, the image controller 237 reads out the drawn image and sends it to the third symbol display device 81. may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame worth of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed and to the third symbol display device 81. It is also possible to replace the frame buffer with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above control example, after the final display data table corresponding to the final display performance is set in the display data table buffer 233d, until the final display performance ends, the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demo command (display demo command) is received, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the final display data table corresponding to the final display performance may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In addition, in this case, the final display effect is not executed until either the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demo command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time the process ends, the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue displaying the final display performance until the variable pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect changes the back image and stops displaying the third symbol consisting of the main symbol to which no numbers from "0" to "9" are attached. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol consisting of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Furthermore, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third symbol or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, when the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the power-on main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly after the power is turned on, so that players, hall personnel, or when checking the operation of the pachinko machine 10 at the factory during manufacturing, etc. You can immediately confirm that the device has started operating without any problems by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command Based on this, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image stored in the power-on variation image area 235b. Note that it is desirable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to more quickly display fluctuations using the power-on fluctuation image.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table indicate the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the content of the image that should be transferred at that time, corresponding to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds. Although the case where image data information (transfer data information) is defined has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, if the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays images at 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 has a frame rate of 1/30 Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display content every 1/30 seconds.

In addition, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval, instead of specifying the sprite type itself, the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified. It may also be something that stipulates. In order to read the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 reads the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval, the sprite can be displayed in association with each sprite type. Since it is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character ROM 234 and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, a stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and it is stored for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the subarea of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above control example, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of that sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. We have described a case in which the MPU 231 performs a process of determining whether or not the image data of a predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and disabling the transfer process. The image controller 237 may perform the processing. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be memorized. Further, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. In contrast, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to "rear surface A" among the plurality of rear images is made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a back image used in some super reaches may be made to reside in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of a super leech that appears frequently or is expected to appear frequently reside in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines an image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case where the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. Information regarding the necessary sprite type is written in the table, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information written at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of that image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer the image to the video RAM 236 for use.

In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes over time on the back surface C, which is the back image of the "island stage", was explained, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes over time, good. In addition, the back image is not only one that scrolls or changes color tone over time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of the back image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the main control device 110 uses the information of various counters (the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of start-up winning that is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 as the number of pending balls. Although we have explained the case where it is included in the command, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (1st winning random number counter C1, 1st winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is sent to the voice lamp by another command. The control device 113 may also be notified.

In the above control example, when executing a variation effect, a case was explained in which a high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at high speed to such an extent that the player cannot see them, but instead of displaying this high-speed variation, , all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size to the extent that they are not visible, or each of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the game board 13 is provided with one first starting port 64a for starting a special symbol jackpot lottery when a ball enters the ball, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entry ports, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a ball being held at each first entrance, the number of held balls command that the main controller 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 indicates which first entrance the ball is being held. May contain information. Furthermore, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 when starting the variation may also include information indicating which first ball entry port the variation effect was held on hold for. good. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, a held ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a held ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the held ball number command is If the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decreased by 1, the number of balls held at the first entry port is You can count the number of balls held each time.

In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the number of reserved balls command is Although the case where the information is transmitted from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, the winning balls into the first starting port 64a and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls held is not limited to four times. , 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls that is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings in the first starting port 64a is displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four areas is changed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting member. may be configured.

Furthermore, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbols as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81; The display may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that is shown. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 246. This second control example is based on the various presentation devices (the presentation member 700, the horizontal slide member 840, and the injection device 400 for injecting the granular material 320 (FIGS. 5 and 5) used in the first control example described above. 6)) will be explained in detail. Note that the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that control details regarding the various performance devices described above are added, and other than that, the pachinko machine 10 is the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229, the contents of various presentation devices in this second control example will be explained. The specific configurations and operating principles of the various production devices are the same as those in the first control example described above, so detailed explanations and illustrations thereof will be omitted. In addition, for convenience of explanation, in the first control example described above, different symbols were attached to the structures (structures having individual functions) that constitute each production device, but in this control example, each production device The explanation will be given as if each production device has the respective functions explained in the first control example, with reference numerals given only to them. In addition, although some of the names have been changed for each production device with the same reference numerals as in the first control example described above, the detailed contents are the same as those described in the first control example above. It is the same as the device (structure) marked with .

FIG. 226(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various devices included in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, and FIG. 226(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the injection device 400. be. The diagram shown in FIG. 226(a) is a simplified version of the diagram shown in FIG. 7 of the first control example, and since the specific content is the same as the first control example described above, Detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), in this pachinko machine 10, an operation unit 500 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This operation unit 500 is assembled into the pachinko machine 10 so that the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81 is located in an opening formed in the center. A presentation member 700 is provided above the operation unit 500, and horizontal slide members (rotating members) 840 are provided on the left and right sides, respectively. Further, the injection device 400 is provided on the back side of the operating unit 500, that is, at a position hidden behind the operating unit 500 and not visible when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front.

The detailed operating principle is the same as the first control example described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted, but the production member 700 is movable so as to move downward from the standby position shown in FIG. 226. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to cover about 1/3 of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when it is in the operating position moved downward (see FIG. 8). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9, the effect member 700 is configured to be able to perform a dividing operation. With this configuration, by moving the presentation member 700 from the standby position to the operating position, the player who is gazing at the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can become interested in the presentation member 700. By making it easy to hold and performing the split operation after positioning the performance member 700 at the operating position, it is possible to perform a performance that is surprising to the player while the player is watching. , it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Further, each of the rotating members 840 can move independently in the vertical direction, and the rotating member 840 itself is configured to be rotatable around the center of the rotating member (see FIG. 11). In this way, by further rotating the rotating member 840 while moving the position of the rotating member 840, it is possible to perform an impressive performance for the player.

Next, the configuration of the injection device 400 will be explained with reference to FIG. 226(b). This injection device 400 is a device for ejecting the granular members 320 radially upward (in the direction of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81), and the injection device 400 itself is made difficult to be seen by the player. Therefore, it is assembled into the pachinko machine 10 so as to be hidden in the operation unit 500. This injection device 400 is formed with a storage area ra for storing the granular material 320, and a bottom member of the storage area ra is formed in an arch shape. By driving the drive mechanism 400m, the bottom member is configured to be movable in the vertical direction, and by moving the bottom member sa upward, a plurality of granular members stored in the storage area ra are removed. 320 is configured to be ejected upward. Note that since the specific operating principle of the injection device 400 is the same as the first control example described above, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this second control example, a storage detection sensor sa is provided as a detection means capable of detecting the amount (number) of granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra. This storage detection sensor sa is formed by a weight sensor that can detect the load applied to the arch-shaped bottom part, and determines whether all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra based on the detection result of the weight sensor. It is configured so that it can be identified. Based on the detection result, this detection means can detect a state in which the granular member 320 injected by the injection device 400 is not stored in the storage area ra, for example, a state in which it is stuck without returning to the storage area ra. can.

Note that the configuration of the detection means for detecting whether or not the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration. The number of granular members 320 ejected beyond the detection line toward the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and from the display surface side of the third symbol display device 81 to the storage area ra. and the number of returned granular members 320, and is configured to be able to determine whether all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra based on the measurement results of the measuring means. You may do so. Further, as in this control example, when the injection target member injected from the injection device 400 has a rollable shape (spherical shape), the injection target member injected by the injection device 400 goes into the storage area ra. An alignment path is formed on the return path, and a counting means capable of counting the number of ejected members rolling along the alignment path is provided, and all the granular members 320 are placed in the storage area ra based on the counting result of the counting means. It may be configured to be able to determine whether or not it is stored.

In this way, by configuring the state of the granular member 320 to be distinguishable, it becomes possible to perform an appropriate performance. In other words, in a performance device such as the performance member 700 and the rotating member 840 whose operation is mechanically controlled based on the drive of a drive means (motor or solenoid), the driving status of the drive means (the number of rotations of the motor (the number of steps) ) and the energization status of the solenoid), it is possible to grasp the current situation (position) of the production device. Although the timing at which the ejected granular material 320 is stored in the storage area ra can be determined by determining the driving status of the drive mechanism 400m, it is difficult to determine the timing at which the ejected granular material 320 is stored in the storage area ra again. In other words, the area that the injected granular members 320 reach is varied depending on the direction of injection and the degree of collision between the injected granular members 320, and furthermore, the momentum of the injected granular members 320 is weakened, and the gravity When the granular material 320 falls downward, it collides with each member provided in the injection area of the granular member 320 or gets stuck in the gaps between the members, causing a delay in the timing of returning to the storage area ra. There was a risk. Furthermore, the granular members 320 may be attracted by static electricity generated by collision or contact of the granular members 320, resulting in a delay in the timing of returning to the storage area ra or the possibility that the granular members 320 may not be able to return.

Although detailed contents will be described later, in this second control example, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the situation of the injected granular member 320 is determined, and based on the determination result, the granular member 320 is The timing and content of the performance using can be variably controlled. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being performed by the injection device 400 to inject the granular member 320 in a state where the granular member 320 is not stored in the storage area ra, resulting in a reduction in the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the determination value for determining the number (amount) of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra as abnormal is changed depending on the operation content (operation purpose) of the injection device 400. It is composed of By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the abnormality determination from being excessively determined as abnormal, making it difficult to execute the effect of injecting the granular member 320 by the injection device 400, and reducing the effect of the effect. can.

Furthermore, in this second control example, in a part of the state in which not all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra, all the granular members 320 are daringly executed by the injection device 400 to be injected. The granular member 320 is configured to be stored in the storage area ra. In this way, it is possible to try to normalize the storage status of the granular member 320 by using the operation control used for presentation, and therefore the contents of the operation control for the injection device 400 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 to 229, the content of the performance using each performance device executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be explained. Note that FIGS. 227 to 229 are diagrams for simply explaining the flow of presentation using each presentation device (the presentation member 700, the rotating member 840, the injection device 400), and the detailed configuration is omitted. However, since the specific structure and operating principle are the same as the first control example described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 227(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the production member 700 is located in the operating position, and FIG. 227(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the production member 700 is located in the operating position. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device 400 is driven and the granular member 320 is injected while the dividing operation is being performed. FIG. 228(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the production member 700 moves to the standby position and the granular member 320 returns to the storage area ra, and FIG. 228(b) shows the rotating member FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the injection device 400 is driven and the granular member 320 is injected while the injection device 840 is being driven.

This control example is configured to be able to execute a series of accessory effects using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400. In this series of performance effects, a first performance is first performed in which the performance member 700 is moved to the operating position (see FIG. 227(a)), and then, the injection device 400 is driven while the performance member 700 is operated in a divided manner. The second effect is executed (see FIG. 227(b)), and after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the third effect is executed to operate the rotating member 840 and drive the injection device 400 (see FIG. 228(b)). and are configured to be executable.

In this way, by performing a performance in which a plurality of various devices are linked together, it is possible to perform a powerful performance that gives players a sense of unity. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 227(b), by driving the injection device 400 in response to the dividing operation of the presentation member 700, it is possible to create an illusion that the granular member 320 is protruding from the inside of the presentation member 700. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, the operating status of the injection device 400 (collection status of the granular member 320) is configured to be able to be determined during the execution of a series of accessory effects. If it is determined that the collection status) is in a predetermined abnormal state, only the effect display is performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400. (See FIG. 29) With this configuration, when the granular member 320 is protruding, the effect member 700, rotating member 840, and injection device 400 While suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which various parts are damaged due to movement of the parts, it is possible to minimize the deterioration of the performance effect of a series of performance parts.

Here, with reference to FIG. 230, the flow of a series of accessory effects will be explained. FIG. 230 is a timing chart schematically showing the status of various devices of the pachinko machine 10 as time passes when a series of accessory performances are executed, and FIG. 230(a) shows the main controller 110, 230(b) shows the audio lamp control device 113, FIG. 230(c) shows the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 230(d) shows the firing accessory (ejection device) 400, FIG. ) is a timing chart schematically showing the situation of the falling accessory (acting member) 700, and FIG. 230(f) is the situation of the rotating accessory (rotating member) 840 over time.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), in this control example, the above-described series of accessory effects are executed during the variation period of the special symbol variation (for example, variation time of 90 seconds) executed by the main controller 110. It is configured as follows. In other words, as shown in FIG. 230(c), based on the start of the special symbol variation, a variation effect display of the third symbol is executed on the display surface (liquid crystal display) of the third symbol display device 81, Thereafter, 45 seconds after the variable effect display is executed, a series of accessory effects display corresponding to the series of accessory effects is executed.

As shown in FIG. 230(b), when performing a series of accessory performances, it is necessary to make the firing accessory 400 perform a preparation motion in advance, and 5 seconds before executing the series of accessory performances ( Preparation control is executed with a preparation period of 5 seconds starting from the timing when 40 seconds have elapsed from the start of special symbol fluctuation. When the preparation control is executed, the launch accessory 400 performs a preparation operation (see FIG. 230(d)), and then the launch accessory 400 and the falling accessory 700 are released in synchronization with the start timing of a series of accessory effects. executes the operation (see FIG. 226(b)). When the first action of the projectile accessory 400 is completed, a preparation action (movement from the firing position to the standby position) is performed for the next action, and a waiting period is set until the execution timing of the second action. Ru.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the operation of the falling accessory 700 has ended, and 60 seconds have elapsed since the variable effect display was executed, the rotating member 840 starts operating, and the firing role is adjusted to match the timing. A second operation of object 400 is performed. In this way, the performance effect can be enhanced by controlling each performance device so that the operation timing of the launching accessory 400 matches the operation details of the falling accessory 700 and the rotating member 840. .

Here, the preparation operation of the launch accessory 400 includes a driving process to move the launch accessory 400 to the standby position (see FIG. 227(a)), and a determination as to whether or not the condition of the granular member 320 is normal. A determination process is executed. When it is determined that the granular member 320 is normal (normally stored in the storage area ra), the next operation of the projectile accessory 400 is configured to be executable.

As shown in FIG. 230, in this control example, the launch accessory 400 is configured to operate multiple times within a series of performance periods, but during the multiple operation periods of the launch accessory 400, There is a waiting period. This waiting period is provided as a period during which a part of the preparation operation can be executed again if the preparation operation does not end normally. Specifically, at the end of the preparation period, it is determined whether all of the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra, and if it is determined that all of the granular members 320 are not stored, a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) is determined. It is configured to be able to perform the process of determining whether all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra again at intervals.

As described above, since the particulate member 320 fired by the firing accessory 400 moves irregularly within the firing area (ejection area), the time it takes to return to the storage area ra varies greatly depending on the case. It turns out. Therefore, the process of determining whether all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra can be executed multiple times at different timings, and even if a slight error occurs, the second operation of the projectile accessory 400 is executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute a series of character effects, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, the storage situation of the granular member 320 is determined to be abnormal during the preparation period of the launch accessory 400, and the abnormality is determined even after the waiting period has elapsed. If the determination continues, the execution of the effect of moving the firing accessory 400 is stopped, and another effect is executed. With this configuration, even if the performance using the firing accessory 400 cannot be executed normally, it is possible to perform a series of accessory effects without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the content of the operation control when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 10 among the operation controls of the projectile accessory 400 will be explained. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of operation control (at startup) of the launch accessory 400. In this control example, when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 10, the operation of various production devices provided in the Pachinko machine 10 is checked. In this way, the system is configured to check the operation of various performance devices at the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, before the opening of the game hall where games using the pachinko machine 10 are played. As a result, if an abnormality occurs in the operation of various performance devices, for example, if it is determined that the drive mechanism (motor, solenoid, drive gear, etc.) is in an abnormal state where it cannot operate normally due to a malfunction. , it becomes possible to carry out repairs without causing inconvenience to players who are playing games.

As shown in FIG. 231, when the operation confirmation process for the projectile accessory 400 is executed at power-on, first, the granular member monitoring is performed to determine whether the granular member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra. The process is executed (see FIG. 231(b)). In this particulate member monitoring process, it is determined whether the particulate member 320 is normally stored in the storage area ra based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor sa shown in FIG. 226(b). Then, based on the determination result of the particulate member monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the current storage situation is abnormal (see FIG. 231(c)).

In this control example, the rank of the abnormality determination is configured to be different depending on the timing (situation) of executing the abnormality determination in the abnormality determination that determines whether or not the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is abnormal. ing. Although detailed contents will be described later, the storage amount of the granular material that is determined to be abnormal is configured to vary depending on the abnormality determination timing (situation).

In the first abnormality determination performed in the operation confirmation process for the projectile accessory 400 at the time of power-up, the abnormality determination with the highest determination level (high level A) is performed. In this high level A abnormality determination, only when the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is that all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra is determined to be "normal"; The configuration is such that if the result is a determination result, it is determined to be "abnormal." If the abnormality is determined to be "abnormal" by the abnormality determination, the execution of the initial operation process at power-on is interrupted, and an abnormality notification process is executed to notify the outside of the pachinko machine 10 of the abnormal state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent secondary damage from occurring due to the initial operation process continuing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the projectile accessory 400.

If it is determined to be "normal" in the abnormality determination performed at the first timing of the initial operation process, then a preparation operation and a firing operation are performed as drive control of the firing accessory 400. Thereafter, after a waiting period of 3 seconds, a second abnormality determination is performed. In this second abnormality determination, abnormality determination having the next highest determination level (high level B) after the above-described high level A abnormality determination is performed.

In this high level B abnormality determination, if the determination result of the granular member monitoring process is that all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra, it is determined to be "normal" and within a predetermined amount. "Retry" if the error is abnormal LV1 indicating that the error is greater than 10% (for example, error 10%), or abnormal LV2 indicating that the error is greater than a predetermined amount (for example, error greater than 10%), or The configuration is such that if the level is abnormal LV3, it is determined as "abnormal".

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the details of the operation control when using the firing accessory 400 as a performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, when performing a series of accessory effects) will be explained. FIG. 232 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of operation control of the firing accessory 400 (during a series of accessory effects). In this control example, similarly to the initial operation process described above, even when performing a series of accessory effects, abnormality determination is performed on various devices used in the effects. The system is configured to vary the performance content of the series of character performances depending on the result of the abnormality determination. Furthermore, by varying the determination levels of the abnormality determination in the abnormality determination, the performance using the firing accessory 400 in the series of accessory performance is made easier to perform.

Next, the performance mode of the series of accessory performances executed in response to the abnormality determination result of the firing accessory object 400 in the series of accessory performances will be explained with reference to FIG. 233. FIG. 233 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of performances executed in a series of character performances. In this control example, as shown in FIG. 232, two abnormality determinations are performed during a series of performance performances (a first abnormality determination with a middle level of discrimination and a second abnormality determination with a low level of discrimination). If both are determined to be normal, as shown in FIG. 233(a), in the first half of the target performance period of the series of accessory performances, the first firing performance of the launching accessory 400 and the falling accessory 700 are performed. A falling effect is performed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second firing performance of the firing accessory 400 and the rotation performance of the rotating member 840 are performed. In addition, on the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81, an effect display corresponding to a predetermined series of accessory effects is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined as "abnormal (for example, abnormal LV2)" in the first abnormality determination, it means that the granular member 320 is not normally stored in the storage area ra, and the firing role is used as a series of accessory performances. Even if the object 400 is operated, the presentation effect will be low, so as shown in FIG. 233(b), a presentation mode different from the normal state (see FIG. 233(a)) is set. Specifically, execution of the first launch performance of the launch accessory 400 is stopped, and a specific falling performance is set as a performance using the falling accessory 700 in place of the normal falling performance. After that, regardless of the result of the second abnormality determination that is executed, the execution of the second firing performance using the firing accessory 400 is stopped even in the latter half of the series of accessory performances, and the rotation performance using the rotating member 840 is stopped. is executed.

Since the performance period of the specific falling performance is set to be longer than the performance period of the normal falling performance, the interval from the end of the performance of the falling accessory 700 to the start of the performance of the rotating member 840 is normal. It is structured so that it is shorter than the series of character performances that are performed during the period. In other words, in a series of performance effects that are executed normally, the launching role object 400 is driven in response to the operations of various performance devices (falling role object 700, rotating member 840), and In order for the object 400 to drive normally, it was necessary to leave a predetermined interval.

On the other hand, in the performance mode of the series of accessory effects shown in FIG. 233(b), the launching accessory object 400 is not driven, so even if the presentation period of the falling accessory object 700 is lengthened, it gives the player a sense of discomfort. Nothing happens. In addition, since the timing for executing the effect of the rotating member 840 is the same as in the normal state (see FIG. 233(a)), the processing load makes it possible to share the control processing content between the normal state and the abnormal state. can be reduced.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 233(b), if the result of the first abnormality determination is determined to be "abnormal", the firing is performed during a series of character performances without considering the result of the second abnormality determination. Although the configuration is configured to set a performance mode in which the accessory 400 is not used, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the result of the second abnormality determination is determined to be "normal", the second firing of the firing accessory 400 is performed. It may be configured to perform a performance. In other words, when it is determined that there is an "abnormality" in the first abnormality determination of a series of accessory performances, for example, the granular members 320 are stored unevenly in the storage area ra, and all the granular members 320 are stored in the storage area ra. If it is not determined normally that the falling accessory object 700 is falling, or if it is determined to be "abnormal" because the granular member 320 is caught in the falling accessory object 700, a performance using the falling accessory object 700 is performed as a series of accessory effects. By doing so, all the granular members 320 may be normally stored in the storage area ra, so the second firing performance of the firing accessory 400 may be executed based on the result of the second abnormality determination. Thereby, it is possible to easily perform a performance using the firing accessory 400.

Next, a performance mode of a series of accessory performances when an abnormality is determined in the second abnormality determination performed during the series of accessory performances will be explained. FIG. 233(c) is a diagram schematically showing a performance mode of a series of accessory performances when a "slight abnormality" is determined in the second abnormality determination.

If the first abnormality determination is the same as "normal", the first firing performance and falling performance, which are the same as the series of accessory performances during normal operation, are executed. After that, if it is determined in the second abnormality determination that it is a "mild abnormality (for example, abnormality LV2)", a retry process is performed in which a delay period is set and the abnormality determination is performed again after the delay period has elapsed. . Then, if the result of the abnormality determination executed in the retry process is "normal", the same operation control as in the normal case is performed, ie. The second firing effect of the firing accessory 400, the rotation effect of the rotating member 840, and the effect display executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are simultaneously executed based on the delay period elapsed timing.

In other words, the execution timing of the second half of the series of accessory performances is delayed by the period during which the retry process is executed (delay period). During the delay period, a specific display is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without controlling the operation of various production devices. With this configuration, the display content of the production display that is continuously displayed during the execution of a series of character productions and the operation content of various production devices whose execution timings are variable depending on the presence or absence of a delay are avoided. It is possible to prevent the production effect from deteriorating.

Although a detailed explanation has been omitted, for example, in the pattern shown in FIG. 233(c), if the result of the second abnormality determination is "abnormal", continuous A second specific display of the content is displayed, and a series of performance effects in which various performance devices do not operate are executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end a series of accessory performances using a performance display that does not give a sense of discomfort to the display content of the specific display. Further, it is possible to reduce the amount of data corresponding to the operation control contents of various performance devices dedicated to the special abnormality determination results.

Next, a performance mode of a series of accessory performances when an abnormality is determined in the second abnormality determination performed during the series of accessory performances will be explained. FIG. 233(d) is a diagram schematically showing a performance mode of a series of role-playing performances when it is determined in the second abnormality determination to be "abnormal (for example, abnormality LV3)". If the determination result of the second abnormality determination is determined to be abnormal LV3, the special operation effect is executed without executing the retry process as shown in FIG. 233(c). This special operation effect sets an operation valid period during which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22), and based on the player operating the operation means within the operation valid period, various performance devices are activated. It is a performance that makes something work.

In other words, based on the fact that it is determined to be "abnormal" by the abnormality determination, we stop operating the various production devices as an action scenario for a series of character productions, and instead incorporate an operation production to be used as a separate production. It consists of With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to operate various performance devices by operating the frame button 22 during execution of a series of performance effects in which the performance devices are operated a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the performance mode was set because the firing accessory 400 was determined to be abnormal by abnormality determination.

<About the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this second control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 234 to 236. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 152). The difference is that various devices have been added, and the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the configuration of the RAM 223 are different. Specifically, a decorative accessory motor for driving various performance devices is different. The difference is that the groups Mz are connected. Since the other configurations are the same as the first control example described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. The decorative accessory motor group Mz includes various motors and solenoids for driving the above-mentioned falling accessory 700, rotating member 840, launching accessory 400, etc., and its specific configuration and operation are as follows. Since the principle is the same as the first control example described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 235(a). FIG. 235(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this second control example. As shown in FIG. 235(a), this second control example is different from the first control example described above in that an accessory operation table 222aa and an abnormality determination table 222ab are added, and other than that, the second control example is the same. It is. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The accessory operation table 222aa contains the operation contents (operation scenarios) for various decorative accessories (falling accessory 700, rotating member 840, firing accessory 400, etc.) used in the variation production performed in response to special symbol fluctuations. ) is stored, in which an action scenario is defined corresponding to the action content to be performed for each of the various decorative accessories, and an action scenario corresponding to the action content to be performed is defined. An operation based on the read operation scenario is executed.

Here, the contents of the scenario defined in this accessory action table 222aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 236(a). FIG. 236(a) is a schematic diagram showing various scenarios defined in the accessory action table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 236(a), the accessory action table 222aa includes, in addition to the action scenarios that are referred to when executing the variable production, the action scenarios that are executed when the power is turned on (startup) of the pachinko machine 10. An operation scenario that is referred to during initial operation is also specified.

Specifically, the initial action scenario 222aa1, the launch accessory preparation action scenario 222aa2, the launch accessory first action scenario 222aa3, the launch accessory second action scenario 222aa4, the falling accessory action scenario 222aa5, and the rotating accessory action scenario 222aa6. is stored.

Next, the abnormality determination table 222ab is referred to when determining how much of the granular member 320 fired by the launch accessory 400 has returned to the storage area ra of the launch accessory 400, The determination result of abnormality determination is configured to vary depending on the error from the normal value. In this control example, the state in which all the granular members 320 (for example, 10 pieces) are stored in the storage area ra is set as "10", and each time the number of stored granular members 320 decreases by one, the error increases. The configuration is such that the determination is made in increments of 10%.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236(b), when the error (%) is "0", the determination result is "normal", and when the error is "10%", the determination result is "abnormal LV1". ”, if the error is “20% to 30%”, the determination result is “abnormal LV2”, and if the error is “40% or more”, the determination result is “abnormal LV3”. In this way, with respect to the state in which all the granular members 320 (for example, 10 pieces) are stored in the storage area ra, the current state is determined step by step, and the stage is determined to be abnormal depending on the situation. can be easily varied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 235(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 235(b), this second control example is different from the first control example described above in that an accessory delay timer 223aa and a production level storage area 223ab are added, and other than that, the second control example is the same. It is. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The accessory delay timer 223aa is a timer for measuring a period during which the operation control of the launch accessory 400 is delayed, and when delaying the operation control of the launch accessory 400, the accessory delay timer 223aa ) is set (see S3909 in FIG. 243). The value is updated every time the accessory production management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) is executed, and when the timer value reaches 0, the process for re-judging the abnormality of the firing accessory 400 is performed. It is executed (see S3810 in FIG. 244). During a period in which the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, that is, during a delay period, operation instructions to various production devices other than the firing accessory 400 executed by the audio lamp control device 113 are also delayed. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to delay the operation instructions to other various performance devices by the same length as the delay period set for the operation control of the firing accessory 400. It is possible to easily control various performance devices including 400 with a sense of unity. In addition, even if the process of extending the delay period of the firing accessory 400 is configured to be executable, until the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa reaches 0, it will not work on other various production devices. Since no instructions are output, it is possible to easily control various performance devices including the firing accessory 400 with a sense of unity.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the various presentation devices, the process of instructing the display control contents regarding the display presentation displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also delayed. Without limitation, an effect device may be provided that outputs an operation instruction regardless of the length of the delay period set for the firing accessory 400. By providing such a performance device, by distinguishing between the operation content of the launch accessory 400 and the operation content of the performance device, it is possible for the player to know that the operation control of the launch accessory 400 has been executed with a delay. It can be easily notified.

The performance level storage area 223ab is a storage area in which a performance level set according to the performance mode of the performance using the firing accessory 400 is temporarily stored. In this control example, before performing a presentation using the firing accessory 400, that is, a firing presentation in which the granular member 320 is fired toward the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227(b)). , it is necessary to perform a preparation operation of lowering the bottom member of the projectile accessory 400 to the preparation position. Since the preparation operation is executed by driving the drive mechanism 400m (see FIG. 226(b)), if the player notices that the drive mechanism 400m has been activated, the firing effect will not be executed. Since the player knows that the firing effect will be executed before the game starts, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult to provide the player with a surprising effect.

Therefore, in this control example, even if the firing effect is not executed, only the preparation operation is configured to be executable. As a result, even if the player notices that the drive mechanism 400m has been driven, it is difficult to tell whether or not the firing effect will be executed, making it easier to provide the player with a surprising effect. be able to.

In this control example, when setting a production in which the preparation motion of the firing accessory 400 is executed, it is determined whether the production set this time is a production mode in which only the preparation motion is executed, or a production in which the firing production is executed. It is configured such that it is possible to determine whether the mode is the same or not, and to determine the performance level according to the determination result. Specifically, the performance level is determined to be level 1 in the case of a performance in which only a preparatory action is performed, and the performance level 2 is determined in the case of a performance in which a firing performance is executed, and the performance level is stored in the performance level storage area 223ab (FIG. 241 (See S3705 and S3706).

The performance level stored in the performance level storage area 223ab is referred to when determining the abnormality level using the abnormality determination table 222ab. In this way, there are cases in which a performance in which only the preparation action is performed, that is, a performance in which the movement of the firing accessory 400 is not controlled even if the result of abnormality determination is "normal", and a case in which a performance in which the firing accessory is executed are performed. By making the determination result of the abnormality level by abnormality determination different depending on the performance, for example, the firing performance was not performed because only the preparation action was performed, or the result of abnormality determination was "abnormal". , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the firing effect has not been executed.

<About the control processing content of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 246, the content of the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. In this second control example, with respect to the first control example described above, startup processing 2 (see FIG. 237) is replaced with startup processing (see FIG. 193), and startup processing 2 (see FIG. 237) is replaced with main processing (see FIG. 194). Processing 2 (see FIG. 239) is replaced with presentation mode setting processing (see S2607 in FIG. 200) and production mode setting processing 2 (see S2657 in FIG. 240) is replaced with liquid crystal presentation execution management processing (see S2110 in FIG. 209). The difference is that the liquid crystal performance execution management process 2 (see S2160 in FIG. 245) is executed instead, and the operation performance management process 2 (see S2161 in FIG. 246) is executed instead of the operation performance management process (see S2111 in FIG. 210). , otherwise the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, startup processing 2 (see FIG. 237) will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of startup processing 2. As shown in FIG. 237, startup processing 2 differs from the startup processing described above (see FIG. 193) in that initial operation processing (S2051) is added.

Specifically, when the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 237) is executed, the same processes of S2001 to S2010 as the above-mentioned start-up process (see FIG. 193) are executed. When the process of S2010 is finished, the initial operation process is executed (S2051), and then interrupt permission is set (S2011), and this process ends. The details of this initial operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. ) is the process to check the operation. In other words, in this second control example, the operation check of various production devices can be executed during the period (startup period) from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the main processing can be executed in a loop. . If an abnormality occurs while checking the operation of various production devices, the start-up process 2 is not terminated, and the abnormality is notified to the outside.

With this configuration, it is possible to know when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on that the various decorative devices are out of order, so that the various devices that are out of order can be detected while the player is playing the game. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution of the performance using the . Furthermore, in recent pachinko machines 10, a plurality of performance devices are configured to be controlled, and the content of the control is configured to vary depending on the lottery results of special symbols. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 10 is being played, it is rare that all the operation control details set for the various performance devices are executed. For example, normal operation may be interrupted due to a disconnection, etc. Even if an impossible performance device occurs, if the performance that controls the operation of the performance device is not executed, it will not be possible to know that the performance device is malfunctioning, and in some cases, it may be impossible to know what is wrong with the performance device. There was a problem in that the wires were left disconnected for days on end. On the other hand, in this control example, when the start-up process 2 of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the operation control for checking the operation of various production devices is executed. It is possible to prevent the failure of the device from being overlooked for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the contents of the initial operation process (S2051) executed in startup process 2 (see FIG. 237) will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the initial operation process (S2051). In this initial operation process (S2051), a process is performed to check the operation of the decorative performance devices (for example, the falling accessory 700, the rotating member 840, the firing accessory 400, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10. This is a process that is looped until all operation checks are completed. In addition, although FIG. 238 describes in detail the processing contents related to the operation confirmation of the firing accessory 400, which is a characteristic configuration of this control example, the processing related to the operation confirmation is similarly executed for other production devices. ing. Detailed explanation of the processing related to operation confirmation for other production devices will be omitted.

When the initial motion process (S2051) is executed, first, the initial motion scenario 222aa1 is read from the accessory motion table 222aa (S2081). Then, operation control corresponding to the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is executed (S2082). Here, the initial operation scenario 222aa1 defines an operation scenario such that operation control is executed sequentially for each production device, and it is determined that the operation check result of the first production device is normal. The configuration is such that the next operation check of the performance device is performed when the performance device is activated. By controlling the operation of each production device independently in this way, it is possible to prevent the production devices in operation from buffering each other and being damaged.

Furthermore, when the operation check of all the performance devices is completed normally, the configuration is such that an operation check is executed in which a plurality of performance devices are simultaneously operated in combinations used in the actual performance. In this case, the motion scenario for performance stored in the accessory motion table 222aa is read out and motion control for each performance is executed. In this way, by checking the operation using the operation control of the content actually executed in the production, it is possible to check whether or not operation instructions are being properly output to multiple production devices, or whether or not the operation instructions are properly output to multiple production devices. When the devices are driven at the same time, it is possible to check the operation to see if an excessive power value is output, and it is possible to further suppress the frequency of malfunctions of the performance devices during a game.

In addition, in this control example, the initial motion process is executed using the motion scenario for the initial motion, but the initial motion processing is not limited to this, and the initial motion processing is performed using only the motion scenario actually used for the production. may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of operation scenarios for operating the presentation device.

In addition, in this control example, the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is defined so that the operation control is executed sequentially for each production device, but the present invention is not limited to this. The contents of the initial operation scenario 222aa1 may be defined so that the operation control is executed redundantly for the production device. This makes it possible to reduce the time spent on initial operation processing.

After completing the process of S2082, it is next determined whether the motion control of the launch accessory 400 is completed (S2083), and if it is determined that the motion control of the launch accessory 400 is not completed, that is, other effects are performed. When the operation control of the device is being executed, or when the operation control of the launch accessory 400 is being executed (S2083: No), it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the performance device other than the launch accessory 400. (S2084), and if it is determined that no abnormality has occurred (S2084: No), the initial operation scenario 222aa1 is updated (S2085), and it is determined whether the updated initial operation scenario 222aa1 indicates the end. However, if it is determined that the content does not indicate termination (S2085: No), the process moves to the process of S2082 described above, and the processes of S2082 to S2086 are repeatedly executed until the initial operation scenario 222aa1 ends. In the process of S2086, if it is determined that the updated initial operation scenario 222aa1 indicates termination (S2084: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2084, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the performance device other than the firing accessory 400 (S2084: Yes), a notification indicating the accessory abnormality is executed (S2091), and the process is looped. . By configuring in this way, the initial operation process does not end in a state where an accessory abnormality is notified. In this case, the hall staff confirms the notification indicating the abnormality in the accessory, removes the cause of the abnormality in the accessory, and then restarts the pachinko machine 10. In other words, in order to normally operate the pachinko machine 10 that has been determined to have an abnormality, the hall staff must perform the work, so the pachinko machine 10 can be reliably brought into a normal state.

In this control example, the initial operation process is always executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, but the invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that when the power is turned on in this state, startup processing 2 can be ended without executing the initial operation processing (S2051). With this configuration, for example, when it becomes necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the game parlor is open due to trouble that occurs while the player is playing, the initial operation process can be skipped. I can do it. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly returned to a state where the player can play.

Return to S2083 and continue the explanation. In the process of S2083, if it is determined that the content of the current initial operation scenario is the content that completes the operation of the launch accessory 400 (S2083: Yes), 3 seconds have elapsed since the operation of the launch accessory 400 was completed. If it is determined that 3 seconds have not elapsed (S2087: No), the process of S2087 is repeatedly executed until 3 seconds have elapsed. Then, in the process of S2087, if it is determined that 3 seconds have elapsed (S2087: Yes), the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S2088), and the detected abnormality is detected using the acquired detection result. The abnormality level is determined with reference to the determination table 222ab (S2089).

Then, it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S2089 is 1 or more (S2090), and when it is determined that it is 1 or more (S2090: Yes), a notification indicating the accessory abnormality is executed (S2091 ), loop the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormality level is not 1 or more (normal) (S2090: No), the process moves to the process of S2085 described above.

Next, the contents of main processing 2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the control contents of main processing 2. This main process 2 is based on the above-mentioned main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 194), in which a role performance management process (S2151) is newly added, and a liquid crystal performance execution management process (S2110) is added. The difference is that liquid crystal performance execution management processing 2 (S2160) is executed instead, and operation performance management processing 2 (S2161) is executed instead of operation performance management processing (S2111). Furthermore, the difference is that the contents of the processes executed in the command determination process (S2114) and the variable display setting process (S2115) are partially changed. Other than that, they are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When main processing 2 is executed, the same processes from S2101 to S2109 as the above-mentioned main processing (see FIG. 194) are executed, and then the role performance management process (S2151) is executed, and then the liquid crystal performance execution management Processing 2 (S2160) and operation performance management processing 2 (S2161) are executed. After completing the process of S2161, the process of S2112 to S2120, which is the same as the main process described above (see FIG. 194), is then executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the contents of the production mode setting process 2 (S2657) executed in the command determination process (see S2114) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 239) will be explained. This production mode setting process 2 (S2657) is different from the production mode setting process described above (see S2607 in FIG. 200) in that a process for setting the production mode of the accessory performance is added. The other contents are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the performance mode setting process 2 (S2657) is executed, first, the same processes of S2701 to S2705 and S2707 as the above-described production mode setting process (see S2607 in FIG. 200) are executed. Then, after completing the processing of S2704, S2705, and S2707, it is next determined whether or not the currently selected variable performance pattern has an accessory effect (S2751), and if it is determined that there is an accessory effect (S2751: Yes) ), executes the accessory effect setting process (S2752), sets display commands for indicating various setting contents (S2706), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that there is no accessory effect (S2751: No), the process of S2706 is directly executed, and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the contents of the accessory performance setting process (S2752) executed in the performance mode setting process 2 (see S2657 in FIG. 240) will be explained. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory effect setting process (S2752). This role-playing effect setting process (S2752) is to execute a process for setting the performance mode of the role-playing effect, and sets an operation scenario for the role-playing effect corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern. When setting a performance mode corresponding to a performance using the firing accessory 400, a process for setting the performance level is executed. The performance level set in this accessory performance setting process (S2752) is referred to when determining the abnormality of the firing accessory 400.

When the accessory production setting process (S2752) is executed, first, the type of accessory production included in the currently selected variable production pattern is extracted (S3701), and the firing accessory 400 is added to the extracted accessory production type. It is determined whether an accessory performance using the following is included (S3702). In the process of S3702, if it is determined that an accessory performance using the firing accessory 400 is included (S3702: Yes), the content of the performance of the firing accessory performance is determined (S3703). Then, it is determined whether the currently extracted firing accessory performance is a firing accessory performance in which only a preparatory action is performed or a firing accessory performance in which a firing performance is executed (S3704).

In the process of S3704, if it is determined that it is a firing accessory performance in which only a preparatory action is performed (S3704: Yes), the performance level 1 is set in the performance level storage area 223ab, and the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, if it is determined that not only the preparation operation but also the firing performance is to be executed (S3704: No), the performance level 2 is set in the performance level storage area 223ab, and the process moves to S3707.

In this control example, the firing accessory performance using the firing accessory 400 is configured to be able to execute a firing accessory performance that only performs a preparatory action and a firing accessory performance that performs a preparation action and a firing action. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance that the firing action will be performed at the time the preparation action is performed.

Furthermore, in this control example, different performance levels are set for a firing accessory performance that only performs a preparatory action and a firing accessory performance that performs a preparatory action and a firing action. The degree of abnormality determination is configured to vary depending on the level. Specifically, when a firing accessory performance that performs a preparation action and a firing action is set, the firing accessory performance is higher than when a firing accessory performance that performs only a preparation action is set. The configuration is such that it is difficult to determine that the situation is abnormal. With this configuration, it is possible to easily execute a firing operation using the firing accessory 400.

On the other hand, when a firing accessory performance using the firing accessory 400 is not performed and only a preparatory action is performed, the situation of the firing accessory 400 is likely to be determined to be abnormal. Because of this structure, it is possible to appropriately determine whether the firing accessory 400 is abnormal without reducing the frequency at which the firing operation using the firing accessory 400 is executed.

In addition, in this control example, when it is determined that the situation of the launch accessory 400 is abnormal, another accessory performance that does not use the launch accessory 400 is configured to be executable. Therefore, when executing a launch accessory performance that only performs the preparation operation of the launch accessory 400, if the situation of the launch accessory 400 is determined to be abnormal, another accessory performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to substantially enhance the performance effect compared to the role performance where only the preparatory actions are performed.

Returning to FIG. 241, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3707, the action scenario corresponding to the type extracted as the current accessory performance is read from the accessory action table 222aa (S3707), the read action scenario is set (S3708), and the performance corresponding to the set action scenario is created. The mode is stored in the performance selection information storage area 223h (S3709), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3702, if it is determined that the type of the current accessory effect does not include a firing accessory effect (S3702: No), the process of S3703 to S3706 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S3707. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the contents of the accessory performance management process (S2151 in FIG. 242) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 239) will be explained. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory performance management process (S2151). In this accessory performance management process (S2151), various management processes executed during the performance of the accessory include abnormality determination processing executed during the performance of the accessory, and processing when a value is set in the accessory delay timer 223aa. Processing is executed.

When the accessory performance management process (S2151) is executed, first, it is determined whether the accessory action scenario has been set, that is, whether the accessory action scenario is currently being performed (S3801), and the accessory action scenario is set. If it is determined that the process has not been performed (S3801: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3801, if it is determined that the accessory motion scenario is set (S3801: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is larger than 0 (S3802), If it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S3802: No), the set accessory motion scenario is updated (S3803). Then, it is determined whether there is an accessory action scenario corresponding to the firing accessory 400 in the currently set accessory action scenario (S3804), and if it is determined that there is an accessory action scenario corresponding to the firing accessory 400. (S3804: Yes), it is determined whether the content of the current operation scenario is an abnormality determination timing (S3805), and if it is determined that it is an abnormality determination timing (S3805: Yes), an abnormality determination process during performance is executed. (S3806), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3804, if it is determined that the accessory motion scenario of the firing accessory 400 is not set (S3804: No), or if it is determined in the process of S3805 that it is not the abnormality determination timing (S3805: If No), the operation control corresponding to the operation scenario is executed (S3807), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S3802, if the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, that is, the abnormality determination process for the firing accessory 400 has already been executed, and as a result of that determination, the delay process for delaying the accessory performance is executed. If it is determined that a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set in the accessory delay timer 223aa (S3802: Yes), the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is updated ( subtraction) (S3808), and determines whether the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa after the subtraction is 0 (S3809). Here, if it is determined that the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is 0 (S3809: Yes), it is the timing when the delay period has elapsed. A determination process is executed (S3810), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3809, if it is determined that the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is not 0 (greater than 0) (S3809: No), this process is directly ended. If it is determined in the process of S3809 that the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is larger than 0, the processes of S3802, S3802, S3808, and S3809 are repeatedly executed, and the operation scenario regarding the currently set accessory effect is The updating process (S3803) is not executed. In other words, in a situation where the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0, the accessory presentation is configured not to proceed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance effects from being executed during the delay period, the performance timings of a plurality of performance effects being shifted, and the performance effects being degraded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the contents of the performance abnormality determination process (S3806) executed in the accessory performance management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) will be explained. FIG. 243 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the performance abnormality determination process (S3806). In this performance abnormality determination process (S3806), abnormality determination in the performance performance (for example, a series of performance performance) in which the firing accessory 400 is used is performed. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 232, the abnormality determination with the determination level of "medium level" is performed before the firing accessory 400 is operated for the first time as a series of accessory effects, and the second firing An abnormality determination with a "low level" determination level that is performed before operating the accessory 400 and an abnormality determination with a "high level" determination level that is performed after the second operation of the ejection accessory 400 are performed. Ru.

When the performance abnormality determination process (S3806) is executed, first, the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S3901), and based on the acquired detection result, the abnormality determination table 222ab is referred to and the current The abnormality level is determined (S3902). Next, it is determined whether the current abnormality determination timing is the first abnormality determination timing (timing at which abnormality determination with the determination level of "medium level" in FIG. 232 is executed) (S3903).

In the process of S3903, if it is determined that it is the first abnormality determination timing (S3903: Yes), it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is "2" or more (S3904), and if it is determined to be "2" or more. If it is determined that it is (S3904: Yes), a performance mode that shows a specific performance that does not use the projectile accessory 400 is determined (S3905), the action scenario corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 is reset (S3906), and the A notification command indicating an abnormality in the object is set (S3907), and this processing is ended.

In other words, at the timing of the first abnormality determination, that is, at the abnormality determination timing executed before performing the performance using the firing accessory 400, the amount of the granular members 320 stored in the storage area ra is less than 80%. In this case, it is determined that the situation of the launching accessory 400 is abnormal. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the performance effect when performing a performance using the firing accessory 400. In addition, in this case, as a specific performance that does not use the launching accessory 400, for example, as shown in FIG. Since the specific falling effect is configured to be executed, it is possible to prevent the effect of the series of character effects from being reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S3903, if it is determined that the current time is not the first abnormality determination timing (S3903: No), then the second abnormality determination timing (the abnormality determination with the determination level "weak level" in FIG. 232) is determined. (S3908). If it is determined in the process of S3908 that it is the second abnormality determination timing (S3908: Yes), then it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is "2" (S3909), and "2" is determined. If it is determined that it is (S3909: Yes), a value indicating 2 seconds is set in the accessory delay timer 223aa (S3910), a display command indicating the display mode during the delay period is set (S3911), and the main Finish the process.

In the process of S3909, if it is determined that the abnormality level is not "2" (S3909: No), then it is determined whether the abnormality level is "3" (S3912), and if it is determined that it is "3", then (S3912: Yes), determines a performance mode showing a second specific performance that does not use the firing accessory 400 (S3913), resets the operation scenario corresponding to the firing accessory 400 (S3914), and notifies the user of an abnormality of the accessory. A command is set (S3915), and this processing ends.

In the process of S3908, if it is determined that it is not the second abnormality determination timing (S3908: No), then the third abnormality determination timing (abnormality determination with the determination level "high level B" in FIG. 232 is executed) timing) (S3916). If it is determined in the process of S3916 that it is the third abnormality determination timing (S3916: Yes), then it is determined whether the abnormality level determined in the process of S3902 is greater than "1" (S3917), ” (S3909: Yes), a notification command indicating an abnormality of the accessory is set (S3918), and the process ends. This third abnormality determination timing corresponds to the case where the motion scenario corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 ends, so even if it is determined that the accessory is abnormal here, the action corresponding to the projectile accessory 400 The scenario will never be reset. On the other hand, in the process of S3917, if it is determined that the abnormality level is not greater than "1" (S3917: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the second performance abnormality determination process (S3810) will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second performance abnormality determination process (S3810). This second performance abnormality determination process (S3810) is executed in the accessory performance management process (S2151) described above with reference to FIG. 242, and the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is updated to 0. In other words, if the process is executed at the timing when the delay period has elapsed, and the result of abnormality determination of the projectile accessory 400 is a predetermined result, the abnormality determination is performed again after a period of time (retry process). This is the process to be executed when

In this second performance abnormality determination process (S3810), first, the detection result of the detection sensor (storage detection sensor sa) is acquired (S4001), and the abnormality level is determined with reference to the abnormality determination table 222ab (S4002). Then, it is determined whether the determined abnormality level is "normal" or abnormality level "1" (S4003), and if it is determined that it is "normal" or abnormality level "1" (S4003: Yes), This process ends immediately. On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormality level is not "normal" or "1", that is, the abnormality level is "2" or "3" (S4003: No), the second specific performance that does not use the firing accessory (S4004), resets the operation scenario corresponding to the firing accessory 400 (S4005), sets a notification command indicating the accessory abnormality (S3918), and ends this process.

If the result of this second performance abnormality determination process is normal, the operation scenarios for the various performance devices will be updated again after the delay period has passed, so the preset sequence will be updated across the delay period. Production of role plays will be resumed. On the other hand, if the result of the abnormality determination process during the second performance is abnormal, a new performance mode (second specific performance) is set when the delay period elapses, and the performance corresponding to the second specific performance is changed to a series of roles. Executed during the second half of the performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the contents of the liquid crystal performance execution management process 2 (S2160) will be explained. This liquid crystal performance execution management process 2 (S2160) is different from the above-mentioned liquid crystal performance execution management process (S2110) in that it does not execute various processes related to the liquid crystal performance while the accessory delay timer 223aa is measuring the delay period. The difference is that a process has been added to make this happen, but otherwise the process is the same. Identical processes will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the liquid crystal performance execution management process 2 (S2160) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3551), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S3551: Yes), Skip all processing and end this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S3551: No), the process of S3501 to S3511, which is the same as the above-mentioned liquid crystal presentation execution management process (S2110), is executed and this process ends. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the contents of the operation performance management process 2 (S2161) will be explained. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of operation performance management processing 2 (S2161). This operation performance management process 2 (S2161) is different from the above-mentioned operation performance management process (S2111) in that it does not execute various processes related to the operation performance while the accessory delay timer 223aa is measuring the delay period. The difference is that a process has been added to make this happen, but otherwise the process is the same. Identical processes will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the operation performance management process 2 (S2161) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the accessory delay timer 223aa is greater than 0 (S3651), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S3651: Yes), all Skip the process and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S3651: No), the same processes as S3601 to S3624 as the above-mentioned operation performance management process (S2111) are executed, and this process ends.

As explained with reference to FIGS. 245 and 246, in this control example, when a delay period is set in order to re-execute the abnormality determination of the firing accessory 400, the production content also applies to other productions. is configured so that updates are not performed. That is, when the delay period is set, not only the performance for the firing accessory 400 but also other performances are delayed. By configuring in this way, in a performance with a sense of unity using a plurality of performance devices (a series of character performance), it is possible to suppress the timing of execution of the performance by each performance device from being shifted.

<First modification example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 247 to 249, a modification of the button-hitting effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above will be described. The continuous hit performance in the first control example described above includes an operation for varying the performance mode (variable operation), and after the performance mode has been varied to the maximum variable value (a performance mode that cannot be changed any further), the continuous hit performance is performed. The operation for shortening the production period (shortening operation) is configured so that the frame button 22 is pressed down, and the player who actively operated the frame button 22 multiple times is After displaying the performance mode corresponding to the maximum variable value of the repeated hit performance to be executed, it is possible to end (shorten) the repeated hit performance without continuing the useless performance period, so it is possible to actively encourage the player. The frame button 22 could be operated by the operator.

On the other hand, the continuous hit performance in this modification differs from the first control example described above in that the variable operation and the shortening operation described above are configured to be executable with different operation contents. In other words, in the first control example described above, since the variable operation and the shortening operation are configured to be executed with the same operation content (operation content of pressing the frame button 22), the production mode of the continuous hit production is different. While the shortening operation can be executed only after changing to the production mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, in this modification, the variable operation and the shortening operation are executed with different operation contents, so it is necessary to hit repeatedly. The shortening operation can be performed before the presentation mode of the presentation changes to the presentation mode corresponding to the maximum variable value.

Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy seeing at what timing during the period in which the continuous hit effect is executed the shortening operation. In addition, similar to the first control example described above, since the maximum variable value can be set differently depending on the repeated hit performance, the performance mode is set to the maximum variable value (a performance mode that does not change any further). ) can be made difficult to understand.

FIG. 247(a) is a schematic diagram showing the start screen of the button continuous press effect in this modification. Note that the same elements as those displayed in the continuous hit effect in the first control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. FIG. 247(a) shows a display screen on which a continuous hit effect (aura effect) that can be varied in up to five levels (Lv5) is being executed as a continuous attack effect. This shows an aura effect whose value is set to the third level (Lv3). That is, in this aura production, even if the player performs the variable operation multiple times, the aura will only be variable up to the third level (Lv3) at most.

As shown in FIG. 247(a), when the aura production is executed, an effect 851, which is a variable mode of the aura production, is displayed around the character 801, and a variable information display mode indicating the current variable stage is displayed in the display area HR51. "Lv1" is displayed as "Lv1". This variable information display mode is to show the player the degree of variation of the effect 851 based on the variable operation, and as the aura production progresses (as the effect 851 varies), higher stages are displayed. be. In this way, by displaying not only the display mode of the effect 851 but also the current variable stage as a numerical value, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the display area HR2, a button 803 and a time gauge 804 showing the same content as in the first control example described above are displayed, and in the sub display area Ds, the game of the continuous hit effect (aura effect) currently being executed is displayed. The comment ``Save energy by repeatedly pressing the button'' is displayed as a guidance display mode to indicate the content.

Then, when the player presses the frame button 22 multiple times during execution of the aura production and the variable mode of the effect 851 reaches the second stage, the variable mode reaches the second stage as shown in FIG. 247(b). A display format indicating what has been done will be displayed. Furthermore, a display area HR52 is formed, and a reduction operation guide display is displayed to the player to indicate that the reduction operation can be executed. In this display area HR52, a button 852 imitating the first button 22za is displayed as a guide display mode for indicating the operation content of the shortening operation. Arrows indicating how to operate the button 852 are also displayed.

Note that at this point, the operation validity period indicated by the time gauge 804 has not yet elapsed, so a display mode indicating that variable operations can also be accepted is displayed in the display region HR2. Above the main display area Dm, there is a notification display mode for notifying the player that the player can select whether to continue executing the variable operation or to execute the shortening operation. ``Choose whether to store more energy by hitting repeatedly or release it by pressing the first button.'' is displayed.

In this way, during the aura production, which is a continuous hit production, a period is provided during which both the variable operation (pressing the frame button 22) and the shortening operation (pressing the first button 22za) can be performed, and the game By configuring the system so that the user selects which operation to perform, it is possible to easily increase variations in the presentation mode of the operation presentation. In other words, if a shortening operation is performed during an aura production before the maximum variable value has been reached, the result of the aura production will be displayed without displaying the variable mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. , it is possible to make it difficult to suggest to the player the lottery result of the special symbol lottery referred to when setting the performance mode (maximum variable value) of the aura performance (repeat performance).

In this modification, the shortening operation is completed by pressing the first button 22za once. When the shortening operation is executed, the effect is displayed in accordance with the degree of variation of the effect 851 due to the aura effect at that time. Specifically, it is determined whether the display mode of the effect 851 displayed at the time when the shortening operation is executed is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the current aura production, and the production is performed according to the determination result. The results are configured to be displayed in different ways.

For example, if the display mode of the effect 851 at the time when the shortening operation is executed is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, the display screen shown in FIG. 248(a) is displayed. FIG. 248(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a shortening operation is performed after the variable mode of aura production (effect 851) is varied to the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value. It is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 248(a), when the shortening operation is executed when the maximum variable value (Lv3) is reached, the sub-display area Ds shows that the shortening operation has been executed after reaching the maximum variable value. The comment "Nice timing!! Lv3 was the upper limit this time" is displayed as a notification display mode for notifying the user. As a result, the player can easily grasp the maximum variable value set for the aura production executed this time, and can avoid a situation where the aura production continues to be executed without executing the shortening operation. You can understand what has been accomplished.

In the main display area Dm, the words "chance" are displayed as a result display mode 851a indicating the performance result of the current aura performance. Note that the display content of this result display mode 851a is the same as the repeated hit effect of the first control example described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Further, the display area HR2 is hidden, and a button 852 imitating the first button 22za and a time gauge 804 are displayed in the display area HR52. In this modification, as described above, when the continuous hit effect is executed, the player is configured to perform operations on different operation means for the variable operation and the shortening operation. When the shortening operation is executed, during the subsequent valid operation period (during the remaining period displayed on the time gauge 804), the operation means that can be operated by the player (the operation means that can execute the variable operation) frame button 22) to the operating means (first button 22za) that performed the shortening operation.

As shown in FIG. 248(a), by hiding the display area HR2 and displaying the time gauge 804 in the display area HR52, the operation on the operation means in the continuous hit performance can be effectively determined within the valid operation period. , the operating means to be operated by the player (the type of operating means that is effectively determined) can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, by switching the operating means that the player can operate during the remaining period after the shortening operation is performed, the trouble of having to operate the frame button 22 again after the shortening operation is executed is eliminated. be able to.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the effect 851 at the time when the shortening operation is executed is not the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, the display screen shown in FIG. 248(b) is displayed. FIG. 248(b) shows an example of the display content that is displayed when the shortening operation is executed in a state where the variable mode (effect 851) of the aura production is a display mode corresponding to a variable value different from the maximum variable value. FIG. As shown in FIG. 248(b), when the shortening operation is executed when the maximum variable value (Lv3) has not been reached, that is, when the variable value is at Lv2, the maximum variable value is displayed in the sub display area Ds. A comment such as "Insufficient power!! You could have saved more energy..." is displayed as a notification display mode to notify the player that the shortening operation has been executed in a state where the power has not been reached. This allows the player to understand that the variable mode could have been further varied in the aura performance executed this time.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the character "?" is displayed as a result display mode 851a indicating the performance result of the current aura performance. In other words, the preset presentation content (display mode) as a result of the aura presentation is the presentation content when the maximum variable value is reached, so the shortening operation was executed before the maximum variable value was reached. In this case, the preset presentation content is configured not to be displayed as the presentation result of the aura presentation. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the performance results of the aura performance.

On the other hand, when the display screen shown in FIG. 248(b) is displayed, the player has difficulty in grasping the maximum variable value set in the current aura production from the display mode, but at least It can be easily seen that a value higher than the variable value (Lv2) at the time the shortening operation was executed was set as the maximum variable value, so it seems that a higher value was set as the maximum variable value. You can enjoy the subsequent performance with a sense of anticipation. Furthermore, for players who do not like repeated-hit effects, the situation in which an effect that prompts the user to operate the frame button 22 multiple times is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time can be resolved by executing the shortening operation. It is possible to make it easier for the player to play any desired game.

In the continuous hit effect (aura effect) of this modification, as shown in FIG. It is configured so that proper performance results are not displayed. Therefore, when a continuous hit effect is executed, in order to display an appropriate effect result, there is a risk that the timing of executing the shortening operation may be delayed and only the variable operation may be executed. In this case, there is a problem in that the shortening operation is not executed even though the maximum variable value has already been reached, and the valid operation period elapses without changing the variable mode, resulting in a reduction in the production effect.

In contrast, in this modification, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a state where the variable aspect of the continuous hit effect reaches the maximum variable value, a guiding effect that prompts the player to perform a shortening operation is configured to be able to be executed. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's desire to play is reduced due to a long period in which the variable mode of the continuous hit effect is not variable.

The content of this guiding performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 249(a). FIG. 249(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the guidance effect is executed. In FIG. 249(a), the same aura production as in FIG. 247(a) described above is executed, and the variable stage of the variable mode (effect 851) has reached the maximum variable value of "3". This figure shows the display screen when the remaining period of the operation validity period is 1 second in the state where the operation is in progress.

As shown in FIG. 249(a), when the variable stage of the variable mode (effect 851) has reached the maximum variable value of "3" and the remaining period of the valid operation period reaches 1 second, In the display area Ds, a comment "Maybe you should press the first button now" is displayed as a guidance effect to prompt the user to operate the first button 22za, and at the same time, it is displayed in the display area HR52. The current button 852 is displayed enlarged. This allows the player to understand that the currently displayed variable mode is the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value in the current aura production.

Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform the shortening operation before the operation validity period has elapsed (before the period displayed on the time gauge 804 has elapsed).

In addition, in this modification, as an execution condition for executing the above-mentioned guidance performance, a time elapsed execution condition is set that is satisfied when the remaining period of the operation validity period in the aura performance reaches a predetermined period (1 second). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the termination condition in the first control example described above, that is, when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated reaches a predetermined number of times after the display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value is displayed. The configuration may also be such that an operation result execution condition that satisfies is set.

Furthermore, even when the guiding effect shown in FIG. 249(a) has been executed, if the operational validity period of the aura effect has passed without the player performing a shortening operation, the state shown in FIG. 249(b) The display screen shown is displayed. FIG. 249(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a shortening operation is not performed during an aura production. As shown in FIG. 249(b), if the shortening operation is not executed while the variable aspect (effect 851) is being varied by the variable operation, the comment "Stored energy has disappeared" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. is displayed, and the result presentation in which the aura presentation ends is executed without displaying the result display mode 851a (see FIG. 248(a)) indicating the presentation result of the aura presentation.

With this configuration, when the aura effect is executed, it is possible to make the player play the game with the intention of executing the shortening operation. In addition, in this modification, the result display screen shown in FIG. 249(b) is configured to be displayed when the shortening operation is not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an aura effect In a state where the variable mode (effect 851) is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the maximum variable value, if the effective period of operation has elapsed without executing the shortening operation, the display screen showing the appropriate effect result. (see FIG. 248(a)) and the variable mode of aura production (effect 851) is displayed in a display mode corresponding to a variable value different from the maximum variable value, and the shortening operation is executed. The display screen shown in FIG. 249(b) may be displayed only when the valid operation period has elapsed. With this configuration, in the aura production, the player who operated the frame button 22 (performed the variable operation) while expecting the variable mode to change until the operation validity period elapses, will receive an appropriate response. Since it is possible to provide effective performance results, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 to 259. In the first control example described above, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to execute all execution management of various effects for indicating the results of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, and the presentation device are driven when a specific timing arrives during the presentation period of various variable presentations that are executed in accordance with the variation time of the special symbol variation. It was configured to output commands to instruct various solenoids to execute effects.

In this way, the audio lamp control device 113 centrally manages the execution timing of the various presentation devices, thereby making it possible for the various presentation devices to execute the presentation without error, thereby providing a presentation with a sense of unity. be able to.

However, in recent years, the pachinko machine 10 has tended to increase the number of various performance devices and to output complicated performance execution instructions to the various performance devices in order to enhance the performance effect. In such a pachinko machine 10, if the voice lamp control device 113 executes the execution management of all performances, the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 will increase, and for example, processing directly related to game results, Specifically, the process of stopping and displaying the third symbol to show the result of the special symbol lottery, the process of displaying the number of balls acquired during a jackpot game, and the display to notify the player that the gaming state will change. There was a risk that the processing etc. would be delayed and the player's desire to play would decrease.

On the other hand, in this third control example, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, which is a control device for displaying various presentation images on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, has a function to manage execution effects. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that it is configured to reduce the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 by controlling the sound ramp control device 113. Other technical ideas are the same as those in the first control example described above, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this third control example, when setting a display variation pattern command by the audio lamp control device 113, a display timer management command for managing the elapsed time on the display control device 114 side can also be set. are doing. When a timer management command is received by the display control device 114, the duration of the target effect is managed by the timer, and when the duration managed by the timer ends, it is determined that the duration has ended. The display end command shown in FIG. 1 can be outputted to the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines that the continuation period has ended by receiving the display end command output from the display control device 114, and sets a command for the effect to be executed based on the end of the continuation period. With this configuration, there is no need for the audio lamp control device 113 to have a measuring means (timer) for measuring the elapse of the duration, and the audio lamp control device 113 can also determine whether the elapsed time has elapsed. There is no need to constantly execute the process of determining the Therefore, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this third control example, whether or not a specific display mode is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the timer-managed period by the display control device 114 ( (Whether or not the corresponding image data was used) is configured to be able to be determined, and when the above-mentioned display end command is set, information indicating whether or not a specific display mode is to be displayed can also be set. .

Then, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether a command indicating the special move display mode has been output from the display control device 114, and based on the determination result, determines the production mode of the performance to be executed after the duration period ends. It is configured to be configurable. This makes it possible to set performance commands for various performance devices with content (performance mode) that corresponds to the execution content (display result) executed by the display control device 114. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when a frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the set duration period, a press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is sent to the display control device 114. Among the various presentation modes set by the audio lamp control device 113, the display mode can be variably controlled by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

With this configuration, it is possible to vary the presentation mode in a presentation (for example, a continuous hit presentation) that is executed outside the control of the audio lamp control device 113, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<About the electrical configuration of the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 250 is a diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. This control example differs from the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example described above in that a production mode 233ba is added to the work RAM 233, and is otherwise the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The performance timer 233ba is a timer for measuring the elapsed time of the timer management performance included in the timer management command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and measures the duration of the timer management performance at the timing when the timer management performance is executed. The value corresponding to is set. The timer value is updated every time the V-interrupt process, which is executed in units of 20 milliseconds, is updated, and when the timer value is updated to 0, it is determined that it is the end timing of the timer management performance.

<About the control processing content of the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 251 to 259, the content of control processing in the third control example will be described. This third control example differs from the first control example described above in that it includes a part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and a part of the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The difference is that some parts have been changed, but the rest is the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 251 to 254, the content of the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third control example is a command determination process in place of the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195) with respect to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above. The difference is that the variable display setting process 3 (see S2165 in FIG. 253) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) for process 3 (see S2164 in FIG. 251). It is. The same processing contents will be given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S2164). This command determination processing 3 (S2164) adds processing when a display end command output from the display control device 114 is received to the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see S2114 in FIG. 195). They are different in that they are the same, but otherwise they are the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When command determination process 3 (S2164) is executed, first, the same processes from S2201 to S2214 as the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 195) of the first control example described above are executed. In the process of S2213, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), then it is determined whether the display end command has been received (S2251), and if it is determined that it has been received ( S2251: Yes), executes end command reception processing (S2252), and ends this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display end command has not been received (S2251: No), this process is immediately ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the contents of the termination command reception process (S2251) executed in command determination process 3 (see S2164 in FIG. 251) will be explained. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end command reception process (S2251). In this termination command receiving process, a process for setting various presentation modes based on the elapsed time managed by the display control device 114 is executed.

In the end command receiving process (S2251), first, the corresponding performance selection information is read from the performance selection information storage area 223h (S4101). In the process of S4101, information regarding the timer management effect stored in the display variation pattern command setting process (see S2651 in FIG. 254), which will be described later, is read. As a result, the end command output from the display control device 114 and the timer management effect set by the audio lamp control device 113 are associated.

Next, information included in the display end command received this time is extracted (S4102). In the process of S4102, the type of the corresponding timer management performance and a specific display indicating that specific image data (performance data) was displayed as image data (performance data) displayed during the performance period of the timer management performance information and period information indicating the duration of the current timer management performance.

Then, it is determined whether the information read in the process of S4102 includes specific display information (S4103), and if it is determined that the specific display concession is included (S4103: Yes), the information read in S4101 is Specific information is additionally updated to the effect selection information (S4104), an end effect command corresponding to the additionally updated effect selection information is set (S4105), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4103 that the specific display information is not included (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the end effect command corresponding to the effect selection information read out in S4101 is executed. settings (S4105), and ends this process.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2165) will be explained with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2165). This variable display setting process 3 (S2165) differs from the above-described variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) in that the process for setting the display variable pattern command is executed in a subroutine. Other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the variable display setting process 3 (S2165), first, the same processes of S2601 to S2607 and S2609 to S2611 as the above-described variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199) are executed, and then the display variable pattern command setting process is performed. (S2651). When the process of S2651 is finished, the process of S2612 to S2616, which is the same as the above-described variable display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199), is executed, and this process ends.

In the display variation pattern command setting process executed in the process of S2651, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the currently selected variation effect pattern is set, and timer management (time elapsed management) is performed on the display control device 114 side. The process to set the command for is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 254, the contents of the display variable pattern command setting process (S2651) executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see S2165 in FIG. 253) will be described. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display variation pattern command setting process (S2651).

In the display variable pattern command setting process (S2651), first, it is determined whether the currently selected variable effect pattern includes a timer management effect (S4201). This timer management performance is a performance that causes the display control device 114 to manage the passage of time, and for example, corresponds to a performance that is executed for a predetermined period within a variable performance period in which a variable performance is executed. Mainly, when the timer management performance ends, another performance is executed based on the display result displayed during the timer management performance. The specific contents of this timer management performance will be described later.

In the process of S4201, if it is determined that there is a timer management effect (S4201: Yes), a timer management command for display indicating the execution timing and duration of the timer management effect is set (S4202), and effect selection information is stored. Information regarding the current timer management performance is stored in the area 223h (S4203), a display variation pattern command is set (S4204), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is not determined that there is a timer management effect, that is, if it is determined that there is no variable effect corresponding to the timer management effect in the currently selected variable effect pattern (S4201: No), The process of S4202 and S4203 is skipped, the process of S4204 mentioned above is executed, and this process ends.

Here, regarding the flow of the variable performance using the timer management performance, for example, in the continuous hit performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example (see FIGS. 130 to 132), the player activates the frame button 22. A case will be specifically explained in which the performance executed during the performance period (10 seconds) in which the valid period of operation that can be performed is set as the timer management performance.

When setting a variable effect pattern command for executing a continuous hit effect, in the display variable pattern command setting process (see S2651 in FIG. 254), the execution timing of the timer management effect (repeat effect) (after the start of the variable effect) Set a display timer management command that indicates 10 seconds later (see FIG. 146(c))) and the duration of the timer management effect (repeated hit effect) (10 seconds (see FIG. 146(c))). (See S4202 of 254). In addition, at this time, the content of the performance selected this time and the performance mode of the performance (various reach performances) to be executed after the timer management performance ends are stored in the performance selection information storage area 223h. By storing the performance selection information storage area 223h in this way, when the audio lamp control device 113 determines that the timer management performance has ended, the control process to be executed next (the next performance to be executed) is stored in the performance selection information storage area 223h. content) can be read easily, reducing the processing load.

When the display control device 114 side receives the display timer management command set by the audio lamp control device 113, it performs a continuous hit performance in accordance with the execution timing of the timer management performance based on the information included in the display timer management command. start (see FIG. 130(a)). Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the continuous hit performance, a press command indicating that the player has operated (pressed) the frame button 22 is output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and the display The control device 114 determines a variable mode in the continuous hit performance based on the received press command, creates image data (performance data) corresponding to the determined variable mode, and displays it on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. .

In this case, as shown in the upper limit number selection table of the first control example (see FIG. 162(b)), when a production pattern that only defines a predetermined range as the final variable mode is selected, It is preferable to configure the display control device 114 to perform control to vary the variable aspect within a range that does not deviate from a predetermined range and within a range in which the currently displayed variable aspect progresses.

With this configuration, the rules according to the result of the special symbol lottery, that is, only the range that can be displayed as the final variable mode is determined by the audio lamp control device 113, and the detailed variable mode within that range is determined. Since it can be executed by the display control device 114, the processing load of the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

Then, when the performance period of the timer management performance (repeated hit performance) has elapsed, the display control device 114 displays end information indicating that the timer management performance has ended, and display information indicating the display contents of the variable mode at the end of the performance period. A display end command including the following is set and output to the audio lamp control device 113.

In the audio lamp control device 113, based on various information included in the display end command outputted from the display control device 114, and based on information stored in the presentation selection information storage area 223h, various types of information to be executed after the end of the continuous hit presentation are executed. The production mode of the production is determined, and various commands for executing the determined production mode are output to the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, and various production devices.

In addition, the display end command output from the display control device 114 includes specific display information (for example, information corresponding to the upper limit of the range determined as the final variable mode) indicating that a specific variable mode was displayed during the continuous hit performance period. Only when the display mode (information indicating that the display mode has been displayed) is included, the production mode of various productions to be executed after the end of the continuous hit production is determined as a specific production mode different from normal, and the determined specific production mode is executed. Various commands for this purpose are output to the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, and various presentation devices.

In this way, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a command indicating the start timing and duration of the timer management performance to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 side can execute time management of the timer management performance. By configuring this, it is possible to reduce the load on the control processing related to the variable effects in the audio lamp control device 113.

Further, the configuration is configured to receive information (command) indicating that the timer management performance has ended from the display control device 114, and based on the reception of the information (command), the performance to be executed after the timer management performance ends. Since the performance mode is determined and the performance execution instructions are given to the various devices constituting the pachinko machine 10, there is no need for the audio lamp control device 113 to perform time management of the timer management performance. To be able to instruct various devices to execute a performance at an appropriate timing without any lag, and to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect due to a lag in the execution timing of the performance executed by the various devices. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during a timer management performance whose time is managed by the display control device 114 can be determined by the display control device 114. ing. Therefore, compared to the case where the audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during a timer management presentation, the load of control processing regarding the variable presentation in the audio lamp control device 113 is reduced. can be reduced.

Furthermore, information regarding the display mode determined by the display control device 114 (information indicating the display mode displayed at the end of the timer management effect) is included in the display end command indicating that the timer management effect has ended. The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to output the output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 determines the presentation mode of the presentation to be executed after the timer management presentation ends based on the information included in the display end command. Because of this configuration, it is possible to set the performance mode in the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the performance result of the timer management performance executed and managed by the display control device 114, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 255 to 259, the content of control processing of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. The control processing content of the display control device 114 in the third control example is replaced with the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)) in contrast to the control processing content of the display control device 114 in the first control example described above. The difference is that command determination processing 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) is executed instead of V interrupt processing 3 (see FIG. 255) and command determination processing (see S6302 in FIG. 214). be. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of V interrupt processing 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the contents of V interrupt processing 3. This V-interrupt processing 3 is different from the above-mentioned V-interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)) in that processing for updating the production timer 233ba is added, and other than that, it is the same. . The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this third control example, similarly to the first control example described above, the MPU 231 uses the V The configuration is such that interrupt processing 3 is executed. That is, the V interrupt process 3 is a control process that is executed periodically. Therefore, by updating the value of the effect timer 233ba in accordance with the execution of the V interrupt processing 3, the display control device 114 can perform appropriate time management using the effect timer 233ba.

Note that in this control example, the update process of the production timer 233ba is executed using the V interrupt process 3, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an arbitrary time can be measured, for example, The display control device 114 may be provided with a timer and configured to be able to measure the elapsed time based on the time measurement result of the timer, or by using a control process that is periodically executed among other control processes. It may be configured to be able to measure elapsed time.

In V-interrupt processing 3, first, the same processing as S6301 to S6309 as the V-interrupt processing (see FIG. 213(b)) of the first control example described above is executed, and then the effect timer update processing is executed ( S6351), this process ends. The effect timer update process executed in S6351 is a process for updating (subtracting) the value set in the effect timer 233ba. This performance timer 233ba measures the performance period (continuation period) of the timer management performance, and is set to a value corresponding to the performance period of the timer management performance in accordance with the timing at which the timer management performance is executed. The value is updated (subtracted) every time interrupt processing 3 is executed (every 20 milliseconds). Then, when the value of the performance timer 233ba becomes 0, the performance period of the timer management performance ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the contents of command determination processing 3 (S6352) executed in V interrupt processing 3 (FIG. 255) will be explained. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S6532). In this command determination process 3 (S6532), processes for executing a press command process (S6452) and a timer setting process (S6454) are added to the above-mentioned command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 214). Identical processing contents that are different in this respect and otherwise the same are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process 3 (S6532), first, the same processes of S6401 to S6413 as the command determination process described above (see S6302 in FIG. 214) are executed. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412), then it is determined whether there is a press command (S6451), and if it is determined that there is a press command (S6451: Yes), The press command process is executed (S6452), and the process moves to S6401.

Here, the press command determined in the process of S6451 is a command to indicate that the frame button 22 has been operated by the player within the valid operation period during which it can be effectively determined that the frame button 22 has been operated. If the command is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to be that the frame button 22 has been operated within the operation validity period, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22. A command set by the audio lamp control device 113 when the frame button 22 is operated during a performance (timer management performance) performed by the display control device 114 to variably determine the displayed display mode. be.

When the display control device 114 receives this press command, it executes a process (press command process) for varying the presentation mode of the timer management presentation. In this way, the push command is set not every time the player operates the frame button 22, but only when the display control device 114 needs information about the operation on the frame button 22. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Note that in this control example, the processing for variably setting the mode of the current performance based on the operation of the frame button 22 is performed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Since the production includes a production to be executed, it is necessary for the audio lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not to set a press command. If the process for variably setting the mode is executed only by the display control device 114, it is preferable to set a press command every time the frame button 22 is operated. In addition, instead of setting a press command every time the frame button 22 is operated, information indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is accumulated for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), and when the predetermined period has elapsed. In this case, the configuration may be such that a press command including operation count information indicating the number of operations on the frame button 22 is set based on the accumulated information.

With this configuration, although a slight error occurs in the timing of changing the presentation mode in response to each operation of the frame button 22 by the player, it is possible to reduce the number of commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113. This configuration is applicable to a single operation of the frame button 22, such as an operation effect that changes the display mode after a predetermined period of time based on the number of operations of the frame button 22 (operation means) within a predetermined period. It is preferable to use this when performing an operation effect that does not require changing the display mode based on the above information.

In addition, when performing such an operation effect, for example, a variable mode that changes depending on the operation of the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, a variable mode of the gauge display that increases each time the frame button 22 is operated) The mode) may be settable by the audio lamp control device 113, and the display mode after a predetermined period of time may be settable by the display control device 114. With this configuration, while changing the display mode each time the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to reduce the number of commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, The processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this control example, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine that the frame button 22 has been operated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 can determine that the frame button 22 has been operated. It may be configured to be able to discriminate, or in a pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of frame buttons 22 (operating means), a control device that executes operation discrimination may be different depending on the type of operating means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the contents of the press command process (S6452) executed in command setting process 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the contents of the press command processing (S6452). In this press command processing (S6452), processing for varying the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In the press command processing (S6452), first, it is determined whether the current performance is a continuous hit performance (timer management performance) (S7801), and if it is determined that the current performance is a continuous hit performance (timer management performance) (S7801: (Yes), then it is determined whether the display mode is variable (S7802). In the process of S7802, it is determined whether the currently displayed display mode is the upper limit (a situation where the display mode cannot be changed any further) set as the final variable mode of the continuous hit effect.

In the process of S7802, if it is determined that the state is variable (the display mode being displayed can be changed) (S7802: Yes), a variable determination is executed (S7803), Image data is created based on the determination result of the variable determination (S7804), the created image data is set as effect image data (S7805), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7801 that the continuous hit performance (timer management performance) is not in progress (S7801: No), or if it is determined in the process of S7802 that it is not in a variable state (S7802: No), This process ends without creating new image data.

The effect image data set in the process of S7805 is stored in the resident video RAM 235, and is controlled to be switched so that it is displayed when the display timing in the display data table corresponding to the timer management effect is timed. With this configuration, the display control device 114 can execute processing for varying the display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the contents of the timer setting process (S6454) executed in command setting process 3 (see S6352 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer setting process (S6454). In this timer setting process (S6454), a process for determining whether or not to execute a timer management performance and setting the performance timer 233ba is executed.

In the timer setting process (S6454), first, the timer management command received this time is analyzed (S7901), the timer set timing included in the timer management command is set (S7902), and the timer period included in the timer management command is managed. A timer is set (S7903), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the contents of the effect timer update process (see S6351 in FIG. 259) executed in the V interrupt process 3 (see FIG. 255) will be explained. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect timer update process (S6351). In this effect timer update process (S6351), a process for updating the value of the effect timer 233ba set in the timer setting process (see S6454 in FIG. 258) is executed.

When the performance timer update process (S6351) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the performance timer 233ba is greater than 0 (S8001), and it is determined that it is not greater than 0, that is, the timer management performance is not in progress. If so (S8001; No), the process ends immediately. In the process of S8001, if it is determined that the value of the performance timer 233ba is larger than 0, that is, the timer management performance is being performed (S8001: Yes), the value of the performance timer 233ba is updated (S8002), and the value of the performance timer 233ba is updated (S8002), It is determined whether the value of the performance timer 233ba is 0 (S8003). In the process of S8003, if it is determined that the value of the performance timer 233ba is not 0 (greater than 0) (S8003: No), the process is immediately ended because the timer management performance is in the performance period.

On the other hand, in the process of S8003, if it is determined that the value of the performance timer 233ba is 0 (S8003: Yes), it is the end timing of the timer management performance, so the processes of S8004 to S8007 shown below are performed as the timer management performance. Execute as termination processing.

First, in the process of S8004, it is determined whether there is a specific image display during the performance period (S8004), and if it is determined that there is a specific image display (S8004: Yes), a specific command indicating the specific image display is created. (S8005), creates an end command (indicating the end of the performance timer) indicating that the value of the performance timer 233ba has become 0 (timer management performance has ended) (S8006), and creates a display end command that includes each created command. is set (S8007), and this processing ends.

Further, in the process of S8004, if it is determined that there is no specific image display during the performance period (S8004: No), the process of S8005 described above is skipped. The process moves to S8006.

As explained above, in the third control example, by causing the display control device 114 to execute a part of the management processing related to the production that was centrally managed by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 The processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the performance executed during the variation performance of the third symbol is targeted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a demo screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 may be configured to manage display periods for various display modes executed during demonstration standby or during a jackpot game where a jackpot game is being executed.

In this case, for example, the audio lamp control device 113 displays information related to the game result, such as the timing at which the variable effect is executed and the timing at which the variable effect stops, to the display control device 114 in order to appropriately notify the player. Information indicating the waiting period until the display control device 114 executes the specific effect at the timing of outputting the command for the specific effect, information indicating the effect period of the specific effect, information indicating the effect content of the specific effect, and information indicating the specific effect. The display control device 114 is configured to output a production management command including information indicating a production cancellation condition that is not to be executed, and when the display control device 114 receives the production management command, it starts measuring a waiting period until the waiting period passes. It may be configured such that the specific performance is executed if the performance discard condition is not satisfied during this period.

Specifically, at the timing when a 30-second variable effect is executed, a production management command that includes at least information such as a waiting period of 40 seconds, a production period of 10 seconds, and "start of a new variable production" as a production cancellation condition. Set. In this case, if the next variable effect is executed immediately after the 30-second variable effect ends, that is, if the special map reservation is secured, the effect discard condition is reached before the waiting period elapses. Since this holds true, the specific performance is not executed. On the other hand, in a state where the special figure reservation is not secured, the specific effect may be executed because the standby period may elapse without the effect discard condition being satisfied.

In this way, when a specific effect is to be executed during a standby period in which a variable effect is not being executed, information regarding the specific effect is output to the display control device 114 in advance in accordance with the timing at which a command regarding the variable effect is output. By enabling the display control device 114 to execute management processing for specific effects, it becomes possible to consolidate the timing of outputting commands from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, whether or not to set (output) the above-mentioned performance management command can be set regardless of the variable performance pattern, that is, the process of setting the variable performance pattern and the process of setting the performance management command are independent. It may also be configured to be executable. With this configuration, for example, when a variable production command corresponding to a variable production pattern whose variation time is longer than 40 seconds and a production management command are simultaneously output to the display control device 114, the standby period (40 seconds), the performance discard condition is never satisfied. Therefore, the specific performance can be executed reliably.

In addition, in the example described above, "the start of a new variable performance" is set as the performance cancellation condition, but other performance cancellation conditions may be set. For example, a new variable performance is executed 3 times during the standby period. You may provide a performance cancellation condition that is satisfied when the game is not started. In this case, it is necessary to start variable effects multiple times during the waiting period, so for example, a large number of special map reserved balls may be stored, and the game may be played with enthusiasm in order to maintain a state in which short variable times are likely to be selected. be able to.

For example, the specific performance executed in accordance with the above example includes a function (so-called setting function) that allows setting of multiple levels of setting values and varying the degree of advantage for the player according to the set setting values. In the case of a pachinko machine 10 that has a specific performance mode that includes a performance mode that allows the player to predict the set value, or a specific performance mode that includes a performance mode that allows the player to predict the currently set gaming state. Execute a specific performance that includes a performance mode that allows the player to predict the end conditions (the number of special symbol drawings, the number of jackpot wins) until the end of the performance and the gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a variable probability state). It is best to configure it like this. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that the specific performance will be executed, which can improve the interest of the game.

In this case, a suggestion (notification) means for suggesting (notification) the length of the set waiting period, and a guidance means for guiding the player to a gaming method that does not satisfy the performance discard condition. It is preferable that the conditions for executing the specific performance be configured so that the player can determine them.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 265. In the first control example described above, in order to enable continuous execution of special symbol fluctuations, the right to execute special symbol fluctuations (lottery rights for special symbol lottery) is reserved and stored up to a predetermined number (four). Even if the lottery right (special pattern reservation) for a special symbol lottery is acquired during the execution of special symbol variation, the lottery right (special symbol reservation) is stored in the storage device. I can do it. Therefore, after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it becomes possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so it is possible to continue executing the special symbol variation. It was possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbol fluctuation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to vary according to the number of lottery rights (number of reserved special symbols) stored in the storage means. Specifically, it is configured such that the smaller the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means (number of reserved special symbols), the easier it is to execute special symbol variations with a longer variation time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the period during which special symbol fluctuations are not performed, and it is also possible to acquire new lottery rights in a state where the number of lottery rights stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit. It was possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the first control example described above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or when a variation pattern in which a variation time longer than 14 seconds is selected, the above-mentioned 14 seconds It is configured so that a variable performance can be executed. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a failure and the result is not a win, the player's desire to play is realized by executing the above-mentioned 14-second variable effect. This made it possible to suppress the decrease in .

However, in the first control example described above, the specific fluctuation performance that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is also executed in a pseudo manner when the result of the special symbol lottery is a win. Although the system is configured to make it difficult for players to understand the lottery results, since a variation pattern is selected based on the result of the special symbol lottery, a specific variation effect is performed for players who have been playing for a long time. The level of expectation of winning a jackpot in the event that the player wins the jackpot is easily predicted, and there is a risk that the player's desire to play may decrease. In other words, the variation time of the special symbol variation in which the above-described specific variation performance is executed is selected in order to shorten the period in which the special symbol variation is not executed when the number of special symbol pending balls is 0, Since it is necessary to select at a predetermined frequency when the number of special symbols reserved is 0, there is an expectation that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot when a specific variation effect (pseudo specific variation effect) is executed. It is difficult to increase the degree of winning, and it is not possible to increase the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot with respect to the specific variation performance, and there is a risk that the desire to play may decrease.

On the other hand, this fourth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be selectable before executing the special symbol lottery. This prevents the player from predicting the result of the special symbol lottery based on the variable performance pattern executed in response to the selected variable pattern, thereby suppressing the player's desire to play from decreasing. be able to.

Furthermore, in this fourth control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be selectable based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (number of special symbol reserved balls) at the time of starting the special symbol variation. Specifically, when executing the first special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation), a variation pattern is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved number of balls), and the second When performing a special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation), a variation pattern is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved pitch number). When the corresponding number of reserved special figure balls is 0, a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds is selected based on the same technical concept as the first control example described above.

With this configuration, the player will not be able to predict the result of the special symbol lottery based on the variable performance pattern that is executed in response to the selected variable pattern, which will reduce the player's desire to play. It is possible to shorten the period in which special symbol fluctuations are not executed when the number of special symbol reserved balls is 0 while suppressing storage.

In addition, in this fourth control example, if the lottery condition is satisfied after the special symbol variation is executed with the variation pattern (variation time) selected based on the number of reserved special symbol balls (after a predetermined time has elapsed), ), it is configured to execute a special symbol lottery, and based on the lottery result, the performance mode of the variable performance being executed is configured to be variable. Thereby, the variable performance executed regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery can be ended with the performance result indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, the result of the special symbol lottery can finally be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, in this fourth control example, the variable aspect of the variation performance is configured to be different based on the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation when the special symbol lottery is executed. Specifically, if the remaining period of the special symbol variation when the special symbol lottery is executed is longer than a predetermined period (10 seconds or more), the content of the variation production is configured to be varied. If the period is less than a predetermined period (less than 10 seconds), only the display mode showing the performance result of the variable performance being executed is changed without changing the performance content of the variable performance.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the special symbol variation in an easy-to-understand manner.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
First, the electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 260. This fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that a variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd (see FIG. 260) is used instead of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 156), and are the same. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd will be explained with reference to FIG. 260(a). FIG. 260(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd. This variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd is composed of a normal 4 table 202cd1 used when the gaming state is set to a normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), and a time saving state (special symbol low probability state). 4 tables 202cd2 for time saving/probability variation used when a low probability state of normal symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) or a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) are set. have.

Next, with reference to FIG. 260(b), the contents defined in the normal four table 202cd1 will be explained. FIG. 260(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the regular 4 table 202cd1, in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 are It is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are selected. This 4 normal table 202cd1 is different from the normal table 202d1 of the first control example described above in that it does not look at the result of the special symbol lottery when selecting a variation pattern, and regardless of the type of special symbol. The major difference is that they are configured so that the same variation pattern is selected.

Specifically, the special symbol type is common, the corresponding special symbol reserved number of balls (number of reserved balls) is "0", and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149". , a variation pattern with a variation time of 14 seconds (normal variation A) is selected, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 28 seconds (normal variation B) is selected for the range "150 to 198".

In addition, when the number of held pitches is "1, 2" and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds (normal fluctuation C) is selected, For the range "50 to 149", a variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds (normal variation D) is selected, and for the range "150 to 198", a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds (normal variation E) is selected. ) is selected. Further, when the number of balls on hold is "3", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds (normal fluctuation F) is selected regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1.

As described above with reference to FIG. 260(b), in this fourth control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, it is based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1. Since the variable pattern is selected based on the selected variable pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance whether or not there will be a jackpot in the special symbol lottery based on the selected variable pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to select a variation pattern with a different variation time depending on the number of reserved balls of a special symbol (number of reserved balls of a special symbol), when the number of reserved balls of a special symbol is "0", By making it easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than when the number of special pattern pending balls is greater than "0", the special symbol variation ends when the number of special pattern pending balls is "0". This makes it easier to prevent this from happening.

Next, with reference to FIG. 260(c), the contents of the 4 time saving/probability variable table 202cd2 will be explained. FIG. 260(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the four time-saving/probability-varying tables 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 260(c), in the time-saving/probability variable 4 table 202cd2, similarly to the above-mentioned normal 4 table 202cd1, the number of reserved pitches (special figure pending pitch number) and the obtained variation type counter CS1 are calculated. Variation patterns with different variation times are defined depending on the value.

This 4-table for time-saving/probability variation 202cd2 is configured so that a variation pattern in which a shorter variation time is set than the above-mentioned 4-table for normal use 202cd1 is more likely to be selected. With this configuration, the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently when the time saving state or variable probability state is set than when the normal state is set. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 125, in the short time state and variable probability state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so the normal state It becomes more difficult for the number of special ball reserved balls to become 0. Therefore, even if a variation pattern with a short variation time is configured to be easily selected, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a long period in which a special symbol variation is not executed.

In addition, as described above, in this fourth control example, the same data table is used to select the variation pattern regardless of the type of special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. As in the first control example, it may be configured such that different fluctuation patterns can be selected depending on the type of special symbol and the gaming state to be set.

<About the control process of the main controller in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263, the content of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described. This fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the timing to start the special symbol variation and the timing to execute the special symbol lottery are different, and the following points are related to the difference. The content of control processing is different. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154) will be explained with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 4 (S154). This special symbol variation process 4 (S154) is a process that is executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 178) of the first control example described above, and is a special symbol variation start process that is executed as a subroutine. (See S213 in FIG. 180), special symbol fluctuation start processing 4 (see S251 in FIG. 262) is executed, and a process for executing special symbol lottery while the special symbol is changing is added. , and are otherwise the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (S154), first, the same processes of S201 to S212 as the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 178) of the first control example described above are executed, and then, the special symbol variation start process 4 is executed (S251), and this process ends. The detailed contents of the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 262.

On the other hand, in the process of S202, if it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the minimum time has elapsed (S252), and if it is determined that the minimum time has elapsed (S252) :Yes), executes the special symbol lottery process (S253), and then executes the same processes from S214 to S221 as the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 178) of the first control example described above, and then executes this process. finish.

Here, in this control example, after the special symbol variation is started, when the minimum time has elapsed, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed is executed. That is, in this control example, the special symbol fluctuation is configured to be executed before the special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the determination in the process of S252 becomes a lottery condition determining means for determining whether the special symbol lottery conditions are satisfied, and the minimum elapsed time determined in the process of S252 becomes the lottery condition.

In this control example, a minimum time (for example, 5 seconds) is set as a lottery condition, and the same time is set as the minimum time regardless of the selected variation pattern. In other words, the minimum time is set as the time that can be measured even with the shortest variation time (5 seconds) that can be selected as a variation pattern. With this configuration, there is no need to vary the lottery conditions according to the selected variation pattern, and the control processing of the main controller 110 can be simplified.

In addition, in this control example, as a lottery condition for executing the special symbol lottery, a lottery condition that is established based on the elapsed time after the start of the special symbol variation is set, but the lottery condition is set during the special symbol variation. For example, a remaining time determining means capable of determining the remaining time of the special symbol fluctuation may be provided, and the remaining period determined by the remaining time determining means may be set under a specific condition (for example, 5 seconds). ) may be set to hold the lottery conditions. In addition, the lottery condition is established when a ball fired into the game area enters a predetermined ball entrance during the special symbol variation period, or when a player performs an arbitrary operation on the operating means. A lottery condition may be established.

In addition, although this control example is configured to set the same lottery conditions regardless of the selected variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and different lottery conditions may be set depending on the type of the selected variation pattern. It is also possible to provide a lottery condition setting means for setting. As a result, the execution timing of the special symbol lottery can be varied depending on the selected variation pattern, so for example, a lottery suggestion performance that suggests the timing when the special symbol lottery will be executed may be displayed during the execution period of the special symbol variation. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, during the special symbol variation period, it is possible to perform a novel performance that suggests to the player the timing at which the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in progress will be executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the contents of the special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) will be explained. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation start processing 4 (S251). This special symbol variation start process 4 (S251) is different from the special symbol variation start process in the first control example described above (see S213 in FIG. 180) in that the process of executing the special symbol lottery is omitted, Other than that, they are the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When special symbol variation start processing 4 (S251) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the start of special symbol 1 variation (whether the type of special symbol variation to be executed this time is the first special symbol) (S351 ). If it is determined that it is a special symbol 1 fluctuation (S351: Yes), then the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is acquired (S352), and the acquired special symbol reserved ball number ( A variation pattern is selected and determined using the variation pattern selection table 222cd1 based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a) and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 (S353). Then, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is set (S354), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S351, if it is determined that it is not a special symbol 1 variation (it is a special symbol 2 variation) (S351: No), then the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b is obtained. (S355), and selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern selection table 222cd1 based on the acquired special symbol reserved ball number (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. , is determined (S353). Then, a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is set (S354), and the process ends.

As described above with reference to FIG. 260, the variation pattern selection table 222cd of this control example is specified so that the result of the special symbol lottery is not referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is determined before executing the special symbol lottery. are configured to be selectable. Therefore, even if the player determines the variation pattern of the selected special symbol variation, the player will not be able to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery based on the content of the discrimination. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the result of the special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this control example, the timing to execute the special symbol lottery is set later than the timing to select the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the first control example described above, After executing the special symbol lottery, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, and in that case, the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cd1 of the fourth control example in which the result of the special symbol lottery is not referred to is used to select the variation pattern. It may be configured to select a pattern. In this case, for example, a special symbol variation is executed based on the selected variation pattern, and a variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern is output to the audio lamp control device 113, and after the variation effect is executed, a predetermined By configuring the lottery result command indicating the result of the special symbol lottery to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 when it is determined that the output condition is satisfied, the same technical idea as the fourth control example is achieved. A pachinko machine 10 can be configured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the contents of the special symbol lottery process (S253) will be explained. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol lottery process (S253). This special symbol lottery process (S253) is executed when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied (when the minimum time has elapsed) after the special symbol variation is executed. A special symbol lottery corresponding to is executed.

In the special symbol lottery process (S253), first, it is determined whether a result command has been set (S371). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery has already been executed. In the process of S371, if it is determined that the resulting command has been set (S371: Yes), this process is directly ended. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery from being executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the process of S371, if it is determined that the result command has not been set, that is, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current special symbol change has not been executed (S371: No), then the special symbol pending Data of the execution area in the ball storage area is acquired (S372), and it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203t is larger than 0, that is, whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols). (S373). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is larger than 0 through the process of S373 (S373: Yes), the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol, so the high probability state corresponding to the type of the special symbol is A lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table 202a (S374). In addition, in the process of S372, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203t is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S373: No), the current state is a low probability state of special symbols, so the type of special symbol A lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table 202a for low probability corresponding to (S375).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S374 or S375 is a jackpot (S376), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S376: Yes), the display mode at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the special symbol is A result command is set to indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot (S377), and the process ends.

The result command set in the process of S377, like various commands set in other processes, is executed in the external output process (see S901 in FIG. 187) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 187). It is output to the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 executes a process for varying the effect mode of the variable effect being executed based on the reception of the resultant command process. Thereby, it is possible to change the performance mode and performance result of the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the special symbol lottery to the performance mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, in the process of S376, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S376: No), a display mode in the event of a loss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S378), and the lottery result is a loss. A result command is set to indicate the result (S379), and this process ends.

<About the control content of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265, the content of the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example is different from the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. The difference is that determination process 4 (see S2174 in FIG. 264) is executed, and the rest is the same.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in the timing of the special symbol lottery executed by the main controller 110, and executes special symbol fluctuations. After that, the special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the setting contents of the display mode (production mode) of the variable display (variation production) of the third symbol to be executed in response to the special symbol variation based on various commands output from the main control device 110 are also the same as those described above. 1 is different from the control example.

Specifically, the variation pattern (variation effect pattern) of the third symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command output at the execution timing of the special symbol variation, and the processing to be executed is the same, but after that, the special symbol lottery The difference is that a process is added to vary (switch) the performance mode of the variable performance pattern being executed or the performance result when a result command for indicating the result is received. In this way, by varying (switching) the performance mode of the variable performance pattern being executed or the performance result based on the reception of the result command, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. .

In addition, since the variable performance that is executed until the result command is received is not set based on the special symbol lottery result, the player will be able to grasp the lottery result based on the performance mode. Nothing happens. In addition, in the variation performance executed until the result command is received, for example, it is preferable to display a suggestion mode that can suggest the length of the variation time of the special symbol variation set this time. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed. Then, based on the prediction, it is possible to predict the timing at which the result command is received, that is, the timing at which the performance mode of the variable performance is varied based on the content of the received result command.

When command determination process 4 (S2174) is executed, first, the same processes as S2201 to S2214 as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see S2114 in FIG. 195) are executed, and in the process of S2213, the process is stopped. If it is determined that no command has been received (S2213: No), then it is determined whether a resultant command has been received (S2271).

In the process of S2271, if it is determined that the result command has been received (S2271: Yes), the result command process is executed (S2272), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2271, if it is determined that the result command has not been received (S22271: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, the contents of the result command process (S2272) executed in the command determination process 4 (S2174) will be explained with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of result command processing (S2272). In this result command processing (S2272), when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the result command, a determination process is performed as to whether or not to vary the production mode of the variable production being executed, and a variable process in the case where it is varied; is executed.

In the result command processing (S2272), first, the lottery result included in the received result command is acquired (S4301), and it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S4302). If it is determined that the jackpot has been won (S4302: Yes), then the residual fluctuation time is calculated (S4303), and it is determined whether the calculated residual fluctuation time is longer than 10 seconds (S4304). If it is determined that the remaining variation time is longer than 10 seconds (S4304: Yes), a display command is set to switch the set variation effect pattern to a winning effect pattern (S4305), and the main effect is set. Finish the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is within 10 seconds (S4304: No), the result display mode of the set variation effect pattern is changed to the winning result display mode that indicates a winning. A display command for switching is set (S4305), and this processing ends. In addition, in the process of S4302, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol lottery this time (the lottery result included in the result command) is not a jackpot (a loss) (S4302: No), continue with this process. finish.

In the second control example described above, a series of accessory effects using the effect member 700, the rotating member 840, and the injection device 400 are configured to be executed according to the elapsed time of the variable display effect. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a series of accessory effects are executed in response to the operation of the frame button 22. That is, in the variable display performance, an operation validity period may be set in which the operation on the frame button 22 is treated as valid when a specific period has elapsed, and a series of accessory effects may be executed based on the depression of the frame button 22. In this case, the delay control in the first control example described above may be applied. That is, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected while a predetermined delay condition is satisfied, a delay period is set for the delay timer 223s to delay the start of the series of accessory effects. You may. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify presentation modes. Furthermore, instead of delaying the start of the entire series of performance effects, a configuration may be adopted in which only some of the actions are delayed. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which only the start of the first operation is delayed, or only the start of the second operation is delayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the performance modes of the series of yakuza performances, and therefore it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the target of the production that delays the movement of the role parts is not limited to a series of role play performances, but also a performance that involves the variable movement of at least one of the various role objects provided in the pachinko machine 10. If so, it may be applied to any performance. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the accessories, it may be possible to delay the start of part or all of the lighting mode of the performance that involves light emission from light-emitting means such as decorative LEDs and lamps. By configuring in this way, the effect mode can be made different depending on whether the delay is delayed or not, so the effect mode can be more diversified.

<Modified example of the first control example>
Next, a modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 266 to 272. The pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example is configured to be able to perform a group effect in which a plurality of characters gather as a type of effect in the variable display effect, and a jackpot is expected depending on the number of characters that gather. The structure is such that the player is informed of the degree.

In addition to this, this modified example is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot by the combination of characters that are stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the group presentation. In addition, in this modification, an accompanying pattern imitating one of the numbers "1" to "9" is provided as an accompanying pattern associated with the third pattern imitating each character. In this modified example, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be suggested also by the combination of accompanying symbols attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in this modified example, in which symbol row the third symbol corresponding to each character is to be displayed is set after the execution of the collective effect is determined, and the execution of the collective effect is also determined for each accompanying symbol. After that, it is configured to set in which symbol row the symbol should be displayed. In other words, the type of character and the type of accompanying symbol are not fixed, and each time a variable display performance accompanied by a collective performance is executed, the correspondence relationship between the third symbol and the accompanying symbol (the The structure is such that the numbers) can be changed. The system is configured such that when the third symbol and the accompanying symbol are in a specific combination, the expectation of a jackpot is high. With this configuration, not only the total number of characters acquired in the collective performance, but also the type of the third symbol, the type of the accompanying symbol, and the type of the accompanying symbol that are stopped and displayed in each symbol row in each variable display in the collective performance. Since the player can play the game by paying attention to the combination of the three symbols and the accompanying symbols, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 266 and FIG. 267, the performance mode of the collective performance in this modification will be described. FIG. 266(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen on which ally characters that can be acquired in a group performance are displayed. As shown in FIG. 266(a), in this modification, for each symbol row L1 to L3 (see FIG. 129(a)), a third symbol imitating an animal character (or the character "?") is used. is displayed, and an accompanying symbol imitating a number is also displayed at the lower right of each third symbol. The accompanying symbol is always displayed along with the third symbol imitating the same character during one collective performance. That is, while the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, it is displayed in a variable manner together with the third symbol. In this modification, the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in each symbol row at the time when this obtainable ally character is displayed, the combination of the accompanying symbols, and the combination of the third symbol, the accompanying symbol, and the stop position. etc., it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

FIG. 266(b) is a diagram showing an example of a combination of stopped symbols (chance-up pattern) that increases the expectation of a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 266(b), the third symbol imitating a bear is displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, suggesting to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high. Furthermore, regarding the types of accompanying symbols that accompany the third bear symbol, there is no difference in the level of expectation except for the accompanying symbol that imitates the number "7". Furthermore, there is no difference in the level of expectation regarding the types of third symbols displayed in the left third symbol display area 901a and the right third symbol display area 901c. That is, as long as the third symbol imitating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, the expectation of a jackpot is high regardless of the type of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol rows. Become. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the type of the third symbol displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, as a chance-up pattern different from the mode in which a third symbol imitating a bear is displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, any one of the third symbol display areas 901a to 901c may be displayed. On the other hand, even when the third symbol accompanied by the accompanying symbol resembling the number "7" is displayed in a stopped state, the expectation of a jackpot is increased. That is, by displaying an accompanying symbol imitating the number "7" in any of the accompanying symbol display areas 901a1 to 901c1, it is possible to suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is high. As a result, by simply paying attention to whether or not the accompanying symbol imitating "7" is stopped and displayed in any of the accompanying symbol display areas 901a1 to 901c1, it is possible to determine whether or not the fluctuating display of the chance-up pattern has been executed. Since it is possible to easily distinguish between the two, it is possible to realize a performance mode that is easier for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in this modification, there is also a stop type in which a jackpot is determined when the jackpot appears. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, a third symbol imitating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, and an accompanying symbol accompanying the third symbol imitating a bear is If the accompanying symbol resembles a "7" (if the accompanying symbol imitates a "7" is displayed in the medium accompanying symbol display area 901b1), a jackpot is confirmed.

In this way, in this modification, not only the total number of characters acquired in the collective performance, but also the type of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in each symbol row in each variable display in the collective performance, the type of the accompanying symbol, Also, the combination of the third symbol and the accompanying symbol is configured to indicate the expectation of a jackpot, so it is possible to indicate not only whether or not the character will be acquired in the collective performance, but also whether the character will be displayed in a stopped state. It is possible to realize a gameplay that draws attention to the character (and associated symbol) that is stopped and displayed at a certain point in time. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in this modification, when the third symbol imitating a bear is stopped and displayed in the middle third symbol display area 901b, or when the accompanying symbol imitating "7" is displayed in any of the third symbol display regions 901a to 901c. The expectation of a jackpot increases when the third symbol with an accompanying symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and the third symbol in the shape of a bear with an accompanying symbol in the shape of "7" is displayed in a stopped manner in the middle third symbol display area 901b. Although the configuration is such that a jackpot is confirmed when a jackpot is achieved, combinations that improve the expectation of a jackpot or combinations that confirm a jackpot are not limited to these, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, it may be configured such that the expectation of a jackpot is high when only the third symbol with an accompanying symbol imitating an odd number is displayed in a static manner, or a combination of an elephant, a bear, and a rhinoceros is displayed in a static manner. It may be configured such that the expectation of a jackpot is increased by being

<Electrical configuration in a modification of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the configuration of the character storage area 223e1 in this modification will be described. In this modification, a character storage area 223e1 is provided for the audio lamp control device 113 in place of the character storage area 222e1 in the first control example described above. In other words, the character storage area 223e1 is configured to be overwritable (updable). More specifically, the configuration is such that the type of the third symbol (character type) to be displayed in each symbol row in the collective performance and the type of the accompanying symbol can be newly set in each collective performance. There is. During the first set performance, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the arrangement set in the character storage area 222e1. By configuring the arrangement to be reset for each performance, it is possible to always give players a sense of novelty, and therefore it is possible to provide games that are difficult to fill.

As shown in FIG. 268, the character storage area 223e1 in this modification is defined in association with the range of addresses "0000H" to "000DH" in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a third Either data indicating the type of symbol (character data) or data indicating the type of accompanying symbol (numeric data) is stored. As shown in FIG. 268, the address "0000H" is a storage area for storing data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol column, and the address "0001H" ” is a storage area for storing data (numeric data) indicating the type of accompanying symbol attached to the first third symbol displayed in the left symbol column. Similarly, address "0002H" and address "0003H" are data (character data) indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the left symbol column, and data (numeric data) indicating the type of the accompanying symbol. ), and address "0004H" and address "0005H" are data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the right symbol column, and the accompanying symbol, respectively. This is a storage area for storing data (numeric data) indicating the type of the symbol, and address "0006H" and address "0007H" are data indicating the type of the second and third symbol to be displayed in the right symbol column, respectively. This is a storage area for storing (character data) and data (numeric data) indicating the type of accompanying symbol. In addition, the address "0008H" and the address "0009H" are data (character data) indicating the type of the first third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol row, and data (numeric data) indicating the type of the accompanying symbol, respectively. Address "000AH" and address "000BH" are the data (character data) indicating the type of the second third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol row, and the data of the accompanying symbol, respectively. This is a storage area for storing data (numeric data) indicating the type, and the address "000CH" and the address "000DH" are data (number data) indicating the type of the third third symbol to be displayed in the middle symbol row. This is a storage area for storing data (character data) and data (numeric data) indicating the type of accompanying symbol.

At the start of the group performance, different character data and numerical data are stored one by one in the addresses "0000H" to "000DH" that make up these character storage areas 223e1. You can set the display mode of the symbols. In addition, in this modification, while 7 types of character data and 9 types of numerical data are provided, the addresses associated with the character storage area 223e1 are 14 addresses (7 addresses x 2). Therefore, although all characters are set in one of the symbol rows in terms of character data, two numbers remain in number data. In other words, among the nine types of accompanying symbols imitating numbers, only seven types of accompanying symbols are set as accompanying symbols of any third symbol in one collective performance. This modification is configured so that an accompanying symbol resembling the number "7" is more likely to be set in the case of a win than in the case of a loss. In other words, the configuration is such that, in the event of a miss, it is difficult to set an accompanying pattern imitating the number "7". As a result, when the accompanying symbol resembling "7" is stopped and displayed, it is possible to improve the player's expectation of hitting the jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 269, when character data is stored in each address of the character storage area 223e1 in this modification, a lottery is performed to determine which data is stored in which address. The character lottery table 222e11 that is referred to for this purpose will be explained. This character lottery table 222e11 is a type of data table provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. Here, in this modification, only the character data to be stored in the first address of the character storage area 223e1 is determined by the character lottery table 222e11. The characters are arranged in a predetermined order (elephant, lion, dugong, rhinoceros, bird, bear, boar), and for addresses other than the first address, the character stored at the first address is used as the starting point. The character data is stored in a predetermined order. For example, if dugong is determined as the character to be stored in the first address, then rhinoceros, bird, bear, boar, elephant, and lion are stored in the order of addresses in the character storage area 22231. With this configuration, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where character data to be stored in all addresses is determined by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 269, in the character lottery table 222e11, the type of character to be set to the first third symbol in the left symbol column (character data to be set to the start address of the character storage area 223e1) is displayed for each success/failure determination result. ) and the range of values of the twelfth performance counter 223p12 are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 269, if the result of the judgment is a win, the elephant character (character data "00H ”) are defined in association with each other. Among the 199 random numbers (counter values) that the 12th production counter 223p12 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the elephant character is 35, so the character data (00H ) is stored in the first address of the character storage area 223e1 approximately 17.6% (35/199). Furthermore, if character data corresponding to an elephant is set in the first address, a third pattern imitating an elephant and a lion will be displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a dugong and a rhinoceros will be displayed in the right pattern column. A third symbol imitating a bird, a bear, and a boar is displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the arrangement is set so that the bear can be displayed in the middle symbol row (an arrangement that can be stopped in a chance pattern or a confirmed pattern).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 269, a lion character (character data "01H") is defined in association with a range in which the value of the 12th performance counter 223p12 is "35 to 69". Of the 199 random numbers (counter values) that the 12th production counter 223p12 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the lion character is 35, so the character data (01H ) is stored in the first address of the character storage area 223e1 approximately 17.6% (35/199). If character data corresponding to a lion is set in the first address, a third pattern imitating a lion and a dugong will be displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a rhinoceros and a bird will be displayed in the right pattern column. A third pattern imitating a bear, a boar, and an elephant is displayed in the middle pattern row. That is, the arrangement is set so that the bear can be displayed in the middle symbol row (an arrangement that can be stopped in a chance pattern or a confirmed pattern).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 269, a dugong character (character data "02H") is defined in association with the range in which the value of the twelfth performance counter 223p12 is "70 to 92". Among the 199 random numbers (counter values) that the 12th performance counter 223p12 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the dugong character is 23, so the character data (02H ) is stored in the first address of the character storage area 223e1 about 11.6% (23/199). In addition, if character data corresponding to a dugong is set in the first address, a third pattern imitating a dugong and a rhinoceros will be displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a bird and a bear will be displayed in the right pattern column. A third pattern imitating a boar, an elephant, and a lion is displayed in the middle pattern row. That is, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 269, the rhinoceros character (character data "03H") is defined in association with the range in which the value of the 12th performance counter 223p12 is "93 to 115". Of the 199 random numbers (counter values) that the 12th production counter 223p12 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the character Sai is 23, so the character data (03H ) is stored in the first address of the character storage area 223e1 about 11.6% (23/199). In addition, if character data corresponding to a rhinoceros is set in the first address, a third pattern imitating a rhinoceros and a bird will be displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a bear and a boar will be displayed in the right pattern column. A third pattern imitating an elephant, a lion, and a dugong is displayed in the middle pattern row. That is, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, a bird character (character data "04H") is defined in association with the value of the 12th performance counter 223p12 in the range "116 to 138". Of the 199 random numbers (counter values) that the 12th performance counter 223p12 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the bird character is 23, so the character data (04H ) is stored in the first address of the character storage area 223e1 approximately 11.6% (23/199). In addition, if character data corresponding to a bird is set in the first address, a third pattern imitating a bird and a bear will be displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a boar and an elephant will be displayed in the right pattern column. A third pattern imitating a lion, a dugong, and a rhinoceros is displayed in the middle pattern row. That is, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 269, a bear character (character data "05H") is defined in association with the range in which the value of the 12th effect counter 223p12 is "139 to 162". Of the 199 random numbers (counter values) that the 12th performance counter 223p12 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the bear character is 24, so the character data (05H ) is stored in the first address of the character storage area 223e1 approximately 12.1% (24/199). Furthermore, if character data corresponding to a bear is set in the first address, a third pattern imitating a bear and a boar will be displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating an elephant and a lion will be displayed in the right pattern column. A third pattern imitating a dugong, a rhinoceros, and a bird is displayed in the middle pattern row. That is, the arrangement is set such that the bear cannot be displayed in the middle symbol row.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 269, a boar character (character data "06H") is defined in association with the range in which the value of the 12th performance counter 223p12 is "163 to 1698". Among the 199 random numbers (counter values) that the 12th production counter 223p12 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the boar character is 36, so the character data (06H ) is stored in the first address of the character storage area 223e1 approximately 18.1% (36/199). In addition, if character data corresponding to a boar is set in the first address, a third pattern imitating a boar and an elephant will be displayed in the left pattern column, and a third pattern imitating a lion and dugong will be displayed in the right pattern column. A third pattern imitating a rhinoceros, a bird, and a bear is displayed in the middle pattern row. That is, the arrangement is set so that the bear can be displayed in the middle symbol row.

In this way, when the result of the judgment is a hit, a third symbol imitating a bear is placed in the middle symbol approximately 53.3% of the time. In other words, it is configured so that it can become a stop pattern that is more than a chance pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269, if the result of the judgment is incorrect, the elephant character (character data "00H") is The lion character (character data "01H") is defined in correspondence with the range "20-39", and the dugong character (character data "01H") is defined in the range "40-74". The character data "02H") is defined in association with the range "75-109", the rhinoceros character (character data "03H") is defined in association with the range "110-144". , the bird character (character data "04H") is defined in association with the range "145-179", the bear character (character data "05H") is defined in association with the range "145-198", ”, a boar character (character data “06H”) is defined in association with the range.

Therefore, the rate at which the third symbol imitating a bear is set in the middle symbol row (the rate at which character data corresponding to either an elephant, a lion, or a boar is set at the top address of the character storage area 223e1) is approximately It is 29.6%. That is, compared to the case of a jackpot, it is configured such that the third symbol imitating a bear is less likely to be placed in the middle symbol row. Thereby, the appearance rate of the chance pattern can be made higher in the case of a jackpot, so the player can play the game while paying attention to the stopped symbols in the middle symbol row. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 270, when storing numerical data to each address of the character storage area 223e1 in this modification, a lottery is performed to determine which data is stored in which address. The number lottery table 222e12 that is referred to for performing the lottery will be explained. This number lottery table 222e12 is a type of data table provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. Here, in this modification, only the character data to be stored at the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is determined by the number lottery table 222e11. For other addresses, numerical data is stored in ascending numerical order starting from the number stored at address "0001H". With this configuration, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where numerical data to be stored in all addresses is determined by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 270, in the number lottery table 222e12, the first third symbol in the left symbol row is displayed depending on the result of the judgment and whether or not the third symbol imitating a bear is placed in the middle symbol row. The type of accompanying symbol set to the symbol (numerical data set to the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1) and the range of the value of the thirteenth performance counter 223p13 are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 270, if the judgment result is a hit, the value of the 13th performance counter 223p13 is in the range of "0 to 24" regardless of the type of the middle symbol row. , and an accompanying pattern imitating the number "1" (numeric data "00H") are defined in association with each other. Of the 199 random numbers (counter values) that the 13th performance counter 223p13 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the accompanying pattern imitating the number "1" is 25, so the number The rate at which numerical data (00H) corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating "1" is stored at the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is approximately 12.6%. In addition, if the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating "1" is set in the address "0001H", the accompanying symbol imitating "1" and "2" will be displayed in the left symbol column, and the accompanying symbol imitating "1" and "2" will be displayed in the right symbol column. Ancillary symbols imitating "3" and "4" are displayed in the middle symbol column, and third symbols imitating "5", "6", and "7" are displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the third symbol with the accompanying symbol resembling a "7" is set in an arrangement in which it can be stopped and displayed (it can be stopped and displayed in a chance UP pattern).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 270, if the judgment result is a hit, regardless of the type of the middle symbol row, the number " 2" (numeric data "01H") is defined in association with the symbol. Of the 199 random numbers (counter values) that the 13th production counter 223p13 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the accompanying pattern imitating the number "2" is 25, so the number The rate at which the numerical data (01H) corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating the number "2" is stored at the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is approximately 12.6%. In addition, if the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying symbol imitating "2" is set in the address "0001H", the accompanying symbols imitating "2" and "3" will be displayed in the left symbol column, and the accompanying symbols imitating "2" will be displayed in the right symbol column. Ancillary symbols imitating "4" and "5" are displayed in the middle symbol row, and third symbols imitating "6", "7", and "8" are displayed in the middle symbol column. That is, the third symbol with the accompanying symbol resembling a "7" is set in an arrangement in which it can be stopped and displayed (it can be stopped and displayed in a chance UP pattern).

Similarly, for the value of the 13th performance counter 223p13 in the range of "50 to 74", an accompanying symbol imitating the number "3" (number data "01H") is defined in association with "75 to 99". '' range is defined in association with an accompanying pattern simulating the number ``4'', and the range ``100 to 124'' is defined in association with an auxiliary pattern simulating the number ``5''; An accompanying pattern imitating the number "6" is defined in association with the range "125 to 174". Therefore, the rate at which numerical data corresponding to accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "3" to "6" are stored at address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is higher than that of accompanying symbols imitating "1" and "2". Similarly, it is about 12.6%, respectively. Even if the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "3" to "6" is set to the address "0001H", the accompanying design imitating the number "7" will be set in any of the symbol rows. It is set as an accompanying symbol of the third symbol. In other words, this is a combination that can be stopped and displayed in a chance-up pattern.

On the other hand, for the range in which the value of the 13th performance counter 223p13 is "175 to 186", an accompanying pattern imitating the number "8" is defined in association with the value, and for the range of "187 to 198", the number An accompanying pattern imitating the number "9" is defined in association with the symbol "9". Since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the numerical data corresponding to these "8" and "9" is 12 each, the accompanying pattern imitating the numbers "8" and "9" The rate at which numerical data corresponding to ``0001H'' of the character storage area 223e1 is stored is approximately 6%. When these accompanying symbols imitating "8" or "9" are set as the accompanying symbols of the first third symbol of the left pattern, the accompanying symbols imitating "7" cannot be set. The lottery ratio of accompanying symbols ("8", "9") that result in a combination in which a chance-up pattern cannot be displayed is compared to the lottery percentage of accompanying symbols ("1" to "7") that result in a combination in which a chance-up pattern can be displayed. By keeping it lower than the percentage, it is possible to increase the expectation of a jackpot when a chance-up pattern appears.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, if the result of the judgment is negative, the selection ratio of each accompanying symbol is changed depending on whether or not the third symbol imitating a bear is set in the middle symbol row. Variable. In other words, the third symbol resembling a bear is not set in the middle symbol row ("05H" is stored as character data in all addresses "0008H", "000AH", and "000CH" of the character storage area 223e1). ), 14 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the associated symbols imitating the numbers "1" to "5", and "6" and "7" 15 random numbers (counter values) are defined to correspond to each accompanying pattern that imitates a number, and 49 random numbers (counter values) correspond to each accompanying pattern that imitates the number "8". 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with an accompanying pattern imitating the number "9". That is, compared to the case of a hit, the rate at which numerical data corresponding to an accompanying pattern imitating the numbers "8" or "9" is set to the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 is higher. In other words, the proportion of combinations that do not include an accompanying symbol resembling the number "7" (combinations in which the chance UP pattern cannot be displayed) increases. Therefore, when the chance-up pattern is displayed, it is possible to improve the player's expectations for a jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, the result of the judgment is negative, and a third symbol imitating a bear is set in the middle symbol row (addresses "0008H" and "0008H" of the character storage area 223e1). If "05H" is stored as character data in either "000AH" or "000CH", a random value (counter value) will be set for the accompanying symbol that imitates the numbers "1" to "3". Not matched. When the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "1" to "3" is set to the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1, the addresses "0009"H and "000BH" corresponding to the middle symbol row are set. , "000DH" will be set with the numerical data "06H" that corresponds to the accompanying symbol that imitates the number "7", so the third symbol that imitates a bear that is set as the middle symbol will be set. Since there is a possibility that an accompanying symbol resembling "7" will be set on the line, the purpose is to avoid this (preventing the fixed pattern (see Figure 267) from being stopped and displayed even though it is a miss). .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 270, 20 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with each of the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying symbols imitating the numbers "4" to "7". Sixty random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the numerical data corresponding to the accompanying pattern imitating the number "8", and the number corresponding to the accompanying pattern imitating the number "9" 59 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the data. In other words, the lottery percentage of the accompanying symbols ("8", "9") that are combinations in which the chance UP pattern cannot be displayed is compared to the lottery percentage of the accompanying symbols ("4" to "7") that are the combinations in which the chance UP pattern can be displayed. Since it is configured to be lower than the lottery ratio of , it is possible to increase the expectation of a jackpot when a chance-up pattern appears.

In this way, in this modification, the arrangement of the third symbols to be placed in each symbol row and the accompanying symbols to be attached to each third symbol in the collective performance is drawn separately. As a result, the display mode can be made different for each collective performance, so it is possible to realize a performance mode that players will not easily get bored with. In addition, the expectation of a jackpot can be suggested by the combination of the 3rd symbol that is stopped and displayed, the combination of the accompanying symbols, and the combination of the 3rd symbol and the accompanying symbol, so every time the symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of symbols can draw more attention to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Control processing of the audio lamp control device in a modification of the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 273. First, with reference to FIG. 271, details of battle effect setting processing 5 (S2755) in this modification will be described. This battle effect setting process 5 (S2755) is a process executed in place of the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204) in the first control example described above, and similar to the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204), This is a process for setting various performance modes in battle performance.

Of this battle effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 271), each process of S3101 to S3110 is the same as each process of S3101 to S3110 of the battle effect setting process (see FIG. 204) in the first control example described above. is executed. In addition, in the battle effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 271) in this modification, an array setting process is executed to set the combination (array) of symbols to be displayed in each symbol column (S3151), and the process proceeds to S3101. and transition. The details of this array setting process (S3151) will be explained with reference to FIG. 272.

FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the above-described array setting process (S3151). In this arrangement setting process (S3151), first, the character lottery table 222e11 (see FIG. 269) is read out, and the specified contents of the read character lottery table 222e11 (see FIG. 269), the validity of the current variation pattern, and the 12th Depending on the value of the production counter 223p12, character data to be stored in the first address of the character storage area 223e1 (see FIG. 268) is determined (S4402), and the determined character data is stored in the first address of the character storage area 223e1. It is stored (S4403).

Next, add "0002H" to the setting address where data was set this time and set the address as the next setting address (S4404), and store the new setting address in the previous setting address. The character data obtained by adding "01H" to the character data obtained is stored (S4405). In the process of S4405, if the previously set character data is the upper limit "06H" (character data corresponding to a boar), "00H" is stored.

When the process of S4405 is completed, character data is then sent to all setting destination addresses ("0000H", "0002H", "0004H", "0006H", "0008H", "000AH", and "000CH"). It is determined whether the data has been stored (S4406), and if there is a setting destination address where no data is stored (S4406: No), the process moves to S4404. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4406 that character data has been stored for all setting destination addresses, then a numeric setting process is performed to set numeric data to each address of the character storage area 223e1. The process is executed (S4407) and ends. The details of this number setting process (S4407) will be explained with reference to FIG. 273.

FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the number setting process (S4407). In this number setting process (S4407), first, the number lottery table 222e12 (see FIG. 270) is read out, and the specified contents of the read number lottery table 222e12, the current success/failure determination result, and the value of the 13th effect counter 223p13. , and the type of character data set for the medium symbol, the numerical data to be stored in the address "0001H" of the character storage area 223e1 (see FIG. 268) is determined (S4502). Next, the numerical data determined in the process of S4502 is stored in the address "0001H" (S4503), and the address obtained by adding "0002H" to the setting destination address where the data was set this time is set as the next setting destination address ( S4504). Next, numeric data obtained by adding "01H" to the numeric data stored in the previous setting destination address is stored in the new setting destination address (S4505). In addition, in the process of S4505, if the previously set numerical data is the upper limit "08H" (numeric data corresponding to the number "9"), it is changed to "00H" (corresponding to the number "1"). numeric data).

When the process of S4505 is completed, character data is then sent to all setting destination addresses ("0001H", "0003H", "0005H", "0007H", "0009H", "000BH", and "000DH"). It is determined whether the data has been stored (S4506), and if there is a setting destination address where no data is stored (S4506: No), the process moves to S4504. On the other hand, in the process of S4506, if it is determined that character data has been stored for all setting destination addresses, the process ends immediately.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first control example, animal characters (or the character "?") are imitated for each symbol row L1 to L3 (see FIG. 129(a)). The third symbol is displayed, and an accompanying symbol imitating a number is displayed on the lower right side of each third symbol. Then, when it is decided to execute a collective effect, the arrangement of characters and accompanying symbols in each symbol row is set separately, so that the correspondence between characters and numbers can be changed for each effect. It consists of Then, the expectation of a jackpot is suggested to the player by the combination of the third symbol stopped and displayed in each symbol row, the combination of the accompanying symbols, the combination of the third symbol, the accompanying symbol, and the stop position, etc. It is configured as possible. With this configuration, in each variable display in the group performance, it is possible to make the game pay more attention not only to whether or not a character is acquired, but also to the combination of stopped symbols, so that the game Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in playing games.

In addition, in this modification, only the type of the first third symbol in the left symbol row and the accompanying symbol attached to the third symbol are determined by lottery, and the types of the remaining symbols are determined by the first symbol determined by lottery. Although the configuration is such that the symbols are arranged in a predetermined order starting from the symbol type, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the characters and numbers to be set for all symbols may be determined by lottery. By configuring in this way, the randomness of each symbol can be further increased, so that the presentation mode can be more diversified. Alternatively, the selectable combinations of symbols may be defined in advance by a table or the like, and the selection ratio of each combination may be varied depending on the lottery results of the special symbols. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting a combination of symbols.

In the modified example of the first control example described above, in the variable control of the display mode of the third symbol when it is decided to execute the collective effect, based on the character lottery table 222e11 described above with reference to FIG. The display mode of the third symbol was configured to be variable. In other words, for the type of the third symbol (numbers 0 to 9) that is displayed in a variable manner, the display mode is determined from the display modes of fewer types (7 types of characters) than the number of types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display mode of the third symbol used for the group performance may be determined from display modes of a number of types that are greater than the number of third symbols that are variably displayed.

Specifically, a character storage area is provided in which 15 types of character information are stored for the 10 third symbols that are displayed in a variable manner, and among the 15 types of character information stored in the character storage area. Accordingly, the display mode used for the collective performance may be determined for the ten third symbols. By configuring this way, it is possible to configure so that all display modes are not displayed in a variable manner, giving players the pleasure of predicting which display mode will be determined when a group effect is executed. can be provided. In addition, in this case, notification (suggestion) for changing the identification information of the third symbol being displayed in a variable manner to such an extent that it is visible to the player, and notifying (suggesting) the type of the determined display mode to the player. Suggestion) It would be good to provide a means. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the display mode of the third symbol that will be stopped and displayed immediately after the group performance is started.

Furthermore, the same display mode may be determined overlappingly as the display mode of the plurality of third symbols that are variably displayed in the collective performance. By configuring in this way, even when performing a collective performance using display modes (character data) of a smaller number of types than the number of third symbols that are variably displayed during a collective performance, all display modes can be It is possible to execute a performance pattern that is not displayed in a variable manner. In addition, by determining only a specific display mode more than other display modes, it is possible to determine the display mode that is likely to be stopped and displayed in the group performance and the display mode that is difficult to be displayed during the fluctuating display of the third symbol in the group performance. It can be suggested to the player.

In a modification of the first control example, when it is decided to execute the collective performance, the display mode of the third symbol is determined, and the collective performance is executed to the end using the determined display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the third symbol temporarily stops during a group presentation and is displayed in a variable manner again, a display for re-determining (updating) the display mode of each third symbol. The configuration may be such that the aspect update process can be executed.

With this configuration, the display mode of the third symbol that can be stopped and displayed can be changed every time the third symbol temporarily stops during the collective performance, so that it is possible to prevent the players from getting bored with the collective performance in the middle. Can be suppressed. Further, the display mode corresponding to the character already acquired in the group performance may be continued as it is and used as the display mode of the third symbol, or the player can understand that the display mode corresponds to the character already acquired. You may use an acquired display mode that varies the display mode to the extent possible (for example, a display mode in which a character is marked as "completed"), or you can use a display mode that corresponds to an acquired character to a display mode that is not yet acquired. The display mode may be changed to a display mode corresponding to the character.

In addition, as in the modification of the first control example described above, when performing a production using identification information (symbols) having a plurality of pieces of information, for example, first information (character information) given to each symbol , the second information (numeric information), and the third information (information indicating a part of the information (large set) indicating whether or not the production was successful) are used, a symbol having multiple of each symbol is used. After displaying a plurality of columns (three) in a variable manner, a first benefit is given based on a combination of first information, a second benefit is given based on a combination of second information, which the three symbols that are stopped and displayed have. In addition to granting a third benefit based on a combination of third information, a combination of first information and second information given to a specific symbol that is stopped and displayed, a combination of first information and third information, It is preferable that a specific benefit can be provided based on a combination of the second information and the third information, or a combination of the first information, the second information, and the third information. By configuring in this way, the player is made interested not only in the combination of each piece of information given to a plurality of symbols that are stopped and displayed, but also in the combination of each piece of information given to a single symbol. This has the effect of increasing the production effect.

<About modified examples of icon display notice>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, as explained with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135, various icons are displayed in various orders at a plurality of locations formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By executing the icon display preview displayed on the screen, the player was provided with a variety of preview contents. For the icon display preview executed in the first control example described above, when setting the preview mode (presentation mode), the presentation icon storage area 222c1 (where information indicating icon types is stored in a specific order in advance) is used. (See FIG. 164(b)), the first icon type is identified, and the icons are displayed in order from the first icon type (rendering element 1).

Also, regarding the display area of the icon, one permutation is selected from the permutation storage area 222c3 (see FIG. 165) in which a plurality of pieces of specific permutation information indicating the display order are stored (direction element 2 ). Furthermore, the number of icons to be displayed in the icon display preview is determined by lottery (performance element 3).

In this way, when performing one performance, by setting multiple performance elements independently and making it possible to execute a performance that combines each set performance element, all possible performance patterns can be executed. Compared to the case where performance data is prepared separately in advance, the amount of performance data to be prepared in advance can be reduced.

Furthermore, as the permutation information indicating the display order, for example, permutation information in which the same display location is selected repeatedly is configured to be selectable, and when displaying the number of icons determined as the production element 3, multiple icons If the performance content is to be displayed in the same display location, by setting a display rule that only displays one of the icons, it is possible to prevent the number of icons that are different from the number of icons determined as the performance element 3 from being displayed. It is possible to execute the displayed effects, and it is possible to execute effects that are rich in variation.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, when determining the content of each performance element, the content of the performance element is determined based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (result of success/failure determination). Although the performance mode is determined at random, the icon display preview to be executed is a performance mode that can suggest the result of the special symbol lottery, so that it can arouse players' interest.

On the other hand, in this modification, we will further explain the performance elements for executing icon display notices with a wide variety of variations. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 274, the size of the icon displayed in the icon display notice can be varied. FIG. 274 is a diagram schematically showing an example in which an enlarged icon is displayed in the icon display preview in this modification. Note that the icon display notice of this modified example differs from the icon display notice of the first control example described above in that the size of the displayed icon can be changed, and the icon displayed in the first display location The difference is that display control is executed to prevent icons from being displayed in other display areas covered by the icon, but other than that they are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 274, as an icon display preview effect, an icon 812a initially displayed in area 811a is displayed to cover (hide) area 811b (see FIG. 133(a)). In this case, no icon is displayed in the area 811b (see FIG. 133(a)) in the current icon display preview effect.

In this way, by configuring the magnification ratio of the displayed icon to be selectable, the area covered by the displayed icon can be varied depending on the magnification ratio of the selected icon, the type of icon, and the display location. becomes possible. Then, by configuring the icons to be displayed in the order selected as the above-mentioned production element 2, excluding areas that are already covered (non-display areas), icon display previews with a richer variety can be executed. can do.

In addition, when the technique of this modification is used, since a non-display area is set, overlapping display locations are more likely to be selected in the display order of icons. Therefore, by combining the technology of setting a non-display area and the technology of displaying only one icon when display areas overlap, it is possible to create a large number of icons that deviates greatly from the number of icons set as the above-mentioned production element 3. Icons can be displayed more easily, and more varied icon display notices can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 275, of the configurations of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of this modification, a configuration different from the first control example described above will be described. In this modified example, as described above, when performing the icon display preview effect, the enlargement rate of the displayed icon (the icon displayed at the beginning) is configured to be variable, and the first control described above is configured to be variable. It is different from the example.

The configuration of the ROM 222 is also different in that a magnification rate selection table 222A1 is provided for selecting the magnification rate of the icon. Since the other configurations of the ROM 222 are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the enlargement rate selection table 222A1. As shown in FIG. 275, different magnification rates are defined in the magnification rate selection table 222A1 in association with the validity determination result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the A-th production counter 223pA. Here, the A-th effect counter 223pA is a counter that can update a random value in the range of "0 to 198", like the various effect counters 223p used in each control example described above, and is a counter that can update the random value in the range of "0 to 198", This is a counter whose value is periodically updated in a process (for example, main process) that is periodically executed in the control process of the control device 113. The value of this counter is configured to be updated with regularity so that the updated value is not synchronized with other production counters 223p, and since the specific configuration is the same, a detailed explanation will be given below. Omitted. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the presentation modes of the various presentations selected by referring to the values of the various presentation counters 223 from becoming the same combination.

Specifically, when the judgment result is "hit (jackpot)" and the value of the A performance counter pA is in the range of "0 to 4", the magnification rate is "50%", and in the range of "5 to 99". The magnification rate is "100%", the magnification rate is "200%" in the range of "100-149", the magnification rate is "500%" in the range of "150-179", and the magnification rate is "500%" in the range of "180-198". , an enlargement rate of "1000%" is specified.

In addition, if the result of the judgment is "miss" and the value of the A-th production counter pA is in the range of "0 to 14", the magnification rate is "50%", and in the range of "15 to 164", the magnification rate is "100%". ”, an enlargement rate of “200%” is defined for the range of “165 to 184”, and an enlargement rate of “500%” is defined for the range of “185 to 198”.

As mentioned above, this magnification rate selection table 223A1 is referred to when selecting the magnification rate when displaying the first icon, and when "50%" is selected as the magnification rate, the magnification rate selection table 223A1 is normally The first icon is displayed at half the size of the icon display (see FIG. 134(a)). If "100%" is selected, the first icon will be displayed in the normal size shown in Figure 134(a), and if "200%" is selected, it will be twice the normal size. If "500%" is selected, the icon will be displayed at 5 times the normal size, and if "1000%" is selected, the icon will be displayed at 10 times the normal size. The icon will be displayed depending on the size.

Here, this modified example is also configured to be able to display multiple types of icons, as in the first control example described above, and the type of icon displayed first in the icon display notice, the display location, and the enlarged The display area covered by the display icon is configured to vary depending on the rate.

For example, referring to FIG. 133(a) and FIG. 164(b), when the first icon is displayed in the area 811a, a magnification rate of 500% is selected for all icon types. Then, the area 811b is covered. In addition, when the first icon is displayed in the area 811b and the magnification rate is 200%, the other area (area 811a) is covered and enlarged only when the "V sign shape" icon is displayed. When a ratio of 500% is selected, the "square" icon covers the area 811c and the area 811d, and the "round", "triangular", and "diamond-shaped" icons cover only the area 811f, The "V sign shape" icon is configured so that the entire area is covered. From now on, regardless of whether the first icon is displayed in area 811c, area 811d, area 811e, or area 811f, other areas covered will vary depending on the displayed icon type and magnification rate. It is composed of

When an enlargement rate of 1000% is selected, all other areas are covered regardless of the type of the first icon and the display location.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the display location where the icon can be displayed in the icon display notice based on the selection result of the location where the first icon is displayed, the icon type, and the enlargement rate. It is possible to easily execute a random icon display notice.

In addition, in this modification, when the "V sign shape" icon, which is an icon type that is likely to be displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, is displayed as the first icon, another icon is displayed as the first icon. It is configured in such a way that it is easier to access other areas than when it is used. Specifically, in order to make it easier for players to understand that an icon with high expectations for winning a jackpot has been displayed, the size of the "V sign-shaped" icon (size at 100% magnification) is different from that of other players. It is configured to be larger than the icon. In this way, by differentiating the reference sizes of the displayed icons, it is possible to easily cover different areas even when the same enlargement ratio is selected.

In this modified example, the same icon type as in the first control example described above is configured to be selectable, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a specific display location (area) such as a "cross-shaped" icon can be selected. An icon type that tends to cover other areas only when displayed as the first icon in 811b) may be used. This allows the player to have fun predicting which icon will be displayed at the timing when the icon display preview is executed and the player is notified of only the location where the first icon will be displayed (see FIG. 133(b)). can be provided.

Note that in this modification and the first control example described above, as shown in FIG. 133(b), when the icon display preview performance is executed, the player is first instructed to select the display location where the first icon will be displayed. Although the configuration is such that notification is possible, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of the first icon may be notified first, or the enlargement rate set for the first icon may be notified first. Alternatively, the non-display area may be notified first.

Next, the flow of control processing in the audio lamp control device 113 when setting the performance mode of the icon display notice in this modification will be explained. This modification is different from the first control example described above in that a random display effect setting process A (see S3293 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207). , otherwise the same. Note that since the basic flow of control processing is the same as the first control example described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the contents of the random display effect setting process A (S3293). This random display effect setting process A (S3293) executes a process of determining the enlargement rate of the icon displayed as the first icon, and a process of varying the display order of the icons based on the determined enlargement rate. This is different from the random display effect setting process described above (see S3203 in FIG. 207). The other processing contents are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the random display effect setting process A (S3293) is executed, first, the same processes as S3301 to S3304 as the above-described random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207) are executed, and then the enlargement rate selection table 223A1 The enlargement ratio of the first icon is determined with reference to (S3391), and a non-display area is extracted based on the enlargement ratio, display location, and type of the first icon (S3392). Note that in the process of S3392, a non-display area (an area covered by the display of the first icon) is extracted based on the contents predefined in a determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 222.

Then, it is determined whether there is a hidden area based on the extraction result of S3392 (S3394), and if it is determined that there is a hidden area (S3394: Yes), a removed permutation is created by removing the hidden area from the permutation determined in the process of S3303. (S3394), and then executes the same processes of S3305 and S3306 as the random display effect setting process (see S3203 in FIG. 207), and ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3393 that there is no hidden area (S3394: No), the permutation determined in the process of S3303 can be used as is, so the process of S3394 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3305. Transition.

With this configuration, even if the type and permutation of the first icon are determined using the same pattern, the location where the icon is displayed can be varied by changing the enlargement ratio of the first icon. Therefore, a wide variety of icon display previews (random display effects) can be executed using a small amount of effect data.

Note that in this modification, when there is a non-display area, a removal permutation is set, and based on the removal permutation, the number of icons determined in the process of S3304 is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the process of simply not displaying the icon corresponding to the non-display area is performed without setting the removal permutation. Even in this case, a different number of icons will be displayed compared to the determined number of icons to be displayed, so a rich variety of icon display previews (random display effects) can be performed using a small amount of effect data. can do.

<Variation example of projectile performance>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 280, a modified example of performance control using the firing accessory 400 will be described. In this modified example, the accessory performance of the firing accessory 400 is configured to be executed in the demonstration performance performed during the standby state, which is a state in which the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation) is not performed. . Then, as the action content of the firing accessory 400, actions located in the preparation action A state and the preparation action B state are executed as preparation actions until the actual firing action is executed, and the timing at which the demonstration performance ends. (At the timing when the player enters the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the special symbol variation starts), the operating status of the firing accessory is determined, and the variation performance is executed based on the determination result. This control example differs from the second control example described above in that it is configured to vary, and is otherwise the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 277, the content of the effect on the demo screen in this modification will be explained. FIG. 277(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a case where the firing accessory 400 operates during a demonstration performance in which a demonstration screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 277(a), a demonstration screen is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the firing accessory 400 operates and the granular member 320 is ejected so as to cover the display surface. .

In this way, by operating the firing accessory 400 during the demonstration screen, it becomes possible to interest the player and increase the performance of the game. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, an operation scenario in which the firing accessory 400 is fired during this demonstration performance is, for example, after a specific period has passed since the demonstration performance is executed, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 It is configured such that an operation scenario can be set in which the firing accessory 400 is operated in accordance with the timing at which a performance display that gives a sense of unity with the operation of the firing accessory 400 is displayed on the display screen.

It should be noted that a plurality of performance patterns during the demonstration performance can be set, and for example, in the second control example described above, if the abnormality determination performed is determined to be a mild abnormality (abnormality level 1), It is preferable to configure the presentation pattern so that it is easy to set a performance pattern including an operation scenario for operating the projectile accessory 400. With this configuration, the granular member 320 can be properly stored in the firing accessory 400 by the operation of the firing accessory 400 executed during the demonstration performance, which improves the performance effect and improves the performance device. It is possible to make it easier to achieve optimization at the same time. Further, while the demonstration performance is being executed, the player is not playing the game, so the firing accessory 400 can be operated without giving discomfort to the player playing the game.

In addition, when operating the firing accessory 400 during a demonstration production, a comment (in the figure, a comment is displayed as "demonstration display") that allows the player to identify that the demonstration production is in progress is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. ) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly inform players that the current demo performance is in progress, so new players cannot play the game because they mistakenly believe that they are playing a game even though the demo performance is in progress. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277(b), the content of the performance when the special symbol variation is executed during the demonstration performance will be explained. FIG. 277(b) shows a case where the special symbol variation is started between when the firing accessory 400 fires the granular members 320 as a demonstration effect and until all the granular members 320 are stored in the firing accessory 400. FIG.

In this modification, the operating state of the firing accessory 400 is a preparatory operation state A for making the player understand that the granular member 320 stored in the storage area has moved downward, and a preparatory operation state A for causing the granular member 320 to be launched. A preparatory operation state B in which a drag force is applied to the elastic member for this purpose, and a firing operation state in which the drag force against the elastic member is released and the granular member 320 is launched by the restoring force of the elastic member are configured to be distinguishable. There is.

Then, when the special symbol variation is started when the firing accessory 400 is in the firing operation state (when the end condition of the demonstration performance is met), the firing operation of the firing accessory 400 executed during the demonstration performance is completed. Before the granular member 320 is stored in the firing accessory 400, a situation occurs in which the special symbol fluctuation is started, and a special symbol lottery is used to indicate to the player that he has won the special symbol lottery. Even when a variation effect is executed in response to a special symbol variation, there is a problem that the granular member 320 is located on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, giving the player an unnecessary sense of anticipation. there were.

On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 277(b), until the firing operation of the firing accessory 400 is completed (until the granular member 320 is stored in the storage area ra of the firing accessory 400) The structure is such that the demonstration performance will continue during this period. With this configuration, the variable effect can be executed after the firing accessory 400 operation in the demonstration effect is completed, which may cause confusion between multiple effects (demonstration effect, variable effect) and the player It is possible to prevent difficult-to-understand presentations from being provided.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 277(b), in a state where the demonstration performance continues after the special symbol variation has started, a display area Dm2 is formed on the upper right side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to be able to notify the player that a special symbol variation is being executed. That is, it is configured such that it is possible to notify the player only that the special symbol variation is being executed without executing the variation effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the special symbol variation is not started even though the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64. Further, a comment "demonstration performance end processing in progress" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation has started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the operational status of the projectile accessory 400 will be described. FIG. 278(a) schematically shows a state in which the launch accessory 400 is located at the standby position (reference), and FIG. 278(b) shows a state in which the launch accessory 400 is in the preparation operation A state ( 278(c) schematically shows a state in which the launch accessory 400 is in the preparation state B (preparation B). It is something that

First, the launching accessory 400 at the reference position will be described with reference to FIG. 278(a). When located at this reference position, the particulate member 320 stored in the storage area ra of the firing accessory 400 is assembled into the pachinko machine 10 so that the player playing the game can see it.

Then, when the operation scenario of the launch accessory 400 is set, the launch accessory 400 first moves to the position of preparation A shown in FIG. 278(b). The position of this preparation A is a position where the arched bottom surface has been moved downward so that it is difficult for the player who is playing the game to see the granular member 320 stored in the storage area ra of the projectile accessory 400. . The firing accessory 400 in this modification has the same configuration as the injection device (launching accessory) 400 in the first embodiment described above, and the arch-shaped bottom surface is formed by the operation of the drive motor 400, which is an electric drive source. moved downwards.

Note that at the preparation A position, no drag is applied to the elastic member, so for example, by driving the drive motor 400 in reverse, the granular member 320 can be launched from the preparation A position to the reference position. It is possible to move it without having to move it.

The launch accessory 400 needs to perform a preparatory action when actually performing a launch action, and if the preparatory action is performed only when the launch action is to be performed, the launcher will not be able to launch at the time when the preparatory action is performed. There is a problem in that the player can easily understand that the action will be executed.

On the other hand, in the second control example described above, a performance pattern is provided in which only a preparatory action is performed, so that the player cannot predict whether or not the firing action will be performed just by performing the preparatory action. It was composed of Furthermore, since the firing accessory 400 is configured to fire the granular member 320 using the restoring force of the elastic member, the operating state shifts to a state where the preparation operation is completed, that is, a state where sufficient resistance is applied to the elastic member. If this happens, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult to move the launch accessory 400 to the reference position without performing a launch operation.

Therefore, in this modification, the preparatory action A that emphasizes to the player that the preparatory action has been performed is made executable, and after the completion of the preparatory action A, the preparatory action B (an action that applies a drag force to the elastic member) is made possible. If a performance pattern is set to execute only the preparatory action, the action control to move the firing accessory 400 to the reference position after the completion of the preparatory action A is performed. are doing.

With this configuration, when a production pattern in which only a preparatory action is performed is set, the firing accessory 400 moves downward and the player can understand that the preparatory action has started, while Moreover, the preparation operation can be completed without applying any drag to the elastic member.

Furthermore, by moving the firing accessory 400 from the reference position (see FIG. 278(a)) to the preparation A (see FIG. 278(b)), the granular member 320 disappears from the player's field of view during the game. Since the projectile accessory 400 is assembled into the motion unit 500 (see FIG. 277), it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the preparation motion has been executed.

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation is omitted, when the drive motor 400m that is the drive source starts driving, larger vibrations are generated than when the drive motor 400m that is the drive source continues to drive. It consists of Therefore, when the preparatory motion is executed, the player can also be informed that the preparatory motion has been executed by the vibration generated from the drive motor 400m that is the drive source.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278(c), the launching accessory 400 located in the preparation operation B state (preparation B) will be described. When the state shown in FIG. 278(b) has elapsed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the drive motor 400m, which is the drive source, operates again, and the projectile accessory 400 moves to the preparation B position. This movement from Preparation A to Preparation B is executed with the granular member 320 already located at a position that is difficult for the player to see, so it can be made difficult for the player to notice. When moving to preparation B, a drag force is applied to the elastic member of the projectile accessory 400. In this state, when the drive motor 400m that is the drive source performs an operation to release the drag force on the elastic member (the locking member (claw) that locks the elastic member), the restoring force of the elastic member causes the granular member to 320 is fired.

In addition, in this modification, the timing to move from the preparation A state to the preparation B state is determined by performing the firing action, and the timing to move from the preparation A state to the reference state by performing only the preparation action. The configuration is such that the timing is the same as the timing. As a result, no matter which effect is executed, the drive motor 400m, which is the drive source, is driven at the same timing, so even if vibrations are generated due to the drive, it is difficult to know which effect is being executed. This can make it difficult for players to predict.

Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the timing at which the end condition of the demonstration performance is met and the operating status of the firing accessory 400. If the conditions for ending the demonstration performance are satisfied in the standard state shown in FIG. 278(a), the operational status of the firing accessory 400 will not affect the variable performance that will be executed after the end of the demonstration performance. Immediately after the demo performance termination condition is satisfied, the normal variable performance is executed.

When the end condition of the demonstration performance is satisfied in the preparation A state shown in FIG. 278(b), since no drag is applied to the elastic member, the performance of the projectile accessory 400 used in the demonstration performance is The operation is interrupted, and the demonstration effect is displayed for an extended period until the firing accessory 400 is moved to the reference state (see FIG. 277(b)), and then the variable effect is executed. Note that, since the preparation A state is a state in which no drag is applied to the elastic member, the variable effect may be executed while maintaining the preparation A state. In this case, when performing a performance using the firing accessory 400 that is first executed as a variable performance, the performance movement of the firing accessory 400 is executed based on the motion scenario from the time when it is in the preparation A state. Just let it happen.

If the end condition of the demonstration performance is satisfied in the preparation B state shown in FIG. 400 cannot be moved to the reference state. Therefore, when the conditions for ending the demonstration performance are satisfied, it is necessary to terminate the demonstration performance while maintaining the preparation B state. However, this preparation B state is a state in which a drag force is applied to the elastic member, so if the preparation B state is maintained for a long time, excessive drag force will be applied to the elastic member, causing the elastic member to recover. There was a risk that the power would decrease, leading to failure of the projectile accessory 400.

Therefore, in this modification, when the conditions for ending the demonstration performance are satisfied in the preparation B state, the performance using the firing accessory 400 is forcibly executed in the variable performance. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the preparation B state from continuing for a long time and causing the launch accessory 400 to malfunction.

Next, of the control processing contents of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification, points that are different from the above-mentioned second control example will be explained. In this modified example, in contrast to the second control example described above, the performance mode setting process (see S2191 in FIG. 279) is performed instead of the performance management process (see S2151 in FIG. The difference is that production mode setting processing B (see S2697 in FIG. 280) is executed instead of S2607 in FIG. 200, but otherwise the process is the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 279, the contents of the accessory production management process B (S2191) will be explained. This accessory production management process B (S2191) differs from the second control example described above in that a control process is added when an interruption signal is received in a state where the operation scenario of the firing accessory 400 is set. . The other processing contents are the same as the above-mentioned accessory performance management processing (see S2191 in FIG. 279), and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 279, when the accessory performance management process B (S2191) is executed, S3801 to S3804 and S3807, which are the same as the accessory performance management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) of the second control example described above, are executed. - Execute the processing of S3810. In the process of S3804, if it is determined that there is an operation scenario for the projectile accessory 400 (set) (S3804: Yes), then it is determined whether an interruption signal has been received (S3891). In the process of S3891, when a command (variation pattern command) for indicating that a new special symbol variation is started is received, it is determined that an interruption signal has been received.

Here, in this modification, similar to the second control example described above, there is a variation effect that is executed during the variation period of the special symbol, and a variation performance that is executed during the variation period of the special symbol, and a variation performance that is performed during the standby period (demonstration period) in which the special symbol variation is not executed. It is configured such that a demonstration performance using the firing accessory 400 can be executed (an operation scenario of the firing accessory 400 can be set) both in the demonstration performance to be executed. Also, in this modification, while one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is fluctuating, another special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is executed as in the second control example described above. It is configured so that it does not occur.

That is, in the state in which it was determined in the role performance management process B (S2191) that the action scenario of the firing role has been set (the state in which it was determined as Yes in the process in S3804), the interruption signal was received (the change If it is determined that a pattern command has been received), this means that a performance using the firing accessory 400 is being performed in a demonstration performance.

Then, in the process of S3891, if it is determined that the interruption signal has been received (S3891: Yes), next, it is determined whether the current operation status of the launch accessory 400 is preparation A (see FIG. 278(b)). If it is determined that it is preparation A (S3892: Yes), an interruption process is executed (S3893), and this process ends. In the process of S3893, in order to interrupt the performance using the projectile accessory 400 that is executed during the demonstration performance, the projectile accessory 400 located at the preparation A position is moved to the reference position (FIG. 278(a) (reference) is executed. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the operation scenario for moving the launch accessory 400 from the preparation A position to the reference position is predefined in the accessory operation table 222aa (see FIG. 236(a)). , when executing the interruption process, the target motion scenario is read from the accessory motion table 222aa (see FIG. 236(a)) and executed.

In this way, by executing the process of S3893, the preparation operation is executed to perform the performance using the accessory 400 during the demonstration performance, and the firing accessory 400 is located at the position of preparation A. Since the demonstration performance can be ended early when the conditions for ending the demonstration performance are fulfilled, it is possible to make it easier for players to enjoy the variable performance.

Returning to FIG. 279, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3892, if it is determined that the current state is not in preparation A (S3892: No), then it is determined whether the current state is in preparation B (see FIG. 278(c)) (S3894), and the current state is in preparation B. If it is determined that this is the case (S3894: Yes), the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON (S3895), the set operation scenario for the launching accessory 400 is cleared (S3896), and this process is ended.

Here, the emergency standby flag 223Ba is a flag for indicating that the operation of the launch accessory 400 is temporarily stopped, and is turned on when the operation of the launch accessory 400 is temporarily stopped. This is stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

The setting status of this emergency standby flag 223Ba is referred to when executing a fluctuation effect, and when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to on, the fluctuation is more effective than when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to on. It is configured so that a performance using the firing accessory 400 can be easily performed as a performance.

With this configuration, it is difficult for the state in which the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, that is, the state in which the launch accessory 400 is positioned in preparation B (see FIG. 278(c)) to continue for a long time. This allows the projectile accessory 400 to be easily prevented from malfunctioning.

In the process of S3891, if it is determined that no interruption signal has been received (S3891: No), or if it is determined in the process of S3894 that it is not preparation B (S3894), the role of the second control example described above is executed. The same processes as S3805 to S3807 (S3897) as the object performance management process (see S2151 in FIG. 242) are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the contents of the production mode setting process B (S2697) will be explained. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing the contents of production mode setting process B (S2697). The content of this performance mode setting process B (S2697) is that a process corresponding to the setting status of the emergency standby flag 223Ba is added to the production mode setting process of the second control example described above (see S2607 in FIG. 200). are different, and otherwise are the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When production mode setting processing B (S2697) is executed, first, it is determined whether the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to on (S2791), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S2791: Yes) , it is determined whether the current variation pattern allows execution of a firing effect using the firing accessory 400 (S2792). In the process of S2792, the variation time of the current variation pattern is determined, and if the length of the variation time is a predetermined time or more (30 seconds or more), it is determined that the firing effect is possible.

If it is determined in the process of S2792 that the firing effect is possible (S2792: Yes), the firing effect is set (S2793), the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to OFF (S2794), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2791, if it is determined that the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to ON (S2791: No), the process of S2701 to S2707 is the same as the production mode setting process described above (see S2607 in FIG. 200). Execute and end this process.

In this way, when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to ON, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, if the length of the variation time satisfies the predetermined condition, the production using the firing accessory 400 is performed. By making it executable, when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is set to on, the effect using the firing accessory 400 is executed as a variable effect than when the emergency standby flag 223Ba is not set to on. It is designed to be easy. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the state of preparation B to continue for a long time, and it is possible to make it easier to prevent the launch accessory 400 from malfunctioning.

The techniques used in each of the control examples described above may be combined as appropriate; for example, for setting and managing the delay period in the button effects (see Figures 136 to 138) used in the first control example. The control may be configured to be executed on the display control device 114 side similarly to the third control example.

Specifically, when setting the variable effect pattern in the audio lamp control device 113 (when executing the delay effect setting process (see S2805 in FIG. 203) in the display setting process (see S2115 in FIG. 199)), As in the first control example described above, only the delay period (delay mode for the audio production) for the audio output device 226 is set in the audio lamp control device 113, and the button production is executed without setting the delay mode for the display production. Set a display command that indicates the timing and the operation valid period (button valid period) in the button effect.

The display control device 114 extracts and sets the execution timing of the button effect and the operational validity period for the button effect based on the received display command. Then, when a press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the operation validity period in the button effect is received, whether or not to execute a delayed effect with respect to the display effect, and when to execute the delayed effect. The delay period is determined, and the delay period corresponding to the determined content is set in the delay timer.

After that, when the value of the delay timer becomes 0, a display effect is executed (image data corresponding to the display effect is generated, and a display mode indicating the effect of the button effect is changed to a third display mode based on the generated image data). (displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 81). Then, a display completion command indicating that the display effect has been executed is output to the audio lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the display completion command, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the delay period of the display performance in the button performance executed in the current button performance, and determines the performance mode to be executed next based on the determination result. Set.

In this case, a command indicating information regarding the delayed effect is not output from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 until the delay period managed by the display control device 114 has elapsed and the display effect is executed. Alternatively, a delay generation command indicating that a delay period has been set, that is, a predetermined value has been set in the delay timer, may be output to the audio lamp control device 113. good. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can grasp that the delay period will occur before the delay period has elapsed, and therefore can execute control processing corresponding to the delay period.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above has operation means (frame button 22, first button 22za, second button 22zb) that can be operated by the player, and effect execution means ( As part of the performance executed by the control process by the audio lamp control device 113, the system is configured to be able to perform an operation performance based on an operation on the operating means. When an operation performance is executed, an operation validity period is set in which the operation performed by the player on the operation means is determined to be valid, and the operation performance is determined according to the operation content performed within the operation validity period. Since the performance mode of the operation performance is variable, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned first control example, an explanation was given of an operation performance that changes the performance mode based on the operation content (for example, the number of operations) on the operation means within the operation validity period that is set continuously. For example, it may be configured such that multiple operation valid periods can be set within the performance period in which the operation performance is executed, and in this case, the content of the operation performed on the operation means within the first operation valid period. The production mode is configured to be variable based on the first production mode, and the first production mode is configured to be variable based on the content of the operation on the operating means executed within the second operation validity period set after the first operation validity period. The presentation mode may be configured to be variable to a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode. That is, the operation performance may be executed so that the performance mode is varied over a plurality of operation valid periods set within the performance period of the operation performance. Further, the performance period of the operation performance may be set so as to span a plurality of special symbol variations or a plurality of jackpot games.

In the above-mentioned first control example, when all the production modes set in the continuous hit production, that is, the production mode is changed to the final production mode based on the operation on the operation means, subsequent operations on the operation means Depending on the content, the continuous hit performance can be ended without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined period during which the continuous hit performance is executed. With this configuration, the player is forced to perform a continuous hit performance for a long time without changing the performance mode, which reduces the player's desire to play and, by extension, the desire to operate the operating means. You can prevent it from happening.

In addition, in the first control example described above, the presentation mode of the operation presentation is configured to be easily variable when the player operates the operation means voluntarily within the operation validity period, but this is not limited to this. It may be possible to configure the presentation mode so that it is easier to change the performance mode without operating the operating means. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting whether or not to operate the operating means during the valid operation period.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, the operation performance result is displayed once based on the operation contents of the operation means within the operation validity period, but the operation effect is not limited to this. For example, when a 10 second operation validity period is set as the operation validity period, a predetermined operation condition (for example, when the operation means is If the operation condition (which is satisfied when the operation is performed twice) is satisfied, the first operation performance result is displayed, and after the first operation performance result is displayed, if there is a remaining period in the operation validity period, the first operation performance result is displayed again. The second operation effect result may be displayed by satisfying a predetermined operation condition. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the display contents of the operation performance results that are displayed multiple times to be variable. Specifically, it is possible to configure the display contents of the operation performance results that are displayed multiple times, and specifically, to configure the true operation performance results and the pseudo operation performance results to be settable, It is preferable to provide a determining means for determining whether to display the result of the operation performance, and to display the result of any operation performance each time the operation condition is satisfied. In this way, by configuring the system so that the results of multiple operations can be displayed within one operation validity period, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

Furthermore, in this case, a condition variable means for changing the predetermined operating conditions each time the operation effect result is displayed, and a limiting means for limiting the number of times the operation effect result can be displayed within one operation validity period are provided. Also good. In addition, the number of times limited by the limiting means may be configured to be varied based on the content of the operation of the operating means executed during the performance period of the operation performance. It may be configured such that the more the operation is performed, the more times the operation performance result can be displayed, or the operation performance result can be displayed more if the operation means is not operated during the operation validity period than when it is operated. It may be configured so that the number of times of display is increased. Further, the probability that the true operation performance result will be displayed may be configured to be varied based on the operation content of the operating means executed during the performance period of the operation performance.

In the second control example described above, an abnormality determination process is executed in which an abnormality determination of the ejection accessory (projection accessory) 400 (an abnormality determination as to whether the granular member 320 is stored) is performed at a specific timing, and the abnormality determination is performed. Depending on the result of the process, it is configured to perform a performance using the projectile accessory 400, perform a retry process to perform abnormality determination again, or perform a process to switch to another performance. However, without being limited to this, for example, after performing a performance using the ejection accessory (projection accessory) 400, the ejection accessory (projection accessory) 400 is in a normal state, that is, the granular member 320 is in a normal state. It may be configured to execute different processes depending on the length of time required to reach the state where the projectile object 400 is stored. If it is determined that the member 320 has been properly stored, a predetermined performance (for example, a series of accessory performances) is continued, and the performance using the firing accessory 400 is performed for 4 to 5 seconds. During this time, a delay period is set, and during this delay period, execution of a series of accessory performances can be delayed, and if it is determined that the granular member 320 is normally stored during this delay period, immediately after that, Alternatively, after the delay period has elapsed, the series of accessory effects is restarted, and even if 5 seconds have passed since the performance using the firing accessory 400 was executed (even if the delay period has elapsed), the granular member 320 is not normally stored. If not, the content of the series of accessory performances may be changed to a performance mode in which the firing accessory 400 is not used. In addition, in this case, if it is determined that the granular member 320 is normally stored within 2 seconds after the performance using the firing accessory 400 is executed, a shortened storage state is set, and the specific performance is continued for a predetermined period (launching). It may be configured such that the performance is executed for a period of 4 seconds after the performance using the accessory 400 is performed.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform different performances depending on the length of the period from when the performance using the projectile accessory 400 is performed until the granular member 320 is normally stored. It is possible to prevent a player from getting bored with the game early.

As described above, in the first to fourth control examples described above, the specific area (probability variable switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 is activated during the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a high probability state (probability variable state) of a special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game by the passage of the symbol. As a configuration that can provide the player with a special game different from the bonus game based on the ball passing through a specific area while the ball is being executed, for example, a lottery result different from a jackpot winning in a special symbol lottery. When a small win is won, a second bonus game (small win game) different from the bonus game (big win game) can be executed, and a variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that is opened and operated during the second bonus game. 65 or other winning devices may be provided separately), a specific area is provided through which the entered ball can pass, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the second bonus game, the second bonus is awarded. A configuration may be used in which a bonus game (big win game) can be executed after the game (small win game) ends.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command Although a case has been described in which the information is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, winnings to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 are held up to a maximum of four times, and passing through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved pitches is not limited to this, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first ball entrance 64, can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as follows.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display may be performed by moving the symbols vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it may be difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data possessed by the display control device 114.

In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is highlighted and displayed to the player and displaying the secondary symbol. Moreover, as the structure of the display means, a structure other than a liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the target area (gaming area) of the game board 13 is changed depending on the gaming state, but the invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state (time saving) that is advantageous to the player is changed. It may be configured such that a left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of a game state (normal state) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. . Further, a left-handed game may be executed during the time saving state, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the frame button 22 is used to determine that the operation means has been operated when the player presses it. However, other configurations may be used. It may also be possible to use a lever-shaped operating means that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or forward or backward, or whether it has been operated by the player touching or coming close to it. It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. Further, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used to change the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. However, it is only necessary to be able to change the performance mode of various performances performed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation on the frame button 22. For example, the display mode of the frame button 22 may be It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operating means (frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, audio lamp control device 113, audio output device 226, lamp display A control device that can generate an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even if a plurality of performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of performance operation means can be centrally managed. It is possible to smoothly set the performance mode for the player's operation on the means.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine from the control examples described above. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which a plurality of levels of probability combinations (commonly referred to as settings) are provided for the jackpot lottery, and the settings can be changed at the game parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, for pachinko machines that have multiple settings, the combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of jackpot probability in a low probability state and jackpot probability in a variable probability state) can be set in one of multiple stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to , but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the pachinko machine is capable of varying the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot depending on the settings. It's okay. That is, the rate at which jackpots of a type advantageous to the player are determined may be varied, or the rate at which jackpots of a type disadvantageous to the player are determined, may be varied depending on the settings. More specifically, for example, the rate at which jackpots are determined with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied depending on the settings, or the rate at which jackpots are determined with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may also be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting is varied by varying the proportion of each setting. In addition, for example, after the jackpot ends, the ratio at which a jackpot is determined that will give a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) can be varied depending on the setting, or a jackpot that will give a small number of time savings (for example, 0 times). The rate at which the is determined may be varied depending on the settings. Furthermore, the rate at which jackpots are determined to transition (or are likely to transition) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot can be varied according to settings, or may be changed to a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, normal state). ) may be changed depending on the setting. Further, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided which has a significantly higher probability of being determined only in a specific setting (almost never being determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the settings can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to 6. In setting 6, if there is a jackpot, a 6-round jackpot is determined 2% of the time, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only 0.01% of the time. It may also be a configuration. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, there is an extremely high possibility that the most advantageous setting is 6, so the player is forced to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot when playing the game. be able to. In addition, instead of this, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the proportion of the jackpot type in which 66 time saving times are given after the jackpot ends is higher than in other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the accessory inside the jackpot) operates in a different operation pattern from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the ratio of determination becomes higher) with a specific setting. In addition, when changing the combination of jackpot probabilities depending on the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the setting is less favorable to the player. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot probability increases as the number increases. This configuration is particularly suitable for a type of game ball type in which the number of special symbol drawings increases as the number of drawings for special symbols increases (the number of prize balls paid out is easier to increase than the number of game balls fired). Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying this to a type of gaming machine that has a configuration in which the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, and in which the variable probability state has a high probability of winning a small win, the advantage of high settings can be realized. You can improve your sexuality. That is, when the probability of a jackpot is low in a variable probability state, the number of drawings until the next jackpot is likely to be increased, so there are many chances to win a small jackpot and win a prize ball. Therefore, when the probability changes, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 that can set settings in multiple stages, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202b that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the main controller 110 is determined based on the set value. or the type of the variation pattern selection table 222a that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation production) of the third symbol with the audio lamp control device 113, or the detailed production executed as the variation production. It is preferable to configure the system so that the types of various selection tables that are referred to when selecting an aspect are different. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the setting values set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the content of the variable effect to be executed, so that the variable effect that the player is interested in can be executed. be able to.

In addition, if the data table that is referred to when selecting the performance mode of the operation performance is changed based on the setting values set in the pachinko machine 10, the settings that are set as the performance mode of the operation performance may be changed. The presentation mode of "setting suggestion" for suggesting a value is specified so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each setting value, and the presentation mode of "setting suggestion" is executed. It is preferable to configure the content of the operation performance to vary according to each set value, and to vary the selection ratio of other performance modes according to the set value. With this configuration, when a "setting suggestion" operation effect that directly suggests a setting value is executed, the content of that effect is displayed, and when any other operation effect is executed, each effect mode is displayed. By understanding the selection ratio in a composite manner, it becomes possible to predict the setting values set in the pachinko machine 10, thereby making the players interested in the various operation effects that will be executed. be able to.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the selection ratio of each performance mode in the operation performance is configured to vary depending on the set gaming state, so for example, from the setting "1" which is disadvantageous to the player, In a pachinko machine 10 in which setting values can be set in six stages up to setting "6", which is advantageous to the player, settings "1" to "3" are set, and the first game is advantageous to the player. The selection ratio of the operation effects selected when the state (variable state) is set, and the settings "4" to "6" are set, and the first game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. 2. By making the selection ratio of the operation presentations that are selected when the gaming state (time saving state) is set the same, it is possible to play the pachinko machine 10 in which setting values that are disadvantageous to the player are set. It is possible to make the player who is playing the game think that the setting value that is advantageous to the player is set.

In addition, as in the first control example described above, the same production mode is used when the first gaming state (variable probability state) is set and when the second gaming state (time saving state) is set. By setting the "chance mode", if a configuration is used that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the currently set gaming state, the above-mentioned effect can be made more noticeable. . Further, as in the first control example described above, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the second gaming state is set after the first gaming state ends, it is determined whether or not the first gaming state has actually been set. By making it more difficult, the effect can be more pronounced.

In this way, the production mode is adjusted based on the setting values set in the pachinko machine 10 and other gaming conditions (jackpot lottery results, set gaming conditions, selected variation pattern (variation time)). By configuring the selection ratio to be variable, it is possible to prevent players from easily determining the setting values set in the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, slot machines are well-known machines in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and the symbol active line determined, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

All or part of the embodiments and control examples described above may be combined.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Production that incorporates randomness>
A gaming machine comprising an action means, a displacement means configured to be able to be displaced by receiving an action from the action means, and an auxiliary means configured such that the displacement means has a plurality of displacement modes. A1.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a displacement means that is displaceably disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display area and is displaced as a drive device such as a motor is driven (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095 ). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the movement pattern of the displacement means is poor, the presentation on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the player's attention level gradually decreases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the auxiliary means changes the displacement mode of the displacement means into a plurality of modes, so that the displacement of the displacement means can be made complicated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and it is possible to maintain the player's attention at a high level.

Note that the specific example of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a box-shaped space constructing means that constitutes a space in which the displacing means can be displaced, or a pushing device that changes the displacement mode of the displacing means by displacing and pushing the displacing means by a drive device separate from the acting means. It can also be a means. Further, the drive device for the pushing means may also be used as a drive device for driving the action means.

In gaming machine A1, the acting means is capable of configuring a first state in which a first acting part can act on the displacing means and a second state in which a second acting part can act on the displacing means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A1, the portions at which the action means act on the displacement means can be made different, so even if the action of the action means is the same, the displacement The displacement mode of the means can be varied.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the acting means includes abutting means that applies a load by abutting against the displacing means, and is configured to be able to generate loads in a plurality of ways via the abutting means. A gaming machine A3 featuring:

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1 or A2, there are a plurality of types of load modes generated through the contact means, so that the displacement mode of the displacement means can be made into a plurality of types.

In gaming machine A3, the contact means is configured to be displaceable and includes a first contact portion configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means, and a first contact portion configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means. and a second abutting part different from the first abutting part, and the angle between the displacement direction of the abutting means and the first abutting part (or the tangent line of the first abutting part) when viewed in a predetermined direction is A game machine A4 characterized in that the angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the second contact portion (or the tangent to the second contact portion) is different from the angle when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacement means can be varied without changing the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement of the displacement means can be made in multiple types. It can be generated in the direction of

In gaming machine A4, the abutting means is configured such that tangent lines drawn to the first abutting part and the second abutting part, which are parallel to each other, are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the abutting means. A gaming machine A5 comprising:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A4, it is possible to apply a load to the displacement means in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means can be displaced with less energy loss. can be done. This makes it possible to ensure a large amount of displacement of the displacement means.

Any one of gaming machines A1 to A5 is provided with a load generating means configured to be able to generate a load for displacing the acting means, and the load generating means generates a load at a position where the displacing means are more densely arranged. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that it is configured to generate.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A5, it is possible to efficiently transmit the load to the displacement means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A6, the acting means is supported in a supporting manner that allows a change in posture, and the change in posture occurs on a side where it is easier to maintain a balance in arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the acting means. A gaming machine A7 featuring:

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A6, the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained by changing the posture of the action means, so that local overload of the action means is prevented. This can be avoided.

Note that the cause of the change in posture of the action means is not limited at all. For example, this may be caused by balancing the load from the displacement means, or a drive device may be provided to change the posture of the action means. When changing the posture of the acting means by balancing the load from the displacement means, it is possible to easily change the posture of the acting means by providing multiple lengths from the part facing the displacement means to the supporting position of the acting means. It is possible to generate multiple types of nuisance.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes a guiding means configured to be able to guide the displacement of the displacing means, and the guiding means is capable of guiding the displacement of the displacing means in one direction. and a second guide part capable of guiding the displacement of the displacement means in another direction, and the first guide part and the second guide part are arranged on a surface facing the displacement means. A gaming machine A8 characterized in that the formation mode is different.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be varied depending on the displacement direction of the displacement means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A8, the acting means is configured to be displaceable, and is configured such that the ease of maintaining balance of the displacing means changes depending on its arrangement, and is arranged at a position where it is easy to maintain balance of the displacing means. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is configured to be able to act on the displacement means.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

A gaming machine A10 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, wherein the displacement means includes one or more members, and the members are configured not to be connected to each other.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from joining together and becoming a lump. Therefore, a configuration in which a plurality of members are scattered can be easily realized.

In the gaming machine A10, the gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the member.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A10, the posture of the displacement means can be stabilized when the displacement means is arranged in the action means.

Note that the method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially making holes in the member may be used.

<Changes due to advancing/retracting means that move back and forth within the range of displacement of the displacement means>
The arrangement means is configured to be able to be placed in a predetermined range, and the advance/retreat means is configured to be displaceable in an advance/retreat direction with respect to the range, and the advance/retreat means is configured to move into a predetermined part of the range, thereby displacing the range. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that the width of the gaming machine B1 is configured to be changeable, and the width can be changed in a plurality of ways.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, which includes a first movable member that displaces left and right, and a second movable member that enters into a range created between the first movable members as the first movable member is displaced. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-231434). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is only one displacement mode when the second movable member enters the range, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the displacement mode of the second movable member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advancing/retracting means has a plurality of ways in which the width of the range changes when it enters the range, it is possible to configure the displacement means in a plurality of ways. It is possible to improve the displacement mode.

Note that the mode of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a granular performance member made of a resin material, a powder member, a liquid, or a game ball.

Further, there is no limitation on the method of configuring a plurality of types of changing modes of the width of the range due to the displacement of the advancing/retracting means. For example, the entrance side of the advancing/retracting means may be formed of an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by having parts with different widths entering the range, or the width of the range may be changed by changing the displacement width of the advancing/retracting means. The width may be made variable.

In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-like means configured to prevent the placement means from going in and out, and is configured to be changeable, and the advancing/retracting means enters the range when it is in a non-changing state. A gaming machine B2, wherein the box-shaped means is configured to be able to be displaced in a manner that the advancing and retracting means can be inserted thereinto, and the box-shaped means is provided with an opening formed in such a manner that the positioning means cannot be inserted therethrough.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1, it is possible to allow the advance/retreat means to enter the range through the opening, while preventing the arrangement means from falling out of the range.

Note that the arrangement of the openings is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed in a location that is difficult for the placement means to reach. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the placement means will accidentally drop out of the range. Further, the open portion may be arranged at a location where the load from the arrangement means is less likely to occur (for example, on the upper side as the opposite side in the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to avoid that the load from the placement means is applied to the advancing/retracting means during displacement, and that the displacement of the advancing/retreating means is obstructed or damage occurs in the advancing/retracting means or the arranging means.

A gaming machine B3 in the gaming machine B1 or B2, wherein the advancing/retracting means is configured to guide the arranging means in different directions depending on the direction in which it comes into contact with the arranging means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the arrangement means are guided in different directions by the same advancing and retreating means. This makes it possible to increase the number of types of performances, thereby improving the performance effects of performances using the arrangement means and the advance/retreat means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advance/retreat means is configured such that, in a state in which it enters the range, a gap between it and the opposing surface of the range is shorter than the width of the arrangement means. A game machine B4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, even if the arranging means is disposed on the side far from the advancing/retracting means, the advancing/retracting means can be moved to the arranging means in the entered state. It can be made to work.

Note that it may be configured such that there is no gap between the advancing/retracting means and the opposing surface of the range. Further, it may be configured such that there is a gap in one part and there is no gap in another part.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the advancing/retracting means is configured to enter the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip on the entry side, the representative tip farthest from the axis is the A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is configured such that the gap between the range and the range is the shortest.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the representative tip, where the positional deviation from the axis is likely to be the largest, enters the range first, so that the deviation from the axis can be improved. It is possible to quickly respond to positional deviations and reduce the resistance to subsequent entry operations.

In the gaming machine B5, the representative tip portion includes a predetermined protruding portion, and is formed so as to be inclined toward the side receding from the range as the distance from the protruding portion increases along the axial direction. Game machine B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B5, the arrangement means can be displaced away from the predetermined projecting portion during the approach process of the advancing and retracting means.

In the gaming machine B6, the advancing/retracting means has a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhang in the axial direction.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the shape of the advancing/retracting means is such that the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging part, so that the arrangement means displaced by the overhanging part It is possible to secure a location for the installation.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a shape where the range side is open. For example, the shape may be such that the range side is open before the advancing/retracting means enters, or the shape may be such that the range side is open when the advancing/retreating means enters.

Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7 includes a drive means capable of generating a driving force, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the advance/retreat means, the transmitter and the advance/retreat means This means that the driving force is transmitted by contact, and the contact area of the contact surface between the transmission means and the advancing/retracting means is configured to be changeable, and the contact area is determined by the approach of the advancing/retracting means into the range. A gaming machine B8 is characterized in that it is configured such that it reaches a maximum at the beginning and then decreases.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the contact area is configured such that the contact area is maximized at the beginning of the approach where a large load is likely to occur when the advancing/retracting means starts contacting the arrangement means. By doing so, the load applied per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced.
Thereby, the durability of the advancing/retracting means and the transmission means can be improved.

Note that the mode of the advancing/retracting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for displacing outside the gaming area or a means for displacing within the gaming area.

<Synchronized operation of two members using transmission cam>
A drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable and made up of one or more members, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, the transmission means comprising: A first transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the first target section of the displacement means in a first aspect; A gaming machine C1 comprising: a second transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to a second target section.

A drive device used for displacing a displacement means in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a first drive device for vertically displacing the displacement means and a second drive device for rotationally displacing the displacement means. There are gaming machines (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-202210). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if the first drive device and the second drive device are synchronized to displace a plurality of displacement devices in order to execute the motion performance of the displacement devices, the drive timings are shifted. There is a problem in that the possibility cannot be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means tends to become unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means is provided with a first transmission section and a second transmission section, and the driving force is transmitted to the first target section or the second target section of the displacement means, respectively. With this structure, transmission of the driving force to the first target part and the second target part can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

Note that the timing at which the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, the driving force may be transmitted at different times, or a combination thereof (partially transmitted simultaneously) may be used.

Moreover, when transmitting the driving force to the first target part and the second target part at the same time, it is preferable to arrange the driving force such that at least a part of the driving force is generated along the direction of gravity. This makes it possible to utilize the vehicle's own weight for driving force transmission.

The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the driving force transmission to the first target section and the driving force transmission to the second target section occur at different times in the gaming machine C1.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C1, by keeping the maximum value of the drive resistance low, it is possible to suppress the driving force required of the drive means.

Note that driving force transmission here may mean a load in the traveling direction where the transmission means is displaced by the driving force, or it can mean a load transmission caused by a displacement caused by the driving force without considering the traveling direction. Also good.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target part and a second member having the second target part, and the displacement means has a displacement locus of the first member and the second member. The displacement locus of A game machine C3 characterized in that it is configured to be able to transmit driving force to the second member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to configure a plurality of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means. In other words, the driving force can be directly transmitted to the second member from the transmission means, and the driving force can be indirectly transmitted to the second member via the first member.

In the game machine C3, the second member is configured to be retractable to a position where it does not come into contact with the first member when the first member is displaced toward the predetermined position. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C3, it is possible to avoid the first member being displaced from coming into contact with the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs when the first member reaches a predetermined position and stops, so that the mode of driving force transmission to the second member can be smoothly switched. can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmission means.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C3 or C4, the driving force transmission mode can be switched by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member is stabilized. This makes it possible to avoid unintentional collision or contact of each member.

Any one of gaming machines C3 to C5 includes a biasing means configured to bias the second member in a predetermined direction, and the driving force is transmitted to the second member in a direction opposing the biasing force. A game machine C6 in which the first member is arranged on the side in the predetermined direction with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the first member is placed in a predetermined position while the second member is placed on the opposite side in a predetermined direction with respect to the first member. I can do it. This makes it possible to determine the timing for displacing the second member against the urging force as the transmission means is displaced, and the timing for stopping the second member against the urging force.

The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmitting section of the transmitting means is displaced toward the predetermined direction. .

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C6, a part of the load necessary for displacing the first member can be generated by the urging force of the urging means. That is, the biasing force can be used supplementarily.

In any one of gaming machines C3 to C7, the second transmission section is capable of forming a non-contact state in which it is not in contact with the second member, and in the non-contact state, the second transmission section is configured to control the displacement of the second member. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the second member is configured so that the second transmission section does not interfere with the movement of the user.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member is a displacement state in which it is pushed by the second transmission part and a displacement state in which it is separated from the second transmission part. can be configured.

In any of gaming machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel to the predetermined direction from a contact point between the first member and the transmission means arranged in the predetermined arrangement causes the displacement of the transmission means in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulating section.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the regulating portion blocks the biasing force transmitted to the transmission means via the first member, so that the biasing force reaches the driving means. can be prevented (to a lesser extent).

Note that the mode of the regulating section is not limited at all. For example, it may be a guide portion that limits displacement to sliding displacement by regulating displacement, or a shaft support that limits displacement to rotational displacement.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means is in a first state in which it is displaced or stopped by receiving the driving force of the drive means, and in a first state in which it receives a load from the second target portion. A gaming machine C10 characterized in that the gaming machine C10 is configured to be able to change its state between a second state in which it is displaced and stopped.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target portion can be complicated.

<Load transmission is cut off by limiting load generation to times when the device is far away.>
A gaming machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, the abutment abutting against the displacement means. and a non-contact state in which the displacement means is not in contact with the displacement means, the first means being configured to be able to change its state between the state and the non-contact state in which it is not in contact with the displacement means, and an object to which a load applied from the outside is transmitted to the first means is configured to be switchable. A game machine D1 characterized by:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the displacement means consisting of one movable body that is displaced by the driving force of the driving means comes into contact with another movable body at the displacement terminal position (upper end position) and can receive a load. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-028623). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the load from another movable body may be transmitted to the drive means via the displacement means, and the state of the drive means (for example, the rotation angle of the motor) due to control, Since there is a possibility that there will be a difference in the state of the actual driving means, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the driving state.

It is also conceivable that the load applied to the drive means may cause the operating resistance of the drive means to increase or decrease unstably, leading to accelerated deterioration of the drive means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the driving state of the driving means can be stabilized. Furthermore, by suppressing unstable increases and decreases in the operating resistance of the drive means, the durability of the drive means can be improved.

Note that the method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing the load may be interposed in the contact portion, or the displacement of the first means that causes the load (for example, the first means receiving an external force) may cause the first means to absorb the load. It may be configured so that this occurs only in a non-contact state.

A gaming machine D2 in the gaming machine D1, wherein the load that the displacement means receives from the first means and the driving force that the displacement means receives via the transmission means face the same side.

According to the game machine D2, the load applied to the displacement means can be reduced compared to the case where the load from the first means and the driving force face opposite sides.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 is provided with a placement means arranged so as to collide with the first means, and is configured such that the collision of the placement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. A gaming machine D3 is characterized in that:

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1 or D2, since the collision of the arrangement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, the load transmission between the transmission means and the displacement means is prevented. Can be blocked.

Note that the collision of the arrangement means may occur when the first means is in contact with the first means, or may occur when the first means is not in contact with the first means. If a collision of the arrangement means occurs in a non-contact state, the load transmission between the first means and the displacement means can be interrupted. ), load transmission to the drive means can be suppressed.

In any one of gaming machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means, and the contact portion is bent in the direction of the load generated by the contact ( A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it is configured flexibly to the extent that it can be deformed.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means. can do.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means include a second abutting part configured to be able to come into contact with each other, and the second contact part of at least one of the first means or the displacement means The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the contact portion is made of a material capable of absorbing impact.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines D1 to D4, the second contact portion can absorb shock, so that it is possible to suppress load transmission to the driving means.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5 is characterized in that it includes a biasing means for biasing the displacement means, and a standby position of the displacement means is set at an end of a displacement range in a biasing direction of the biasing means. A gaming machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid shifting of the standby position of the displacement means (the position where it waits for load generation from the transmission means). It is easy to set the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means at an appropriate position for controlling the transmission means to operate at high speed until the position where the first means and the displacement means are separated. Thereby, the driving means can be controlled easily and appropriately.

Furthermore, by reducing the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid the first means and the displacement means from inadvertently coming into contact with each other.

A gaming machine D7 in any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, wherein the first means is allowed to change its posture due to a collision of the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the load from the arrangement means can be used to change the attitude of the first means, so that load transmission to the driving means is suppressed. be able to.

In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means exerts the urging force of the urging means. and the transmission means is in contact with the displacement means, displacing the displacement means in a direction opposite to the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means, and the first biasing force of the biasing force is A gaming machine D8 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state between an ineffective contact state in which transmission to the means is disabled and a non-contact state in which the first means and the displacement means are separated.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D6 or D7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease with which the position of the arrangement means changes in response to a collision).

<Regulating one of the forward and reverse rotations with conditions>
The displacement means is configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point from which the displacement mode changes, and from the reference position, a plurality of types of displacement means are provided. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to be displaced to the predetermined position.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that control the same movable accessory to perform different actions in multiple performances (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73517). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, different operations correspond to whether or not the drive direction of the drive device is switched, so the type of performance can be determined from the drive sound of the drive device, and the performance that will be executed from now on. There is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the perspective of increasing player interest because the player can predict what will happen.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the determination participation means can make it difficult for the player to determine the performance that will be executed from now on. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Note that the displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, a hit performance and a miss performance may be different performances that involve displacement of the displacement means. In this case, if the displacement means is displaced to the predetermined position in one manner, it will be known whether the displacement from the predetermined position is correct (for example, a driving sound is generated). On the other hand, by providing a plurality of displacement modes, even if a displacement occurs (for example, a driving sound is generated), it can be difficult to determine whether the displacement is correct or not.

Further, the mode of displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be a path, a displacement velocity, or a displacement velocity pattern.

The gaming machine E1 includes a driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and a regulating means for regulating displacement of the displacing means, and the regulating means is configured such that the driving means generates a driving force. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the gaming machine E2 is configured to be able to regulate displacement of the displacement means when the displacement means is not in use.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E1, the driving sound of the drive means can be suppressed when the displacement means is regulated, so that when the displacement means is regulated, it is possible to eliminate whether the driving direction is the forward direction when the game machine E2 is driven again after that. This can make it difficult to determine whether the direction is the opposite direction.

Moreover, unlike the case where the drive means continues to generate driving force when performing a long-time performance (long reach, etc.) with the displacement of the displacement means regulated, generation of heat by the drive means can be suppressed.

A gaming machine E3 in the gaming machine E1 or E2, wherein the regulating means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacing means by the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of driving means can be reduced compared to the case where a driving means for driving the regulating means is provided separately.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a determination involvement means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to determine in which mode the displacement is occurring among the plurality of types of modes. E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the discriminating means can be configured so that it is difficult to distinguish the displacement mode of the displacing means in a predetermined section. Compared to the case where it is difficult to distinguish the displacement mode only in this case, it is easier to continue the displacement of the displacement means while the displacement mode is difficult to discriminate.

A gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the gaming machine E4 is configured such that the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E4, it is possible to switch the drive direction of the drive means while maintaining the displacement means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being discovered from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such as starting the drive means before notifying the propriety.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5 is provided with a detection means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means, and the detection means determines switching of executable displacement among the displacements in the plurality of displacement modes. A gaming machine E6 characterized in that it also serves as a determining means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for determining the displacement mode switching can be used both, so that the detection sensor is The number of devices installed can be reduced.

<Sense of unity of multiple parts>
A gaming machine in which a first member and a second member are configured to be displaceable, wherein the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is different between the first member and the second member. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a first member and a second member configured to be displaceable are controlled to move up and down while maintaining a close state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-231434 ). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement of the first member and the second member occurs on the same straight line, so depending on the speed at which the first member and the second member approach each other, there is a risk that the first member and the second member may move back after contacting each other. Yes, it may look bad. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of maintaining the performance mode regardless of the displacement speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is made different. For example, the displacement mode of the first member and the second member is not to make them approach each other on the same straight line, but to change the direction and approach each other after approaching each other on a different straight line, so that the first member and the second member It is possible to avoid reversion and maintain the presentation mode easily.

In the game machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is divided into at least a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparation section for coming into contact with each other; The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second member is configured to have different postures in the first section and the second section.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

A gaming machine F3, which is the gaming machine F1 or F2, and includes a load generating means capable of generating a load directed toward maintaining the close arrangement of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

Note that the load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a fixed direction or a load of a fixed magnitude. For example, if the load that the player is likely to receive (for example, the performance mode that generates an external force) changes depending on the situation (for example, the gaming state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generation means may be changed accordingly.

Further, the load by the load generating means does not need to be generated all the time. For example, generation of a load and elimination of the load may be switched in accordance with the above-mentioned changes in the situation. Note that the load generating means may be external.

The gaming machine F3 includes a displacement generating means configured to displace at least one of the first member or the second member, and configured to be able to configure a predetermined state by the displacement, and the load generating means is configured to displace at least one of the first member or the second member, and the load generating means A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is configured integrally with a generating means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to appropriately maintain the relationship between the timing of load generation by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member, thereby eliminating the deviated timing. This can prevent loads from occurring.

Further, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can complement each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

In gaming machine F4, gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the predetermined state is a contacting state in which at least a portion of the first member is in contact with the second member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F4, it is possible to easily perform a performance in which the gap between the first member and the second member is filled.

A gaming machine F6 characterized in that in the gaming machine F4 or F5, the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F4 or F5, it is possible to avoid the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in states other than the predetermined state.

A gaming machine F7, in any one of gaming machines F3 to F6, wherein the load generating means is configured to generate a load at a plurality of locations on the first member or the second member.

According to the game machine F7, in any of the game machines F3 to F6, the load generating means generates a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of locations, so that the state is not limited to maintaining the state against displacement in one direction. It is also possible to maintain the state of the first member or the second member against changes in posture. Thereby, even if the first member and the second member are three-dimensionally configured, it is possible to avoid noticeable deviations in their arrangement.

In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded parts that receive a load from the load generating means, and the plurality of loaded parts include a first loaded part and a first loaded part. a second loaded part having a larger displacement relative to the load generating means than the loaded part, and the load generating means applies a load to the first loaded part before the second loaded part. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be applied to the first member or the second member in stages. Furthermore, the role of the load applied to the first loaded section and the second loaded section can be separated. For example, the first loaded part can be used to arrange the position at a predetermined position, and the second loaded part can be used to adjust the posture.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, the load generating means has a portion that applies a load to the first member or the second member toward the side opposite to gravity, compared to other portions of the first member. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the opposing surface facing the second member has a long facing length.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the sagging of the first member or the second member due to its own weight. On the other hand, in other parts, since the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

A gaming machine F10 characterized in that, in any of gaming machines F3 to F9, the first member and the second member can be assembled in a state where the first member and the second member are separated. .

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the first member or the second member due to the load generated during the assembly work. That is, compared to the case where the assembly work is performed in a state of contact, it is easier to avoid load transmission between the first member and the second member, so the first member and the second member can be assembled without damage. can.

As a result, it is possible to provide the first and second members with contact surfaces as designed, thereby preventing situations where the load from the load generating means is more likely to cause misalignment, such as when there is a gap. can do.

<Multiple types of wobbling states of displacement means>
A gaming machine G0 comprising a displacement means and an action means for displacing the displacement means, the action means being configured to suppress a change in attitude of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a displacement means configured to enable displacement consisting of a change in position and rotation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, although the part that supports the displacement means disposed at the tip of the arm is formed with a large diameter, it is necessary to provide a gap to ensure displacement, so the position of the displacement means is There was a problem in that measures against changes were not sufficient and there was room for improvement from the perspective of suppressing changes in the posture of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G0, the configuration of the action means can suppress the change in the posture of the displacement means. Thereby, even if the space in which displacement of the displacement means is allowed is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid a collision between the displacement means and the wall member forming the space.

Note that the direction of the attitude change of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be tilted about a straight line along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction, etc.), or it may be oscillated about a straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction, etc.).

The gaming machine G1 in the gaming machine G0 is characterized in that the acting means is configured to be able to increase or decrease the acting force for suppressing a change in the posture of the displacing means in accordance with the arrangement position of the displacing means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0, the degree of suppression of the change in posture of the displacement means can be changed in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. As a result, the space for disposing the displacement means can be narrowed while maintaining a high degree of freedom in the performance of the displacement means.

For example, when the displacement means reciprocates, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse at the end of the displacement where the direction of displacement is switched. By increasing the number, it is possible to suppress the posture of the displacement means from collapsing.

In addition, for example, when the displacement means itself is scaled/contracted or rotated by the driving force installed in the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse, so the driving force generation position By increasing the number of acting force generation positions, it is possible to suppress the posture of the displacement means from collapsing.

A gaming machine G2 characterized in that in the gaming machine G0 or G1, the acting means is configured to support the displacing means with a plurality of main supporting means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of the displacing means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G0 or G1, since the operating means supports the displacing means with a plurality of main supporting means on the horizontal plane at the center of gravity of the displacing means, the displacing means is prevented from tilting. It can be made easier.

In the gaming machine G2, the acting means includes an auxiliary supporting means that supports the displacing means at a position different from the horizontal plane where the main supporting means is arranged.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the displacing means is supported by the main supporting means and the auxiliary supporting means at three or more support points that are not arranged in a straight line, so that the displacing means is improved. Posture changes can be suppressed in all directions.

In the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as a guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means can be added with a function not only as a supporting force generating position but also as a position for guiding displacement.

In the game machine G1, the displacement means can be displaced in a manner that increases or decreases the area when viewed in a predetermined direction, and the action means is configured such that the acting force generation position is maximum at a displacement end position of the displacement means. The game machine G5 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, it is possible to generate an acting force on the displacing means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the effect of increasing the area of the displacing means is most effective. , it is possible to effectively suppress changes in the posture of the displacement means.

Furthermore, by relatively reducing the position where the acting force is generated during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be made smoother. That is, while the displacement means is displacing, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia accompanying the displacement, so if the position where the acting force is generated is increased unnecessarily, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means increases. , the problem is that the drive device becomes larger.

On the other hand, by configuring to reduce the number of acting force generation positions at positions other than the displacement end position, it is possible to avoid excessive displacement resistance of the displacement means and to avoid increasing the size of the drive device.

<Propeller unit wiring guide>
The electric wiring displacement means includes a displacement means, an electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and an electric wiring displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that the predetermined portion is configured to be able to be displaced to a side that avoids the displacement means when the gaming machine H1 is displaced toward a side that approaches the displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is attached to a long member that interlocks with the displacement means, thereby limiting the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-157474 (see official bulletin). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue displacing beyond the electric wiring in order to avoid contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring. Since a space is required for arranging the electric wiring outside, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, since the electric wiring displacement means is configured to be able to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring to the side avoiding the displacement means, contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring is actively prevented. Therefore, the displacement means can be configured to be displaced beyond the electrical wiring. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means can be increased.

Note that there is no limitation in the case where the displacement means approaches the predetermined portion. For example, the case may be such that there is a risk of the displacement means and the predetermined portion coming into contact if the predetermined portion is stopped, or the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means may be closer than the reference length.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be movable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is movable in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H1, the amount of displacement of the displacement means in the predetermined plane formed by the first direction and the second direction can be avoided from being limited by the electric wiring.

A gaming machine H3 in the gaming machine H2, wherein the first direction and the second direction are parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set along the predetermined directional view, so that the displacement of the electric wiring causes the displacement in the predetermined directional view. The effect on visibility can be reduced.

Any one of gaming machines H1 to H3 includes a stopping means for stopping a second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring disposed on the opposite side of the displacing means with respect to the predetermined portion, and the electrical wiring displacing means A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the second predetermined portion is configured to be easily displaced with respect to the stop means.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines H1 to H3, it is possible to improve the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged in the stop means.

Note that the configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the stop means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is arranged in a spiral shape in the stop means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed in along the tangential direction of the outer circumference of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be arranged in a movable member. In the case of being guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed in so as to displace the movable member.

A gaming machine H5 in the gaming machine H4, wherein the stopping means is disposed outward from a displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, since the stopping means is disposed outward from the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction, the stopping means is extended to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. It can be configured as follows. As a result, the amount of electrical wiring that can be accommodated in the stopping means can be increased, so that the amount of displacement of the displacement means can be increased to compensate for the distance from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H5, the electrical wiring displacing means is configured integrally with the displacing means, and includes a corresponding changing means for changing the arrangement of the electrical wiring displacing means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacing means. The gaming machine H6 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines H1 to H5, the relative arrangement between the electric wiring and the displacement means can be appropriately managed by the correspondence change means.

<Flow path of the ball passing through the electric tube>
It is characterized by comprising a gaming area and a flowing down means for causing game balls ejected from the gaming area to flow down, and the flowing down means including a section configured to allow the gaming balls ejected from the gaming area to be visually recognized. A gaming machine I0.

BACKGROUND ART Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a base plate constituting a gaming area is made of a plywood board (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-80178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the game balls discharged from the game area flow toward the back side of the base plate, they are hidden by the base plate, and the game ball cannot be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the player is likely to lose sight of the game ball, and if the player does not pay attention to the ejection timing, he or she may get the impression that the game ball has suddenly disappeared from the game area.

In addition, even if you pay attention to the ejection timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning hole and the out hole are often placed close to each other, so even though the ball actually entered the out hole, it did not reach the winning hole. There is a possibility that it may be mistaken for a ball that has entered the ball. In this case, the player may feel distrustful that the prize ball is not paid out. That is, the conventional gaming machine had a problem in that there was room for improvement in the ejection of game balls from the gaming area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, the falling means is configured with a section where the game balls ejected from the gaming area can be visually recognized, so the player can visually observe the game balls flowing down the section. By doing so, it is possible to check how the game balls are arranged from the game area. This makes it possible to improve the ejection of game balls from the game area.

Note that the ejection of game balls from the game area refers to all manners in which game balls are ejected from the game area. For example, the ball may be ejected through a prize ball opening, or it may be discharged through an out port where there is no prize ball.

The gaming machine I0 is arranged such that the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can pass therethrough, and includes a benefit giving means configured to be able to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the passing of the gaming ball, The means includes a first component that is configured to be able to guide a game ball toward a side that approaches the profit giving means above the profit giving means, and a first component that is disposed downstream of the first component and that is configured to guide the game ball toward the profit giving means. A gaming machine I1 comprising: a second component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side away from the profit giving means above the giving means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0, by visually recognizing the gaming balls flowing down the flowing means, the player can grasp how the gaming balls are discharged from the gaming area, and It is possible to prevent the game ball from approaching the profit giving means on the lower side. As a result, game balls that have already been ejected from the game area and game balls that are still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit giving means, so that players can play games comfortably. You can try to make it possible.

Note that the predetermined benefit is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a payout of a prize ball, a lottery of symbols such as the first symbol or a second symbol, or other profits.

The gaming machine I0 or I1 includes an attention means formed inwardly of the gaming area, and a frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means, and the flowing means is arranged within the frame when viewed from the front. A game machine I2 characterized in that it is configured to cause game balls to flow down inside the means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0 or I1, the flowing means allows the game ball ejected from the gaming area to enter the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means. Thereby, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the attention means, it is possible to make the player understand that the game ball has been ejected from the game area.

Note that the attention means is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means that displays a variable pattern, a movable accessory that can be moved by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

A gaming machine I3 in the gaming machine I2, wherein the downstream means includes a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the gaming ball stays in the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means.

<Improvements to the board design and around the light guide plate>
The predetermined substrate includes a predetermined substrate including a light emitting means, and a disposed means disposed on the near side of at least a portion of the predetermined substrate when viewed in a predetermined direction, and the predetermined substrate has an area that is visually recognized as viewed in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine J0 characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is smaller than the visible area.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an illuminated board having light emitting means such as an LED is placed on the back side of a base board with a gaming area on the front, and the surface of the illuminated board and the surface of the base board are arranged on the back side of the base board. There is a gaming machine in which the players are arranged substantially parallel to each other (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the area of the illuminated board that is visible when viewed from the front is large, so when irradiating LED light to a decorative member placed on the front side of the illuminated board, the field of view is illuminated. The decorative board may get in there, and the decorative member and the illumination board may appear to be overlapping in the front and back.

On the surface of the illumination board, only functionally necessary components such as circuits and resistors are arranged, and it usually does not have a high design quality. Therefore, when the decorative member and the illumination board are visually recognized as overlapping in the front and back, the appearance is poor and there is a possibility that the player's interest may be reduced. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the presentation effect of a predetermined board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J0, the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area visible when viewed from the area of the gaming machine J0 is smaller than the area of the irradiated light. It is possible to configure a region where only light can be seen without overlapping the substrate. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the predetermined board.

Note that the arrangement of the predetermined substrates is not limited at all. For example, it may be partially hidden so that the visible area is reduced, or it may be entirely covered so that no visible area is present.

Note that the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means disposed on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be directed in the thickness direction of a given substrate, the optical axis may be directed in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the given substrate, or the optical axis may be directed at an angle between the two. It may be something that can be done.

Note that the light transmittance of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, the structure may be configured to have good light transmission, or may be configured to have low light transmission, or the degree of light transmission may be varied from part to part.

In the gaming machine J0, the placement means includes a plurality of direction changing means arranged on both surfaces of the predetermined substrate and changing the traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting means, and between the plurality of direction changing means. is provided with a low transmittance means having a lower light transmittance than the direction changing means, and the predetermined substrate is at least partially disposed inside the low transmittance means when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined board can be hidden by the low-transmission means. Thereby, the range in which the predetermined substrate is visible can be narrowed.

Note that the direction changing means is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, it may be a movable accessory configured to be able to be displaced by a drive device, it may be a gaming area or channel through which game balls flow, or it may be a case member or decorative member that is fixedly arranged. But it's okay.

In the game machine J1, the game machine J2 is characterized in that the low-transmission means is at least a part of a shape portion that constitutes a predetermined pattern or figure shape.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J1, the low-transmission means can be blended into the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, so that it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Note that the shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped bone such as a window frame, it may be a bone that connects the axis of a rotating body such as a tire and the rotating outer circumference, or it may be a bone that is composed of arbitrary character strings and patterns and has a series of meanings. It may be a part of the design to be expressed (for example, a title logo).

A game machine J3, in any of the game machines J0 to J2, wherein the predetermined board is arranged with an end surface of the board facing the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J3, the area of the predetermined board when viewed in a predetermined direction can be minimized.

The gaming machine J3 includes a display means for executing a display effect that is visible when viewed from a predetermined direction, and a gaming area arranged in front of the display means, and the predetermined board is configured to cover the display area of the display means and the display area of the display means. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged at a boundary with a gaming area in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, by arranging the predetermined board at the boundary, unlike the case where light is irradiated from the back of the gaming area to the front side and performing a light effect as a whole, only the display area side from the predetermined board is emitted. It is possible to perform a production in which light is irradiated on the player's side, or a production in which light is irradiated only on the gaming area side.

In the gaming machine J4, the gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on a gaming board that forms the gaming area on the front side.

According to the game machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the game board, the arrangement of the light emitting means is easier than when the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the back case where movable accessories etc. are arranged, for example. The degree of freedom can be improved.

In addition, since the electrical wiring that supplies electricity to the light emitting means can be guided along the back side of the game board to the outside of the back case, even when the back case side is visible from the window of the game board. However, since it is impossible to see all the way to the back of the game board without looking around with a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the electrical wiring from being seen by the player.

Furthermore, if the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the center of the back case, the space for placing the specified board will be limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device, but there is a method of placing the specified board on the back side of the game board. If so, the predetermined substrate can be placed at any position without being limited by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrates can be improved.

<Lock member to prevent misalignment of accessories during shipment>
It includes a displacement means and a restriction means configured to be able to limit the displacement of the displacement means, and the restriction means has a first state in which it can act on the displacement means and a second state in which it cannot act on the displacement means. A gaming machine K1, characterized in that the gaming machine K1 is configured to be able to change states, and is configured to suppress movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a movable accessory (displacement means) that moves downward from a standby position to the front of a liquid crystal display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of fixing and releasing the arrangement of the displacement means.

In other words, while gaming machines are configured to be able to operate normally after they have been installed, it is difficult to secure movable accessories even in situations where large vibrations or external forces may be applied to the gaming machine, such as during shipping. Not configured to work.

Therefore, as a measure to secure the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the displacement of the movable accessory is suppressed by stuffing cushioning material in the area where the movable accessory is displaced, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, if the central opening of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, which may place a heavy burden on the game hall.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the restriction on the displacement of the displacement means can be canceled by changing the state of the restriction means, so that the arrangement of the displacement means can be fixed and released easily.

On the other hand, unlike when the cushioning material is removed, the limiting means is not removed, so it is difficult to continue the game if the state easily changes due to external forces that may occur during the game. On the other hand, by configuring the limiting means to suppress unintended state changes in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems during the game.

A gaming machine K2 in the gaming machine K1, wherein the limiting means is configured to be able to change its state between the first state and the second state when power is not supplied.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, since the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunction of the limiting means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the worker from having difficulty in performing the work during a power outage state or during recovery work from a power outage state.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes a biasing means for biasing the operating section of the limiting means in a predetermined direction, and the limiting means is configured to displace the operating section by a predetermined amount from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The operating portion is configured to be able to be displaced away from the reference position in the predetermined direction by a biasing force of the biasing means, and in the second state, the operating portion is configured to change its state away from the reference position in the predetermined direction. A game machine K3 characterized in that it is arranged at a separate position apart from the game machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, since the operating section is placed at a separate position away from the reference position in the second state, there are no effects on the gaming machine after installation, such as opening and closing of the door. It is possible to avoid causing a predetermined amount of displacement required for a state change of the limiting means due to an external force that may be applied, and it is possible to easily prevent the limiting means from changing its state from the second state.

A gaming machine K4, which is any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, wherein the operating section of the limiting means is arranged outside the area forming means that forms the area in which the displacing means can be displaced.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, since the operating section is arranged outside the area forming means, even if the displacing means is displaced due to the operation of the operating means, The displacement means can be prevented from coming into contact with the worker.

Any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4 includes a biasing means for biasing the operating section of the limiting means in a predetermined direction, and the limiting means is configured to move the operating section from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction by a predetermined amount. The limiting means is configured to change its state as it is displaced, and the limiting means includes guiding means that guides the displacement of the operating section in the predetermined direction, and the guiding means A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is configured to ensure a permissible displacement width (posture change width) of the portion.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, since the operating means is configured to be able to be displaced in a direction that intersects with a predetermined direction, the operating unit has a direction. When an unknown load is applied, it can be prevented from easily displacing in a predetermined direction, and it can be easily prevented from displacing the operating portion by a predetermined amount. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a change in the state of the restricting means due to unintended external force caused by opening/closing a door or the like.

In the gaming machine K5, the operating section includes an engaging section configured to be able to engage with the guiding means, the urging means is disposed at the center of the operating section, and the engaging section is configured to engage with the guiding section. A game machine K6 characterized in that it is placed at a position away from the center of the game machine.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K5, even if an external force in an unknown direction is applied to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operating section does not displace with the engaging section as the fulcrum. (posture change) and can prevent a predetermined amount of displacement required for a state change from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the limiting means from changing its state from the first state to the second state due to external forces such as opening and closing of the door, vibrations during shipping, and the like.

In the gaming machine K6, the limiting means is arranged on the back side of the area forming means which is configured to be rotatable on a support shaft on the left and right side, and the engaging part is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft. A gaming machine K7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K6, the state of the limiting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the limiting means, so that the clerk of the gaming hall can open the front door. This makes it easier to operate the control means. That is, since the engaging portion is disposed on the side where the opening width becomes larger when the front door is opened (opposite side of the support shaft), the operating position of the restricting means can be moved closer to the front side.

In the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is disposed on the support shaft side of the area configuring means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K7, since the limiting means is disposed on the support shaft side, it is possible to prevent an operator who works with the front door open from accidentally touching the limiting means. can do.

In addition, compared to the case where it is placed on the opposite side of the support shaft, the load applied to the restricting means when opening and closing the front door can be reduced, so that the restricting means is not in a state due to the impact caused by opening and closing the front door. Changes can be prevented.

A gaming machine K9, which is one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, characterized in that, in the first state, the displacement means is configured to guide displacement of the limiting means.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines K1 to K8, the displacement guidance accuracy when the restriction means acts on the displacement means is reduced with the displacement guidance accuracy of the restriction means alone reduced. can be improved.

A gaming machine K10, characterized in that any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9 is provided with a prevention notification means for notifying that when electricity is applied in the first state, the continuation of the electricity-carrying state is to be prevented.

According to the game machine K10, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines K1 to K9, the prevention notification means can notify that the state of the restriction means should be switched from the first state.

Note that the mode of notification is not limited at all. For example, notification may be made by displaying an error message on a liquid crystal display device, notification may be made by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or a predetermined lighting means may be turned on (or kept in an off state). You may also notify us by doing so.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for storing a target object, comprising an operating means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable, and an opening is formed in the container at a position corresponding to the operating means. A game machine L0 characterized by:

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent unauthorized access to the control board.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the control board is provided with an operating means, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, there was a problem that it was time-consuming.

According to the game machine L0, the operating means is provided on the object and is operable, and the housing is formed with an opening at a position corresponding to the operating means, so that the operating means can be operated through the opening. can be operated. That is, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means.
Therefore, the effort can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention using substrate boxes A100 and A2100 (covering parts A270 and A2270) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating device. M1.

According to the gaming machine M1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating device. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container from the opening.

In the gaming machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and the opposing portion covers at least a portion of the first surface of the operating means excluding a displacement locus of the operating element. A gaming machine M2 is characterized in that some of the gaming machines are arranged facing each other.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the opposing part is arranged to face at least a part of the first surface of the operating element excluding the displacement locus of the operating element. Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing part while preventing the insertion of the operator into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the container from the opening. Insertion can be suppressed.

A gaming machine M3 in the gaming machine M1 or M2, wherein the opposing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing part is formed in a plate shape with the base end fixed and one end free, so that the shape is simplified and moldability is improved. Can be secured. As a result, yield can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

In the gaming machine M3, a gaming machine M4 is characterized in that a protruding part is provided on the opposing part.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, since the opposing part is provided with a protruding part, the rigidity of the opposing part can be increased and damage to the opposing part can be suppressed.

Note that the protrusion may be formed as a protrusion that extends in a stripe shape.

The gaming machine M5 in the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the protrusion protrudes from a surface of the facing portion on a side opposite to the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M4, since the protrusion is provided protruding from the surface of the facing portion on the side opposite to the first surface of the operating means, the opposing portion and the first surface of the operating means are By reducing the gap between the container and the surface, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container through the gap.

In the gaming machine M5, the gaming machine M6 is characterized in that the protrusion comes into contact with the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M5, since the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means, at such a contact point, the opposing portion and the first surface of the operating means are By eliminating the gap between the containers, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container.

In addition, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, even if the opposing part is pushed in the insertion direction by the operating element when inserting the operating element into the operating means, the opposing part will not move in the insertion direction. deformation can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the proximal end side of the facing portion can be suppressed.

In addition, since the facing part is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end, the elastic deformation of the facing part can be used to form and maintain the state in which the protrusion is in contact with the protrusion. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of adhesion and suppress insertion of foreign objects such as wires.

In any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the gaming machine M7 is characterized in that the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a stripe shape.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a stripe shape, so that the rigidity of the opposing part can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the interior of the container.

In any of gaming machines M1 to M7, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operating element, and the opposing portion has an edge abutting the operating element inserted into the operating means. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that it can be formed.

Here, if the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator in a horizontal direction, or the member on which the container is installed is carelessly opened/closed) , when the operating element collides with another member and is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also tilted, and the load on the base of the operating means (the part connected to the object) increases. Additionally, if the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operator inserted into the operating means becomes excessive, the operating means will also be displaced in the direction of the displacement, resulting in a large load on the base of the operating means (the part connected to the object). Become. In these cases, there is a risk that the operating means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the opposing part is formed so that the edge can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means. By bringing the operating element (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) into contact with the edge of the opposing portion, it is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operating element. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the gaming machine M9 is characterized in that the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the housing includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that the gap between the operating means and the covering portion can be reduced. Can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

Here, if the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, if the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, if the operator carelessly moves the operating element) (If the operator is pressed in the lateral direction by colliding with another member, such as by inadvertently opening or closing the member on which the housing is installed, the operating means will also be tilted and the operation The load on the root of the means (the part that connects it to the object) increases. In this case, there is a possibility that the operating means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since one end side of the operating means is covered with the covering part, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering part, thereby suppressing the tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

A gaming machine M10 in the gaming machine M9, wherein an external shape of the operating means at a base end side opposite to the one end side is larger than an internal shape of the covering part.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M9, the outer shape at the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operating means is made larger than the inner shape of the covering part, so that the outer shape at the base end side of the operating means The gap between the cover and the cover can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion or the operating means includes a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the covering portion or the operating means includes a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 comprising:

According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering part or the operating means is provided with a bulging part formed to bulge, and the other of the covering part or the operating means is Since the receiving part that receives the bulging part is provided, the gap between the bulging part and the receiving part can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

A gaming machine M12 characterized in that the bulging part and the receiving part are partially formed in the circumferential direction in the gaming machine M11.

According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M11, the bulging part and the receiving part are partially formed in the circumferential direction, so that the bulging part and the receiving part are brought into contact with each other, and the operating means can be operated. Excessive displacement (especially displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

A gaming machine M13 in any one of the gaming machines M1 to M12, wherein the housing includes an erected wall that is erected from its inner surface and whose erected tip comes into contact with the object.

According to the gaming machine M13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines M1 to M12, the container is provided with an upright wall that is erected from the inner surface of the container and whose erected tip comes into contact with the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening hits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

A gaming machine M14 in the gaming machine M13, wherein the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means.

According to the game machine M14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine M13, since the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means, it is possible to block the path for entering the inside of the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and the surface of the control board where the electronic components are connected to the circuit by solder is the side on which the operating means is disposed. A gaming machine M15 characterized in that is set on the opposite side.

According to the gaming machine M15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and the surface on which the electronic components are connected to the circuit of the control board by solder is the operating means. Since it is set on the opposite side to the side on which the wall is installed, it is easy to bring the tip of the standing wall into close contact with the object (control board), and the connection between the object (control board) and the wall is It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Therefore, the standing wall can reliably function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the opening hits, and it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the interior of the container.

In any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, a gaming machine M16 is characterized in that the upright wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the upright tip is reduced.

According to the game machine M16, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines M13 to M15, the upright wall is formed in a plate shape and the thickness of the upright tip is reduced, so that it does not come into contact with the object. By increasing the surface pressure at the erected tip, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted between the object and the erected tip. As a result, foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from being inserted into the housing.

In the game machine M16, the thickness of the upright end of the upright wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface facing the operation means.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M16, the thickness of the erected tip of the erected wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operation means side. Therefore, while improving moldability, it is possible to suppress insertion of foreign objects such as wires into the interior of the container. That is, by forming the tapered surface, the shape change is gradual and the fluidity of the resin within the mold can be ensured. On the other hand, when the erected tip of the erected wall comes into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it can be made difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object.
As a result, foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from being inserted into the housing.

In any of gaming machines M9 to M12, the housing has one outer surface formed from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion protrudes from two areas.

According to the gaming machine M18, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container is separated from the first area and the second area located closer to the object than the first area. Since the outer surface of the side is formed and the covering portion is provided protruding from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased.
Therefore, the area where the covering part covers the operating means (the area where the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire is suppressed, and the area where the covering part contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container, and to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Gaming machine M19, in any one of gaming machines M9 to M12, wherein the covering section projects from the outer surface of the container, and the opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering section.

According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering part projects from the outer surface of the container and an opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering part, so that wires, etc. This makes it difficult for the tip of the foreign object to reach the opening.

For example, if it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening because the opening cannot be seen due to a shield, etc., the tip of the foreign object such as a wire can be slid on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening. method is done. On the other hand, according to the game machine M19, when the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the housing, the tip of the foreign object such as a wire hits the outer surface of the covering part, and no further damage is caused. progress can be stopped. That is, the outer surface of the covering part can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign objects such as wires. As a result, foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from being inserted into the housing.

<About the concept of the invention using the board box A100 (erected walls A280, A290) as an example>
The gaming machine L0 is characterized in that the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operating element, and the housing is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the outer surface of the operating means or the operating element. Game machine N1.

Here, if the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator in a horizontal direction, or the member on which the container is installed is carelessly opened/closed) , when the operating element collides with another member and is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, there is a risk that the displaced (tilted) operating means may be damaged (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may come off or break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L0, the housing is formed so that it can come into contact with the outer surface of the operating means or the operator, so the operating means or the operator can be held in the housing. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the operating means by receiving it. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

In the game machine N1, the game machine N2 is characterized in that the storage body is provided with an upright wall that stands up from its inner surface and whose upright tip comes into contact with the object.

Here, if the container is configured to receive the displaced (tilted) operating means, there is a risk that the container will be deformed and damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the container is provided with an upright wall that is erected from the inner surface of the container and whose erected tip comes into contact with the object, so that the erected wall serves as a support and can suppress deformation of the container. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

At the same time, since deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the standing wall, tilting of the operating means can be suppressed more reliably. As a result, damage to the operating means can be easily suppressed.

In the gaming machine N2, the gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N2, the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means, so that the standing wall is protected against tilting of the operating means in any direction. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the container can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the erected wall can block a path for entering the inside of the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N3, the erected wall is connected to an inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the erected wall is erected.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N3, since the standing wall is connected to an inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the standing wall is erected, the rigidity of the container is improved. By utilizing this, the rigidity of the standing wall can be increased, and by connecting the inner surfaces with each other, the rigidity of the entire container can be increased. Therefore, the function of the upright wall as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that suppresses deformation of the container when the operating means is tilted can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the gaming machine N5 is characterized in that the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the housing includes a covering part that covers one end of the operating means, so that the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering part. Therefore, tilting of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Further, according to the gaming machine N5, since the covering section covers one end side of the operating means, the gap between the operating means and the covering section can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the housing, the housing includes a protrusion that protrudes from the outer surface and extends in a striped manner, and one end of the protrusion extends from the outer surface of the housing. A gaming machine N6 characterized in that it is connected to a covering part.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N5, the covering portion projects from the outer surface of the container, and the container includes a protrusion that projects from the outer surface and extends in a stripe shape. Since one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part, the protrusion can function as a rib and the covering part can be supported by the protrusion. Therefore, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering part, thereby suppressing the tilting of the operating means, and also suppressing damage to the covering part at that time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Further, since the covering portion is provided to protrude from the outer surface of the container, the height of the protruding portion of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the area where the covering part covers the operating means (the area where the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire is suppressed, and the area where the covering part contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container, and to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

In gaming machine N6, gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the container is provided with a display section formed on the outer surface thereof to display predetermined information, and the display section is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N6, the container includes a display section formed on the outer surface of the container and displaying predetermined information, and the display section is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion. Therefore, the protrusion can also function as an instruction line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed on the display section. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and when an operator is inserted into the first surface and displaced, the operating means is operated and the housing is opened. A game characterized in that the body includes a facing part facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing part is formed such that an edge can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and the housing includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means. Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container from the opening.

In addition, since the opposing part is formed so that its edge can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means, the operating element (i.e., the position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) can be placed on the edge of the opposing part. It is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operator by making it come into contact with the part. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

A gaming machine N9 in the gaming machine N8, wherein the opposing portion is disposed to face at least a part of the first surface of the operating means excluding a displacement locus of the operating element.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N8, the opposing portion is disposed in at least a part of the first surface of the operating element excluding the displacement locus of the operating element. The area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing part while preventing the insertion of the operator into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator from being inhibited, so that a foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the container through the opening. can be suppressed.

Further, by increasing the area of the facing portion that contacts the displaced operator, excessive displacement (particularly displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) of the operator can be easily suppressed. As a result, excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N9, the operating means is formed to be able to displace the operating element to a first position, and the operating means is configured such that a position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part is displaced to the first position. A gaming machine N10 characterized in that the child and the facing part are in a position where they are in contact with each other.

In the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed to be able to displace the operator to a second position different from the first position, and the position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part is the second position. A gaming machine N11 characterized in that the operating element displaced to the second position is in a position where the opposing part comes into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operating element can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part. Since the position where the operator is displaced to the first position or the second position is in contact with the opposing part, the operator displaced to the first or second position is in contact with the opposing part. By using the protrusions, it is possible to effectively suppress damage to the facing part and the covering part when they come into contact with each other.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (operation wall A210) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has one outer surface formed by a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the opening in the second region. A gaming machine O1 characterized in that: is formed.

Here, by being able to operate the operating means through the opening, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, the effort can be reduced. However, there is a possibility that fraud may be committed by inserting a foreign object such as a wire through the opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the housing has one outer surface formed by a first area and a second area located closer to the object than the first area, and the second area Since the opening is formed in the container, the opening can be arranged at a position recessed from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first region and the second region can be arranged around the opening. This increases the distance to the opening and makes it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container through the opening. In other words, fraud can be prevented.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that at least a part of a connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is sloped downward from the first area to the second area. O2.

Here, in consideration of heat dissipation from the object (control board), it is necessary for the container (board box) to ensure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface. On the other hand, if the opening is too far away from the operating means, operability will deteriorate. Therefore, by forming an opening in the second region, it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the operating means, and as described above, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the interior of the container through the opening. . However, when operating the operating means, the operator's hand interferes with the step (connection surface) between the first region and the second region, which hinders the operation. Therefore, there is a possibility that the operability when operating the operating means may be deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area to the second area, so the gaming machine In addition to the effect of O1, the space connected to the second area can be expanded by the amount of the downward slope, thereby improving the operability when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine O2, the second area is formed as a generally rectangular area when viewed from the front, the length dimension along one direction being larger than the length dimension along the other direction perpendicular to the one direction, and the operation means is configured to operate the second area. A gaming machine O3, which is operated by inserting and displacing a child, and wherein the attitude of the operator when inserted into or pulled out from the operating means is a posture along the other direction. .

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O2, the second area is a generally rectangular area when viewed from the front, where the length along one direction is larger than the length along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and when the operating element is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means, the attitude of the operating element is along the other direction. By orienting the child-gripping surface in the longitudinal direction of the second region, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the child-gripping surface. Therefore, when inserting the operator into or pulling out the operator from the operating means, it is possible to prevent the fingers holding the operator from interfering with the container. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the second area with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction, and the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction of the second area is connected from the first area to the second area. A gaming machine O4 characterized in that it is tilted downward toward the area.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center in the second region, and the connecting surface located on the one longitudinal side of the second region is located on the second region. Since the operator is tilted downward from the first area to the second area, when the operator is gripped and displaced, it is possible to prevent fingers different from the one gripping the operator from interfering with the container. For example, when the operator is grasped with the index finger and thumb and the operator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward slope of the connecting surface and the space on the other longitudinal side in the second region are This can be secured as a space for moving the little finger side, and interference between the little finger side and the container can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O4, since the connecting surface is formed on the other longitudinal side of the second area, the operation can be performed using the connecting surface (first area) on the other longitudinal side. Means can be protected. For example, damage to the operating means can be suppressed by suppressing interference with other members during manufacturing. Further, by making the position of the opening difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container through the opening.

In addition, by forming the connection surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be expanded accordingly, that is, the area of the first region can be increased by that amount, that is, the area of the first region can be expanded to accommodate heat dissipation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

In any of gaming machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. The gaming machine O6 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine O6, in any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, a connection surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and no connection surface is formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. Therefore, the other side in the lateral direction in the second region can be opened. Therefore, when the operator is gripped with fingers and operated (inserted into the operation means, pulled out from the operation means, or displaced (e.g. rotated)), the gripped fingers (e.g. thumb and index finger) The above-mentioned open space can be used as a space for arranging or displacing fingers different from the above. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction of the second region is inclined downwardly from the first region to the second region, and the other connection surface is inclined downwardly from the first region to the second region. A gaming machine O7, which is substantially orthogonal to the area and the second area.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is tilted downward from the first region toward the second region, and the other Since the connecting surface is substantially perpendicular to the first region and the second region, the container is designed to accommodate heat dissipation from the object (control board) while ensuring the effect of descending the connecting surface. The volume of internal space can be secured. That is, the reduction in volume of the internal space of the container due to the downward slope of the connecting surface can be minimized.

The gaming machine O4 or O5 includes a base body on which the storage body is arranged, and a rotating shaft rotatably supporting the base body, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is the axial direction of the rotating shaft. The two regions are substantially perpendicular to each other, and the transversal direction thereof is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region is located farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. Game machine O8.

According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O4 or O5, the gaming machine O8 is provided with a base body on which a storage body is arranged, and a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the base body, and the longitudinal axis in the second area is The direction is substantially perpendicular to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region is arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. Therefore, when operating the operating means in the space formed by rotating the base body about the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward slope of the connecting surface can be effectively utilized. That is, a space for allowing the operator's hand to access the operating means can be secured by the space formed by the downward slope of the connecting surface. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for accommodating a target object, comprising a display device disposed in a gaming area, and an operating means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable; A gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is disposed on the control board (object), there is a problem in that it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine P1, the gaming machine P1 includes a display device disposed in the gaming area and an operating means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, and information regarding the operation of the operating means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, the operating state of the operating means can be easily understood based on the display on the display device. Further, by disposing the display means in the gaming area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information regarding the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine P1, the gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the container is formed to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the container is formed to be displaceable, so the container can be placed (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be operated while viewing the display device. be able to. As a result, operations can be performed while checking the display (information), so operability can be improved and operational errors can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the operating means is not operated, it can be placed at a predetermined position (for example, a position where it is difficult to be seen from the outside), and therefore fraud can be suppressed.

The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the housing is movable to a position where the surface of the housing where the operating means is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. P3.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine P2, the container can be moved to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to easily operate the operation means while checking the display on the display device. As a result, it is possible to more reliably improve operability and suppress operational errors.

The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine P3, the housing is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed at a side farther from the center of the housing from the position where the housing is supported.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P3, the container is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed on the side farther from the center of the container than the position where it is supported. When the container is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed at the same time, the operating means is moved to a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. It can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the operating means from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body.
As a result, operability can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the operating means includes a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, is located on the side farther from the pivoted position than the first operating means. A gaming machine P5 characterized in that it is arranged in a.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, there are a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, has a higher frequency than the first operating means. Since it is arranged on the side far from the position where it is pivoted, the frequently operated operating means (first operating means) can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, when operating the frequently operated operating means (first operating means), it is possible to prevent the fingers from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for storing a target object, comprising an operation means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable, one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the target object, A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed depending on the connection state of the electrical connection line to the object.

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is provided on the control board (object), there is room for improvement in terms of whether or not the operating means can be operated. In other words, if the operation is allowed regardless of the state of connection of one or more electrical connection lines to the object, there is a risk that the operating means will be easily manipulated illegally. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, there is a risk that the work efficiency associated with the operation of the operating means will be deteriorated.

According to the gaming machine Q1, the gaming machine Q1 is provided with an operating means that is disposed on the object and formed to be operable, one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the connection of the electrical connection lines with the object is connected to the object. Since the operability of the operating means is changed depending on the state, fraud can be suppressed and work efficiency can be improved.

In the gaming machine Q1, the gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that the container is formed to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1, since the container is formed to be displaceable, the container can be placed (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be easily operated.
As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, when the operating means is not operated, it can be placed at a predetermined position (for example, a position where it is difficult to be seen from the outside), and therefore fraud can be suppressed. In this case, when displacing the container, at least one electrical connection line is released (pulled out) from the object, so the operability of the operating means is changed depending on the connection state of the electrical connection line. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving work efficiency.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state in which at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected to the object. Q3.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operating means is allowed to be operated while at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve work efficiency. That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of a predetermined electrical connection wire to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, the operation means may be disconnected even if other electrical connection wires are disconnected (unplugged) from the object. By allowing operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensure versatility).

In particular, in a configuration in which the container is displaceable, other electrical connection wires that are released (unplugged) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, arrange it for easy operation) are connected to the container. After displacing the object, in order to allow operation of the operating means, for example, an extension line is interposed between the object and the other electrical connection line, and the other electrical connection line is released (pulled out). This avoids the trouble of reconnecting the target to the target object.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, operation of the operating means is prohibited in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object. Q4.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object (that is, all electrical connections are (If the line is not connected to the object), the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so it is possible to suppress unauthorized operation of the operating means.

In addition, in a configuration in which the container is displaceable, other electrical connection wires that are released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, arrange it for easy operation) are connected to the container. After displacing the object, for example, by interposing an extension line between the object and the other electrical connection line and reconnecting the released (unplugged) other electrical connection line to the object, the operation can be performed. Since the operation of the means can be allowed, it is possible to perform work by operating the operation means.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A3100 and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for storing a target object, comprising an operation means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable, the container being formed to be displaceable and disposed during a game. A gaming machine R1 characterized in that the operating means is movable to a position where it is easier to operate.

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operating means is provided on the control board (object), there is a problem in that the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

According to the game machine R1, the storage body is formed to be displaceable, and the operating means is easier to operate than the position where it is disposed during the game. Since it can be moved to any position, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

A gaming machine R2 in the gaming machine R1, wherein the housing is rotatably supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivoted portion as the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine R1, the housing is rotatably supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivoted part as the center of rotation, so that the housing is displaced. The structure can be simplified. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the housing body has a separate member facing the operating means at a position where it is disposed during the gaming.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, since a separate member of the housing faces the operating means at the position where it is disposed during a game, the operating means cannot be operated illegally. can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and in the state where the operating element is inserted, the operating element is brought into contact with the separate member, so that the operating means A gaming machine R4 characterized in that the container cannot be moved to the position where it is placed during the game.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and when the operating element is inserted, the operating element touches another member. By being in contact with it, the container cannot be moved to the position where it is placed during the game, so forgetting to remove the operator can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from being used illegally.

<Characteristics AA group> (Notify that the final display mode has been displayed within the presentation period by pressing the button repeatedly)
The player has an operation means that can be operated by a player, a performance execution means that can execute a performance based on the operation of the operation means within the validity period, and a validity period setting means that can set the validity period. In the gaming machine, the effect executing means is capable of executing a first effect as the effect after the valid period reaches at least a first state based on the operation of the operating means within the valid period. The validity period is variably set so as to be in the first state when the first performance is determined to be executed by the performance execution means. The gaming machine AA1 is characterized by the following.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced. There are many games that are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various performances (variable performances) using the period until the symbols are stopped and displayed (special symbol fluctuation period). Among these, there is a performance (so-called continuous hit performance) in which the display mode is varied by having the player operate the operating means multiple times.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, the display mode of the performance can be changed by the player's own operation, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

However, in the above-mentioned continuous hit performance, the number of times (upper limit number of times) that the display mode can be varied in the continuous hit performance is set in advance, for example, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery. No matter how many times the player operates the operating means within the operation validity period during which the operation is set to be valid, when the display mode (upper limit display mode) that has been varied by the preset upper limit number of times is displayed, There was a problem in that the display mode could not be changed any further, and the remaining period of the valid operation period at the time when the upper limit display mode was displayed could not be used for production. In addition, in general, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the number of times (upper limit number of times) the display mode can be varied in the continuous hit performance is greater than when the result is a loss. In addition, the system is configured so that the player cannot grasp the upper limit number of times set in the current consecutive hit performance, and is configured to increase the interest of the game by making the player operate the operating means voluntarily. However, in this case, even though the upper limit display mode is displayed, the player is forced to continue operating the operating means voluntarily until the operation validity period has passed, and the player is forced to use the operating means multiple times. There has been a problem in that the display mode frequently does not change despite the operation, which reduces the player's desire to play.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by increasing the player's desire to play. There is.

According to the gaming machine AA1, the validity period is set to be in the first state when the first performance is determined to be executed by the performance execution means, so the first performance is not provided to the player. Willing to be determined to be carried out. This has the effect that the operating means can be operated and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, since it is possible to execute the first performance even if the preset validity period has not elapsed, the performance executed by the performance execution means may be delayed and the performance effect may be reduced. It has the effect of suppressing the

The gaming machine AA1 has an operation determining means capable of determining the content of the operation on the operating means within the validity period, and the performance executing means is configured to perform, when the determination result of the operation determining means is a specific determination result, A gaming machine AA2 characterized in that the first effect can be executed.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA1, it is possible to execute the first effect when the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, so that the player This has the effect that it is possible to voluntarily operate the operating means so as to obtain a specific determination result, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AA2 includes an operation count measuring means capable of measuring the number of operations of the operation means within the validity period, and the operation determining means determines that the operation count measured by the operation count measuring means is a specific operation count. The gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that it is possible to determine that it is the specific determination result when .

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA2, when the number of times the operating means is operated reaches a specific number of operations, the operation determining means determines that the result is a specific determination, so that the player On the other hand, there is an effect that the operating means can be operated so as to quickly reach a specific number of operations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, by operating the operating means voluntarily, the number of operations becomes a specific number of operations, and it is determined that the result is a specific discrimination result. It is possible to prevent the user's desire to operate from decreasing due to the incorrect determination result.

In the gaming machine AA2 or AA3, the performance execution means is capable of executing the performance in a performance mode including at least a first mode and a second mode that is variable from the first mode, and the operation discrimination means The gaming machine AA4 is characterized in that the content of the operation on the operating means after the performance is executed in the second mode is determined.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA2 or AA3, the operation determining means makes a determination based on the operation contents after the performance mode of the performance executed by the performance execution means is changed to the second mode. is executed, the player can play the game while expecting that the performance executed by the performance execution means will change to the second mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine AA5, in the gaming machine AA4, further comprising a suggesting means capable of suggesting that the performance mode of the performance executed by the performance execution means is the second mode.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA4, the suggestion means suggests that the performance is being executed in the second mode, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player. There is.

<Feature AB group> (Display control of random display)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information to show the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a benefit that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information of the display means is displayed. A gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting the following, a symbol display means capable of displaying a plurality of different symbols on the display means, and a plurality of displays capable of displaying a plurality of the symbols. It has a display position setting means that can set a position, and a symbol determining means that determines the type of the symbol to be displayed at the plurality of display positions by the symbol display means, and the symbol determining means is configured to set the display position of the symbol. A game characterized in that the type of symbol to be displayed at a predetermined display position among the positions is determined, and the type of symbol to be displayed at the remaining display positions is determined based on the determined type of symbol. Machine AB1.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced. There are many games that are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various performances (variable performances) using the period until the symbols are stopped and displayed (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, there are some that are configured to be able to perform a variety of effects by randomly displaying a plurality of types of icons at a plurality of locations on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10 that is capable of performing such a performance, in order to prevent the player from easily predicting the performance mode of the icon display performance, the location where each icon is displayed in the icon display performance, A plurality of performance pattern data with different types of icons to be displayed are prepared in advance, and the performance mode of the icon display performance to be executed is determined according to the lottery results of special symbols. However, when using a method of preparing a plurality of performance pattern data in advance, there is a problem in that the amount of performance data to be stored in advance increases depending on the number of performance patterns.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can execute suitable effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of effect data.

According to the gaming machine AB1, it is possible to determine the types of symbols to be displayed in the remaining display positions based on the types of symbols to be displayed in a predetermined display position, so that it is possible to determine the type of symbols to be displayed in the remaining display positions. This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that can perform performances.

The gaming machine AB1 has a symbol type order storage means that stores in advance a plurality of symbol types in a specific order, and the symbol determination means selects the specific symbol type order storage means stored in the symbol type order storage means. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that the type of the symbol to be displayed in the remaining display position is determined based on the order.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1, the types of symbols to be displayed in the remaining display positions are determined based on a predetermined specific order, so the types of symbols are determined. This has the effect of simplifying the process.

The gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that the symbol type order storage means stores at least a first order and a second order different from the first order as the specific order. Game machine AB3.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB2, since a plurality of orders are stored in advance in the symbol type order storage means, the order used when determining the symbol type by the symbol determining means can be adjusted. By making them different, it is possible to perform performances with a wide variety of variations, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AB3, the types of the symbols included in the first order are different from the types of at least some of the types of symbols included in the second order. .

According to gaming machine AB4, different symbol types are determined depending on whether the symbol type is determined based on the first order or the second order. This has the effect of making it possible to perform rich performances and enhancing the performance effects.

In gaming machine AB4, the symbol determining means is capable of determining the type of symbol based on the second order when the determination result of the determining means is a determination result in which the specific identification information is displayed. The gaming machine AB5 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB4, when the determination result is that a privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means, the type of symbol can be determined based on the second order. A player can be made to play a game while expecting that the type of symbols included only in the order will be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game early.

<Characteristic AC group> (Button delay effect)
An operating means that can be operated by a player, a measuring means that can measure a predetermined period of time based on the operation of the operating means, and a length of the period measured by the measuring means that satisfy the first condition. A gaming machine AC1 characterized in that it has a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a condition setting means capable of setting at least one condition from among a plurality of different conditions as the first condition.

Conventionally, performances have been created that provide players with a sense of discomfort by varying only the execution timing without changing the contents of each performance (display performance that changes the display mode, audio performance that outputs audio). There was a gaming machine that executed a performance (so-called delayed performance) that increased the effect. This delayed effect allows only players who notice the strange feeling to understand that the delayed effect has been executed, and as a benefit, benefits advantageous to the player (for example, winning a jackpot) are given with a high probability. It has been used in recent years as a performance to show that something is going on.

However, since the player uses it as a performance that gives advantageous benefits with a high probability, the frequency of occurrence (frequency of execution) is low, and even if the player plays the game all day long, it will only be executed once or twice. It was something. Conventionally, for delayed effects that are performed infrequently and where the content of each effect remains the same, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to the pattern of each delayed effect, that is, after the frame button 22 is operated, the display effects are displayed. Prepare in advance performance data exclusively for delayed effects, which includes display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the audio effect is executed, and audio data including audio data corresponding to the waiting period until the audio effect is executed. Therefore, there was a problem in that the capacity of the effect data became large compared to the frequency of execution.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to perform the above-described delayed effect without increasing the capacity of the effect data.

According to the gaming machine AC1, by setting different conditions using the condition setting means, it is possible to easily vary the period from when the operating means is operated until the performance is executed, so that a variety of performances can be created. This has the effect of being able to be executed without increasing the capacity of performance data.

The gaming machine AC1 includes a first display mode display means capable of displaying on the display means a first display mode indicating that the operation means has been operated based on the operation of the operation means. A game machine AC2, wherein the first display mode display means is configured to continue displaying at least until the performance is executed by the performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC1, even if there is an interval before the performance is executed, the first display mode is continuously displayed, so that the operation of the operating means is controlled by the gaming machine. This has the effect that it is possible to identify that the game has been accepted, and to play the game with peace of mind.

The gaming machine AC1 or AC2 has a validity period setting means for setting the operation of the operation means to be effective, and the performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the performance even after the validity period has elapsed. A game machine AC3 is characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the effect can be improved because the effect can be performed even after the expiration of the validity period.

<Characteristic AD group> (Gauge reduction control)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and when the display means displays identification information for indicating a particular discrimination result. , a gaming machine having a benefit granting means capable of granting benefits advantageous to the player, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance variable in response to number information, and subtracting or adding the number information. and a setting means capable of determining number information to be subtracted or added to one time for each number of times, corresponding to the number of times determined by the number of times determining means. A gaming machine AD1 is characterized in that it is a gaming machine AD1.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced. There are many games that are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various performances (variable performances) using the period until the symbols are stopped and displayed (special symbol fluctuation period). Among these, there is one that displays predetermined number information and executes an addition/subtraction suggestion effect that suggests a lottery result based on the result of adding or subtracting the number information multiple times.

In a gaming machine capable of performing such an addition/subtraction suggestion performance, in order to suggest a lottery result based on the performance result of the addition/subtraction suggestion performance, a predetermined lottery result is displayed by varying the number of times the number information is added or subtracted. Therefore, there was a problem in that the presentation content of the addition/subtraction suggestion presentation became one pattern, resulting in a reduction in the presentation effect. In addition, if the amount of addition or subtraction is randomly determined each time numerical information is added or subtracted, the performance result will not be able to suggest the lottery result, resulting in a meaningless performance. There was a problem that the effectiveness decreased.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game by increasing the effect of the performance using numerical information. do.

According to the gaming machine AD1, after determining the number of times the number information is subtracted or added, the number information to be subtracted or added each time is set. It becomes possible to set appropriate number information. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect of the performance in which numerical information is varied can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AD1, the performance execution means is configured to be able to execute a performance corresponding to a predetermined lower limit value or upper limit value of the number information when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine AD2 characterized in that it is a gaming machine AD2.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD1, it is possible for the player to predict the determination result of the discriminating means according to the variable result of the numerical information, so that the player can can attract attention. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the setting means determines the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or the number of times the minimum number information is added among the number information to be subtracted or added at one time, and then performs the subtraction or addition. The gaming machine AD3 is characterized in that information on the number to be subtracted or information on the number to be added to the remaining number of times is set based on the information on the number that can be added.

According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the number of times the minimum number information is subtracted or added is determined first, so the number information that is subtracted or added beyond the lower limit or upper limit This has the effect of suppressing problems caused by setting.

<Characteristic AE group> (Symbol display control)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information to show the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a benefit that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information of the display means is displayed. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine has a privilege awarding means capable of awarding a bonus, wherein the identification information is assigned a plurality of predetermined identification symbols, and the gaming machine has a symbol that corresponds to each of the identification symbols. a symbol determining means that can be determined, and a symbol updating means that can display a symbol newly determined by the symbol determining means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in correspondence with the corresponding identification symbol. A gaming machine AE1 characterized in that it has the following features:

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced. There are many games that are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various performances (variable performances) using the period until the symbols are stopped and displayed (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, the production effect is enhanced by executing a variable production using multiple decorative symbols that are associated with identification information (for example, numbers) indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and a character that can be identified by the player. There are things that are.

In gaming machines capable of performing such variable effects, multiple characters are displayed in a variable manner, which can enhance the effect of the effect compared to effects in which only numbers are displayed in a variable manner. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem in that when the game is played continuously, the novelty of the game is lost and the performance effect is reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that enhances the performance effect by providing a novel performance to the player.

According to the gaming machine AE1, the symbol determining means determines a symbol corresponding to the identification symbol, and the symbol updating means displays a new symbol, so that it is possible to display a symbol that is surprising to the player. This has the effect of increasing the performance effect.

In the gaming machine AE1, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol rows that display the symbols corresponding to the identification symbols in a predetermined order, and the benefit giving means is configured to display the identification symbols in a predetermined combination. The gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that the privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AE1, a bonus is given when a predetermined identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so it is possible to determine which symbol corresponds to which identification symbol is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide the user with the pleasure of predicting the identification symbol that can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, during the period until the identification information is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game and improve the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AE3 characterized in that the gaming machine AE1 or AE2 has a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance when the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed as the identification information is a specific combination. .

According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AE1 or AE1 or 2, a specific performance is executed according to the combination of symbols, so that an identification symbol displayed as identification information to the player, The game can be played while being interested in each of the symbols, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AF group> (Pseudo-outlier definite fluctuation)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. , a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed after the identification information is dynamically displayed; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance within a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, wherein the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display mode determining means determines whether the determination result is a specific determination result or not. The dynamic display mode is configured to be able to determine a specific period dynamic display mode configured with the same dynamic display period, and the specific period dynamic display mode is such that a common specific effect is executed before execution of the dynamic display is started. A gaming machine AF1 is characterized in that it is configured as follows.

Conventionally, there are devices that have a storage means that can reserve and store a predetermined number (four) of the right to execute a special symbol variation (lottery right of special symbol lottery). Thereby, even if the lottery right (special pattern reservation) for the special symbol lottery is acquired during the execution of special symbol variation, the lottery right (special pattern reservation) can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it becomes possible to immediately execute the special symbol lottery based on the lottery right stored in the storage means, so it is possible to continue executing the special symbol variation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbol fluctuation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is configured to vary according to the number of lottery rights (number of reserved special symbols) stored in the storage means. be. Specifically, when the number of lottery rights (number of reserved special symbols) stored in the storage means is 0 and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a loss fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is executed. There are some configurations that make it easier. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the period during which special symbol variations are not executed, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which special symbol variations are not executed from continuing and the player's desire to play decreases. .

However, according to the conventional gaming machine using the above-described configuration, when a winning variation with a long variation time is executed, it is easy for the player to realize that the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is a winning one. There is a problem in that the player's desire to play decreases during the special symbol variation period.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by increasing the player's desire to play. There is.

According to the gaming machine AF1, by starting a dynamic display mode of similar periods, the player makes predictions about the determination result, and the player's desire to play decreases before the determination result is notified. It has the effect of suppressing

In gaming machine AF1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines a first state in which the dynamic display mode is determined based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a first state in which the dynamic display mode is determined based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means. A gaming machine AF2 is configured such that a second state for determining the second state can be set.

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AF1, the method for determining the dynamic display mode is switched between the first state and the second state, so that the player can identify the determination result at the start of the dynamic display. This has the effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being easily tricked and to keep the player interested in the determination result until the identification information is stopped and displayed, thereby allowing the player to play the game.

In gaming machine AF2, when the second state is set, the content of the dynamic display mode is determined by determining the determination result at a predetermined timing when the determined dynamic display mode is being executed. The gaming machine AF3 is characterized in that it is variable based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AF2, by changing the content based on the determination result, there is an effect that the game can be played while anticipating the timing of the change.

The gaming machine AF3 includes a remaining period determining means capable of determining the residual display period at the time when the determination by the determining means is executed, and when the determination result by the remaining period determining means satisfies a variable condition, A game machine AF4 characterized by having a dynamic display mode changing means for changing the display mode of the game.

According to the gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AF3, the dynamic display mode can be varied according to the residual dynamic display period. This has the effect of making the players interested in both the length and the length of the game.

In any of gaming machines AF1 to AF4, at least a first period and a second period longer than the first period are set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. the dynamic display period setting means is capable of setting the first period when the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result; The dynamic display mode determining means is capable of determining the dynamic display mode for the specific period corresponding to the length of the first period, and the effect execution means is configured to determine the dynamic display mode for the specific period corresponding to the length of the first period. The gaming machine AF5 is characterized in that it is possible to execute a performance including the dynamic display mode for the specific period as part of the performance corresponding to the above.

According to gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effects produced by gaming machines AF1 to AF4, even if a dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the specific period dynamic display mode is set, the specific period Since the performance using the dynamic display mode is executed, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result and play the game until the identification information is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine AF5, the performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the specific period dynamic display mode is set a plurality of times as a performance corresponding to the dynamic display in which the second period is set. The gaming machine AF6 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine AF6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AF5, the dynamic display mode can be executed for a specific period multiple times for one dynamic display period, so that the production effect can be enhanced. There is.

<Characteristic AG group> (Seconds management on the LCD side)
In a gaming machine having a first control means for executing an effect and a second control means different from the first control means, the first control means has a first control means that can set the effect contents of the effect. a setting means; and a first output means capable of outputting a first signal based on the effect set by the first setting means to the second control means; a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance in response to the first signal output from the first output means; and a period for executing the second performance executed by the second performance execution means. It has a measuring means for measuring, and a second output means capable of outputting a second signal to the first control means when a specific condition is satisfied by the measuring means, and the first control means A gaming machine AG1 characterized in that a specific performance can be executed based on the second signal output from the second output means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of performing performances for a predetermined period of time to show the results of a special symbol lottery. In such gaming machines, players can spend a predetermined period of time enjoying the contents of the performance being executed until the results of the special symbol lottery are displayed, which prevents players from becoming bored with the games early. It was something that could be done.

Furthermore, in recent years, gaming machines have become mainstream that use multiple movable decorative objects in addition to liquid crystal displays to show the results of special symbol drawings. There has been a problem in that the processing content of the control device that centrally manages the data increases.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by managing the effects for showing the results of the special symbol lottery using a plurality of control devices, it is possible to The purpose is to prevent concentration of processing load.

According to the gaming machine AG1, there is no need for the first control means to measure the period required for executing the second performance, and there is an effect that the control load on the first control means can be reduced.

A gaming machine AG2 in the gaming machine AG1, wherein the measuring means is configured to be able to measure the end timing of the second performance.

According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG1, the end timing of the second performance is measured by the measuring means, so that control for managing the end timing by the first control means is unnecessary, and the first control means This has the effect of reducing the control load due to

In the gaming machine AG1 or AG2, the second control means has a mode variable means that can change the performance mode of the second performance when a variable condition is satisfied, and the second output means is configured to control the second performance. The first control means also includes an information command for indicating at least a part of the performance mode of the second performance executed by the second performance execution means when the performance period measured by the means satisfies the end condition. and the first control means is capable of determining a presentation mode of a specific presentation to be executed after the second presentation based on the information command output from the second output device. A gaming machine AG3 characterized in that it has a means.

According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG1 or AG2, the first control means can determine the performance mode of the second performance that has been varied by the second control means, and the performance mode can be determined based on the determination result. The performance mode of the performance is variable. Thereby, the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristics AH group> (Accessory object delay control by button press)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a stop display of the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result on the display means. In this case, a gaming machine is provided with a benefit granting means capable of granting advantageous benefits to a player, an operating means operable by the player, and an effect can be executed based on the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine AH1 characterized in that it has a performance executing means, and a determining means capable of variably determining the execution timing at which the performance is executed by the performance executing means.

Conventionally, performances have been created that provide players with a sense of discomfort by varying only the execution timing without changing the contents of each performance (display performance that changes the display mode, audio performance that outputs audio). There was a gaming machine that executed a performance (so-called delayed performance) that increased the effect. This delayed effect allows only players who notice the strange feeling to understand that the delayed effect has been executed, and as a benefit, benefits advantageous to the player (for example, winning a jackpot) are given with a high probability. It has been used in recent years as a performance to show that something is going on.

However, since the player uses it as a performance that gives advantageous benefits with a high probability, the frequency of occurrence (frequency of execution) is low, and even if the player plays the game all day long, it will only be executed once or twice. It was something. Conventionally, for delayed effects that are performed infrequently and where the content of each effect remains the same, conventionally, the effect data corresponding to the pattern of each delayed effect, that is, after the frame button 22 is operated, the display effects are displayed. Prepare in advance performance data exclusively for delayed effects, which includes display data including display image data corresponding to the waiting period until the audio effect is executed, and audio data including audio data corresponding to the waiting period until the audio effect is executed. Therefore, there was a problem in that the capacity of the effect data became large compared to the frequency of execution.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to perform the above-described delayed effect without increasing the capacity of the effect data.

According to the gaming machine AH1, since the performance execution timing is variably determined by the determining means, there is no need to previously set a plurality of performance data corresponding to differences in the performance execution timing, and the data capacity increases. This has the effect of suppressing the problems that occur.

In the gaming machine AH1, the movable means is configured to be movable as the effect, and the movable means is configured to be movable in a predetermined movable pattern by the effect execution means. The gaming machine AH2 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine AH2, there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved by moving the movable means.

A gaming machine AH3 characterized in that the gaming machine AH1 or AH2 has a notification mode execution means capable of executing a notification mode during a period from when the operating means is operated until execution of the performance is started. .

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, the notification mode is executed during the period until the execution of the performance starts, so that the player can recognize that the operation of the operating means is effective, This has the effect of allowing the player to play an easy-to-understand game.

Any one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3 has a clocking means that can start timing based on the operation of the operating means, and the determining means determines the execution timing of the performance based on the clocking data of the clocking means. A gaming machine AH4 is characterized in that it discriminates.

According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, it is possible to time the period that has elapsed since the operating means was operated by the clocking means, so that the period during which the operating means was operated can be measured. The effect is that the execution timing of the performance can be set according to the performance, and that the player can be interested in the length of the period from when the operating means is operated until the start of the performance.

In the gaming machine AH4, the performance execution means is composed of at least an output means capable of outputting a signal instructing execution of the performance, and a setting means for setting execution of the performance based on the signal from the output means. The gaming machine AH5 is characterized in that the output means outputs the signal based on the time measurement data of the time measurement means having become a value corresponding to the content determined by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AH4, since the signal is not output until the clock data reaches the corresponding value, if the execution of the performance is executed at the timing when the signal is received, the decision is made by the determining means. It is possible to easily execute the game at the specified timing, and there is an effect that the game can be easily controlled.

<Characteristic AI group> (crash control)
A discriminating means, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and an advantageous for the player when the display means displays the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine having a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit that is, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a first setting necessary for the performance execution means to execute the performance. a second setting that is executed after the first setting is executed; and at least executable setting execution means; is releasable, and the setting execution means is configured such that the first setting can be executed by the setting execution means even when the performance is not executed.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of performing performances for a predetermined period of time to show the results of a special symbol lottery. In such gaming machines, players can spend a predetermined period of time enjoying the contents of the performance being executed until the results of the special symbol lottery are displayed, which prevents players from becoming bored with the games early. It was something that could be done.

Furthermore, in recent years, gaming machines have become mainstream that use multiple decorative movable objects in addition to liquid crystal displays to show the results of special symbol drawings. By using these movable accessories, it was possible to provide a powerful performance to the players and enhance the performance effect.

However, in order to prevent the movable accessory from breaking down, if the movable accessory is not located at the execution position at the execution timing of the performance using the above-mentioned movable accessory, the movable accessory Since the system is configured to prohibit the execution of performances using movable accessories, there is a problem in that the frequency of execution of performances using movable accessories decreases.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the performance effect by suitably performing the performance using movable accessories. The purpose is

According to the gaming machine AI1, the first setting is executed even when the effect is not executed, so it is possible to complete preparations for executing the effect early, and the effect can be executed in a short period of time. There is an effect that it can be done.

A gaming machine AI2 characterized in that the gaming machine AI2 is configured to be able to identify that the first setting has been executed in the gaming machine AI1.

According to the gaming machine AI2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AI1, the execution of the first setting has the effect of increasing interest by making it possible to expect the performance to be executed even when the performance is not executed. be.

The gaming machine AI1 or AI2 has a movable means that can be moved as at least part of the performance, and the first setting is such that a drive unit for moving the movable means is driven. The gaming machine AI3 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine AI3, in addition to the effect exerted on the gaming machine AI1 or AI2, although the movable means is moved by the drive unit being driven, it can be executed even when the movable means is not moved with respect to the first setting. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined early that the movable means is movable due to the first setting.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Large set)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means displaying an identification pattern to show the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification pattern on the display means. , a privilege awarding means capable of awarding a benefit advantageous to a player when the identification symbol for indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed after the identification symbol is dynamically displayed; and the privilege awarding means. In the gaming machine, the dynamic display means dynamically displays a symbol row constituted by a plurality of the identification symbols. The gaming machine includes a storage means in which identification display modes of more types than the plurality of identification symbols are stored, and a storage means for selecting the identification display modes from among the identification display modes stored in the storage means. a determining means capable of determining a different identification display mode to be displayed for each; and a determining means capable of determining a different identification display mode to be displayed for each, and a different identification pattern different from the identification pattern for indicating the specific discrimination result when a specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine AJ1 characterized in that it has a performance execution means capable of stopping and displaying the identification symbol in which an identification display mode is displayed and executing a performance corresponding to the stopped and displayed identification display mode. .

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced. There are many games that are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various performances (variable performances) using the period until the symbols are stopped and displayed (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, the production effect is enhanced by executing a variable production using multiple decorative symbols that are associated with identification information (for example, numbers) indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and a character that can be identified by the player. There are things that are.

In gaming machines capable of performing such variable effects, multiple characters are displayed in a variable manner, which can enhance the effect of the effect compared to effects in which only numbers are displayed in a variable manner. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem in that when the game is played continuously, the novelty of the game is lost and the performance effect is reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that enhances the performance effect by providing a novel performance to the player.

According to the gaming machine J1, the performance executed when a specific condition is satisfied is varied depending on the identification display mode determined by the determining means, so that the player is not interested in the identification display mode displayed on the identification symbol. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game even if identification symbols indicating specific discrimination results are not displayed.

In the gaming machine AJ1, when the specific condition is satisfied, the performance execution means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification symbol in which the identification display mode is displayed a plurality of times after stop displaying the identification symbol. and the determining means is configured to be able to update the type of the identification display mode displayed on the identification symbol when the identification symbol is re-dynamically displayed by the production execution means. A gaming machine AJ2 is characterized in that it is

According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AJ1, the identification display mode is updated when re-dynamically displaying, so that various identification display modes can be displayed in a static manner, and a variety of This has the effect of allowing the performance to be executed.

In the gaming machine AJ2, the performance execution means identifies, as the performance, information corresponding to the identification display mode that is stopped and displayed each time the identification symbol is stopped and displayed when the specific condition is satisfied. It is configured to be able to execute possible notification effects, and to be configured to be able to execute a specific effect corresponding to the identification display mode notified in the notification effect based on the establishment of performance conditions. The AJ3 gaming machine is characterized by

According to the gaming machine AJ3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AJ2, the specific performance is varied depending on the identification display mode displayed each time the gaming machine AJ2 is stopped, so the identification display that is displayed over multiple times is changed. This has the effect of making the combination of aspects more interesting.

<Characteristic AK group> (Large set system derivative)
a display means for displaying a plurality of identification display modes; a display control means capable of displaying a predetermined number of identification display modes on the display means; and a display means for storing a plurality of types of identification display modes greater than the predetermined number and a determining means capable of determining a predetermined number of identification display modes to be displayed on the display means from among the identification display modes stored in the storage means, and a specific condition is satisfied. A game machine AK1 characterized in that it has a performance execution means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the identification display mode displayed on the display means when the identification display mode is displayed on the display means.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced. There are many games that are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various performances (variable performances) using the period until the symbols are stopped and displayed (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, the performance effect is enhanced by executing a variable performance using multiple decorative symbols that are associated with identifying information (for example, numbers) indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and a character that can be identified by the player. There are things that are.

In gaming machines capable of performing such variable effects, multiple characters are displayed in a variable manner, which can enhance the effect of the effect compared to effects in which only numbers are displayed in a variable manner. Since the combination with the identification information is fixed, there is a problem in that when the game is played continuously, the novelty of the game is lost and the performance effect is reduced.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and provides a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by providing the player with a novel performance and enhancing the performance effect. is intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine AK1, the determining means determines a predetermined number of identification display modes to be displayed on the display means, and the effect execution means executes a performance corresponding to the displayed identification display mode, so that the performance is displayed on the display means. It is possible to create interest in the type of identification display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AK1 includes a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a predetermined number of the identification display modes determined by the determining means, and the effect execution means dynamically displays the predetermined number of identification display modes determined by the determining means. A game machine AK2, characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform an effect in response to the identification display mode that is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position after being displayed.

According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK1, it is possible to make the stop position of the identification display mode more interesting, thereby making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the identification display mode again after stopping displaying the identification display mode; A game machine AK3 characterized in that the type displayed is updated when the target is displayed.

According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, when the stopped display mode of identification is displayed again dynamically, the type of the identification display mode is updated, so that the type of the identification display mode is updated. Each time, the user can gain new interest in the type of identification display mode displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AK2 or AK3, the performance execution means is capable of executing, as the performance, an information performance in which information corresponding to the stopped and displayed identification display mode can be identified every time the identification display mode is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine AK4 is configured to be able to execute a specific performance corresponding to the identification display mode notified in the notification performance based on the establishment of performance conditions. .

According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK2 or AK3, the stopped and displayed identification display mode is notified, so that it is possible to perform an easy-to-understand performance for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AL group> (Large set system derivation 2)
a display means for displaying a plurality of identification display modes; a display control means capable of displaying a predetermined number of identification display modes on the display means; and a storage means for storing a plurality of types of the identification display modes; a determining means capable of determining a predetermined number of identification display modes to be displayed on the display means from among the identification display modes stored in the storage means; A game machine AL1 comprising: performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance when the number of types of the identified identification display modes reached a predetermined number.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is announced. There are many games that are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various performances (variable performances) using the period until the symbols are stopped and displayed (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, by displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information (for example, numbers) in a variable manner to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol, and notifying the player of the result of the special symbol lottery based on the combination of the statically displayed identification information, There is also something interesting about the identification information that is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

In a gaming machine that can perform such a fluctuating performance, while multiple pieces of identification information are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the fluctuating performance is performed with the expectation that the identification information indicating a lottery result favorable to the player will be stopped and displayed. Although it was something that could be enjoyed, if the identification information that was stopped and displayed was a combination that indicated a lottery result other than winning, people would lose interest in the identification information that was stopped and displayed, and the performance effect would be reduced. There was a problem with this.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and provides a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by providing the player with a novel performance and enhancing the performance effect. is intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine AL1, a specific effect is executed when the types of displayed identification display modes reach a predetermined number. Since there is a possibility that a specific performance will be executed until the period has elapsed, the performance effect can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AL1 includes a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a predetermined number of the identification display modes determined by the determination means, and the performance execution means dynamically displays the predetermined number of identification display modes determined by the determination means. A gaming machine AL2, characterized in that the gaming machine AL2 is configured to be able to perform an effect in accordance with the identification display mode that is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position after being displayed.

According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AL1, it is possible to make the stop position of the identification display mode more interesting, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the identification display mode again after stopping displaying the identification display mode, and the identification display mode is A gaming machine AL3, characterized in that the gaming machine AL3 is configured such that the type displayed is updated when the target is displayed.

According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, the type of the identification display mode is updated when the stopped display mode is dynamically displayed again. Each time, the user can gain new interest in the type of identification display mode displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AL2 or AL3, the performance execution means is capable of executing, as the performance, an information performance in which information corresponding to the stopped and displayed identification display mode can be identified every time the identification display mode is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine AL4 is configured to be able to execute a specific performance corresponding to the identification display mode notified in the notification performance based on the establishment of performance conditions. .

According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AL2 or AL3, the stopped and displayed identification display mode is notified, so that it is possible to perform an easy-to-understand performance for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include operating means, and there are gaming machines that execute various settings based on the results of operations on the operating means. In such gaming machines, the interest is increased by operating the operating means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-249877).
However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the player's interest in playing games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an effect execution means that can execute an effect based on the operation of the operation means within a valid period. , a validity period setting means capable of setting the validity period, and the effect execution means is configured to set the validity period to at least a first state based on the operation of the operating means within the validity period. The device is configured such that a first performance can be executed as the performance after the first performance is executed, and the validity period is the first performance when the first performance is determined to be executed by the performance execution means. It is variably set so that it is in one state.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, and includes operation determining means capable of determining the content of the operation on the operating means within the validity period, and the performance execution means When the determination result of the means is a specific determination result, the first effect can be executed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, which includes an operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of operations of the operating means within the validity period, and the operation determining means When the number of operations counted by the number of times measuring means reaches a specific number of operations, it can be determined that the specific determination result has been obtained.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, a performance execution means that can execute a performance based on the operation of the operation means within the validity period, and the validity period and a valid period setting means that can set a valid period, and the effect executing means is configured to set the valid period after the valid period reaches at least the first state based on the operation of the operating means within the valid period. It is configured to be able to execute a first performance as a performance, and the valid period is in the first state when the first performance is determined to be executed by the performance execution means. It can be set variably as follows.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has an operation determining means that can determine the content of the operation on the operating means within the validity period, and when the determination result of the operation determining means is a specific determination result, the performance executing means It is possible to perform the performance.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the device has an operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of operations of the operating means within the validity period, and the operation determining means determines that the number of operations measured by the operation number measuring means has become a specific number of operations. In this case, it can be determined that the specific determination result is obtained.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
22 Frame button (operation means)
113 Audio lamp control device 113 (validity period setting means )

Claims (1)

a determination means capable of performing the determination;
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result;
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
a validity period setting means capable of setting a validity period for determining that a predetermined operation on the operation means is valid;
A gaming machine comprising a predetermined mode display means capable of displaying a predetermined mode corresponding to the validity period,
Information updating means that can update information in stages by performing the predetermined operation a plurality of times within the validity period;
A first effect executed in response to the information updating means updating the information to specific information corresponding to the specific determination result; If the execution condition is satisfied based on the predetermined operation performed in a state where has not been updated to the specific information, the production mode is different from the production mode of the first production and corresponds to the specific determination result. a second effect in which a notification is executed in a special mode; and a effect execution means capable of executing the second effect ,
The gaming machine is
It is configured to be able to execute a predetermined performance corresponding to the result of the determination by the determining means during a performance period that includes at least the valid period,
The performance period that corresponds to the specific determination result in the performance period that includes a first period in which the first performance can be performed and a second period that is before the first period and in which the second performance can be performed. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration capable of executing a predetermined performance .

Images